Home

Motorola DSP56301 Stereo System User Manual

image

Contents

1. Daer M_BAAP x M_AAR1 change AAT polarity in order to set it high 5 ACTIVATE SERIAL INTERFACE and SYNCHRONIZE movep 3 x M_STXL load TX byte READ opcode BO bset M_SCTE x M_SCR activate SCI s TX 6 TRANSMIT OPCODE and ADDRESS jelr M TDRE x M_SSR wait until byte is TXed opcode BO movep 0 x M_STXL load TX byte address B1 jclr M_RDRF x M_SSR wait until byte is RXed garbage B2 movep x M_SRXL a2 read garbage jclr M_TDRE x M_SSR wait until byte is TXed address B1 movep a2 x M_STXL keep transmitting to maitain clock ECHO jclr M_RDRF x M_SSR wait until byte is RXed garbage B1 movep x M_SRXL a2 read garbage first read two words program_length and target_address do 6 _rd_2_ws jclr M_TDRE x M_SSR wait until byte is TXed ECHO movep a2 x M_STXL keep transmitting to maitain clock ECHO jclr M_RDRF x M_SSR wait until byte is RXed valid BO movep x M_SRXL a2 read ONE byte valid BO asr 8 a a pack it _rd_2_ws move al x0 starting address for load move al rl save starting address Now read program words do a0 On ws read N words do 3 _rd_bytes read 3 bytes jclr M_TDRE X M_SSR wait until byte is TXed ECHO movep a2 x M_STXL keep transmitting to maintain clock ECHO 7 READ ONE BYTE jclr M_RDRF x M_SSR wait until byte is RXed v
2. 1 a A EE EE EE EE TEE EE TEE EE EE ECVET p If MC MB MA x001 then it loads a program RAM segment from consecutive byte wid P memory locations starting at P D00000 bits AA moronoLa DSP56301 User s Manual A 1 A 2 7 0 The memory is selected by the Address Attribute AAl and is accessed with 31 wait states he umber EPROM bootstrap code expects first to read 3 bytes specifying the of program words then 3 bytes specifying the address to tart loading the program words and then 3 bytes for each program word T n s to be loaded The number of words the starting address and the program W t ords are read least significant byte first followed by the mid and hen by the most significant byte The program words will be condensed into 24 bit words and stored in contiguous PRAM memory locations starting at the specified starting address After the program words are read program execution starts from the same address where loading started TIET EI EE EEEEEEETEEEEEETEEEEEEEEEETEEEEETEEEEEEEEEEETEEET If MC MB MA x010 then it loads the program RAM from the SCI interface code expects first to receive 3 bytes specifying the of program words then 3 bytes specifying the address to start loading the program words and then 3 bytes for each program word to be loaded The number of words the starting address and the program words are rece
3. 2 11 Timers The DSP56301 has three identical and independent timers Each timer can use internal or external clocking and either interrupt the DSP56301 after a specified number of events clocks or signal an external device after counting a specific number of internal events All timer pins are 5 V tolerant AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 27 Timers Table 2 16 Triple Timer Signals Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description TIOO Input or Output Input Timer 0 Schmitt Trigger Input Output When Timer 0 functions as an external event counter or in measurement mode TIOO is used as input When Timer 0 functions in watchdog timer or pulse modulation mode TIOO is used as output The default mode after reset is GPIO input This can be changed to output or configured as a timer I O through the timer 0 control status register TCSRO This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated TIO1 Input or Output Input Timer 1 Schmitt Trigger Input Output When Timer 1 functions as an external event counter or in measurement mode TIO1 is used as input When Timer 1 functions in watchdog timer or pulse modulation mode TIO1 is used as output The default mode after reset is GPIO input This can be changed to output or configured as a timer I O through the timer 1 control status register TCSR1 This signal has a weak keepe
4. IFO Serial Input Flag 0 The ESSI latches any data on the SCO signal during reception of the first received bit after the frame sync is detected The IFO bit is updated with this data when the data in the receive shift register transfers into the receive data register IFO is enabled only when SCO is an input flag and the Synchronous mode is selected that is when SCO is programmed as ESSI in the port control register PCR the SYN bit is set and the TE1 and SCDO bits are cleared If it is not enabled the IFO bit is cleared 7 5 4 ESSI Receive Shift Register The 24 bit Receive Shift Register see Figure 7 12 and Figure 7 13 receives incoming data from the serial receive data signal The selected internal external bit clock shifts data in when the associated frame sync I O is asserted Data is received MSB first if SHFD is cleared and LSB first if SHFD is set Data transfers to the ESSI Receive Data Register RX after 8 12 16 24 or 32 serial clock cycles are counted depending on the word length control bits in the CRA AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 29 ESSI Programming Model 7 5 5 ESSI Receive Data Register RX The Receive Data Register RX is a 24 bit read only register that accepts data from the receive shift register as it becomes full according to Figure 7 12 and Figure 7 13 The data read is aligned according to the value of the ALC bit When the ALC bit is cleare
5. Synchronous Asynchronous Controls whether the receive and transmit functions of the ESSI occur synchronously or asynchronously with respect to each other See Figure 7 7 on page 7 25 When SYN is cleared the ESSI is in Asynchronous mode and separate clock and frame sync signals are used for the transmit and receive sections When SYN is set the ESSI is in Synchronous mode and the transmit and receive sections use common clock and frame sync signals Only in Synchronous mode can more than one transmitter be enabled AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 21 ESSI Programming Model Table 7 4 ESSI Control Register B CRB Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 11 CKP 0 Clock Polarity Controls which bit clock edge data and frame sync are clocked out and latched in If CKP is cleared the data and the frame sync are clocked out on the rising edge of the transmit bit clock and latched in on the falling edge of the receive bit clock If CKP is set the data and the frame sync are clocked out on the falling edge of the transmit bit clock and latched in on the rising edge of the receive bit clock 10 FSP Frame Sync Polarity Determines the polarity of the receive and transmit frame sync signals When FSP is cleared the frame sync signal polarity is positive that is the frame start is indicated by the frame sync signal going high
6. 4 4 3 Processing Interrupt Source Priorities Within an IPL If more than one interrupt request is pending when an instruction executes the interrupt source with the highest IPL is serviced first When several interrupt requests with the same IPL are pending another fixed priority structure within that IPL determines which interrupt source is serviced first Table 4 7 shows this fixed priority list of interrupt sources within an IPL from highest to lowest at each level The interrupt mask bits in the Status Register I 1 0 can be programmed to ignore low priority level interrupt requests Table 4 7 Interrupt Source Priorities Within an IPL Priority Interrupt Source Level 3 nonmaskable Highest Hardware RESET Stack error Illegal instruction Debug request interrupt Trap Lowest Nonmaskable interrupt Levels 0 1 2 maskable Highest IRQA external interrupt IRQB external interrupt MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 19 Configuring Interrupts Table 4 7 Interrupt Source Priorities Within an IPL Continued Priority Interrupt Source IRQC external interrupt IRQD external interrupt DMA channel 0 interrupt DMA channel 1 interrupt DMA channel 2 interrupt DMA channel 3 interrupt DMA channel 4 interrupt DMA channel 5 interrupt Host command interrupt Host transmit data empty Host receive data full ESSIO
7. DSP PCI Transaction Address Low In memory accesses the AR 1 0 bits have the following meaning AR ARO Burst Order 0 0 Linear incrementing 0 1 PCI Cache line toggle mode the data must be arranged by the DSP software Reserved 6 34 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model 6 7 5 DSP Status Register DSR 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 HACT UBM PCI SC 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HF2 HF1 HFO SRRQ STRQ HCP UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility UBM Universal Bus mode PCIl PCl mode SC Self Configuration mode Figure 6 9 DSP Status Register DSR A 24 bit read only status register by which the DSP56300 core examines the HI32 status and flags The host processor cannot access DSR Note When data is written to the HI32 there is a two cycle pipeline delay while any status bits affected by this operation are updated If any of the status bits are read during the two cycle delay the status bit may not reflect the current status Table 6 14 DSP Status Register DSR Bit Definitions Bit e Reset Number Pit Name Value Mode Description 23 HACT 0 UBM HI32 Active PCI Indicates the activity of the HI32 HACT is set when DCTR HM 1 SC 2 3 or 5 HACT is cleared in response t
8. ESSIO X FFFFB7 ESSI1 X FFFFA7 Figure 7 11 ESSI Status Register SSISR Table 7 5 ESSI Status Register SSISR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 8 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 7 RDF 0 Receive Data Register Full Set when the contents of the receive shift register transfer to the receive data register RDF is cleared when the DSP reads the receive data register If RIE is set a DSP receive data interrupt request is issued when RDF is set 6 TDE 0 Transmit Data Register Empty Set when the contents of the transmit data register of every enabled transmitter are transferred to the transmit shift register It is also set for a TSR disabled time slot period in Network mode as if data were being transmitted after the TSR has been written When TDE is set TDE data is written to all the TX registers of the enabled transmitters or to the TSR The TDE bit is cleared when the DSP writes to all the transmit data registers of the enabled transmitters or when the DSP writes to the TSR to disable transmission of the next time slot If the TIE bit is set a DSP transmit data interrupt request is issued when TDE is set 5 ROE 0 Receiver Overrun Error Flag Set when the serial receive shift register is filled and ready to transfer to the receive data register RX but RX is already full that is the RDF bit is set If the REIE bit is set a DSP receiver overrun error interrupt r
9. Clock Out Divider The clock output divider is controlled by COD and the SCI mode If the SCI mode is synchronous the output divider is fixed at divide by 2 If the SCI mode is asynchronous either E If COD is cleared and SCLK is an output that is TCM and RCM are both cleared then the SCI clock is divided by 16 before being output to the SCLK signal Thus the SCLK output is a 1 X clock E f COD is set and SCLK is an output the SCI clock is fed directly out to the SCLK signal Thus the SCLK output is a 16 X baud clock AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 19 SCI Programming Model Table 8 5 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Reset er Number Bit Name Value Description 11 0 CD 11 0 0 Clock Divider Specifies the divide ratio of the prescale divider in the SCI clock generator A divide ratio from 1 to 4096 CD 11 0 000 to FFF can be selected The SCI clock determines the data transmission baud rate and can also establish a periodic interrupt that can act as an event timer or be used in any other timing function Bits CD11 CDO SCP and SCR STIR work together to determine the time base If SCR TMIE 1 when the periodic time out occurs the SCI timer interrupt is recognized and pending The SCI timer interrupt is automatically cleared when the interrupt is serviced This interrupt occurs every time the periodic timer times out Fi
10. Figure 6 15 Host Command Vector Register HCVR The HCVR is a 32 bit read write register by which the host processor causes the DSP56300 core to execute a vectored interrupt The host command feature is independent of any of the data transfer mechanisms in the HI32 It can cause any of the 128 possible interrupt routines in the DSP to be executed The HCVR is written in accordance with the byte enables HC3 HBE3 HC0 HBEO pins Byte lanes that are not enabled are not written and the corresponding bits remain unchanged When the HCVR is read to the PCI bus DCTR HM 1 the HAD 31 0 pins are driven with the HCVR data during a read access and these pins are written to the HCVR in a write access In a 24 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HCTR HTF 0 or HCTR HRF 0 the HD 23 0 pins are driven with the three least significant bytes of the HCVR in a read access HD 23 0 are written to the three least significant bytes of the HCVR the most significant portion is zero filled during the HCVR write In a 16 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HCTR HTF 0 or HCTR HRF 0 the HD 15 0 pins are driven with the two least significant bytes of the HCVR in a read access HD 15 0 are written to the two least significant bytes of the HCVR the most significant portion is zero filled during the HCVR write In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 memory space transactions the HCVR is accessed if the PCI add
11. 9 4 2 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR The TPLR is a read write register that controls the prescaler divide factor that is the number that the prescaler counter loads and begins counting from and the source for the prescaler input clock 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 PS1 PSO PL20 PL19 PL18 PL17 PL16 PL15 PL14 PL13 PL12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 PL11 PL10 PL9 PL8 PL7 PL6 PL5 PL4 PL3 PL2 PL1 PLO Reserved bit Read as 0 Write to 0 for future compatibility Figure 9 21 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR Table 9 1 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 22 21 PS 1 0 0 Prescaler Source Control the source of the prescaler clock The prescaler s use of a TIO signal is not affected by the TCSR settings of the timer of the corresponding TIO signal If the prescaler source clock is external the prescaler counter is incremented by signal transitions on the TIO signal The external clock is internally synchronized to the internal clock The external clock frequency must be lower than the DSP56301 internal operating frequency divided by 4 that is CLK 4 NOTE To ensure
12. HD 23 16 Not connected High Data Bus Should be pulled up or down HDBEN_ gt O Output enable of transcievers x HDBDR DIR Direction of transcievers i HSAK gt I016_ 16 bit data word 7 HBS_ lt Vec Bus Strobe disabled 7 HAEN lt AEN DMA cycle enable A HTA gt CHRDY Channel ready HWR_ IOWC_ IO DMA write strobe HRD lt IORC_ IO DMA read strobe H HRST lt inverted RSTDRV invert ISA reset ZE EEEEEEEEZEEEEEEEZTEEEEEEEEEEESEEEEZEESEERIEETSEEEEEETEEEEEEIEREEEE EES de e TE D MC MB MA x110 then it loads the program RAM from the Host Interface programmed to operate inthe Universal Bus UB mode in double strobe pin configuration The HI32 bootstrap code expects first to receive 3 bytes specifying the number of program words then 3 bytes specifying the address to start loading the program words and then 3 bytes for each program word to be loaded The number of words the starting address and the program words are received least significant byte first followed by the mid and then by the most significant byte The program words will be condensed into 24 bit words and stored in contiguous PRAM memory locations starting at the specified starting address After reading the program words program execution starts from the same address where loading started The Host Interface bootstrap load program may be stopped by setting the Ho
13. Normal Mode MOD 0 Serial Clock SSI Control Register B CRB READ WRITE Frame SYNC 4 Transmitter Interrupt or DMA Request and A A Receiver Interrupt or DMA Request and Flags A Note Interrupts occur and data is transferred once per frame sync Network Mode MOD 1 Serial Clock Frame SYNC Transmitter Interrupts or DMA Request and 4 A 4 4 4 Serial Data n n 4 n n Receiver Interrupt or DMA Request and Flags Set Note Interrupts occur every time slot and a word may be transferred j poy Buirwwebod ISS ESSI Programming Model Frame SYNC d d FSLO 0 FSL1 0 Frame SYNC d d FSLO 0 FSL1 1 d Slot 0 ge Wait Slot 0 Figure 7 9 Normal Mode External Frame Sync 8 Bit 1 Word in Frame Frame SYNC E Na A FSLO 0 FSL1 0 Frame SYNC FSLO 0 FSL1 1 Sooo Dat KKK KAKI raf SLOT 0 ER SLOT 1 ER SLOT 0 Ei SLOT1 Figure 7 10 Network Mode External Frame Sync 8 Bit 2 Words in Frame gt AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 27 ESSI Programming Model 7 5 3 ESSI Status Register SSISR The SSISR is a read only status register by which the DSP reads the ESSI status and serial input flags 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RDF TDE ROE TUE RFS TFS IF 1 IFO Reserved bit read as 0 write to 0 0 for future compatibility
14. Reserved bit read as 0 write to 0 0 for future compatibility ESSIO X FFFFB3 ESSI1 X FFFFA3 Figure 7 15 ESSI Transmit Slot Mask Register B TSMB TSMA and TSMB as in Figure 7 12 and Figure 7 13 can be seen as a single 32 bit register TSM Bit nin TSM TSn is an enable disable control bit for transmission in slot number N When TSn is cleared all the data signals of the enabled transmitters are tri stated during transmit time slot number N The data still transfers from the enabled transmit data register s to the transmit shift register However the TDE and the TUE flags are not set Consequently during a disabled slot no transmitter empty interrupt is generated The DSP is interrupted only for enabled slots Data written to the transmit data register when the transmitter empty interrupt request is serviced transmits in the next enabled transmit time slot When TSn is set the transmit sequence proceeds normally Data transfers from the TX register to the shift register during slot number N and the TDE flag is set The TSM slot mask does not conflict with the TSR Even if a slot is enabled in the TSM you can chose to write to the TSR to tri state the signals of the enabled transmitters during the next transmission slot Setting the bits in the TSM affects the next frame transmission The frame being transmitted is not affected by the new TSM setting If the TSM is read it shows the current setting After a hardware RESET sig
15. The SCI can cause five different exceptions in the DSP discussed here from the highest to the lowest priority 1 SCI receive data with exception status occurs when the receive data register is full with a receiver error parity framing or overrun error To clear the pending interrupt read the SCI status register then read SRX Use a long interrupt service routine to handle the error condition This interrupt is enabled by SCR 16 REIE 2 SCI receive data occurs when the receive data register is full Read SRX to clear the pending interrupt This error free interrupt can use a fast interrupt service routine for minimum overhead This interrupt is enabled by SCR 11 RIE 3 SCI transmit data occurs when the transmit data register is empty Write STX to clear the pending interrupt This error free interrupt can use a fast interrupt service routine for minimum overhead This interrupt is enabled by SCR 12 TIE 8 8 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI Programming Model 4 SCI idle line occurs when the receive line enters the idle state 10 or 11 bits of ones This interrupt is latched and then automatically reset when the interrupt is accepted This interrupt is enabled by SCR 10 ILIE 5 SCI timer occurs when the baud rate counter reaches zero This interrupt is automati cally reset when the interrupt is accepted This interrupt is enabled by SCR 13 TMIE 8 6 SCI Programming Model The SCI programming model can be
16. 1 and HCTR HRF 0 STRQ reflects the status of the DTXS and HSTR HRRQ reflects the status of the HRXS STRQ is set if the DTXS is not full and cleared when the DSP56300 core fills the DTXS HSTR HRRQ is cleared if the HRXS is empty and set when it contains data to be read by an external host AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 53 Host Side Programming Model Table 6 22 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit l Reset Number BitName vaiue Mode Description 6 DMAE 0 UBM _ DMA Enable ISA EISA Used by the host processor to enable the HI32 ISA EISA DMA type accesses in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 If the host drives the HAEN pin low the HI32 responds when it identifies its address such as ISA EISA I O type accesses The HI32 does not respond to ISA EISA DMA type accesses When the HAEN pin is high E f DMAE is cleared the HI32 cannot be accessed E f DMAE is set the HI32 responds to ISA EISA DMA type accesses When DMAE is cleared the HDRQ pin is deasserted HIRQ is active If DMAE is set the HIRQ pin is deasserted HDRQ is active This allows the HI32 to generate host DMA requests during ISA EISA I O type accesses A typical application is an external host write to the HI32 using a polling procedure and external DMA reads from the HI32 An external bus controller arbitrates between the two and sets or clears HAEN accordingly If both DMAE a
17. 3C CILP MAX_LAT MIN_GNT Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin 40 48 Dwords FC Note Addresses are shown in bytes Table 6 21 Host Side Registers Universal Bus Mode Address Space Base Address 0 Base Address 3 Reserved 4 Locations Base Address 4 HI32 Control Register HCTR Base Address 5 HI32 Status Register HSTR Base Address 6 Host Command Vector Register HCVR Base Address 7 Host Transmit Slave Receive Data FIFO HTXR HRXS Note Addresses shown are in words locations The base address is defined by eight bits of the CBMA register AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 47 Host Side Programming Model 6 8 1 HI32 Control Register HCTR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 TWSD HS2 UBM PCI PCI 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HS1 HSO HRF1 HRFO HTF1 HTFO SFT DMAE HF2 HF1 HFO RREQ TREQ UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI Reserved Read as zero Write to zero for future compatibility UB Universal Bus mode PCI PCI mode Figure 6 13 Host Interface Control Register HCTR The HCTR is a 32 bit read write control register by which the host processor controls the HI32 interrupts flags semaphores data transfer formats and
18. B 30 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 10 of 10 Host Processor H132 Subsystem ID Register Bits 31 16 Subsystem Vendor ID Register Bits 31 16 Specifies the subsystem ID Specifies the subsystem vendor ID Modes PCI mode only Modes PCI mode only 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 1716 15 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SID 15 0 CSO SEH HI32 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CSID Read Write Reset 00000000 Figure B 19 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CSID AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 31 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 3 Select SC1 as Tx 0 drive enable 0 SC1 functions as serial I O flag 1 functions as driver enable of Tx 0 external buffer Word Length Control WLO Number of bits word 8 12 16 24 32 data in first 24 bits 32 data in last 24 bits Reserved Reserved g A A EH CH CH CH A A 00 400 S E t ES z E sch Sa Alignment Control 0 16 bit data left aligned to bit 23 16 bit data left aligned to bit 15 Frame Rate Divider Control DC4 0 00 1F 1 to 32 Divide ratio for Normal mode of time slots for Network The combination of PSR 1 and PM 7 0 00 is forbidden Prescaler Range Prescale Modulus Select 0 divide by 8 PM 7 0 00 FF divide by 1 to 256
19. HCTR In Fetch mode the HI32 requests data from the DSP56300 core by enabling the STRQ status bit and generating core interrupt requests or DMA requests if enabled only after the host begins a read transaction from the HI32 In Pre Fetch mode when the DTXS is not full the HI32 requests data from the DSP56300 core by enabling the STRQ status bit and generating core interrupt requests or DMA requests if enabled Hardware software and personal software resets set STRQ In the personal software reset state STRQ 0 PCI mode DCTR HM Fetch SFT 1 The DSP to host data path 1 is a six word deep FIFO buffer three word deep in the 32 bit data format mode HCTR HRF 0 During a read transaction from the DTXS HRXS FIFO STRQ reflects the status of the DTXS STRQ is set if the DTXS is not full STRQ is cleared when the DSP56300 core fills the DTXS When the host is not executing a read transaction from the HRXS the DSP to host data path is forced to the reset state and STRQ is cleared Universal Bus mode Fetch SFT 1 There is no FIFO buffering DCTR HM 2 or 3 of the DSP to host data path At the beginning of a read data transfer from the HRXS STRQ is set STRQ is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes to the DTXS If the host is not reading from the HRXS the DSP to host data path is forced to the reset and STRQ is cleared PCI and Universal Bus Pre Fetch SFT 0 The DSP to host data modes DCTR HM 1 pat
20. d PS DSP56301 P SCI SCLK i z SCI TXD F SCI RXD F F i A AAI F r i The SEEPROM is P The SCI SEEPROM bootstrap specifying the number specifying the address then 3 by words the starting address selected by the EPROM connected to the SCI interface as in the scheme We EPROM SCK SIN SOUT CS Address Attribute Pin AAT code expects first to receive 3 bytes of program words afterwards 3 bytes to start loading the program words and tes for each program word to be loaded The number of and the program words are received least significant byte first followed by the mid and then by the most Significant byte The program words stored program execution in contiguous specified started The SCI is configured to work starting address starts from th will be condensed into 24 bit words and PRAM memory locations starting at the After the program words are read same address where loading in Mode 0 8 bit Synchronous Negative Clock Polarity MSB First Shift Direction The clock source is internal Operating frequency te dee ae ae eA ee ee eee ey A ee ee ee a a ee ee ede ee ee ae this is the location in P memory on the external memory bus where the external byte wide EPROM would be located BOOT equ AARV equ M_ BAAP EQU M SSR EQU M_STXL EQU M_SRXL E
21. 00 Geh 23 16 HT 7 0 Header Type 0 hardwired 0 CLS 7 0 Cache Line Specify system cache line 0 7 0 aa A size in units of 32 bit words CBMA 0 MSI Memory Space 0 HI382 is a memory mapped hardwired 0 Indicator agent 2 1 MS 1 0 Memory Space 0 32 bits wide and mapping can hardwired 0 be done anywhere PF Prefetch 0 HI82 data is not pre fetchable hardwired 0 3 i in the PCI sense 15 4 PM 15 4 Memory Base Address 00 64 Kbytes occupancy of PCI hardwired 00 Low memory space PM 31 16 Memory Base Address 0000 31 16 High 23 15 GB 10 3 UBM Base Address 00 CSID 31 16 SID 15 0 Subsystem ID gt 15 8 SVID 15 0 Subsystem Vendor ID CILP 70 IP 7 0 Interrupt Line PCI interrupt line routing information 15 8 IL 7 0 Interrupt Line 01 INTA is supported hardwired 01 23 16 MG 7 0 MAX_GNT 00 Min Grant hardwired 00 31 24 ML 7 0 MAX_LAT 00 Max Latency hardwired 00 1 STRQ MTRQ are zero in the personal software reset state 6 80 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Chapter 7 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI The ESSI provides a full duplex serial port for serial communication with a variety of serial devices including one or more industry standard codecs other DSPs microprocessors and peripherals The ESSI consists of independent transmitter and receiver sections and a common ESSI clock generator There are two independent and identical E
22. 1 6 28 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 11 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 14 CLRT 0 Clear Transmitter Clears the HI32 master to host bus data path in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 When the DSP56300 core sets CLRT the HI32 hardware clears the master DSP to host bus data path that is the DTIXM HRXM FIFO is forced empty thus setting the PCI Master Transmit Data Request bit MTRQ in the DPSR Then it clears CLRT The DSP56300 core cannot write a value of zero to CLRT To assure operation the DSP56300 core can set CLRT only under the following conditions 1 MARQ is set in the DPSR that is the DSP56300 core has not initiated a PCI transaction 2 No DSP56300 core DMA channel is enabled to service HI32 master transmit data DMA requests CLRT is ignored when the HI32 is not in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 13 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 12 TCIE Transfer Complete Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP56300 core interrupt request in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The request is generated if the host data transfer complete HDTC status bit in the DSP PCI Status Register DPSR is set When TCIE is cleared transfer complete interrupt requests are disabled 11 10 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility TTIE Transaction Terminat
23. 1 Ja target abort has occurred 9 TDIS PCI Target Disconnect 0 mo target disconnect cleared by 0 1 ja target disconnect writing 1 10 TRTY PCI Target Retry 0 jno target retry cleared by 0 1 ja target retry writing 1 11 TO PCI Time Out 0 jno time out termination cleared by 0 Termination 1 ja time out termination writing 1 HDTC PCI Host Data 0 J HI82 is transferring data to the cleared by 0 0 Transfer Complete core writing 1 written 12 1 HI32 has completed transfer 1 only if HDTC of data to the core and will 1 disconnect write accesses to the HTXR 13 MDT Master Data 0 No data transfer all data did 0 0 14 Transferred not transfer successfully 1 Data transferred successfully HDCO Remaining Data Count 0O No data transfer data 15 Qualifier 1 transferred successfully Qualify RDC 5 0 value 21 16 RDC 5 0 Remaining Data Count BL 5 0 RDC 5 0 RDCQ gt R DRXR 23 0 DSP Receive Data empty FIFO DTXM 23 0 DSP Master Transmit empty 8 Data FIFO DTXS 23 0 DSP Slave Sg Transmit Data FIFO pa DATH 23_ DAT 23 0 GPIO Pin Data 0000 00 DIRH DIR 23 0 GPIO Pin Direction O Input 0000 _ 23 0 1 Output 00 MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 77 HI32 Programming Model Quick Reference HI32 Registers Quick Reference Bit Reset Type Reg Comments Num Mnemonic Name Val Function HS PH PS Host Side HC
24. 32 bit internal address Decoding decoding BR Universal Bus mode 11 bit 12 with HAEN internal address decoding Data Fetch In HI32 slave to host data transfers fetch and Types pre fetch Semaphores Flags for HI32 allocation in a multi host system Table 6 2 HI32 Features in PCI Mode and Universal Bus Mode Feature PCI Mode Universal Bus Mode Operation Initiator master or target slave Slave in many standard bus environments for example ISA bus or DSP56300 core based DSP Port A bus Word Size 8 16 24 and 32 bits as defined by the HBE 3 0 8 16 and 24 bits wide lines Input Data 32 bit words to 24 bit words 16 bit words to 24 bit words Alignment E Three MSBs E Left aligned and zero filled E Three LSBs E Right aligned and zero extended E Right aligned and sign extended MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 3 Overview Table 6 2 HI32 Features in PCI Mode and Universal Bus Mode Continued Feature PCI Mode Universal Bus Mode Output Data 24 bit words to 32 bit words 24 bit words to 16 bit words two most significant Alignment E Left aligned and zero filled bytes two least significant bytes E Right aligned and zero extended E Right aligned and sign extended Data E Up to 33 Mword sec zero wait state data BR Data transfers at three clock cycles per Tramsfer transfers with a 33 MHz PCI clock and a transfer that is 22 Mword sec for a 66 MHz Speed DSP clock CLKOUT freq
25. 7 Check pram clra start_pram r2 7 restore pointer clear a do n2 _loopp move p r2 al 7 ad a2 0 eor y0 a add a b accumulate error in b _loopp ri toggle pin if no errors stop execution otherwise ri beq label1 belr SCKO x M_PDRC Clear sckO if error enddo 7 terminate the loop normally bra lt burnl 7 and stop execution labell 77 if no error bchg SCKO x M_PDRC 7 toggle pin and keep on looping burnl wait 7 enter wait after test completion ORG PL PL PATTERNS dsm 4 7 align for correct modulo addressing ORG PL PATTERNS PL PATTERNS Each value is written to all memories dc 555555 de SAAAAAA dc 333333 dc SFOFOFO NUM_PATTERNS equ PATTERNS SEREPROM P DSP563xx F DESCRIPTION Bootstrap from Serial EEPROM through SCI UPDATI 11 June CA 1998 LA READ_BLOCK 2 RESET SERIAL INTERFACE movep 008108 x M_SCR Mode 0 8 bit Synchronous MSB first Negative Clock Polarity TX disabled RX enabled oe movep 5000031 x M_SCCR work freq 1 400 DSP freq The following line is for testing only movep 5000001 x M_SCCR work freq 1 2 DSP freq movep 5000007 x M_PCRI 4 ASSERT CHIP SELECT internal tx clock internal rx clock prescaler divides by 1 clock divider 32 Gl Configure SCLK TXD and RXD as SCI pins DSP56301 User s Manual Ad MOTOROLA
26. AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 49 Host Side Programming Model Table 6 22 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Mode Description 13 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 12 11 HRF 1 0 0 UBM PCI Host Receive Data Transfer Format Define data transfer formats for DSP to host communication The data transfer format converter HDTFC operates according to the specified HRF 1 0 See Table 6 5 Receive Transfer Data Formats on page 6 10 The personal hardware reset clears HRF 1 0 DSP to PCI host data transfer formats DCTR HM 1 E f HCTR HRF 0 32 bit data mode The two least significant bytes of two words written to the DTXS are transferred to the HRXS The two least significant bytes of the first word written to the DTXS are transferred to the two least significant bytes of the HRXS The two least significant bytes of the second word written to the DTXS are transferred to the two most significant bytes of the HRXS All four HRXS bytes are output to the HAD 31 0 pins E f HCTR HRF 1 The data written to the DTXS is transferred to the three least significant HRXS bytes and output to the HAD 31 0 pins as right aligned and zero extended in the most significant byte E f HCTR HRF 2 The data written to the DTXS is transferred to the three least significant HRXS bytes and output to the HA
27. AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 1 Operating Modes 4 1 Operating Modes The operating modes govern not only how the DSP56301 operates but also the start up procedure location when the DSP56301 leaves the reset state The MODA MODD pins are sampled as the DSP56301 exits the reset state Table 4 1 depicts the mode assignments and Table 4 2 defines the modes Table 4 1 DSP56301 Operating Modes Mode MOD MOD MOD MOD Reset Description D c B A Vector 0 0 0 0 0 C00000 Expanded mode 1 0 0 0 1 FF0000 Bootstrap from byte wide memory 2 0 0 1 0 FF0000 Bootstrap through SCI 3 0 0 1 1 FF0000 Host bootstrap in DSP to DSP mode 4 0 1 0 0 FF0000 Bootstrap from serial EEPROM through SCI 5 0 1 0 1 FF0000 Host bootstrap 16 bit wide UB mode supporting ISA slave glueless connection 6 0 1 1 0 FF0000 Host bootstrap 8 bit wide UB mode in double strobe pin configuration 7 0 1 1 1 FF0000 Host bootstrap 8 bit wide UB mode in single strobe pin configuration 8 1 0 0 0 008000 Expanded mode 9 1 0 0 1 FF0000 Bootstrap from byte wide memory A 1 0 1 0 FF0000 Bootstrap through SCI B 1 0 1 1 FF0000 Host bootstrap in DSP to DSP mode C 1 1 0 0 FF0000 Host bootstrap PCI target slave mode D 1 1 0 1 FF0000 Host bootstrap 16 bit wide UB mode supporting ISA slave glueless connection E 1 1 1 0 FF0000 Host bootstrap 8 bit wide UB mode in double strobe pin configuration F 1
28. Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 19 16 C 3 0 0 PCI Bus Command Defines the PCI bus command When the DSP56300 core writes to the DPAR and the HI32 is in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 ownership of the PCI bus is requested When the request is granted the address is driven to the HAD 31 0 pins and the bus command is driven to the HC 3 0 HBE 3 0 pins during the PCI address phase PCI bus commands that the HI32 supports as a PCI master are listed here The HI32 does not support illegal values and they should not be used C 3 0 Command Type 0000 Illegal 0001 Illegal 0010 UO Read 0011 UO Write 0100 Illegal 0101 Illegal 0110 Memory Read 0111 Memory Write 1000 Illegal 1001 Illegal 1010 Configuration Read 1011 Configuration Write 1100 Memory Read Multiple 1101 Illegal 1110 Memory Read Line 1111 Memory Write and Invalidate Note When the Memory Write and Invalidate command is used a minimum transfer of one complete cache line should be guaranteed reflected by the Burst Length value used BL 5 0 in the DMPC The cache line size is set by the PCI configurator in the Cache Line Size Configuration Register CCLS The DSP56300 core cannot access this value so the system must provide the CCLS value to the DSP56300 core in another user defined way 15 0 AR 15 0
29. Carry Central Processor Gegen Zero Negative Unnormalized U Acc 47 xnor Acc 46 Extension Limit FFT Scaling S Acc 46 xor Acc 45 Interrupt Mask d Exceptions Masked None IPLO Scaling Mode IPL 0 1 6 Scaling Mode IPL 0 1 2 No scaling Scale down Scale up Reserved Sixteen Bit Compatibilitity Double Precision Multiply Mode Loop Flag DO Forever Flag Sixteen Bit Arithmetic Instruction Cache Enable Arithmetic Saturation Rounding Mode Core Priority 3 Core Priority 0 lowest 3 highest mg ae 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 cP1 cro Rm sm ce sa Fv F om sc x si so n s if e ufnNnfz v c CT 0 ee ee a Extended Mode Register EMR Mode Register MR Condition Code Register CCR Status Register SR Read Write Reset C00300 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 1 Status Register SR AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 13 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 2 of 2 Central Processor Reemann Reset Vector Description 0000 C00000 Expanded mode External Bus Disable 000 FF0000 Bootstrap from byte wide memory 0010 gt FF0000 Bootstrap through SCI 0 enable 1 disable 00 S Reserved ORS 0100 FF0000 Bootstrap from ISA host Stop Delay 010 0 12 FF0000 Bootstrap from HC11 host 8 K clocks 1 16 clocks 0110 FF0000 Bootstrap from 8051 hos
30. DMA controllers or standard peripheral buses for example ISA EISA because the interface appears to the host as static RAM A host command feature enables the host processor to issue vectored interrupt requests to the DSP56300 core Writing to a vector address register in the HI32 the host can select any one of 128 DSP56300 core interrupt routines to execute This flexibility allows the host programmer to execute up to 128 pre programmed functions inside the DSP For example host exceptions can allow the host processor to read or write DSP registers X Y or program memory locations force exception handlers for example SSI Timer IRQA IRQB exception routines and perform control and debugging operations if exception routines are implemented in the DSP to perform these tasks The host processor can also generate non maskable interrupt requests to the DSP56300 core using the host commands 6 3 Data Transfer Paths The master data transfer format control bits FC 1 0 in the DPMC affect the HTXR DRXR and DTXM HRXM data paths only see Table 6 3 H 32 PCI Master Data Transfer Formats on page 6 8 The target data transfer format control bits HTF 1 0 and HRF 1 0 in the HCTR affect the HTXR DRXR and DTXS HRXS data paths only see Table 6 4 Transmit Data Transfer Format on page 6 9 and Table 6 5 Receive Transfer Data Formats on page 6 10 The data paths to the other host registers are not affected by the data transfer form
31. Enabled IPL 0 0 No 1 Yes 0 1 0 Yes d 1 1 Yes 2 ESSIH IPL S1L0 Enabled No SCI IPL Yes SCLO Enabled Yes 0 No Yes 1 Yes 0 Yes 1 Yes ESSIO IPL SOLO Enabled 0 No 1 Yes 0 Yes 1 Yes Host IPL HPLO Enabled 0 No 1 Yes 0 Yes 1 Yes 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 KKK LK LK KL KL KL KL ELSE zk TOL1 ToLdScL1 ScLo siL1 S1Lo SoL1 SoLo HPL1 HPLO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Interrupt Priority Register IPRP X FFFFFE Read Write Reset 000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 4 Interrupt Priority Register Peripherals IPRP B 16 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 1 PLL XTAL Disable Bit XTLD Predivision Factor Bits PD0 PD3 0 Enable Xtal Oscillator 1 EXTAL Driven From 2 An External Source 3 PD3 PD0 Predivision Factor PDF Crystal Range Bit XTLR 0 External Xtal Freq gt 200KHz 1 External Xtal Freq lt 200KHz Clock Output Disable COD 0 50 Duty Cycle Clock 1 Pin Held In High State Division Factor Bits DFO DF2 DF2 DFO Division Factor DF 0 1 2 2 2 PSTP and PEN Relationship PSTP PEN Operation During STOP 7 7 PLL Oscillator Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Multiplication Factor Bits MFO MF11 MF1
32. FFFFC5 DSP Control Register DCTR FFC4 FFFFC4 Reserved FFC3 FFFFC3 Reserved FFC2 FFFFC2 Reserved FFC1 FFFFC1 Reserved FFCO FFFFCO Reserved PORT C FFBF FFFFBF Port C Control Register PCRC FFBE FFFFBE Port C Direction Register PRRC FFBD FFFFBD Port C GPIO Data Register PDRC AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 5 Internal UO Memory Map Table B 2 Internal UO Memory Map X Data Memory Continued Peripheral 16 Bit Address 24 Bit Address Register Name ESSI 0 FFBC FFFFBC ESSI 0 Transmit Data Register 0 TX00 FFBB FFFFBB ESSI 0 Transmit Data Register 1 TX01 FFBA FFFFBA ESSI 0 Transmit Data Register 2 TX02 FFB9 FFFFB9 ESSI 0 Time Slot Register TSRO FFB8 FFFFB8 ESSI 0 Receive Data Register RX0 FFB7 FFFFB7 ESSI 0 Status Register SSISRO FFB6 FFFFB6 ESSI 0 Control Register B CRBO FFB5 FFFFB5 ESSI 0 Control Register A CRAO FFB4 FFFFB4 ESSI 0 Transmit Slot Mask Register A TSMAO FFB3 FFFFB3 ESSI 0 Transmit Slot Mask Register B TSMBO FFB2 FFFFB2 ESSI 0 Receive Slot Mask Register A RSMAO FFB1 FFFFB1 ESSI 0 Receive Slot Mask Register B RSMBO FFBO FFFFBO Reserved PORT D FFAF FFFFAF Port D Control Register PCRD FFAE FFFFAE Port D Direction Register PRRD FFAD FFFFAD Port D GPIO Data Register PDRD B 6 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Internal UO Memory Map Tabl
33. Frame Rate Divider Control DC bits 7 16 frame sync generator 7 17 length 7 12 selection 7 11 signal 7 7 7 10 7 18 Frame Sync Length FSL bits 7 22 Frame Sync Polarity FSP bit 7 22 Frame Sync Relative Timing FSR bit 7 22 Framing Error Flag FE bit 8 17 functional signal groups 2 2 Index 5 G General Purpose Input Output GPIO 1 5 1 6 2 2 5 4 data register 6 43 direction register 6 43 ESSIO 5 6 ESSI1 5 6 HIO8 5 5 Port B 2 3 5 5 Port C 5 6 Port D 5 6 Port E 5 6 SCI 5 6 timer 5 7 GPIO mode 6 13 ground GND 2 1 2 4 H handshake flags 6 44 hardware stack 1 8 Header Type HT 7 0 bits 6 68 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS Cache Line Size CLS 7 0 6 69 Latency Timer High LT 7 0 6 69 HI32 Active HACT bit 6 35 HI32 Control Register HCTR DMA Enable DMAE 6 54 Host Flags 2 0 HF 2 0 6 54 Host Receive Data Transfer Format HRF 1 0 6 50 Host Semaphores HS 2 0 6 49 Host Transmit Data Transfer Format HTF 1 0 6 51 Receive Request Enable RREQ 6 55 Slave Fetch Type SFT 6 52 Target Wait State Disable TWSD 6 49 Transmit Request Enable TREQ 6 56 HI32 Interrupt Priority Level HPL bits 4 16 HIRQ pin 6 69 Host Command HC bit 6 61 Host Command Interrupt Enable HCIE bit 6 26 Host Command Pending HCP bit 6 37 Host Command Vector HV 6 0 bits 6 60 Host Command Vector Register HCVR 6 59 Host Command HC 6 61 Host Command Vector HV 6 0
34. HTRDY HDBEN HIRDY HDBDR HDEVSEL HSAK HLOCK HBS HPAR HDAK HPERR HDRQ HGNT HAEN HREQ HTA HSERR HIRQ HSTOP HWR HRW HIDSEL HRD HDS HFRAME Tie to pull up or Voc HCLK Tie to pull up or Vcc HAD16 HD8 HAD17 HD9 HAD18 HD10 HAD19 HD11 HAD20 HD12 HAD21 HD13 HAD22 HD14 HAD23 HD15 HAD24 HD16 HAD25 HD17 HAD26 HD18 HAD27 HD19 HAD28 HD20 HAD29 HD21 HAD30 HD22 HAD31 HD23 HRST HRST HINTA HINTA PVCL Leave unconnected Programming the Peripherals General Purpose Input Output GPIO Port B GPIO PBO D I PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10 PB11 PB12 PB13 PB14 PB15 PB16 PB17 PB18 PB19 PB20 PB21 PB22 PB23 Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Internal disconnect Leave unconnected Host Port HP Reference HPO HP1 HP2 HP3 HP4 HP5 HP6 HP7 HP8 HP9 HP10 HP11 HP12 HP13 HP14 HP15 HP16 HP17 HP18 HP19 HP20 HP21 HP22 HP23 HP24 HP25 HP26 HP27 HP28 HP29 HP30 HP31 HP32 HP33 HP34
35. Modes PCI only UBM Specifies duration of HIRQ pulse Specifies cache line size 32 bit words Modes UBM and PCI Modes UBM and PCI Cache Line Size Bits 7 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 1716 1514 1312 11 10 9 7 6 3 2 eee HI32 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS Read Write Reset 00000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 17 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHT Y CLAT CCLS AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 29 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 9 of 10 Host Processor HI32 Memory Base Address Low Bits 15 4 Hardwired to 000 Modes PCI PCI Mode Base Address High Bits 31 16 Pre fetch Bit 3 Specifies the HI32 base address in PCI mode Hardwired to 0 Modes PCI only Data is not pre fetchable Modes PCI Memory Space Bits 2 1 Hardwired to 00 CBMA register is 32 bits wide Modes PCI Universal Bus Mode Base Address Bits 23 16 Specifies the HI32 base address in UBM Memory Space Indicator Bit 0 Modes UBM only Hardwired to 0 CBMA register maps HI32 into PCI memory Modes PCI PM31 PM30 PM29 PM28 PM27 PM26 PM25 PM24 PM23 PM22 PM214PM20 PM19 PM184PM17 4 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 GB10 GB9 GB8 GB7 GB6 GB5 GB4 GB3 HI32 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA Read Write Reset 00000000 Figure B 18 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA
36. Number BitName vaiue Mode Description 1 TREQ 0 UBM Transmit Request Enable request HIRQ pin is asserted HDRQ is deasserted Controls the HIRQ and HDRQ pins for host transmit data transfers in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 When the DMA enable bit DMAE is cleared TREQ when set enables the Host Interrupt Request HIRQ pin if the host transmit data request HTRQ status bit in the HI32 Status Register HSTR is set If TREQ is cleared HTRQ host interrupt requests are disabled If TREQ is set and HTRQ is set the host interrupt When DMAE and the HSTR HTRQ status bit are set TREQ enables the host DMA request HDRQ pin When TREQ is cleared HTRQ external DMA requests are disabled If TREQ and HTRQ are set the host DMA request HDRQ pin is asserted HIRQ is deasserted high impedance if HIRD 0 in the DCTR The personal hardware reset clears TREQ 0 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility Note 1 High impedance if HIRD 0 in the DCTR 2 High impedance if HIRD 0 in the DCTR 6 8 2 Host Interface Status Register HSTR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HREQ HINT HF5 HF4 HF3 HRRQ HTRQ TRDY PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PC Figure 6 14 Host Interface Status Register HSTR Reserved read as zero and should be written zero UBM Uni
37. Similar flags exist for each peripheral 5 3 2 Interrupts Interrupts are more efficient than polling but require additional register initializations Polling requires the core to remain busy checking a flag in a specified control register and therefore does not allow the core to execute other code at the same time With interrupts the programmer can initialize the interrupt so it is triggered off one of the same flags that can be polled so the core does not have to continuously check a flag Once the interrupt is initialized and the flag is set the core is notified to execute a data transfer Until the flag is set the core can remain busy executing other sections of code When an interrupt occurs the core execution flow jumps to the interrupt start address defined in Table B 3 in Appendix B Programming Reference It executes code starting at the interrupt address If it is a short interrupt that is the service routine is two opcodes long the code automatically returns to the original program flow after executing two opcodes with no impact to the pipeline Otherwise if a longer service routine is required the programmer can place a jump to subroutine JSR instruction at the interrupt service address In this case the program executes that service routine and continues until a return from interrupt RTI instruction executes The execution flow then resumes at the position of the program counter before the interrupt was triggered Configurin
38. Slave Transmit Interrupt Enable Enables a DSP56300 core interrupt request when the slave transmit data request STRQ status bit in the DSR is set When STIE is cleared STRQ interrupt requests are disabled When STIE is set a slave transmit data interrupt request is generated if STRQ is set HCIE UB PCI Host Command Interrupt Enable Enables a vectored core interrupt request when the DSR HCP is set When HCIE is cleared HCP interrupt requests are disabled When HCIE and DSR HCP are both set a host command interrupt request is generated The starting address of this interrupt is determined by the host vector HV 6 0 in the Host Command Vector Register HCVR When the host non maskable interrupt HNMI bit is set in the Host Command Vector Register HCVR HCIE is ignored and an interrupt is generated if HCP is set regardless of HCIE 6 7 2 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR The DPCR is a 24 bit read write control register by which the DSP56300 core controls the HI32 PCI interrupts and interface logic The host processor cannot access the DPCR The bit manipulation instructions are useful for accessing individual bits in the DPCR 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 IAE RBLE MWSD MACE SERF 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 MTT CLRT TCIE TTIE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TAIE PEIE MAIE MRIE MTIE 6 26 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility Figure 6 6 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR D
39. The DRAM controller is an efficient interface to dynamic RAM devices in both random read write cycles and Fast Access mode Page mode An on chip DRAM controller controls the page hit circuit the address multiplexing row address and column address the control signal generation CAS and RAS and the refresh access generation CAS before RAS for a variety of DRAM module sizes and access times The on chip DRAM controller configuration is determined by the DRAM Control Register DCR The DRAM Control Register DCR is a 24 bit read write register that controls and configures the external DRAM accesses The DCR bits are shown in Figure 4 7 Note To prevent improper device operation you must guarantee that all the DCR bits except BSTR are not changed during a DRAM access 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 BRP BRF7 BRF6 BRF5 BRF4 BRF3 BRF2 BRF1 BRFO BSTR BREN BME 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BPLE BPS1 BPSO BRW1 BRWo BCW1 BCWO Reserved bit Read as zero write to zero for future compatibility Figure 4 7 DRAM Control Register DCR 4 24 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers Table 4 10 DRAM Control Register DCR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 BRP 0 Bus Refresh Prescaler Controls a prescaler in series with the refresh clock divider If BPR is set a divide by
40. can cause synchronization problems and thus should not be used 10 8 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 7 0 PM 7 0 Prescale Modulus Select Specify the divide ratio of the prescale divider in the ESSI clock generator A divide ratio from 1 to 256 PM 0 to FF can be selected The bit clock output is available at the transmit clock signal SCK and or the receive clock SCO signal of the DSP The bit clock output is also available internally for use as the bit clock to shift the transmit and receive shift registers Figure 7 3 shows the ESSI clock generator functional block diagram Fore is the DSP56301 core clock frequency the same frequency as the enabled CLKOUT signal Careful choice of the crystal oscillator frequency and the prescaler modulus can generate the industry standard CODEC master clock frequencies of 2 048 MHz 1 544 MHz and 1 536 MHz 7 16 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model TX 1 or FlagO Out Flago In CRB TE1 CRB OFO SSISR IFO Sync Mode Sync Mode CRA WL2 0 Sync TX RX clk Async TX Shift Register CRB SCKD Kei Note 1 Foore is the DSP56300 core CRA PSR CRA PM7 0 internal clock frequency H to 256 2 ESSI internal clock range min Fog 4096 0 0 255 max Fosc 4 FooRE Opposite 3 n in signal name is ESSI 0 or 1 from SSI Figure 7 3 ESSI Clock Generator Functional Block Diagram CRB F
41. format and protocol used are determined by the user s software 8 1 3 1 Transmitting Data and Address Characters To send data the 8 bit data character must be written to the STX register Writing the data character to the STX register sets the ninth bit in the frame to zero which indicates that this frame contains data To send an 8 bit address the address data is written to the STXA register and the ninth bit in the frame is set to one indicating that this frame contains an address 8 1 3 2 Wired OR Mode Building a multidrop bus network requires connecting multiple transmitters to a common wire The Wired OR mode allows this to be done without damaging the transmitters when the transmitters are not in use A protocol is still needed to prevent two transmitters from simultaneously driving the bus The SCI multidrop word format provides an address field to support this protocol 8 1 3 3 Idle Line Wakeup A wakeup mode frees a DSP from reading messages intended for other processors The usual operational procedure is for each DSP to suspend SCI reception the DSP can continue processing until the beginning of a message Each DSP compares the address in the message header with the DSP s address If the addresses do not match the SCI again suspends reception until the next address If the address matches the DSP reads and processes the message and then suspends reception until the next address The Idle Line Wakeup mode wakes up the SC
42. gooo 092M un 0000 0000 NOTE External program memory begins immediately after the internal program memory The internal memory modules that are mapped to the addresses 0400 0800 are used as Instruction Cache space when the Instruction Cache is enabled and these addresses become part of the external P memory space Bit Settings Memory Configuration Addressable CE MS SC Program RAM X Data RAM Y Data RAM Cache Memory Size 1 1 1 1K 3K 3K 1K 64 K 000 3FF 000 BFF 000 BFF not addressable Figure 3 8 16 Bit Space Switched Program RAM Instruction Cache Enabled 1 1 1 3 14 DSP56301 User s Manual MOTOROLA Chapter 4 Core Configuration This chapter presents DSP56300 core configuration details specific to the DSP56301 These configuration details include the following Operating modes Bootstrap program Central Processor registers Status Register SR Operating Mode Register OMR Interrupt Priority Registers IPRC and IPRP PLL Control PCTL register Bus Interface Unit registers Bus Control Register BCR DRAM Control Register DCR Address Attribute Registers AAR 3 0 DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 Device Identification Register IDR JTAG Identification ID Register JTAG Boundary Scan Register BSR For information about specific registers or modules in the DSP56300 core refer to the DSP56300 Family Manual
43. page 28 One Receive Shift Register page 29 One Receive Data Register RX page 30 Three Transmit Shift Registers page 30 Three Transmit Data Registers TX0 TX1 TX2 page 30 One special purpose Time Slot Register TSR page 33 Two Transmit Slot Mask Registers TSMA TSMB page 33 Two Receive Slot Mask Registers RSMA RSMB page 35 This section discusses the ESSI registers and describes their bits Section 7 6 GPIO Signals and Registers on page 7 36 covers ESSI GPIO 7 5 1 ESSI Control Register A CRA The ESSI Control Register A CRA is one of two 24 bit read write control registers that direct the operation of the ESSI CRA controls the ESSI clock generator bit and frame sync rates word length and number of words per frame for serial data 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 DCH WL2 WL1 WLO ALC DC4 DC3 DC2 DC1 DCO 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PSR PM7 PM6 PM5 PM4 PM3 PM2 PM1 PMO Reserved bit read as 0 write to 0 for future compatibility 7 14 ESSIO X FFFFB5 ESSI1 X FFFFA5 Figure 7 2 ESSI Control Register A CRA DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model Table 7 3 ESSI Control Register A CRA Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 22 SSC1 0 Select SC1 Controls the functionality of the SC1 signal If SSC1 is set the ESSI is confi
44. the HI32 throughput is 22 Mwords sec 66 Mbytes sec Figure 6 4 Connection to the DSP56300 Core Port A Bus AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 21 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model 6 7 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model The DSP56300 core views the HI32 as a memory mapped peripheral occupying eleven 24 bit words in data memory space Table 6 9 shows the HI32 DSP side programming model Table 6 9 HI32 Programming Model DSP Side X Memory Register Address Mode Register Page X FFFFC5 PCI DSP Control Register DCTR page 23 Universal Bus X FFFFC6 PCI only DSP PCI Control Register DPCR page 26 X FFFFC7 PCI DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC page 30 Self Configuration X FFFFC8 PCI DSP PCI Address Register DPAR page 33 Self Configuration X FFFFC9 PCI DSP Status Register DSR page 35 Universal Bus X FFFFCA PCI only DSP PCI Status Register DPSR page 38 X FFFFCB PCI DSP Receive Data FIFO DRXR page 41 Universal Bus X FFFFCC PCI DSP Master Transmit Data FIFO DTXM page 42 Universal Bus X FFFFCD PCI DSP Slave Transmit Data FIFO DTXS page 42 Universal Bus X FFFFCE Universal Bus DSP Host Port GPIO Direction Register page 43 DCTR HM 2 DIRH GPIO X FFFFCF Universal Bus DSP Host Port GPIO Data Register page 43 DCTR HM 2 DATH GPIO The separate host to DSP and DSP to host data paths are FIFOs through which the HI32 and the host processor transfer data ef
45. this signal receives an external frame sync signal for the transmitter and the receiver in synchronous operation Port C 2 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PC2 When configured as PC2 signal direction is controlled through PRRO The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SC02 through PCRO This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 23 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 0 Table 2 13 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 0 Continued Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description SCKO PC3 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Clock Provides the serial bit rate clock for the ESSI The SCKO is a clock input or output used by both the transmitter and receiver in synchronous modes or by the transmitter in asynchronous modes Although an external serial clock can be independent of and asynchronous to the DSP system clock it must exceed the minimum clock cycle time of 6T that is the system clock frequency must be at least three times the external ESSI clock frequency The ESSI needs at least three DSP phases inside each half of the serial clock Port C 3 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PC3 When configured as PC3 signal direction is controlled through PRRO The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SCKO through PCRO Th
46. 0 0 UBM PCI Host Transmit Data Transfer Format cont Note When the HI32 is in PCI mode the HTF control bits affect the address insertion the IAE bit is set in the DPCR in the same way they affect the transferred data Address as appears on the PCI bus 12345678 HTF 1 0 Inserted Address 0 0 005678 001234 0 1 345678 1 0 345678 1 1 123456 SFT UBM PCI Slave Fetch Type Defines Fetch mode data fetch or pre fetch as follows E SFT 1 Fetch E SFT 0 Pre Fetch In Fetch mode the HI32 requests data from the DSP56300 core only after the host has begun a read transaction from the HI32 The HI32 issues this request by enabling the STRQ status bit and generating core interrupt requests or DMA requests if enabled In Pre Fetch mode the HI32 requests data from the DSP56300 core whenever the DTXS is not full The HI32 issues this request by enabling the STRQ status bit and generating core interrupt requests or DMA requests if enabled The value of SFT can be changed only if the DTXS HRXS data path is empty The personal hardware reset clears SFT PCI mode Fetch SFT 1 DCTR HM 1 The DSP to host data path DTXS HRXS is a six word deep three word deep if HCTR HRF 0 FIFO buffer Writing SFT 1 resets the DSP to host data path and clears STRQ and HSTR HRRQ During a read transaction from the HRXS STRQ is set if the DTXS HRXS FIFO is not ful
47. 1 X SCLK if the SCI Clock Polarity SCKP bit is cleared RXD can be configured as a GPIO signal PEO when the SCI RXD function is not in use 8 2 2 Transmit Data TXD This output signal transmits serial data from the SCI transmit shift register Data changes on the negative edge of the asynchronous transmit clock SCLK if SCKP is cleared This output is stable on the positive edge of the transmit clock TXD can be programmed as a GPIO signal PE1 when the SCI TXD function is not in use 8 2 3 SCI Serial Clock SCLK This bidirectional signal provides an input or output clock from which the transmit and or receive baud rate is derived in Asynchronous mode and from which data is transferred in Synchronous mode SCLK can be programmed as a GPIO signal PE2 when the SCI SCLK function is not in use This signal can be programmed as PE2 when data is being transmitted on TXD since the clock does not need to be transmitted in Asynchronous mode Because SCLK is independent of SCI data I O there is no connection between programming the PE2 signal as SCLK and data coming out the TXD signal 8 4 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI After Reset 8 3 SCI After Reset There are several different ways to reset the SCI Hardware RESET signal Software RESET instruction Both hardware and software resets clear the port control register bits which configure all I O as GPIO input The SCI remains in the Reset state as long as all SCI sign
48. 1 1 1 FF0000 Host bootstrap 8 bit wide UB mode in single strobe pin configuration 4 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes Table 4 2 Operating Mode Definitions Mode Description Expanded mode Bypasses the bootstrap ROM The DSP56301 begins fetching instructions starting at C00000 Memory accesses are performed using SRAM memory access type with 31 wait states and no address attributes selected default Bootstrap from byte wide memory Loads a program memory segment from consecutive byte wide P memory locations starting at P D00000 bits 7 0 The memory is selected by the Address Attribute AA1 and is accessed with 31 wait states The EPROM bootstrap code expects first to read 3 bytes specifying the number of program words then 3 bytes specifying the address to start loading the program words and then 3 bytes for each program word to be loaded The number of words the starting address and the program words are read least significant byte first followed by the middle and then the most significant byte The program concatenates consecutive three byte sequences into 24 bit words and stores them in contiguous PRAM memory locations starting at the specified address After the program words are read program execution starts from the same address where loading started Bootstrap through SCl The hardware reset vector is located at address FFO000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps th
49. 13 Reserved 1 1 1 0 14 Reserved 1 1 1 1 15 Reserved Note 1 The GPIO function is enabled only if all of the TC 3 0 bits are 0 3 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 31 Triple Timer Module Programming Model Table 9 3 Timer Control Status Register TCSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 2 TCIE 0 Timer Compare Interrupt Enable Enables disables the timer compare interrupts When set TCIE enables the compare interrupts In the timer pulse width modulation PWM or watchdog modes a compare interrupt is generated after the counter value matches the value of the TCPR The counter starts counting up from the number loaded from the TLR and if the TCPR value is M an interrupt occurs after M N 1 events where N is the value of TLR When cleared the TCSR TCIE bit disables the compare interrupts TOIE 0 Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable Enables timer overflow interrupts When set TOIE enables overflow interrupt generation The timer counter can hold a maximum value of FFFFFF When the counter value is at the maximum value and a new event causes the counter to be incremented to 000000 the timer generates an overflow interrupt When cleared the TOIE bit disables overflow interrupt generation TE 0 Timer Enable Enables disables the timer When set TE enables the t
50. 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAC11 BAC1Q BAC9 BAC8 BAC7 BAC6 BAC5 BAC4 BAC3 BAC2 BAC1 BACO BNC3 BNC2 BNC1 BNCO IH BYEN BXEN BPEN BAAP BAT1 BATO Address Attribute Registers 3 AAR3 X FFFFF6 Read Write Address Attribute Registers 2 AAR2 X FFFFF7 Read Write Address Attribute Registers 1 AAR1 X FFFFF8 Read Write Address Attribute Registers 0 AARO X FFFFF9 Read Write Reset 000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 8 Address Attribute Registers AAR 3 0 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 1 DMA Channel Enable Bit 23 Three Dimensional Mode Bit 10 0 Disables channel operation 0 Three Dimensional mode disabled 1 Enables channel operation 1 Three Dimensional mode enabled DMA Interrupt Enable Bit 22 DMA Address Mode Bits 9 4 l 0 Disables DMA Interrupt Non Three Dimensional Addressing Modes D3D 0 1 Enables DMA interrupt DAM 2 0 source DAM 5 3 Destination DAMIS 211 Addressing Mode Counter Offset Register DMA Transfer Mode Bits 21 19 DAM 2 0 Mode Selection 000 DORO DTM 2 0 Triggered By DE Cleared Transfer Mode 001 DORI request yes block transfer 010 DOR2 request yes word transfer 011 DOR3 100 No update None request yes line transfer 101 Postincrement by 1 None DE yes block transfer 110 111 reserved request ne bioek transiet Three Dimensional Addressing Modes D3D 1 request no word t
51. 20 19 18 17 16 FC1 FCO BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BLO 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 AR31 AR30 AR29 AR28 AR27 AR26 AR25 AR24 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AR23 AR22 AR21 AR20 AR19 AR18 AR17 AR16 6 30 Figure 6 7 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 12 DSP PCI Master Control Register DMPC Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 22 FC 1 0 0 Data Transfer Format Control In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 define data transfer formats between the HI32 and a PCI agent when the HI32 is a bus master The data transfer format converter operates according to the specified FC 1 0 To assure proper operation FC 1 0 can be changed only if both the host to DSP and the DSP to host master data paths are empty In addition switching between 32 bit data modes and non 32 bit data modes may be done only in the personal software reset state DCTR HM 0 and DSR HACT 0 See Table 6 3 on page 6 8 for a description of data transfer formats FC 1 0 are ignored when the HI32 is not in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 In a PCI DSP to Host transaction IFC 0 32 bit data The two least significant bytes of the first word mode written to the DTXM and the two least significant bytes of the second word written to the DTXM are output to the HAD 31 0 pins HADJ 31 0 HHHHLLLL where LLLL are the two least significant bytes o
52. 4 MAIE 0 Master Address Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP56300 core interrupt request when the HI32 is not the PCI transaction initiator in the PCI mode DCTR HM 1 If MAIE is cleared master address interrupt requests are disabled If MAIE is set a master address interrupt request is generated if the master address request MARQ status bit in the DPSR is set Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility MRIE Master Receive Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP56300 core interrupt request when the master receive data request MRRQ status bit in the DSP Status Register DPSR is set If MRIE is cleared master receive data interrupt requests are disabled MTIE Master Transmit Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP56300 core interrupt request when the master transmit data request MTRQ status bit in the DPSR is set If MTIE is cleared MTRQ interrupt requests are disabled Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 6 7 3 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC The DPMC is a 24 bit read write register by which the DSP56300 core generates the two most significant bytes of the 32 bit PCI transaction address and controls the burst length and data transfer format The host processor cannot access the DPMC The DPMC bits are ignored when the HI32 is not in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The DPMC can be written only if MARQ is set or in Self Configuration mode 23 22 21
53. 5 interrupt Host command interrupt Host PCI Transaction Termination Host PCI Transaction Abort Host PCI Parity Error Host PCI Transfer Complete Host PCI Master Receive Request Host Slave Receive Request Host PCI Master Transmit Request Host Slave Transmit Request Host PCI Master Address Request ESSIO RX data with exception interrupt ESSIO RX data interrupt MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 11 Interrupt Sources and Priorities Table B 4 Interrupt Source Priorities Within an IPL Continued Priority Interrupt Source ESSIO receive last slot interrupt ESSIO TX data with exception interrupt ESSIO transmit last slot interrupt ESSIO TX data interrupt ESSI1 RX data with exception interrupt ESSI1 RX data interrupt ESSI1 receive last slot interrupt ESSI1 TX data with exception interrupt ESSI1 transmit last slot interrupt ESSI1 TX data interrupt SCI receive data with exception interrupt SCI receive data SCI transmit data SCI idle line SCI timer TIMERO overflow interrupt TIMERO compare interrupt TIMER1 overflow interrupt TIMER1 compare interrupt TIMER2 overflow interrupt Lowest TIMER2 compare interrupt B 12 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets B 3 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 2
54. 6 60 Host Non Maskable Interrupt HNMI 6 60 Host Data Direction Register HDDR programming sheet B 40 Host Data Register HDR programming sheet B 40 Host Data Strobe Mode HDSM bit 6 25 Host DMA Request Polarity HDRP bit 6 24 Index 6 DSP56301 User s Manual Host Flags 2 0 HF 2 0 bits 6 36 6 54 Host Flags 5 3 HF 5 3 bits 6 26 6 57 Host Interface HI32 1 5 2 2 16 bit data Universal Bus mode 6 48 active PCI master 6 13 address insertion 6 4 bit manipulation instructions 6 26 block diagram 6 5 byte enable pins 6 45 Cache Line Size Configuration Register CCLS 6 34 Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register CCCR CRID 6 67 PCI Device Base Class BC 7 0 6 67 PCI Device Program Interface P 17 10 6 67 PCI Device Sub Class SC 7 0 6 67 Revision ID RID 7 0 6 67 clearing the HM bits 6 13 Configuration space accesses 6 45 core interrupts 6 4 data transfer 6 6 data transfer format converter 6 63 deadlock 6 46 Device Vendor ID Configuration Register CDID CVID 6 64 disable PCI wait states 6 28 DMA 6 22 DMA transfers 6 42 DSP Control Register DCTR 6 23 Host Command Interrupt Enable HCIE 6 26 Host Data Strobe Mode HDSM 6 25 Host DMA Request Polarity HDRP 6 24 Host Flags 5 3 lt HF 5 3 6 26 Host Interrupt A HINT 6 25 Host Interrupt Request Drive Control HIRD 6 24 Host Interrupt Request Handshake Mode HIRH 6 24 Host Read Write Polarity HRWP 6 25 Host Reset Polarity HRSP 6 24
55. 7 0 Note When the HIRQ pin is used in pulse mode HIRH 0 in DCTR the LT 7 0 value in CLAT should not be zero CLS 7 0 Cache Line Size Read write bits that specify the system cache line size in units of 32 bit words These bits compose the Cache Line Size Configuration Register CCLS Note When some PCI commands are used for example the Memory Write and Invalidate commands a minimum transfer of one complete cache line should be guaranteed This should be reflected by the Burst Length value used BL 5 0 in the DMPC The cache line size is set by the PCI configurator in the Cache Line Size Configuration Register CCLS but the DSP56300 core cannot read this value The system should provide the CCLS value to the DSP56300 core in another user defined way AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 69 Host Side Programming Model 6 8 11 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 PM31 PM30 PM29 PM28 PM27 PM26 PM25 PM24 PM23 PM22 PM21 PM20 PM19 PM18 PM17 PM16 GB10 GB9 GB98 GB7 GB6 GB5 GB4 GB3 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 PM9 PM8 PM7 PM6 PM5 PM4 PF MS1 MSO MSI Hardw
56. 7 28 Receiver Frame Sync Flag RFS 7 29 Receiver Overrun Error Flag ROE 7 28 Serial Input Flag 0 IFO 7 29 Serial Input Flag 1 IF1 7 29 Transmit Data Register Empty TDE 7 28 Transmit Frame Sync Flag TFS 7 29 Transmitter Underrun Error Flag TUE 7 28 Synchronous Asynchronous SYN bit 7 11 AA MOTOROLA Time Slot Register TSR 7 8 7 33 Transmit Data Registers TXO TX2 7 14 7 33 Transmit Enable TE 7 18 Transmit Shift Registers 7 30 Transmit Slot Mask Register TSM programming sheet B 34 Transmit Slot Mask Registers TSMA and TSMB 7 14 7 33 TX clock 7 11 variable prescaler 7 16 word length frame sync 7 12 word length frame sync timing 7 12 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 0 ESSIO GPIO 5 6 signals 2 23 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 1 ESSI1 GPIO 5 6 signals 2 25 Enhanced Universal Bus mode 6 15 EOM byte 4 12 ESSI 1 12 ESSIO Interrupt Priority Level SOL bits 4 16 ESSI1 Interrupt Priority Level S1L bits 4 16 expansion memory 3 1 Extended Mode Register EMR 4 7 Arithmetic Saturation Mode SM 4 7 Cache Enable CE 4 8 Core Priority CP 4 7 DO FOREVER FV Flag 4 8 Rounding Mode RM 4 7 Sixteen bit Arithmetic Mode SA 4 8 Extension E bit 4 11 External EXTAL clock input 2 5 external address bus 2 6 external bus control 2 6 External Bus Disable EBD bit 4 15 external data bus 2 6 external memory expansion port 2 6 F Fast Back to Back Capable FBBC bit 6 66 frame rate divider 7 10
57. 8 12 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CSID 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 1D15 SID14 SID13 SID12 SID11 SID10 SID9 SID8 SID7 SID6 SID5 SID4 SID3 SID2 SID1 SIDO 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID SVID 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Figure 6 21 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CSID A PCI standard read write register mapped into the PCI configuration space in PCI mode HM 1 The CSID register is read if a configuration read command is in progress and the PCI address is 2C In Self Configuration mode HM 5 the DSP56300 core can indirectly write the CSID see Section 6 5 5 Self Configuration Mode DCTR HM 5 on page 6 16 The host cannot access the CSID register when the system is not in PCI mode HM 1 This register uniquely identifies the add in board or subsystem in which the DSP56301 resides Add in card vendors can use this mechanism to distinguish their cards from one another even though the cards may have the same DSP56301 on them and therefore the same Vendor ID and Device ID Implementation of this register is optional and an all zero value indicates that the device for example add in board does not support subsystem identification The CSID bit
58. Application PS 1 0 Prescaler Clock Source Internal CLK 2 TIOO TIO1 TIO2 Programming Sheets Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 3 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 zk PS1 PS0 0 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR Reset 000000 AA MOTOROLA Prescaler Preload Value PL 20 0 X FFFF83 Read Write Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 25 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR Programming Reference B 37 Programming Sheets Application B 38 Inverter Bit 8 0 0 to 1 transitions on TIO input increment the counter or high pulse width measured or high pulse output on TIO 1 1 to 0 transitions on TIO input increment the counter or low pulse width measured or low pulse output on TIO Timer Reload Mode Bit 9 0 Timer operates as a free running counter 1 Timer is reloaded when selected condition occurs Direction Bit 11 0 TIO pin is input 1 TIO pin is output Data Input Bit 12 0 Zero read on TIO pin 1 One read on TIO pin Data Output Bit 13 0 Zero written to TIO pin 1 One written to TIO pin Prescaled Clock Enable Bit 15 Clock source is CLK 2 or TIO 1 Clock source is prescaler output Timer Compare Flag Bit 21 0 1 has been written to TCSR TCF or timer compare interrupt serviced 1 Timer Compare has occurred Timer Overflow Flag Bit 20 0 1 has been written to TCSR TOF or timer Overflow i
59. Cache Enabled 1 1 1 3 14 Status RGGI EE 4 7 Operating Mode Register COMR siceacisecccsicceceesacteedesesiceeutaesseasceeieaebeidecdenaedeuneane 4 12 Interrupt Priority Register Peripherals PRP ON SPF 4 16 Interrupt Priority Register Core IPRC OG 2SPPPREPE 4 16 PLL Control Register PC K nesrecna er enemas 4 21 Bus Control Resister BCR iciicssscscacassntcetasesaedasasededagntecdvasagianesausdad e aKa 4 22 DRAM Control Register DCR Jerinin serenas a a iS 4 24 Address Attribute Registers AAR 0 3 OG SPPPPPO Ste 4 27 DMA Control Register DCR ssssssseessesressessessrseresresserererreesttsteseenstrsesressresereene 4 29 Identification Register Configuration Revision EN 4 34 JTAG Identification ID Register Configuration esesseeseereeseereesreererrrrserereses 4 35 Memory Mapping of Peripherals Control Registers seseeeseseseeereererresreerrsrree 5 2 Host Interface Port B Detail Signal Duaeram ee eeeeeeeeeeneecneeeeeeeteeeeeneeees 5 5 DN Eeer geg 5 6 Port Eeer eege 5 6 Port E EE 5 6 Ree 5 7 HERR Di gr i E 6 5 Connection to POLBUS eegene 6 19 Connection to 16 Bit ISA EISA Data Bus wissscccssccesecestedeceeseeccavascedeesesasenenesncdeeses 6 20 Connection to the DSP56300 Core Port A Bus 6 21 DSP Control Register DC UR etc 6 23 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR sscisissssccesasisvcesssdanaesachiceesanseses ssaedenesandavenvaseonnnee 6 26 DSP PCI Master Control Register D PIMC vsasasassccsacnsssexatadt
60. Configure the interrupt trigger a Enable and prioritize overall peripheral interrupt functionality IPRP TOL 1 0 b Enable a specific peripheral interrupt TCSRO TCIE c Unmask interrupts at the global level SR I 1 0 d Configure a peripheral interrupt generating function TCSRO TC 7 4 e Enable peripheral and associated signals TCSRO TE 9 3 Operating Modes Each timer has operating modes that meet a variety of system requirements as follows Timer GPIO mode 0 Internal timer interrupt generated by the internal clock Pulse mode 1 External timer pulse generated by the internal clock Toggle mode 2 Output timing signal toggled by the internal clock Event counter mode 3 Internal timer interrupt generated by an external clock m Measurement Input width mode 4 Input pulse width measurement Input period mode 5 Input signal period measurement Capture mode 6 Capture external signal PWM mode 7 Pulse width modulation m Watchdog Pulse mode 9 Output pulse internal clock Toggle mode 10 Output toggle internal clock Note To ensure proper operation the TCSR TC 3 0 bits should be changed only when the timer is disabled that is when TCSR TE is cleared AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 5 Operating Modes 9 3 1 Triple Timer Modes For all triple timer modes the following points are true The TCSR TE bit is set to clear the counter and en
61. DCTR HM 1 with DPMC FC 0 or HCTR HTF 0 only the two least significant bytes contain data The most significant byte is read as zeroes See Table 6 3 Hardware software and personal software resets empty the host to DSP data path FIFO SRRQ and MRRQ are cleared 6 7 8 DSP Master Transmit Data Register DTXM The 24 bit wide DSP Master Transmit Data Register DTXM is the input stage of the master DSP to host data path FIFO for DSP to host master data transfers in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The DTXM can be written if the DPSR MTRQ bit is set To prevent overwriting of previous data data should not be written to the DTXM until DPSR MTRQ is set Filling the DTXM by DSP56300 core writes MOVE P instructions or DMA transfers clears DPSR MTRQ The DSP56300 core can set the DPCR MTIE bit to cause a host receive data interrupt when DPSR MTRQ is set In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 the DSP56300 core can clear the HI32 master to host bus data path and empty DTXM by setting DPCR CLRT In 32 bit mode DCTR HM 1 with DPMC FC 0 only the two least significant bytes of the DTXM are transferred See Table 6 3 Hardware software and personal software resets empty the DTXM 6 7 9 DSP Slave Transmit Data Register DTXS The 24 bit wide DSP Slave Transmit Data Register DTXS is the input stage of the slave DSP to host data path FIFO for DSP to host slave data transfers in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The DTXS can be written if the
62. DSR STRQ bit is set To prevent overwriting of previous data data should not be written to the DTXS until DSR STRQ is set Filling the DTXS by DSP56300 core writes MOVE P instructions or DMA transfers clears DSR STRQ The DSP56300 core can set the STIE bit to cause a host receive data interrupt when DSR STRQ is set In 32 bit mode DCTR HM 1 with HCTR HRF 0 only the two least significant bytes of the DTXS are transferred See Section 6 3 2 DSP To Host Data Path on page 6 7 and Table 6 3 HI32 PCI Master Data Transfer Formats on page 6 8 Hardware software and personal software resets empty the DTXS 6 42 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model 6 7 10 DSP Host Port GPIO Direction Register DIRH 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 DIR23 DIR22 DIR21 DIR20 DIR19 DIR18 DIR17 DIR16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 DIR15 DIR14 DIR13 DIR12 DIR11 DIR10 DIR9 DIR8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DIR7 DIR6 DIR5 DIR4 DIR3 DIR2 DIR1 DIRO Figure 6 11 DSP Host Port Direction Register DIRH A 24 bit read write register by which the DSP56300 core controls the direction of the host port pins in GPIO mode The host processor cannot access DIRH The DIR 23 0 bits define the corresponding GPIO pins as input or output The functionality of DIR 23 0 is defined in Table 6 16 Hardware and software resets clear all DIRH bits Table 6 16 DATH and DIRH Functionality DATx DIR
63. DTXS and HRXS are output The DSP side of the DSP to host data FIFOs is described in the following pages For a detailed description of the host side see Section 6 8 4 Host Master Receive Data Register HRXM on page 6 61 and Section 6 8 5 Host Slave Receive Data Register HRXS on page 6 61 Table 6 3 HI32 PCI Master Data Transfer Formats DPMC Register DSP to PCl Host PCI Host to DSP FC1 FCO Data Transfer Format Data Transfer Format 0 0 The two least significant bytes of two HRXM All 32 PCI data bits are written to the HTXR as two locations are output zero extended 16 bit words GDB MDDB GDB MDDB DTXM DRXR HRXM HTXR HDTFC HDTFC T T T PClbus I T T PClbus 0 1 The three least significant HRXM bytes are output The three least significant PCI data bytes are right aligned and zero extended written to the HTXR GDB MDDB GDB MDDB DTXM DRXR HRXM HTXR HDTFC HDTFC o TTT PClbus x T T PCIbus 1 0 The three least significant HRXM bytes are output The three least significant PCI data bytes are right aligned and sign extended written to the HTXR GDB MDDB GDB MDDB DTXM DRXR HRXM HTXR HDTFC HDTFC PCI bus PCI bus 6 8 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Data Transfer Paths Table 6 3 HI32 PCI Master Data Transfer Formats Continued to the HTXR G
64. During Signal Name Type Reset Signal Description RXD Input Input Serial Receive Data Receives byte oriented serial data and transfers it to the SCI receive shift register Port E 0 The default configuration following reset is GPIO PEO Input or Output input PEO When configured as PEO signal direction is controlled through the SCI port directions register PRR The signal can be configured as an SCI signal RXD through the SCI port control register PCR This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated TXD Output Input Serial Transmit Data Transmits data from the SCI transmit data register PE1 Input or Output Port E 1 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PE1 When configured as PE1 signal direction is controlled through the SCI PRR The signal can be configured as an SCI signal TXD through the SCI PCR This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated SCLK Input Output Input Serial Clock Provides the input or output clock used by the transmitter and or the receiver Port E 2 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PE2 When configured as PE2 signal direction is PE2 Input or Output controlled through the SCI PRR The signal can be configured as an SCI signal SCLK through the SCI PCR This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated
65. E nade eraistnoemansnteaneat 8 4 62 0 SCI Serial Clock SOLAR orsgeiirier niina E E E E EEE 8 4 8 3 BC TA er RESET saps scat sade eea a A Ee E aE O EA a S Eaa EE EI iS 8 5 8 4 SCI Initiaation oonsiccsecessicesavncadavvncdaadeanveceetsnveessssmaead aasuased suedsoacaes uoadesageosdasasbovadeiaapoacasanboeavers 8 6 8 4 1 Preamble Break and Data Transmission Porta 8 7 8 4 2 Bootstrap Loading Through the SCI Boot Mode 2 or A 8 8 8 3 EE 8 8 5 6 SSC Ee aosconce25p usesertientrnncetonsdactexcniacteetete arene daceeeunigecenneg reece 8 9 8 0 1 SCE Conmiral Register e EE 8 12 5 6 2 SCI EA 8 17 8 6 3 SCI Clock Control Register dt Renee 8 19 904 SR e 8 22 8 6 4 1 SCI Receive Regist r SR E 8 22 8 6 4 2 SCI Transmit Register STX Keen ege eegen 8 23 8 7 GPIO gentlech eege E E ai 8 24 Gl Port E Control Register PORE Jesien iranier ena ia Re EREE aiii 8 24 8 7 2 Port E Direction Register RE 8 25 8 7 3 Port E Data Register CERN 8 25 MOTOROLA Contents ix Chapter 9 Triple Timer Module 9 1 Eeer ebeeEege 9 1 9 1 1 Triple Timer Module Block Diagram eee eee eeseceeeeeseeeeseeceaeceseeeeeeesaeecaecsaeesseeeeaeeenaeee 9 2 SL Individual Timer Block Diseraaicsacvacrcteuccatecscscen ee 9 2 92 Operation Seeerei 9 3 SCH Mimer After RESC ane a E ae es 9 3 9 2 2 Tee Tree a e a a a e e ee a Ea 9 4 9 2 3 Timer EXCeptlonS sisis ti de cedacatieeze ts cet swedatd siini nanas Ees na rE aE aiia esaat iie iarasi insasi 9 4 9 3 Operati
66. ESSIO X FFFFB1 Read Write Reset FFFF ESSI1i X FFFFA1 Read Write Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 22 ESSI Transmit and Receive Slot Mask Registers TSM RSM B 34 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Application Transmitter Enable 0 Transmitter Disable 1 Transmitter Enable Idle Line Interrupt Enable 0 Idle Line Interrupt Disabled 1 Idle Line Interrupt Enabled Receive Interrupt Enable 0 Receive Interrupt Disabled 1 Idle Line Interrupt Enabled Transmit Interrupt Enable 0 Transmit Interrupts Disabled 1 Transmit Interrupts Enabled Timer Interrupt Enable 0 Timer Interrupts Disabled 1 Timer Interrupts Enabled SCI Timer Interrupt Rate 0 32 1 1 SCI Clock Polarity 0 Clock Polarity is Positive 1 Clock Polarity is Negative SCI Receive Exception Inerrupt 0 Receive Interrupt Disable 1 Receive Interrupt Enable Programming Sheets Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 2 Word Select Bits 0 0 8 bit Synchronous Data Shift Register Mode Reserved 10 bit Asynchronous 1 Start 8 Data 1 Stop Reserved 11 bit Asynchronous 1 Start 8 Data Even Parity 1 Stop 11 bit Asynchronous 1 Start 8 Data Odd Parity 1 Stop 11 bit Multidrop 1 Start 8 Data Data Type 1 Stop Reserved 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 01 10 11 00 01 10 11 Receiver Wakeup Enable SCI Shift Direction 0 receiver has awakened 0 LSB First 1 Wakeup function enabled 1 MSB First Wired Or Mode Sel
67. Figure 8 7 There are two receive registers a Receive Data Register SRX and a serial to parallel Receive Shift Register There are also two transmit registers a Transmit Data Register called either STX or STXA and a parallel to serial Transmit Shift Register 23 16 15 8 7 0 SCI Receive Data Register High Read Only SCI Receive Data Register Middle Read Only SCI Receive Data Register Low Read Only SCI Receive Data Shift Register Note SRX is the same register decoded at three different addresses a Receive Data Register 23 16 15 8 7 0 SCI Transmit Data Register High Write Only SCI Transmit Data Register Middle Write Only SCI Transmit Data Register Low Write Only Note Bytes are masked on the fly 1 STX is the same register decoded at four different addresses b Transmit Data Register Figure 8 7 SCI Programming Model Data Registers 8 6 4 1 SCI Receive Register SRX Data bits received on the RXD signal are shifted into the SCI receive shift register When a complete word is received the data portion of the word is transferred to the byte wide SRX This process converts serial data to parallel data and provides double buffering Double buffering promotes flexibility and increased throughput since the programmer can save and process the previous word while the current word is being received The SRX can be read at three locations as SRXL SRXM and SRXH When SRXL is read the contents of
68. Host Transfer Acknowledge Polarity HTAP 6 25 Slave Receive Interrupt Enable SRIE 6 26 Slave Transmit Interrupt Enable STIE 6 26 DSP Host Port GPIO Data Register DATH 6 43 DSP Host Port GPIO Direction Register DIRH 6 43 DSP Master Transmit Data Register DTXM 6 42 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR 6 33 DSP PCI Transaction Address Low AR 15 0 6 34 PCI Bus Command C 3 0 6 34 PCI Byte Enables BEIS OI 6 33 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC 6 30 Data Transfer Format Control FC 1 0 6 31 A MOTOROLA DSP PCI Transaction Address High AR 31 16 6 32 PCI Data Burst Length BL 5 0 6 32 DSP PCI Port Control Register DPCR 6 26 Clear Transmitter CLRT 6 29 HSERR Force SERF 6 28 Insert Address Enable IAE 6 27 Master Access Counter Enable MACE 6 28 Master Address Interrupt Enable MAIE 6 30 Master Receive Interrupt Enable MRIE 6 30 Master Transfer Terminate MTT 6 28 Master Transmit Interrupt Enable MTIE 6 30 Master Wait State Disable MWSD 6 28 Parity Error Interrupt Enable PEIE 6 29 Receive Buffer Lock Enable RBLE 6 27 Transaction Abort Interrupt Enable TAIE 6 29 Transaction Termination Interrupt Enable TTIE 6 29 Transfer Complete Interrupt Enable TCIE 6 29 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR 6 38 Master Data Transferred MDT 6 39 PCI Address Parity Error APER 6 40 PCI Data Parity Error DPER 6 40 PCI Host Data Transfer Complete HDTC 6 39 PCI Master Abort MAB 6 40 PCI Master Ad
69. In program memory space the location of the internal Instruction Cache when enabled by the CE bit varies depending on the setting of the MS bit as noted above Refer to the memory maps in Section 3 7 for detailed address information When the instruction cache is enabled that is the SR CE bit is set 1 K program words switch to instruction cache and are not accessible via addressing the address range switches to external program memory 3 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA X Data Memory Space 3 1 4 Program Bootstrap ROM In the current version of the DSP56301 the program memory space occupying locations FF0000 FF0C00 contains the 3 K word DSP56301 bootstrap program space Note In older versions of the DSP56301 the program memory space occupying locations FF0000 FF00BF contains the 192 word DSP56301 bootstrap program 3 2 X Data Memory Space The X data memory space consists of the following Internal X data memory 2 K by default up to 3 K Internal I O space upper 128 locations Optional off chip memory expansion up to 64 K in 16 bit mode or 16 M in 24 bit mode Refer to the DSP56300 Family Manual especially Chapter 9 External Memory Interface Port A for details on using the external memory interface to access external X data memory Note The X memory space at FFOOOO FFEFFF is reserved and should not be accessed 3 2 1 Internal X Data Memory The default on chip X data RAM is a 24 bit wide inter
70. Internal disconnect HP49 HINTA HINTA Internal disconnect HP50 PVCL Leave unconnected Leave unconnected PVCL Note HPxx is a reference only and is not a signal name GPIO references formerly designated as HIOxx have been renamed PBxx for consistency with other Motorola DSPs Figure 2 2 Host Interface Port B Detail Signal Diagram AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections Power 2 1 Power Table 2 2 Power Inputs Power S Name Description Vccp PLL Power V c dedicated for PLL use The voltage should be well regulated and the input should be provided with an extremely low impedance path to the Vcc power rail Vocat Quiet Core Low Power An isolated power for the core processing logic This input must be isolated externally from all other chip power inputs The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors VocaH Quiet External High Power A quiet power source for I O lines This input must be tied externally to all other chip power inputs The user must provide adequate decoupling capacitors Vcca Address Bus Power An isolated power for sections of the address bus I O drivers This input must be tied externally to all other chip power inputs The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors Vecp _ Data Bus Power An isolated power for sections of the data bus I O drivers This input must be tied externally to all other chip power inputs The user must provide adequate
71. Interrupt Request C IRQC 2 9 Interrupt Request D IRQD 2 9 Interrupt Service Routine ISR 7 9 9 4 AA MOTOROLA interrupt trigger event 7 9 interrupts 1 4 5 2 5 3 core HI32 6 4 Inverter INV bit 9 30 9 32 IRQD IRQA Priority and Mode IDL IAL bits 4 16 ISA EISA bus DMA type accesses 6 15 J Joint Test Action Group JTAG 1 5 1 9 4 35 interface 2 29 JTAG OnCE Port 2 2 L Latency Timer High LT 7 0 6 69 Limit L bit 4 11 Literature Distribution Center 1 14 Loop Address LA register 1 8 Loop Counter LC register 1 8 low power state 6 13 M68HC11 SCI interface 8 16 MA MD bits 4 5 mapping control registers 5 2 Master Access Counter Enable MACE 6 28 Master Address Interrupt Enable MAIE bit 6 30 Master Data Transferred MDT bit 6 39 Master Receive Interrupt Enable MRIE bit 6 30 Master Transfer Terminate MTT bit 6 28 Master Transmit Interrupt Enable MTIE bit 6 30 Master Wait State Disable MWSD bit 6 28 MAX_LAT ML 7 0 bits 6 73 MC68681 DUART 8 16 memory allocation switching 3 2 configuration 3 5 configuration summary 3 6 dynamic switching 3 5 expansion 3 1 maps 3 7 on chip 1 10 Memory Base Address High Low PM 31 16 bits 6 70 Memory Base Address Low PM 15 4 6 71 memory expansion port 1 5 memory space X I O 5 2 Memory Space MS 1 0 bits 6 71 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA Memory Base Address High Low PM 3 1 16 6 70 Index 9 Memory Base Add
72. JSSET The contents of the internal X I O memory space are listed in Appendix B Programming Reference Table B 2 X Data Memory FFFFFF Internal I O Peripheral Control Registers FFFF80 Memory Space FFF000 Internal Reserved FF0000 Internal X Data RAM 2K default 0007FF 000000 Figure 5 1 Memory Mapping of Peripherals Control Registers 5 3 Data Transfer Methods Peripheral I O on the DSP56301 can be accomplished in three ways m Polling Interrupts ms DMA 5 3 1 Polling Polling is the easiest method for data transfers When polling is chosen the DSP56300 core continuously checks a specified register flag waiting for an event to happen One example would be setting an overflow flag in one of the Timers Once the event occurs the DSP56301 is free to continue with its next task However while it is waiting for the event to occur the 5 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Data Transfer Methods DSP56300 core does not execute any other code Polling is the easiest transfer method since it does not require register initializations but it is also the least efficient use of the DSP core Each peripheral has its own set of flags that can be polled to determine when data is ready to be transferred For example the ESSI control registers provide bits that tell the core when data is ready to be transferred to or from the peripheral The core polls these bits to determine when to interact with the peripheral
73. Last Slot Interrupt Enable TLIE 7 19 control register mapping 5 2 conventions document 1 2 core Data ALU 1 4 Program Control Unit PCU 1 4 Core Priority CP bits 4 7 Core DMA Priority CDP bits 4 14 Crystal XTAL output 2 5 crystal frequency 8 6 Crystal Range XTLR bit 4 21 D data alignment input 6 3 Data Arithmetic Logic Unit Data ALU 1 4 1 6 1 7 registers 1 7 data bus external 2 6 signals 2 1 2 6 Data Input DI bit 9 29 data memory expansion 1 5 Data Output DO bit 9 29 Data Parity Reported DPR bit 6 65 Data Transfer Format Control FC 1 0 bits 6 31 data transfer format converter 6 63 data transfer methods 5 2 deadlock HI32 6 46 Debug Event DE 2 29 A MOTOROLA Debug mode entering 2 29 external indication 2 29 Debug support 1 5 Detected Parity Error DPE bit 6 65 Device Vendor ID Configuration Register CDID CVID 6 64 DEVSEL Timing DST 1 0 bits 6 65 Direct Memory Access DMA ISA EISA bus 6 15 ISA EISA bus enable 6 54 Request Source bits 4 29 techniques 6 22 transfers 5 2 5 4 triggered by timer 9 25 Direction DIR bit 9 30 Division Factor DF bits 4 21 DMA Address Mode DAM bit 4 34 DMA Channel Enable DE bit 4 29 DMA Channel Priority DPR bit 4 31 DMA Continuous Mode Enable DCON bit 4 32 DMA Control Registers DCRs 4 29 bit definitions 4 29 MA Address Mode DAM 4 34 MA Channel Enable DE 4 29 MA Channel Priority DPR 4 31 MA Continuous Mode Enable DCON 4 32 MA Destinatio
74. MODB and MODA respectively After the DSP56300 core leaves the Reset state MI MA can be changed under program control Note The MD MA bits reflect the corresponding value of the mode input that is MODD MODA respectively 4 4 Configuring Interrupts DSP56301 interrupt handling like that for all DSP56300 family members is optimized for DSP applications Refer to the sections describing interrupts in Chapter 2 Core Architecture Overview in the DSP56300 Family Manual Two registers are used to configure the interrupt characteristics Interrupt Priority Register Core IPRC Programmed to configure the priority levels for the core DMA interrupts and the external interrupt lines as well as the interrupt line trigger modes Interrupt Priority Register Peripherals IPRP Programmed to configure the priority levels for the interrupts used with the on chip peripheral devices The interrupt table resides in the 256 locations of program memory to which the PCU vector base address VBA register points These locations store the starting instructions of the interrupt handler for each specified interrupt The memory is programmed by the bootstrap program at startup AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 15 Configuring Interrupts 4 4 1 Interrupt Priority Registers IPRC and IPRP There are two interrupt priority registers in the DSP56301 The IPRC Figure 4 3 is dedicated to DSP56300 core interrupt sources and IPRP Fi
75. Memory Space 0 1 Y Memory Space 1 0 P Memory Space 1 1 Reserved 4 8 Device Identification Register IDR The IDR is a read only factory programmed register that identifies DSP56300 family members It specifies the derivative number and revision number of the device This information is used in testing or by software Figure 4 10 shows the contents of the IDR Revision numbers are assigned as follows 0 is revision 0 1 is revision A and so on 23 16 15 12 11 0 Reserved Revision Number Derivative Number 00 See Note 301 Note No specific revision number is shown because this manual is current for several revisions of the DSP56301 Figure 4 10 Identification Register Configuration Revision E 4 34 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA JTAG Identification ID Register 4 9 JTAG Identification ID Register The JTAG ID register is a 32 bit read only factory programmed register that distinguishes the component on a board according to the IEEE 1149 1 standard Figure 4 11 shows the JTAG ID register configuration Version information corresponds to the revision number 0 for revision 0 1 for revision A and so forth 31 28 27 22 21 12 11 1 0 Version information Design Center Sequence Manufacturer 1 Number Number Identity See Note 000110 0000000011 00000001110 1 Note No specific revision number is shown because this manual is current for several versions of the DSP5630
76. Mode M_DCTR equ DCTR_ADDR M_DPMC equ DPMC_ADDR M_DPAR equ DPAR_ADDR movep movep movep movep movep movep movep movep HI32 via programmed address 5 HI32 via programmed address S6 HI32 via programmed address 8 500000 x M_DCTR enter self configuration mode BASE_ADDRESS x M_DPMC CBMA Data location 10 CCMR_DATA x M_DPAR write CSTR amp CCMR location 04 S0 x M_DPAR dumy write to location 08 CLAT_DATA x M_DPAR write CLAT location 0C S0 x M_DPAR write CBMA location 10 gt 012345 x M_DPMC set SIDR value to 2345 gt 6789ab x M_DPAR set SVID value to 89ab and write Example 6 4 Self Configuration Procedure for Universal Bus Mode M_DCTR equ DCTR_ADDR M_DPMC equ DPMC_ADDR M_DPAR equ DPAR_ADDR AA MOTOROLA movep 500000 x DCTR movep BASE_ADDRESS x M_DPMC movep 0 x M_DPAF movep 0 x M_DPAF R R movep HIRQ__DURATION x M_DPAR movep 0 x M_DPAF R HI32 via programmed address 5 HI32 via programmed address 6 HI32 via programmed address 8 enter self configuration mode CBMA Data location 10 dummy write to location 04 dummy write to location 08 write CLAT location 0C write CBMA location 10 Host Interface HI32 6 17 Host Port Pins 6 6 Host Port Pins The HI32 signals are discussed in Chapter 2 In this section Table 6 8 summarizes the pin functi
77. PRE PREO lel far TT Port E Direction Register PRRE X FFFF9E Read Write Reset 000000 if port pin n is GPIO input then PDn reflects the value on port pin n if port pin n is GPIO output then value written to PDn is reflected on port pin n 2376 5 413 2 1 0 k k x x x PDE PDE pes 0 0 0 0 O Port E GPIO Data Register PDRE X FFFF9D Read Write Reset 000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 31 Port E Registers PCRE PRRE PDRE AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 43 Programming Sheets B 44 DSP56301 User s Manual H MOTOROLA Index A adder modulo 1 7 offset 1 7 reverse carry 1 7 Address Arithmetic Logic Unit Address ALU 1 7 Address Attribute 0 3 AA O 3 2 6 Address Attribute Priority Disable APD bit 4 13 Address Attribute Registers AAR 4 22 4 27 Bus Access Type BAT 4 29 Bus Address Attribute Polarity BAAP 4 28 Bus Address to Compare BAC 4 27 Bus Number of Address Bits to Compare BNC 4 27 Bus Packing Enable BPAC 4 28 Bus Program Memory Enable BPEN 4 28 Bus X Data Memory Enable BXEN 4 28 Bus Y Data Memory Enable BYEN 4 28 programming sheet B 20 address bus external 2 6 signals 2 1 2 6 Address Generation Unit AGU 1 7 Address Mode Wakeup 8 3 Address Trace Enable ATE bit 4 13 Address Trace mode 1 5 addressing modes 1 4 1 8 Alignment Control ALC bit 7 16 Arithmetic Saturation Mode SM bit 4 7 Asynchronous Bus Arbitration Enable ABE bit 4 13 asy
78. Priority 00 00 0 lowest 00 01 1 00 10 2 00 11 3 highest 01 XX DMA accesses have higher priority than core accesses 10 XX DMA accesses have the same priority as core accesses 11 XX DMA accesses have lower priority than core accesses E f DMA priority gt core priority for example if CDP 01 or CDP 00 and DPR gt CP the DMA performs the external bus access first and the core waits for the DMA channel to complete the current transfer E f DMA priority core priority for example if CDP 10 or CDP 00 and DPR CP the core performs all its external accesses first and then the DMA channel performs its access BR f DMA priority lt core priority for example if CDP 11 or CDP 00 and DPR lt CP the core performs its external accesses and the DMA waits for a free slot in which the core does not require the external bus E In Dynamic Priority mode CDP 00 the DMA channel can be halted before executing both the source and destination accesses if the core has higher priority If another higher priority DMA channel requests access the halted channel finishes its previous access with a new higher priority before the new requesting DMA channel is serviced 16 DCON DMA Continuous Mode Enable Enables disables DMA Continuous mode When DCON is set the channel enters the Continuous Transfer mode and cannot be interrupted during a transfer by any other DMA ch
79. Programming Model Table 6 22 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Mode Description 31 20 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 19 TWSD 0 PCI Target Wait State Disable Note Do not set the TWSD bit This bit is reserved The HI32 may operate improperly in PCI mode when the Target Wait State Disable TWSD bit is set Disables PCI wait states which are inserted by deasserting HTRDY during a data phase If TWSD is cleared and the HI32 is in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 BR as the selected target in a read data phase from the HRXS the HI32 inserts PCI wait states if the HRXS is empty HRRQ 0 Wait states are inserted until the data is transferred from the DSP side to the HRXS Up to eight wait states can be inserted before a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C Retry is generated BR as the selected target in a write data phase to the HTXR the HI32 inserts PCI wait states if the HTXR is full HTRQ 0 Wait states are inserted until the data is transferred from the HTXR to the DSP side Up to eight wait states can be inserted before a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C Retry is generated BR as the selected target in a write data phase to the HCVR the HI32 inserts PCI wait states if a host command is pending HC 1 Wait states are inserted until the pending host command is serviced Up
80. Programming Reference B 39 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 4 G P IO Port B HI08 DRx 1 gt HIx is Output DRx 0 gt HIx is Input 14 1 II 15 3 12 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STEEP WW Host Data Direction Register HDDR X FFFFC8 Write Reset 00 DRx holds value of corresponding HI08 GPIO pin Function depends on HDDR 12 11 15 14 13 10 9 8 7 6 5 Au 2 1 0 SS WM Host Data Register HDR X FFFFC9 Write Reset Undefined Figure B 28 Host Data Direction and Host Data Registers HDDR HDR B 40 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 2 of 4 GPIO Port C ESSIO PCn 1 Port Pin configured as ESSI PCn 0 gt Port Pin configured as GPIO 23 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 k Pccs pcca Poca Poca Pcci Peco 0 0 Port C Conirol Register PCRC X FFFFBF Read Write Reset 000000 PDCn 1 Port Pin is Output PDCn 0 Port Pin is Input 2376 5 413 2 1 0 k PRC5 paca PRC3 PRC2 PRC1 PRCO Pr Port C Direction Register PRRC X FFFFBE Read Write Reset 000000 if port pin n is GPIO input then PDn reflects the value on port pin n if port pin n is GPIO output then value written to PDn is reflected on port pin n 237 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PDC5 PDC4 PDC3 PDC2 PDC1 PDCO ole Port C GPIO Data Register PDRC X FFFFBD Read Write Reset 000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figur
81. RX data with exception interrupt ESSIO RX data interrupt ESSIO receive last slot interrupt ESSIO TX data with exception interrupt ESSIO transmit last slot interrupt ESSIO TX data interrupt ESSI1 RX data with exception interrupt ESSI1 RX data interrupt ESSI1 receive last slot interrupt ESSI1 TX data with exception interrupt ESSI1 transmit last slot interrupt ESSI1 TX data interrupt SCI receive data with exception interrupt SCI receive data SCI transmit data SCI idle line SCI timer TIMERO overflow interrupt TIMERO compare interrupt TIMER1 overflow interrupt TIMER1 compare interrupt TIMER2 overflow interrupt Lowest TIMER2 compare interrupt 4 20 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA PLL Control Register PCTL 4 5 PLL Control Register PCTL The bootstrap program must initialize the system Phase Lock Loop PLL circuit by configuring the PLL Control Register PCTL The PCTL is an X I O mapped read write register that directs the on chip PLL operation See Figure 4 5 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 PD3 PD2 PD1 PDO COD PEN PSTP XTLD XTLR DF2 DF1 DFO 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MF11 MF10 MF9 MF8 MF7 MF6 MER MEA MF3 MF2 MF1 MFO Figure 4 5 PLL Control Register PCTL Table 4 8 defines the DSP56301 PCTL bits Changing the following bits may cause the PLL to lose lock
82. Receive Data Register DTXM DSP Master Transmit Data Register DTXS DSP Slave Transmit Data Register DIRH DSP Host Port GPIO Direction Register DATH DSP Host Port GPIO Data Register a 247 24 es 24 24 24 24 Sas jaan are ae H 6 words deep De J I 8 words deep I y D Se I o z 6 words deep S d 72 24 24 24 32 32 CDID CVID Device ID Vendor ID Configuration Register CSTR CCMR Status Command Configuration Register CCCR CRID Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register CHTY CLAT Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CCLS Cache Line Size Configuration Register CBMA Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CSID Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CILP Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration Register Note As the PCI master the HI32 uses the HRXM to output data The host bus cannot access this register Figure 6 1 HI32 Block Diagram In Self Configuration mode DCTR HM registers in the PCI Configuration Space but the CDID DVID register The HI32 cannot read any of the registers in its configuration space Host processors can use standard host processor instructions and addressing modes to communicate with the HI32 registers The host processor can be any of a number of industry standard microcomputers or microprocessors AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 5 the DSP56300 core can indirectly write all 6 5 Data Transfer Paths
83. Register Mode Page Host Interface Control Register HCTR UBM page 48 PCI Host Interface Status Register HSTR UBM page 57 PCI Host Command Vector Register HCVR UBM page 59 PCI Host Master Receive Data Register HRXM PCI page 61 Host Slave Receive Data Register HRXS UBM page 61 PCI Host Transmit Data Register HTXR UBM page 62 PCI Device ID Vendor ID Configuration Register CDID CVID PCI page 67 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR PCI page 64 Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register PCI page 67 CCCR CRID Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register UBM page 68 Cache Line Size Configuration Register PCI CHTY CLAT CCLS Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register UBM page 70 CBMA PCI Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration PCI page 71 Register CSID Interrupt Line Interrupt Signal Configuration Register CILP PCI page 73 Note As the PCI master the HI32 uses the HRXM to output data and the host bus cannot access this register In the Universal Bus modes m The HI32 occupies eight words in the host processor address space The host processor cannot access the PCI configuration registers CDID CVID CSTR CCMR CCCR CRID CHTY CLAT CBMA CSID and CILP in the Universal Bus modes However it can configure these registers in Self Configuration mode Because of the fast DSP56300 core interrupt response most host microprocessors can read or write data at th
84. STA bit 6 65 signals by function 2 1 functional grouping 2 2 Sixteen bit Arithmetic Mode SA bit 4 8 Sixteen bit Compatibility SC mode 3 6 Sixteen bit Compatibility SC mode bit 3 7 4 9 Size register SZ 1 8 Slave Fetch Type SFT 6 52 Slave Receive Data Request SRRQ bit 6 36 Slave Receive Interrupt Enable SRIE bit 6 26 Slave Transmit Data Request STRQ bit 6 37 Slave Transmit Interrupt Enable STIE bit 6 26 SRAM support 1 5 Stack Counter register SC 1 8 Stack Extension Enable SEN bit 4 12 Stack Extension Overflow Flag EOV bit 4 13 Stack Extension Underflow Flag EUN bit 4 13 Stack Extension Wrap Flag WRP bit 4 12 Stack Extension XY Select X YS bit 4 13 Stack Pointer SP 1 8 start up procedure location 4 2 Status Register SR 1 8 4 7 bit definitions 4 7 Condition Code Register CCR 4 7 Carry C 4 11 Extension E 4 11 Limit L 4 11 Negative N 4 11 Overflow V 4 11 Scaling S 4 10 Unnormalized U 4 11 Index 13 Zero Z 4 11 Extended Mode Register EMR 4 7 Arithmetic Saturation Mode SM 4 7 Cache Enable CE 4 8 Core Priority CP 4 7 DO FOREVER FV Flag 4 8 Instruction Cache Enable CE 4 7 Rounding Mode RM 4 7 Sixteen bit Arithmetic Mode SA 4 8 Mode Register MR 4 7 Do Loop Flag LF 4 8 Double Precision Multiply Mode DM 4 9 Interrupt Mask I 4 10 Scaling S Mode 4 10 Sixteen bit Compatibility SC Mode 4 9 programming sheet B 13 Status Command Configuration Registe
85. Self Configuration Mode DCTR HM 5 on page 6 16 The host writes to CSTR CCMR in accordance with the byte enables Byte lanes that are not enabled are not written and the corresponding bits remain unchanged The host can access CSTR CCMR only in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 Table 6 26 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 31 DPE 0 Detected Parity Error Indicates that the HI32 hardware has detected a parity error In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 DPE is set when the HI32 detects either an address or data parity error DPE is cleared when the host processor writes a value of one to it The personal hardware reset clears DPE 30 SSE Signaled System Error Indicates a system error In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 SSE is set when the HI32 asserts the HSERR pin SSE is cleared when the host processor writes a value of one to it The personal hardware reset clears SSE 29 RMA Received Master Abort Indicates a master abort PCI bus state In PCI mode HM 1 RMA is set when the HI32 as a master device terminates its transaction with master abort RMA is cleared when the host processor writes a value of one to it The personal hardware reset clears RMA 28 RTA Received Target Abort Indicates a target abort PCI bus event In PCI mode DCTR HN 1 RTA is set when the HI32 as a master device detects that its tran
86. Source Priorities Within an ID 4 19 4 8 PLL Control Register PCTL Bit Definitions 4 iscscssascosossascsscsosnessesuasesnasesennsens 4 21 4 9 Bus Control Register BCR Bit Definitions 0 eee eeeeeeseeeneeceeeeeeneeeseeenaeenes 4 22 4 10 DRAM Control Register DCR Bit Definitions 00 eee eeeeeseeeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeens 4 25 4 11 Address Attribute Registers AAR 0 3 Bit Definitions 0 eee eeeeeeeteeeeeeee 4 27 4 12 DMA Control Register DCR Bit Defmpons 4 29 6 1 HI32 Features Core Side and Host Sde 6 2 6 2 HI32 Features in PCI Mode and Universal Bus Mode 6 3 6 3 HI32 PCI Master Data Transfer Format 6 8 6 4 Transmit Data Transfer POI ys caicsecsSe2e5s ocesesed rs sactionentcasentseedvaseasesteesenegasioneanientee 6 9 6 5 Receive Tra nster Data FOUnats Seege ee 6 10 6 6 LIRE 6 12 6 7 LIES 6 13 6 8 Host Port Pin TRU AD EE 6 18 6 9 HI32 Programming Model DSP Side szcacczcstccscccseticacenveasdess tate dendeasteavethccecesasadeeieins 6 22 AA MOTOROLA Tables XV B 4 xvi DSP Control Register DCTR Bit Definitions 0 00 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenteeeeaees 6 23 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR Bit Definitions 20 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeceteeeeeeees 6 27 DSP PCI Master Control Register DMPC Bit Definitions 00 ee eeeeeeeteeee 6 31 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR Bit Definitions 20 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeenteeeenaees 6 33 DSP Status Register DSR Bit Definitions icscc ssccesscescstessevesennsnceencnsece
87. TCIE 1 Figure 9 3 Timer Mode TRM 1 Mode 0 internal clock no timer output TRM 0 N write preload first event last event M write compare TE Clock CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR Nj 7 y a eG AS DE CED OLE ven a Z TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 TOF Overflow Interrupt if TCIE 1 Figure 9 4 Timer Mode TRM 0 MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 7 Operating Modes 9 3 1 2 Timer Pulse Mode 1 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 0 0 0 1 1 Timer Pulse Timer Output Internal In Mode 1 the timer generates an external pulse on its TIO signal when the timer count reaches a pre set value The TIO signal is loaded with the value of the TCSR INV bit When the counter matches the TCPR value TCSR TCF is set and a compare interrupt is generated if the TCSR TCIE bit is set The polarity of the TIO signal is inverted for one timer clock period If TCSR TRM is set the counter is loaded with the TLR value on the next timer clock and the count is resumed If TCSR TRM is cleared the counter continues to increment on each timer clock This process repeats until TCSR TE is cleared disabling the timer The TLR value in the TCPR sets the delay between starting the timer and generating the output pulse To generate successive output pulses with a delay of X clock cycles between signals set the TLR value to X 2 and set t
88. This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated SRD1 PD4 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Receive Data Receives serial data and transfers the data to the ESSI receive shift register SRD1 is an input when data is being received Port D 4 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PD4 When configured as PD4 signal direction is controlled through PRR1 The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SRD1 through PCR1 This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated STD1 PD5 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Transmit Data Transmits data from the serial transmit shift register STD1 is an output when data is being transmitted Port D 5 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PD5 When configured as PDS signal direction is controlled through PRR1 The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal STD1 through PCR1 This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated 2 26 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface SCI 2 10 Serial Communications Interface SCI The SCI provides a full duplex port for serial communication with other DSPs microprocessors or peripherals such as modems All SCI pins are 5 V tolerant Table 2 15 Serial Communication Interface State
89. Transfer Format on page 6 9 When HSTR HTRQ is set and TREQ in the HCTR is set m The HSTR HREQ status bit is set m The HIRQ pin is asserted if DMAE is cleared in the Universal Bus modes The HDRQ pin is asserted if DMAE is set in the Universal Bus modes Hardware software and personal software resets empty the HTXR HSTR HTRQ is set 6 8 6 1 PCI Mode DCTR HM 1 As the active target in a memory space write transaction the HTXR is accessed if the PCI address is between HI32_base_address 01C and HI32_base_address FFFC that is the host processor views HTXR as a 16377 Dword write only memory As the active master the HTXR is written with all data read from the accessed target In PCI host to DSP data transfers data is written to the HTXR FIFO in accordance with FC 1 0 or HTF 1 0 bits regardless of the value of the byte enable pins HC3 HBE3 HC0 HBEO If TWSD is cleared the HI32 as the selected PCI target DCTR HM 1 in a write data phase to the HTXR inserts PCI wait states if the HTXR is full HTRQ 0 Wait states are inserted until the data transfers from the HTXR to the DSP side Up to eight wait states can be inserted before a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C Retry is generated 6 8 6 2 Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 The HTXR is accessed if the HA10 HA3 value matches the HI32 base address see Section 6 8 11 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register C
90. When FSP is set the frame sync signal polarity is negative that is the frame start is indicated by the frame sync signal going low FSR Frame Sync Relative Timing Determines the relative timing of the receive and transmit frame sync signal in reference to the serial data lines for word length frame sync only When FSR is cleared the word length frame sync occurs together with the first bit of the data word of the first slot When FSR is set the word length frame sync occurs one serial clock cycle earlier that is simultaneously with the last bit of the previous data word FSL 1 0 Frame Sync Length Selects the length of frame sync to be generated or recognized as in Figure 7 6 on page 7 24 Figure 7 9 on page 7 27 and Figure 7 10 on page 7 27 FSL1 FSLO Frame Sync Length RX TX 0 word word 0 word bit 1 bit bit o oO 1 bit word SHFD Shift Direction Determines the shift direction of the transmit or receive shift register If SHFD is set data is shifted in and out with the LSB first If SHFD is cleared data is shifted in and out with the MSB first as in Figure 7 12 on page 7 31 and Figure 7 13 on page 7 32 SCKD Clock Source Direction Selects the source of the clock signal that clocks the transmit shift register in Asynchronous mode and both the transmit and receive shift registers in Synchronous mode If SCKD is set and the ESSI is in Synchrono
91. Y Data RAM Cache Memory Size 0 1 0 2K 3K 3K None 16M 000 800 000 BFF 000 BFF Note 1 Address range is for 3 K bootstrap space Figure 3 3 Switched Program RAM 0 1 0 MOTOROLA Memory Configuration 3 9 Memory Maps Program X Data Y Data FFFF FFFF Internal UO FFFF External I O 128 words gFF8o __ 128 words FF80 External External External 0C00 0C00 0800 Internal Internal X Data Internal Y Data H RAM 3K RAM 3K 0000 0000 0000 Bit Settings Memory Configuration Program Addressable CE MS SC RAM X Data RAM Y Data RAM Cache Memory Size 0 1 1 2K 3K 3K None 64K 000 7FF 000 BFF 000 BFF 3 10 Figure 3 4 16 Bit Space With Switched Program RAM 0 1 1 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Memory Maps Program X Data Y Data FFFFFF FFFFFF Internal I O SFFFFFF External IO mend FFFF80 128 words FFFF80 128 words Reserved External External FFFOOO FFFOOO FFOOCO Internal Internal B ROM Reserved Reserved prrago Bootstrap RO FF0000 FF0000 External External External 000C00 000800 000800 Internal Program RAM Internal X Data Internal Y Data 3K RAM 2K RAM 2K 000000 000000 000000 NOTE External program memory begins immediately after the internal program memory The internal memory modules that are mapped to the a
92. a 24 bit wide DSP56301 word Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least 64 times the data transmission rate Host bootstrap in DSP to DSP mode The hardware reset vector is located at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through the HI32 in UB mode double strobe HTA pin active low The DSP56301 is written with 24 bit wide words Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least three times the data transfer rate Host bootstrap PCI mode 32 bit wide The hardware reset vector is located at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through the HI32 in standard PCI slave configuration The DSP56301 is written with 24 bit wide words encapsulated in 32 bit wide PCI transfers Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be 5 3 of the PCI clock 4 4 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Bootstrap Program Table 4 2 Operating Mode Definitions Continued Mode Description D Host bootstrap 16 bit wide ISA slave glueless interface in UB mode Loads the program memory from the Host Interface programmed to operate in the Universal Bus mode supporting ISA slave glueless connection Using Self Configuration mode the base address in the CBMA is initially written with 2F which corresponds to an ISA HTXR address of 2FE Serial Port 2 Modem Status read only register The HI32 bootstrap code expects to read 32 consecutive times the magic number 0037 Subsequently the bootstrap code expects to read a 16
93. a single instruction If an interrupt trigger event occurs before all interrupt trigger configuration steps are performed the event is ignored and not queued If interrupts derived from the core or other peripherals need to be enabled at the same time as ESSI interrupts step 2f should be performed last AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 9 Operating Modes Normal Network and On Demand 7 4 Operating Modes Normal Network and On Demand The ESSI has three basic operating modes and several data and operation formats These modes are programmed via the ESSI control registers The data and operation formats available to the ESSI are selected when you set or clear control bits in the CRA and CRB These control bits are WL 2 1 MOD SYN FSL 1 0 FSR FSP CKP and SHFD 7 4 1 Normal Network On Demand Mode Selection To select either Normal mode or Network mode clear or set CRB MOD In Normal mode the ESSI sends or receives one data word per frame per enabled receiver or transmitter In Network mode 2 to 32 time slots per frame can be selected During each frame 0 to 32 data words are received or transmitted from each enabled receiver or transmitter In either case the transfers are periodic The Normal mode typically transfers data to or from a single device Network mode is typically used in time division multiplexed networks of CODECs or DSPs with multiple words per frame Network mode has a submo
94. accordance with the byte enables Byte lanes that are not enabled are not written and the corresponding bits remain unchanged The host can access CHTY CLAT CCLS only when the HI32 is in PCI mode HM 1 Table 6 28 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 31 24 0 Not implemented Write to zero for future compatibility 23 16 HT 7 0 0 Header Type hardwired to 00 Read only bits that identify the layout of bytes 10 3F in the configuration space and also whether the device contains multiple functions 6 68 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model Table 6 28 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 15 8 LT 7 0 0 Latency Timer High In PCI mode HM 1 specify the value of the latency timer for this PCI bus master in units of PCI bus clock cycles In the Universal Bus modes HM 2 3 with HIRH cleared LT 7 0 specify the duration of the HIRQ pulse in units of DSP56300 core clock cycles The following equation gives the duration of the HIRQ pulse HIRQ_PULSE_WIDTH LT 7 0 _ Value 1 DSP56300_Core_clock_cycle The DSP56300 core can write to these bits in Self Configuration mode see Example 6 4 on page 6 17 The personal hardware reset clears LT
95. active low 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 Host Transfer Acknowledge Polarity Bit 15 0 HTA is active high 1 HTA is active low Host Read Write Polarity Bit 14 0 Host to DSP direction is low HRW 1 Host to DSP direction is high HRW Host Data Strobe Mode Bit 13 0 Double Strobe pin mode is selected 1 Single strobe pin mode is selected Host Interrupt A Bit 6 0 HINTA pin released 1 HINTA pin driven low Host Flags Bits 5 3 Used for DSP to host communication Set or cleared by DSP visible to host Slave Receive Interrupt Enable Bit 2 0 SRRQ interrupt requests are disabled 1 Core interrupt when DSR SRRQ is set Slave Transmit Interrupt Enable Bit 1 0 STRQ interrupt requests are disabled 1 Core interrupt when DSR STRQ is set Host Command Interrupt Enable Bit 0 0 HCP interrupt requests are disabled 1 Core interrupt when DSR HCP is set Oe cara 12 1110 9 8 7 6 os i GaGa Gal AE lc DSP Control Register DCTR Read Write Address X FFFFC5 Reset 000000 Note All bits but the mode setting bits Bits 22 20 work only in a Universal Bus Mode DCTR HM Reserved Program as 0 2 or 3 Figure B 10 DSP Control Register DCTR B 22 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Application Programming Sheets Date Programmer Sheet 2 of 10 Host Processor HI32 Insert Address Enable Bit 21 0 Does not write PCI transaction address 1 Writes PCI transaction a
96. and re lock according to the new value PD 3 0 PEN XTLR and MF Table 4 8 PLL Control Register PCTL Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 20 PD 3 0 0 Predivider Factor Define the predivision factor PDF to be applied to the PLL input frequency The PD 3 0 bits are cleared during DSP56301 hardware reset which corresponds to a PDF of one 19 COD Clock Output Disable Controls the output buffer of the clock at the CLKOUT pin When COD is set the CLKOUT output is pulled high When COD is cleared the CLKOUT pin provides a 50 percent duty cycle clock 18 PEN Set to PINIT input value PLL Enable Enables PLL operation 17 PSTP 0 PLL Stop State Controls PLL and on chip crystal oscillator behavior during the stop processing state 16 XTLD XTAL Disable Controls the on chip crystal oscillator XTAL output The XTLD bit is cleared during DSP56301 hardware reset so the XTAL output signal is active permitting normal operation of the crystal oscillator 15 XTLR Crystal Range Controls the on chip crystal oscillator transconductance The XTLR bit is cleared 0 during hardware reset in the DSP56303 14 12 DF 2 0 Division Factor Define the DF of the low power divider These bits specify the DF as a power of two in the range from 2 to 2 MED 1 0 PLL Multiplication Factor Define the multiplication f
97. bidirectional bus Tri state bidirectional bus During the first clock of a transaction Transfers data between the host processor HAD 31 16 contain the physical byte and the HI32 This bus is released address 32 bits During subsequent disconnected when the HI32 is not selected clock HAD 31 16 contain data by HA 10 0 The HD 23 0 pins are driven by the HI32 during a read access and are inputs to the HI32 during a write access During operation with a host bus less than 16 bits wide the HD 23 8 pins not used to transfer data must be pulled to Vcc or GND For example during operation with an 8 bit bus HP 40 33 must be pulled up to Vcc or pulled down to GND Note Motorola recommends that you pull these unused data lines down Pulling these lines up sets the corresponding bits when the external host writes to the HCTR HP 48 41 HD 23 16 disconnected Data Bus Tri state bidirectional bus Transfers data between the host processor and the HI382 This bus is released disconnected when the HI32 is not selected by HA 10 0 The HD 23 16 pins are driven by the HI32 during a read access and are inputs to the HI32 during a write access HD 23 16 outputs are high impedance if HRF 0 HD 23 16 inputs are disconnected if HTF 0 During operation with a host bus less than 24 bits wide the data pins not used to transfer data must be forced or pulled to Vcc or to GND For example during operations with
98. bit 7 21 Transmit 2 Enable TE2 bit 7 21 Transmit Clock Source TDM bit 8 19 Transmit Data Register Empty TDE bit 7 28 Transmit Data Register Empty TDRE bit 8 18 Transmit Data Registers TXO TX2 7 14 7 33 Transmit Data signal TXD 8 4 Transmit Enable TE bits 7 18 Transmit Exception Interrupt Enable TEIE bit 7 19 Transmit Frame Sync Flag TFS 7 29 Transmit Interrupt Enable TIE bit 7 20 Transmit Last Slot Interrupt Enable TLIE bit 7 19 Transmit Request Enable TREQ bit 6 56 Transmit Shift Registers 7 30 Transmit Slot Mask Registers TSMA and TSMB 7 14 7 33 Transmitter Empty TRNE bit 8 18 Transmitter Enable TE bit 8 14 Transmitter Ready TRDY bit 6 58 Transmitter Underrun Error Flag TUE 7 28 triple timer module 1 13 TX clock 7 11 TXD signal 8 4 U Universal Bus modes 6 44 6 63 Universal Bus mode 6 15 6 63 16 bit 6 48 6 57 6 63 24 bit 6 56 Universal Bus Mode Address Space 6 47 Universal Bus Mode Base Address GB 10 3 bits 6 70 Universal Host Interface 1 5 Unnormalized U bit 4 11 V VBA register 1 8 Vector Base Address register VBA 1 8 W Wait Cycle Control WCC bit 6 66 Wakeup Mode Select WAKE bit 8 15 Wired OR Mode Select WOMS bit 8 14 Word Length Control WL bits 7 15 Word Select WDS bits 8 16 Write WR 2 7 X X data memory 3 3 Index 15 X I O memory space 3 4 5 2 X Memory Address Bus XAB 1 10 X Memory Data Bus XDB 1 10 X Memor
99. bit word that is the designated ISA Port Address this address is written into the CBMA The HOST Processor must poll for the Host Interface to be reconfigured This must be done by reading the HSTR and verifying that the value 0013 is read Then the host processor starts writing data to the Host Interface The HI32 bootstrap code expects to read a 24 bit word first that specifies the number of program words followed by a 24 bit word specifying the address from which to start loading the program words followed by a 24 bit word for each program word to be loaded The program words are stored in contiguous PRAM memory beginning at the specified starting address After reading the program words program execution starts from the address where loading started Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least three times the data transfer rate E Host bootstrap 8 bit wide UB mode in double strobe pin configuration The hardware reset vector is located at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through HI32 in UB slave double strobe HWR HRD configuration The DSP56301 is written with 24 bit wide words broken into 8 bit wide host bus transfers You can use this mode for booting from various microprocessors or microcontrollers for example booting a slave DSP56301 from port A of a master DSP563xx Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least three times the data transfer rate F Host bootstrap 8 bit wide UB mode in single strobe pin configu
100. change only when DSR HACT 0 in the DSR HDSM is ignored when the HI32 is not in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 12 7 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 6 HINT 0 UB PCI Host Interrupt A Controls the HINTA pin When the core sets HINT the HINTA pin is driven low When the core clears HINT the HINTA pin is released AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 25 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 10 DSP Control Register DCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Mode Description 5 3 HF 5 3 0 UB PCI Host Flags General purpose flags for DSP to host communication The DSP56300 core can set or clear these bits HF 5 3 are visible to the external host in the HSTR There are six host flags three by which the host signals the DSP56300 core HF 2 0 and three by which the DSP56300 core signals the host processor HF 5 3 The host flags do not cause interrupts they must be polled to determine whether they have changed These flags can be used individually or as encoded triads SRIE UB PCI Slave Receive Interrupt Enable Enables a DSP56300 core interrupt request when the slave receive data request SRRQ status bit in the DSR is set When SRIE is cleared SRRQ interrupt requests are disabled When SRIE is set a slave receive data interrupt request is generated if SRRQ is set STIE UB PCI
101. cleared the SCI requests an SCI receive data with exception interrupt from the interrupt controller Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears REIE 15 SCKP 0 SCI Clock Polarity Controls the clock polarity sourced or received on the clock signal SCLK eliminating the need for an external inverter When SCKP is cleared the clock polarity is positive when SCKP is set the clock polarity is negative In Synchronous mode positive polarity means that the clock is normally positive and transitions negative during valid data Negative polarity means that the clock is normally negative and transitions positive during valid data In Asynchronous mode positive polarity means that the rising edge of the clock occurs in the center of the period that data is valid Negative polarity means that the falling edge of the clock occurs during the center of the period that data is valid Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears SCKP 14 STIR 0 Timer Interrupt Rate Controls a divide by 32 in the SCI Timer interrupt generator When STIR is cleared the divide by 32 is inserted in the chain When STIR is set the divide by 32 is bypassed thereby increasing timer resolution by a factor of 32 Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears this bit To ensure proper operation of the timer STIR must not be changed during timer operation that is if TM
102. cleared only by hardware reset or by an explicit MOVEC operation to the OMR 4 12 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit CPU Registers Table 4 4 Operating Mode Register OMR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 18 EOV 0 Stack Extension Overflow Flag Set when a stack overflow occurs in Stack Extended mode Extended stack overflow is recognized when a push operation is requested while SP SZ Stack Size register and the Extended mode is enabled by the SEN bit The EOV flag is a sticky bit that is cleared only by hardware reset or by an explicit MOVEC operation to the OMR The transition of the EOV flag from zero to one causes a Priority Level 3 Non maskable stack error exception 17 EUN Stack Extension Underflow Flag Set when a stack underflow occurs in Extended Stack mode Extended stack underflow is recognized when a pull operation is requested SP 0 and the SEN bit enables Extended mode The EUN flag is a sticky bit that is cleared only by hardware reset or by an explicit MOVEC operation to the OMR Transition of the EUN flag from zero to one causes a Priority Level 3 Non maskable stack error exception Note While the chip is in Extended Stack mode the UF bit in the SP acts like a normal counter bit 16 XYS Stack Extension XY Select Determines whether the stack extension is mapped onto X or Y memory space If t
103. data to be read from the DRXR is slave data When MRRQ is set and DPCRI MRIE is set a master receive data interrupt request is generated When MRRQ is set and when enabled by an DSP56300 core DMA channel a master receive data DMA request is generated Hardware software and personal software resets clear MRRQ MTRQ PCI Master Transmit Data Request Indicates that the DSP master transmit data FIFO DTXM is not full and can be written by the DSP56300 core MTRQ is cleared when the DTXM is filled by core writes MTRQ is set when data is output from the DTXM HRXM FIFO to the host bus When MTRQ is set and DPCR MTIE is set a master transmit data interrupt request is generated When enabled by a DSP56300 core DMA channel a master transmit data DMA request is generated Hardware software and personal software resets set MTRQ In the personal software reset state MTRQ 0 MWS PCI Master Wait States Indicates that the HI32 as master in a PCI transaction inserts wait states to extend the current data phase or the first data phase if the transaction is not yet initiated by deasserting HIRDY because it cannot guarantee completion of the next data phase MWS is enabled when the DPCR MWSD bit is cleared MWS is set in a PCI write transaction when there is only one word in the HI32 to host data path MWS is set in a PCI read transaction if there is only one empty location in the host to DSP data path This has many applicat
104. deasserted these inputs are hardware interrupt request lines Table 2 9 Interrupt and Mode Control Signal state er Type During Signal Description Name Reset RESET Input Input Reset Must be asserted at power up Deassertion of RESET is internally synchronized Schmitt to CLKOUT When asserted the chip goes into the Reset state and the internal phase trigger generator is reset The Schmitt trigger allows a slowly rising input such as aa charging capacitor to reset the chip reliably If RESET is deasserted synchronous to CLKOUT exact start up timing is guaranteed allowing multiple processors to start synchronously and operate together in lock step Deasserting the RESET signal latches the initial chip operating mode from the MODA MODD inputs This input is 5 V tolerant MODA Input Input Mode Select A Internally synchronized to CLKOUT MODA MODB MODC and Schmitt MODD select one of 16 initial chip operating modes latched into the OMR when the trigger RESET signal is deasserted IRQA Input External Interrupt Request A After reset this input becomes a level sensitive or negative edge triggered maskable interrupt request input during normal instruction processing If IRQA is asserted synchronous to CLKOUT multiple processors can be resynchronized using the WAIT instruction and asserting IRQA to exit the wait state If the processor is in the st
105. down if not used HD18 disconnected HP44 HAD27 pull up or down if not used HD19 disconnected HP45 HAD28 pull up or down if not used HD20 disconnected HP46 HAD29 pull up or down if not used HD21 disconnected HP47 HAD30 pull up or down if not used HD22 disconnected HP48 HAD31 pull up or down if not used HD23 disconnected HP49 HRST HRST Schmitt trigger buffer on input HP50 HINTA PVCL Leave unconnected 1 HD23 HD16 Output is high impedance if HRF4 0 Input is disconnected if HTF 0 Table 2 12 Host Port Pins HI32 Signal Universal Bus Mode Name SS Enhanced Universal Bus Mode GPIO HP 7 0 HAD 15 0 HA 10 3 HIO 15 8 Address Data Multiplexed Bus Host Address Bus GPIO Tri state bidirectional bus Input pin During the first clock cycle of a Selects HI32 register to access HA 10 3 transaction HAD31 HADO contain the select the HI32 and HA 2 0 select the physical byte address 32 bits particular register of the HI32 to be accessed During subsequent clock cycles HP 15 8 HAD31 HADO contain data HD 7 0 Host Data Bus Tri state bidirectional bus Transfers data between the host processor and the HI32 This bus is released disconnected when the HI32 is not selected by HA 10 0 The HD 23 0 pins are driven by the HI32 during a read access and are inputs to the HI32 during a write access HD 23 16 outputs are high impedance if HRF 0 HD 23 16 inputs are disconnected if HTF 0 2 16 DSP56301 User s Manual A MO
106. input or output through the HI32 DIRH HPAR Input Tri stated Host Parity When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI Output bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Parity signal HDAK Input Host DMA Acknowledge When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCI bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host DMA Acknowledge Schmitt trigger input Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected HPERR Input Tri stated Host Parity Error When the HI32 is programmed to interface with Output a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Parity Error signal HDRQ Output Host DMA Request When HI32 is programmed to interface a with universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host DMA Request output Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected HGNT Input Input Host Bus Grant When the HI82 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Bus Grant signal HAEN Input Host Address Enable When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Address Enable output Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected HREQ Output Tri stated Host Bus Request When the HI
107. is defined I_VEC must be defined for the assembler before the interrupt equate file is included Load the exception vector table entry two word fast interrupt or jump branch to subroutine long interrupt p I_SIOTD 2 Configure interrupt trigger preload transmit data Note a S Ce GB P Enable and prioritize overall peripheral interrupt functionality IPRP SO0L1 0 Write data to all enabled transmit registers TX00 Enable a peripheral interrupt generating function CRB TEO Enable a specific peripheral interrupt CRBO TIE Enable peripheral and associated signals PCRC PC 5 0 Unmask interrupts at the global level SR Il 0 The example material to the right of the steps shows register settings for configuring an ESSIO transmit interrupt using transmitter 0 The order of the steps is optional except that the interrupt trigger configuration must not be completed until the ISR configuration is complete Since step 2c may cause an immediate transmit without generating an interrupt perform the transmit data preload in step 2b before step 2c to ensure that valid data is sent in the first transmission After the first transmit subsequent transmit values are typically loaded into TXnn by the ISR one value per register per interrupt Therefore if N items are to be sent from a particular TXnn the ISR needs to load the transmit register N 1 times Steps 2c and 2d can be performed in step 2a as
108. is in measurement mode the TIO signal is used for the input signal 9 34 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Appendix A Bootstrap Program This appendix lists the bootstrap program for the DSP56301 BOOTSTRAP CODE FOR DSP56301 C Copyright 1996 1999 Motorola Inc Original June 18 1996 Revised Februaury 1999 to add burnin and serial eprom Bootstrap through the Host Interface External EPROM or SCI This is the Bootstrap program contained in the DSP56301 3K Boot ROM K30A only This program can load any program RAM segment from an external EPROM from the Host Interface or from the SCI serial interface E MEMORY EQUATES Grir series TIRITI EQUALDATA equ 1 7 1 if xram and yram are of equal j7 size and addresses 0 otherwise if EQUALDATA start_dram equ 0 7 2k X and Y RAM length_dram equ 0800 j same addresses else start_xram equ 0 7 2k XRAM length_xram equ 0800 start_yram equ 0 7 2k YRAM length_yram equ 0800 endif start_pram equ 0 7 4k PRAM length_pram equ 1000 E ie oe eee ae a de ie Le ed Ae ee ee ee ee ee ei ee ae ee ee eee r EE MC MB MA x000 then the Boot ROM is bypassed and the DSP56301 will start fetching instructions beginning with address C00000 MD 0 or 008000 MD 1 assuming that an external memory of SRAM type is used The accesses will be performed using 31 wait states with no address attributes selected default area
109. levels on Mode pins Figure B 2 Operating Mode Register OMR Reserved Program as 0 B 14 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 2 Interrupt Priority DMAS5 IPL SES D5L0 Enabled IRQD Mode H Trigger IDL1 IDLO Enabled 1 Level 0 0 No 0 Neg Edge 1 Yes 1 0 Yes 1 Yes 0 1 1 DMAG IPL D4L0 Enabled IPARA nae IRQC Mode 0 No Yes Trigger ICL1 ICLO Enabled 1 0 Yes Level 0 0 No 1 Yes Neg Edge 0 1 1 0 1 1 DMAS3 IPL D3L0 Enabled 0 No Yes IRQB Mode 1 0 ves Trigger IBL1 IBLO Enabled 1 Nes Level 0 0 No DMA2 IPL Neg Edge 0 1 Yes DOL Enabl 1 0 Yes D nabled 1 1 Yes 0 No 1 Yes 0 Yes 1 Trigger Enabled DMA1 IPL Level No D1L0 Enabled Neg Edge DMAO IPL DOLO Enabled 0 No Yes 1 0 1 Yes a a ai ame an ara 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ben Priority Register aaa TERS a ame Reset 000000 Figure B 3 Interrupt Priority Register Core IPRC MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 15 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 2 of 2 Interrupt Priority Triple Timer IPL TOL1 TOLO
110. line preamble to follow immediately the transmission of the last character of the message including the stop bit 4 Write the first byte of the second message to STX In this sequence if the first byte of the second message is not transferred to STX prior to the finish of the preamble transmission the transmit data line remains idle until STX is finally written RE Receiver Enable When RE is set the receiver is enabled When RE is cleared the receiver is disabled and data transfer from the receive shift register to the receive data register SRX is inhibited If RE is cleared while a character is being received the reception of the character completes before the receiver is disabled RE does not inhibit RDRF or receive interrupts Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears RE WOMS Wired OR Mode Select When WOMS is set the SCI TXD driver is programmed to function as an open drain output and can be wired together with other TXD signals in an appropriate bus configuration such as a master slave multidrop configuration An external pullup resistor is required on the bus When WOMS is cleared the TXD signal uses an active internal pullup Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears WOMS 8 14 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI Programming Model Table 8 2 SCI Control Register SCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Nam
111. of the HIRH value if enabled and the corresponding data path is ready for a data transfer The HIRQ drive driven or open drain is controlled by the HIRD bit in the DCTR AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 19 Host Interface HI32 Table 2 12 Host Port Pins HI32 Continued Universal Bus Mode SE Pcl Enhanced Universal Bus Mode GPIO HP29 HSTOP HWR HRW disconnected Host Stop Host Write Read Write Sustained tri state bidirectional pin Schmitt trigger input pin Indicates that the current target is When in the double strobe mode of the HI32 requesting the master to stop the HDSM 0 this pin functions as host write current transaction input strobe HWR The host processor initiates a write access by asserting HWR Data input is latched with the rising edge of HWR In the single strobe mode of the HI32 HDSM 1 this pin functions as host read write HRW input It selects the direction of data transfer for each host processor access from the HI32 to the host processor when HRW is asserted and from the host processor to the HI32 when HRW is deasserted The polarity of the HRW pin is controlled by HRWP bit in the DCTR NOTE Simultaneous assertion of HRD and HWR is illegal HP30 HIDSEL HRD HDS disconnected Initialization Device Select Host Read Data Strobe Input pin Schmitt trigger input pin Used as a chip select in lieu of the In the double strobe mode of the HI32 u
112. operation modes The HCTR bits affect the HI32 logic upon the completion of the transaction in which they were written In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 the HAD 31 0 pins are driven with HCTR data during a read access and the pins are written to the HCTR in a write access In PCI mode memory space transactions the HCTR is accessed if the PCI address is HI32_base_address 010 Ina 24 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HCTR HTF 0 or HCTR HRF 0 the HD 23 0 pins are driven with the three least significant HCTR bytes during a read access HD 23 0 are written to the three least significant HCTR bytes in a write access Ina 16 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HCTR HTF 0 or HCTR HRF 0 the HD 15 0 pins are driven with the two least significant bytes of the HCTR in a read access HD 15 0 are written to the two least significant bytes of the HCTR the most significant portion is zero filled during the HCTR write Ina Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 the HCTR is accessed if the HA 10 3 value matches the HI32 base address see Section 6 8 11 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA on page 6 70 and the HA 2 0 value is 4 The HCTR is written in accordance with the byte enables HC 3 0 HBE 3 0 pins Byte lanes that are not enabled are not written and the corresponding bits remain unchanged 6 48 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side
113. part Documentation is available from the following sources see back cover for detailed information A local Motorola distributor A Motorola semiconductor sales office A Motorola Literature Distribution Center m The World Wide Web WWW Table 1 3 DSP56301 Documentation Name Description Order Number DSP56300 Family Detailed description of the DSP56300 family processor core and DSP56300FM AD Manual instruction set DSP56301 User s Detailed functional description of the DSP56301 memory DSP56301UM AD Manual configuration operation and register programming this manual DSP56301 DSP56301 features list and physical electrical timing and package DSP56301 D Technical Data specifications You can download these documents and other related documentation all in pdf format referenced by the product page at http www mot com SPS DSP For printed copies contact the Literature Distribution Center at the number s provided on the back cover of this manual 1 14 DSP56301 User s Manual AA MOTOROLA Chapter 2 Signals Connections The DSP56301 input and output signals are organized into functional groups as shown in Table 2 1 Two different configurations are illustrated in Figure 2 1 and Figure 2 2 The difference between these two configurations is the host port functionality Although the DSP56301 operates from a 3 3 volt supply some of the input pins can tolerate 5 volts A special notice
114. period Mode 5 Measurement capture Mode 6 m Pulse width modulation PWM mode Mode 7 The external signal synchronizes with the internal clock that increments the counter This synchronization process can cause the number of clocks measured for the selected signal value to vary from the actual signal value by plus or minus one counter clock cycle 9 3 2 1 Measurement Input Width Mode 4 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 0 1 0 0 4 Input width Measurement Input Internal In Mode 4 the timer counts the number of clocks that occur between opposite edges of an input signal After the first appropriate transition as determined by the TCSR INV bit occurs on the TIO input signal the counter is loaded with the TLR value If TCSR INV is set the timer starts on the first high to low 1 to 0 signal transition on the TIO signal If the INV bit is cleared the timer starts on the first low to high that is 0 to 1 transition on the TIO signal When the first transition opposite in polarity to the INV bit setting occurs on the TIO signal the counter stops TCSR TCF is set and a compare interrupt is generated if the TCSR TCIE bit is set The value of the counter which measures the width of the TIO pulse is loaded into the TCR which can be read to determine the external signal pulse width If the TCSR TRM bit is set the counter is loaded with the TLR v
115. pull up resistor or directly to Voc Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 13 Host Interface HI32 Table 2 10 Host Interface Continued State During e a Signal Name Type Reset Signal Description HAD 31 16 Input Output Tri stated Host Address Data 16 31 When the HI82 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected these signals are lines 16 31 of the bidirectional multiplexed Address Data bus HD 23 8 Input Output Host Data 8 23 When the HI82 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected these signals are lines 8 23 of the bidirectional Data bus Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR these signals are internally disconnected HRST Input Tri stated Hardware Reset When the HI82 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Hardware Reset input HRST Input Hardware Reset When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is the Hardware Reset Schmitt trigger input Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected HINTA Output open Tri stated Host Interrupt A When the H
116. register for I O expansion and stream mode channel interfaces A gated AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 1 Operating Modes transmit and receive clock compatible with the Intel 8051 serial interface mode 0 synchronizes data Asynchronous modes are compatible with most UART type serial devices Standard RS 232 communication links are supported by these modes Multidrop Asynchronous mode is compatible with the MC68681 DUART the M68HC11 SCI interface and the Intel 8051 serial interface 8 1 1 Synchronous Mode Synchronous mode SCR WD2 0 000 Shift Register mode handles serial to parallel and parallel to serial conversions In Synchronous mode the clock is always common to the transmit and receive shift registers As a controller synchronous master the DSP puts out a clock on the SCLK pin To select master mode choose the internal transmit and receive clocks set TCM and RCM 0 As a peripheral synchronous slave the DSP accepts an input clock from the SCLK pin To select the slave mode choose the external transmit and receive clocks TCM and RCM 1 Since there is no frame signal if a clock is missed because of noise or any other reason the receiver loses synchronization with the data without any error signal being generated You can detect an error of this type with an error detecting protocol or with external circuitry such as a watchdog timer The simplest way to recover synchronization is to reset the SCI 8 1
117. reset clears PM 31 16 23 16 GB 10 3 Universal Bus Mode Base Address Defines the HI32 base address when it is mapped into the Universal Bus mode space The remaining CBMA bits are ignored in the Universal Bus modes The HI32 slave occupies eight locations in the Universal Bus mode space The HI32 is selected by the eight most significant address pins HA 10 3 The three least significant address pins HA 2 0 select the HI32 registers on the host side The personal hardware reset clears GB 10 3 6 70 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model Table 6 29 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 15 4 PM 15 4 0 Memory Base Address Low Hardwired to zeros 3 PF 0 Hardwired Pre Fetch Hardwired to zero Indicates whether the data is pre fetchable PF is hardwired to zero and is unaffected by any type of reset 2 1 MS 1 0 0 Hardwired Memory Space Hardwired to zeros Specifies that the CBMA register is 32 bits wide and mapping can be done anywhere in the 32 bit memory space MS1 and MSO are hardwired to zero and are unaffected by any type of reset 0 MSI 0 Hardwired Memory Space Indicator Hardwired to zero Specifies that the CBMA register maps the HI32 into the PCI memory space MSI is hardwired to zero and is unaffected by any type of reset 6
118. the ESSI requests an SSI transmit data with exception interrupt from the interrupt controller 17 RE Receive Enable Enables disables the receive portion of the ESSI When RE is cleared the receiver is disabled data transfer into RX is inhibited If data is being received while this bit is cleared the remainder of the word is shifted in and transferred to the ESSI receive data register RE must be set in both Normal and On Demand modes for the ESSI to receive data In Network mode clearing RE and setting it again disables the receiver after reception of the current data word The receiver remains disabled until the beginning of the next data frame Note The setting of the RE bit does not affect the generation of a frame sync 16 TEO Transmit 0 Enable Enables the transfer of data from TXO to Transmit Shift Register 0 TEO is functional when the ESSI is in either synchronous or Asynchronous mode When TEO is set and a frame sync is detected the transmitter 0 is enabled for that frame When TEO is cleared transmitter 0 is disabled after the transmission of data currently in the ESSI transmit shift register The STD output is tri stated and any data present in TXO is not transmitted In other words data can be written to TXO with TEO cleared the TDE bit is cleared but data is not transferred to the transmit shift register 0 The transmit enable sequence in On Demand mode can be the same as in Normal mode or T
119. the OMR When this bit is set BG and BB are synchronized internally This eliminates the respective setup and hold time requirements but adds a required delay between the deassertion of an initial BG input and the assertion of a subsequent BG input Note For operations that do not use the BG bus control function pull this pin low Input Output Input Bus Busy Asserted and deasserted synchronous to CLKOUT BB indicates that the bus is active Only after BB is deasserted can the pending bus master become the bus master and then assert the signal again The bus master can keep BB asserted after ceasing bus activity regardless of whether BR is asserted or deasserted Such bus parking allows the current bus master to reuse the bus without rearbitration until another device requires the bus BB is deasserted by an active pull up method that is BB is driven high and then released and held high by an external pull up resistor The default operation of this bit requires a setup and hold time as specified in the DSP56301 Technical Data sheet An alternate mode can be invoked set the ABE bit Bit 13 in the OMR When this bit is set BG and BB are synchronized internally See BG for additional information Note BB requires an external pull up resistor Output Never tri stated deasserted Bus Lock Asserted at the start of an external indivisible Read Modify Write RMW bus cycle and deasserted at the end of the
120. the SCI is the slave device as noted above The clock is gated and limited to a maximum frequency equal to one eighth of the DSP core operating frequency that is 12 5 MHz for a DSP core frequency of 100 MHz For asynchronous operation the SCI can use the internal and external clocks in any combination as the source clocks for the TX clock and RX clock If an external clock is used for the SCLK input it must be sixteen times the desired bit rate designated as the 16 x clock as indicated in Figure 8 6 When the internal clock is used to supply a clock to an external device the clock can use the actual bit rate designated as the 1 X clock or the 16 x clock rate as determined by the COD bit The output clock is continuous Select 8 or 9 bit Words SN Idle Line 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX TX Data SSFTD 0 Start Stop Start x1 Clock SCKP 0 Figure 8 6 16 x Serial Clock When SCKP is cleared the transmitted data on the TXD signal changes on the negative edge of the serial clock and is stable on the positive edge When SCKP is set the data changes on the positive edge and is stable on the negative edge The received data on the RXD signal is sampled on the positive edge if SCKP 0 or on the negative edge if SCKP 1 of the serial clock AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 21 SCI Programming Model 8 6 4 SCI Data Registers The SCI data registers are divided into two groups receive and transmit as shown in
121. the SRX are placed in the lower byte of the data bus and the remaining bits on 8 22 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI Programming Model the data bus are read as zeros Similarly when SRXM is read the contents of SRX are placed into the middle byte of the bus and when SRXH is read the contents of SRX are placed into the high byte with the remaining bits are read as Os This way of mapping SRX efficiently packs three bytes into one 24 bit word by ORing three data bytes read from the three addresses The SCR WDSO WDS1 and WDS2 control bits define the length and format of the serial word The SCR receive clock mode RCM defines the clock source In Synchronous mode the start bit the eight data bits the address data indicator bit or the parity bit and the stop bit are received respectively Data bits are sent LSB first if SSFTD is cleared and MSB first if SSFTD is set In Synchronous mode a gated clock provides synchronization In either Synchronous or Asynchronous mode when a complete word is clocked in the contents of the shift register can be transferred to the SRX and the flags RDRF FE PE and OR are changed appropriately Because the operation of the receive shift register is transparent to the DSP the contents of this register are not directly accessible to the programmer 8 6 4 2 SCI Transmit Register STX The transmit data register is a one byte wide register mapped into four addresses as STXL STXM STXH and S
122. the data transfer is calculated as follows BL 5 0 RDC 5 0 RDCQ Note If any of the DPSR TAB TRTY MAB status bits are set the transaction can be initiated again with the same address and burst length by writing the DPAR with its previous value If the master counter is disabled DPCR MACE is cleared the RDC 5 0 and RDCQ bits are not valid 6 38 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 15 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 14 MDT 0 Master Data Transferred Indicates the status of the latest completed PCI transaction to which the HI32 was a PCI master MDT is set at the end of a transaction MARQ 1 if the HI32 successfully transferred the master data as defined by the DPMC BL bits Otherwise MDT is cleared If MARQ is set it is sufficient to check MDT to determine whether the HI32 transferred all master data to the designated target If MARQ is set and MDT is cleared you can find out why the transaction terminated before all the data transferred by checking the TO TRTY TDIS TAB and MAB status bits in the DSPR Note If the Master Access Counter is disabled DPCR MACE 0 MDT is not valid 13 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 12 HDTC PCI Host Data Transfer Complete When the receive buffer lock enable RBLE bit in the DSP PCI Control Reg
123. this input becomes a level sensitive or negative edge triggered maskable interrupt request input during normal instruction processing If IRQD is asserted synchronous to CLKOUT multiple processors can be resynchronized using the WAIT instruction and asserting IRQD to exit the wait state NMI Input Input Nonmaskable Interrupt After RESET deassertion and during normal instruction Schmitt processing the negative edge triggered NMI request is internally synchronized to trigger CLKOUT AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 9 Host Interface HI32 2 7 Host Interface HI32 The Host Interface HI32 provides a fast parallel data port up to 32 bits wide that can connect directly to the host bus The HI32 supports a variety of standard buses and provides glueless connection with the PCI bus standard and with a number of industry standard microcomputers microprocessors DSPs and DMA hardware The functions of the signals associated with the HI32 vary according to the programmed configuration of the interface as determined by the 24 bit DSP Control Register DCTR Refer to Chapter 6 Host Interface HI32 for detailed descriptions of this and other HI32 configuration registers Note All HI32 inputs are 5 V tolerant Table 2 10 Host Interface Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description HAD 0 7 HA 3 10 PB 0 7 Input Output Input Input or Output Tri stated Host Address Data 0 7 Whe
124. three least significant HTXR bytes and is sent to DRXR to be read by the DSP56300 core E f HCTR HTF 1 The 16 bit data from HD 15 0 data pins transfers to the three least significant HTXR bytes as right aligned and zero extended and sent to DRXR to be read by the DSP56300 core E f HCTR HTF 2 The 16 bit data from HD 15 0 data pins transfers to the three least significant HTXR bytes as right aligned and sign extended and sent to DRXR to be read by the DSP56300 core E f HCTR HTF 3 The 16 bit data from HD 15 0 data pins transfers to the three least significant bytes of the HTXR as left aligned The least significant byte is zero filled and sent to DRXR to be read by the DSP56300 core To assure proper operation BR HTF 1 0 can be changed if the host to DSP data path is empty BR Switching between 32 bit data modes and non 32 bit data modes can occur only in the personal software reset state DCTR HM 0 and HACT 0 If the HTF 1 0 value is not equal to the value of the FC 1 0 bits in the DPMC PCI transactions that start in the non data address space the PCI address is less than HI32_base_address 007 should not extend into the data address space AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 51 Host Side Programming Model Table 6 22 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Mode Description 9 8 cont HTF 1
125. timing purposes TSR is a write only register that behaves as an alternative transmit data register except that rather than transmitting data the transmit data signals of all the enabled transmitters are in the high impedance state for the current time slot 7 5 9 Transmit Slot Mask Registers TSMA TSMB Both transmit slot mask registers are read write registers When the TSMA or TSMB is read to the internal data bus the register contents occupy the two low order bytes of the data bus and the high order byte is filled by 0 In Network mode the transmitter s use these registers to determine which action to take in the current transmission slot Depending on the bit settings the transmitter s either tri state the transmitter s data signal s or transmit a data word and generate a transmitter empty condition 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 TS15 TS14 TS13 TS12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TS11 TS10 TS9 TS8 TS7 TS6 TS5 TS4 TS3 TS2 TS1 TSO Reserved bit read as 0 write to O 0 for future compatibility ESSIO X FFFFB4 ESSI1 X FFFFA4 Figure 7 14 ESSI Transmit Slot Mask Register A TSMA AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 33 ESSI Programming Model 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 TS31 TS30 TS29 TS28 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TS27 TS26 TS25 TS24 TS23 TS22 TS21 TS20 TS19 TS18 TS17 TS16
126. to DSP communication The data transfer format converter HDTFC operates according to the specified HTF 1 0 see Table Table 6 4 Transmit Data Transfer Format on page 6 9 The personal hardware reset clears HTF 1 O PCI host t DSP data transfer formats DCTR HM 1 E f HCTR HTF 0 32 bit data mode All four PCI data bytes from HAD 31 0 pins are written to the 32 bit HTXR The two least significant bytes are transferred to the two least significant bytes of the DRXR FIFO Then the two most significant bytes are transferred to the two least significant bytes of the DRXR FIFO Thus when the DSP56300 core reads two words from the DRXR the two least significant bytes of the first word read contain the two least significant bytes of the 32 bit word written to the HTXR the two least significant bytes of the second word read contain the two most significant bytes of the 32 bit word E f HCTR HTF 1 or 2 The three least significant PCI data bytes from the HAD 23 0 pins transfer to the three least significant HTXR bytes and are sent to DRXR to be read by the DSP56300 core E f HCTR HTF 3 The three most significant PCI data bytes from the HAD 31 8 pins transfer to the three least significant HTXR bytes and are sent to the DRXR to be read by the DSP56300 core Universal Bus mode host to DSP data transfer formats DCTR HM 2 or 3 E f HCTR HTF 0 The 24 bit data from HD 23 0 data pins transfers to the
127. transaction address The two least significant bytes reside in the DPAR see Section 6 7 4 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR on page 6 33 In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 when the DSP56300 core writes to the DPAR the PCI ownership is requested When the request is granted the HI32 initiates a PCI transaction The full 32 bit address AR 31 16 from the DPMC and AR 15 0 from the DPAR is driven to the HAD 31 0 pins during the PCI address phase 6 32 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model 6 7 4 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 BE3 BE2 BEI BEO C3 C2 C1 Co 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 ARQ AR8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 ARI ARO Figure 6 8 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR A 24 bit read write register by which the DSP56300 core generates the two least significant bytes of the 32 bit PCI transaction address the PCI bus command and the PCI bus byte enables The host processor cannot access DPAR The two most significant bytes of the PCI transaction address are located in the DSP PCI Master Control register DPMC see Section 6 7 3 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC on page 6 30 When the DSP56300 core writes to DPAR in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 DPSR MARQ is cleared When the HI32 can complete the first data phase ownership of the PCI bus is requested When the request is granted
128. transfer rate 24 bit DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DSP Side Operating Modes pci_cyc pci_w s x multfactor tot_cyc a 0 x 2 2 multfactor 2 because f_cor 66 MHz and f_pci 33 MHz Since 4 2 3 HI32 gt 2 core this dominates so the answer is 66 2 33 Mwords 2 DMA transfer internal memory DRXR gt DMA gt internal X 1 src 1 dest 0 w s 2 DMA As fast as HI32 gt 66 2 33 Mwords sec Max HI32 Rate 3 dma transfer external memory core cycles DMA 1 DMA source access 1 external wait state 1 DMA destination access 3 total DRXR gt DMA gt external X 1 src 1 dest 1 w s 3 DMA slower than HI32 gt 66 3 22 Mwords sec DMA const rained 6 5 3 Universal DCTR HM 2 and Enhanced Universal DCTR HM 3 Bus Modes In both Universal bus mode and Enhanced Universal Bus mode the following are true Glueless connection to various external buses for example ISA EISA DSP56300 core based DSP Port A bus m 24 bit 16 bit with data alignment and 8 bit buses ISA EISA bus DMA type accesses m HP19 HP31 and HP32 are unused and must be forced or pulled up to Vcc When the host bus is less than 24 bits wide the data pins that are not used for transferring data must be forced or pulled up or down to Vcc or to GND respectively For example for a 16 bit bus ISA bus and so on HP 48 41 must be force
129. transmitters or when you write to TSR to clear the pending interrupt ESSI transmit last slot interrupt Occurs when the ESSI is in Network mode at the start of the last slot of the frame This exception occurs regardless of the transmit mask register setting The transmit last slot interrupt can signal that the transmit mask slot register can be reset the DMA channels can be reconfigured and data memory pointers can be reassigned Using the Transmit Last Slot interrupt guarantees that the previous frame is serviced with the previous frame settings and the new frame is serviced with the new frame settings without synchronization problems The maximum transmit last slot interrupt service time should not exceed N 1 ESSI bits service time where N is the number of bits in a slot ESSI transmit data Occurs when the transmit interrupt is enabled at least one of the enabled transmit data registers is empty and no transmitter error conditions exist Write to all the enabled TX registers or to the TSR to clear this interrupt This error free interrupt uses a fast interrupt service routine for minimum overhead if no more than two transmitters are used DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operation To configure an ESSI exception perform the following steps 1 Configure the interrupt service routine ISR a b Load vector base address register VBA b23 8 Define I_VEC to be equal to the VBA value if that is nonzero If it
130. write bus cycle BL remains asserted between the read and write bus cycles of the RMW bus sequence BL can be used to resource lock an external multi port memory for secure semaphore updates The only instructions that automatically assert BL are BSET BCLR or BCHG which accesses external memory BL can also be asserted by setting the BLH bit in the BCR register CAS Output Tri stated Column Address Strobe When the DSP is the bus master DRAM uses CAS to strobe the column address Otherwise if the bus mastership enable BME bit in the DRAM control register is cleared the signal is tri stated BCLK Output Tri stated Bus Clock When the DSP is the bus master BCLK is active as a sampling signal when the program address tracing mode is enabled that is the ATE bit in the OMR is set When BCLK is active and synchronized to CLKOUT by the internal PLL BCLK precedes CLKOUT by one fourth of a clock cycle The BCLK rising edge can be used to sample the internal program memory access on the A 0 23 address lines BCLK Output Tri stated Bus Clock Not When the DSP is the bus master BCLK is the inverse of the BCLK signal Otherwise the signal is tri stated 2 8 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Interrupt and Mode Control 2 6 Interrupt and Mode Control The interrupt and mode control signals select the chip s operating mode as it comes out of hardware reset After RESET is
131. 0 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 9 15 9 16 9 17 9 18 9 19 9 20 9 21 9 22 9 23 BI B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR cscicdsassssssaacssesecesaseseacatasstincaussecaesdesedamecapants 8 19 SCL Baud Rate Generatori ssion esitin aeos iea aeta i eenig 8 20 EP EEIE COC E A A T 8 21 SCI Programming Model Data Register 8 22 Port E Control Register PCRE X SERRH9F icisacstteiecassen nana evsidantcesiets ate 8 24 Port E Direction Register PRRE X SPEEEOE 8 25 Port Data Registers PDRE X FFFFOD csccssssesscsssescessorcesseneessessenseeneecs 8 25 Triple Timer Module Block Diagram x eech Re 9 2 Timer Module Block Diasramn ege Ae caccassahesuastiacaiwanties tate gen edd eet See 9 3 Eimer ModesGi RM eege eer 9 7 Timer Mode CURM 0 r kite ee ee a ee ale ek devine 9 7 Pulse Mode TRM 1 EE EE 9 8 Puls Mode CERS ties teeth EE 9 9 Toggle Mode TRM S I iosian eege tee EENS eed ecient 9 10 WTogele Mode TRM 0 sacs ears ee ee 9 11 Event Counter Mode TRM CT 9 12 Event Counter Mode TRM 0 9 13 Pulse Width Measurement Mode TRM CT 9 15 Pulse Width Measurement Mode TRM 0 9 15 Period Measurement Mode TRM CT 9 16 Period Measurement Mode TRM 0 9 17 Capture Measurement Mode TRM U N 9 18 Pulse Width Modulation Toggle Mode TRM cl 9 20 Pulse Width Modulation Toggle Mode TRM U N 9 21 Watchdog Pulse Mode iwsc issscssadiesascevesecosstessev
132. 0 HI32 is in personal reset PS 0 0 23 5 1 HI82 is active DPSR 0 MWS PCI Master Wait 0 HI32 is asserting HIRDY 0 0 States 1 HI32 is deasserting HIRDY MTRQ IPCI Master Transmit 1 master transmit FIFO is not cleared if the 10 SA 1 Data Request full DTXM is filled by 0 master transmit FIFO is full Core writes MRRQ PCI Master D master receive FIFO is empty cleared if the 0 a 0 Receive Data Request 1 master receive FIFO is not DRXR is empty emptied by core 2 reads or the data to be read from the DRXR is slave data MARQ IPCI Master Address 1 Core can initiate new 0 0 0 if Request transaction 0 Core cannot initiate new transaction 6 76 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 Programming Model Quick Reference HI32 Registers Quick Reference Bit Reset Type Reg Comments Num Mnemonic Name Val Function HS PH PS DPSR APER PCI Address Parity 0 HI32 target has not detected cleared by 0 cont 5 Error an address parity error writing 1 1 HI32 target has detected an address parity error DPER PC Data Parity Error 0 ja data parity error has not cleared by 0 6 occurred writing 1 1 Ja data parity error has occurred MAB PCI Master Abort 0 ja master abort has not cleared by 0 7 occurred writing 1 1 a master abort has occurred TAB PCI Target Abort 0 Jatarget abort has not cleared by 0 S 8 occurred writing 1
133. 1 Figure 4 11 JTAG Identification ID Register Configuration 4 10 JTAG Boundary Scan Register BSR The BSR in the DSP56301 JTAG implementation contains bits for all device signals clock pins and their associated control signals All DSP56301 bidirectional pins have a corresponding register bit in the BSR for pin data and are controlled by an associated control bit in the BSR For details on the BSR consult the DSP56300 Family Manual For the latest description of the BSR contents by available package type in boundary scan description language BSDL call your local Motorola Semiconductor Sales Office or authorized distributor or refer to the following Motorola website http www mot com SPS DSP tools other htm1 56303 AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 35 JTAG Boundary Scan Register BSR 4 36 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Chapter 5 Programming the Peripherals When the DSP56301 peripherals HI32 ESSI SCI and Timers are programmed in a given application a number of possible modes and options are available for use Chapters 6 9 describe in detail the possible modes and configurations for peripheral registers and ports This chapter presents general guidelines for initializing the peripherals These guidelines include a description of how the control registers are mapped in the DSP56301 data transfer methods that are available when the various peripherals are used and information on General Purpose Input Output
134. 1 MFO Multiplication Factor MF 000 001 002 FFF FFF ee EE po 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 3 2 Pree he Epa pre e fP MF10 MF9 MF8 MF7 MF6 MF5 MF4 MF3 MF2 MF1 MFO PLL Control Register PCTL X FFFFFD Read Write Reset 000000 Figure B 5 Phase Locked Loop Control Register PCTL MOTOROLA Programming Reference Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 3 Bus Interface Unit NOTE All BCR bits are read write control bits Bus Request Hold Bit 23 Default Area Wait Control Bits 20 16 0 BR pin is asserted only for attempted Area 3 Wait Gontral Bias or pending access Area 2 Wait Control Bits 12 10 1 BR pin is always asserted Area 1 Wait Control Bits 9 5 Area 0 Wait Control Bits 4 0 Bus Lock Hold Bit 22 These read write control bits define the number of wait states inserted 0 BL pin is asserted only for attempted read into each external SRAM access to write modify external access the designated area The value of 1 BL pin is always asserted E should not be programmed Bits Bit Name of Wait States Bus State Bit 21 20 16 BDFW 4 0 0 31 0 DSP is not bus master 15 13 BA3W 2 0 0 7 1 DSP is bus master 12 10 BA2W 2 0 0 7 9 5 BA1W 4 0 0 31 4 0 BAOW 4 0 0 31 Y y BDFWI4 0 BAM BAI
135. 1 divide by 1 23 22 31 20 19 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Hanh ati ojo aid 8 ESSI Control Register A CRAx ESSIO X FFFFB5 Read Write Reset 000000 ESSI1 X FFFFA5 Read Write Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 20 ESSI Control Register A CRA B 32 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Application Receive Exception Interrupt Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Transmit Exception Interrupt Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Receive Last Slot Interrupt Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Transmit Last Slot Interrupt Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Receive Interrupt Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Transmit Interrupt Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Receiver Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Transmit 0 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Transmit 1 Enable SYN 1 only 0 Disable 1 Enable Transmit 2 Enable SYN 1 only 0 Disable 1 Enable Mode Select 0 Normal 1 Network Sync Async Control Tx amp Rx transfer together or not 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous Programming Sheets Date Programmer Sheet 2 of 3 Clock Polarity clk edge data amp Frame Sync clocked out in 0 out on rising in on falling 1 in on rising out on falling Frame Sync Polarity 0 high level positive 1 low level negative Frame Sync Relative Timing WL Frame Sync only 0 with first data bit 1 1 clock cycle earlier than first data bit Frame Sync Length TX RX Word Word Bit Wor
136. 1 0 0 1 1 FO U TD2 FS XC U RD 1 0 1 0 0 TD1 F1 TOD U FS XC U U 1 0 1 0 1 TD1 F1 TOD U FS XC U RD 1 0 1 1 0 TD1 TD2 FS XC U U 1 0 1 1 1 TD1 TD2 FS XC U RD 1 1 0 0 0 FO U F1 TOD U FS XC TDO U 1 1 0 0 1 FO U F1 TOD U FS XC TDO RD 1 1 0 1 0 FO U TD2 FS XC TDO U 1 1 0 1 1 FO U TD2 FS XC TDO RD 1 1 1 0 0 TD1 F1 TOD U FS XC TDO U 1 1 1 0 1 TD1 F1 TOD U FS XC TDO RD 1 1 1 1 0 TD1 TD2 FS XC TDO U 1 1 1 1 1 TD1 TD2 FS XC TDO RD TXC Transmitter clock RXC Receiver clock XC Transmitter receiver clock synchronous operation FST Transmitter frame sync FSR Receiver frame sync FS Transmitter receiver frame sync synchronous operation TDO Transmit data signal 0 TD1 Transmit data signal 1 TD2 Transmit data signal 2 TOD Transmitter 0 drive enable if SSC1 1 amp SCD1 1 RD Receive data FO Flago F1 Flag1ifSSC1 0 U Unused can be used as GPIO signal X Indeterminate When configured as an output SC1 functions as a serial Output Flag as the transmitter 0 drive enabled signal or as the receive frame sync signal output If SC1 is used as serial Output Flag 1 its value is determined by the value of the serial Output Flag 1 OF1 bit in the CRB When configured as an input this signal can receive frame sync signals from an external source or it acts as a serial input flag As a serial input flag SC1controls status bit IF1 in the SSISR When SC1 is configured as a transmit data signal it is always an o
137. 1 ignored 1010 Configuration Read 1011 Configuration Write 1100 Memory Read 1101 ignored 1110 Memory Read 1111 Memory Write Note All internal address decoding is ignored and DEVSEL is not asserted m The HI32 does not reach deadlock due to illegal PCI events Illegal PCI events bring 6 46 the HI32 master and target state machines to the idle state DSP56301 User s Manual MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model Table 6 19 Host Side Registers PCI Memory Address Space Base Address 0000 Base Address 000C Reserved 4 Dwords Base Address 0010 HI32 Control Register HCTR Base Address 0014 HI32 Status Register HSTR Base Address 0018 Host Command Vector Register HCVR Base Address 001C Host Transmit Slave Receive Data Register HTXR HRXS 16377 Dwords Base Address FFFC Note Addresses are shown in bytes Table 6 20 Host Side Registers PCI Configuration Address Space 00 CDID CVID Device ID CDID Vendor ID CVID 04 CSTR CCMR Status CSTR Command CCMR 08 CCCR CRID Class Code CCCR Revision ID CRID 0C CHTY CLAT Header Type Latency Timer Cache Line CCLS CHTY CLAT 10 CBMA Memory Space Base Address CBMA 14 Reserved 6 Dwords 28 2C CSID Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID CSID 30 Reserved 3 Dwords 38
138. 1 is the area defined by AAR1 Note Do not program the value of these bits as zero since SRAM memory access requires at least one wait state When four through seven wait states are selected one additional wait state is inserted at the end of the access When selecting eight or more wait states two additional wait states are inserted at the end of the access These trailing wait states increase the data hold time and the memory release time and do not increase the memory access time AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 23 Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers Table 4 9 Bus Control Register BCR Bit Definitions Continued Sal Bit Name Reset Value Description Number 4 0 BAOW 4 0 11111 Bus Area 0 Wait State Control 31 wait Defines the number of wait states one through 31 inserted in each external states SRAM access to Area 0 DRAM accesses are not affected by these bits Area 0 is the area defined by AARO Note Do not program the value of these bits as zero since SRAM memory access requires at least one wait state When selecting four through seven wait states one additional wait state is inserted at the end of the access When selecting eight or more wait states two additional wait states are inserted at the end of the access These trailing wait states increase the data hold time and the memory release time and do not increase the memory access time 4 6 2 DRAM Control Register DCR
139. 11 Each instruction has 3 bytes movem p r2 a2 Get the 8 LSB from ext P mem asr 8 a a Shift 8 bit data into Al _LOOP11 Go get another byte movem al p r0 Store 24 bit result in P mem nop movem cannot be at LA _LOOP10 and go get another 24 bit word bra lt FINISH Boot from EPROM done i TERMINATE enddo End the loop before exit FINISH This is the exit handler that returns execution to normal expanded mode and jumps to the RESET vector andi 0 ccr Clear CCR as if RESET to 0 jmp r1 Then go to starting Prog addr End of bootstrap code Number of program words 191 BURN 7 get PATTERN pointer clr p PATTERNS r6 b is the error accumulator move lt NUM_PATTERNS 1 m6 program runs forever in 77 cyclic form 7 configure SCKO as gpio output PRRC register is cleared at reset movep b X M_PDRC Clear GPIO data register bset SCKO x M_PRRC Define SCKO as output GPIO pin 7 SCKO toggles means test pass do 9 burnl ri 7 test RAM 7 each pass checks 1 pattern vr move p r6 x1 7 pattern for x memory move p r6 x0 7 pattern for y memory move p r6 yO 7 pattern for p memory 7 write pattern to all memory locations LE EQUALDATA 7 x y ram symmetrical 7 write x and y memory clr a start_dram r0 z start of x y ram move gt Length_dram n0 7 length of x y ram A 12 DSP56301 User s Manual _
140. 15 COM byte 4 12 Core DMA Priority CDP 4 14 EOM byte 4 12 External Bus Disable EBD 4 15 Memory Switch Mode MS 4 14 programming sheet B 14 SCS byte 4 12 Stack Extension Enable SEN 4 12 Stack Extension Overflow Flag EOV 4 13 Stack Extension Underflow Flag EUN 4 13 Stack Extension Wrap Flag WRP 4 12 Stack Extension XY Select XYS 4 13 Stop Delay Mode SD 4 15 TA Synchronize Select TAS 4 14 operating modes 4 2 HI32 6 12 Overflow V bit 4 11 Overrun Error Flag OR bit 8 18 P Parity Error PE bit 8 17 Parity Error Interrupt Enable PEIE 6 29 Parity Error Response PERR bit 6 66 PCI Address Parity Error APER bit 6 40 PCI bus command 6 45 PCI Bus Command C 3 0 bits 6 34 PCI Bus Master Enable BM bit 6 66 PCI Byte Enables BE 3 0 bits 6 33 PCI Data Burst Length BL 5 0 bits 6 32 PCI Data Parity Error DPER 6 40 PCI Device Base Class BC 7 0 6 67 PCI Device Program Interface P 17 10 6 67 PCI Device Sub Class SC 7 0 bits 6 67 PCI Host Data Transfer Complete HDTC bit 6 39 PCI host to DSP data transfers 6 45 PCI idle state 6 13 PCI master active 6 13 PCI Master Abort MAB 6 40 PCI Master Address Request MARQ bit 6 40 PCI Master Receive Data Request MRRQ bit 6 41 PCI Master Transmit Data Request MTRQ 6 41 PCI Master Wait States MWS bit 6 41 PCI Memory Address Space 6 47 PCI Memory Space Enable MSE 6 66 PCI Mode 6 63 PCI mode 6 13 6 45 6 63 6 64 memory space transactions 6 57
141. 2 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 TCM RCM SCP COD CD11 CD10 CD9 CD8 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CD7 CD6 CD5 CD4 CD3 CD CD1 CDO Reserved Read as 0 Write to 0 for future compatibility Figure 8 4 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR Table 8 5 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 16 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 15 TCM 0 Transmit Clock Source Selects whether an internal or external clock is used for the transmitter If TCM is cleared the internal clock is used If TCM is set the external clock from the SCLK signal is used RCM Receive Clock Mode Source Selects whether an internal or external clock is used for the receiver If RCM is cleared the internal clock is used If RCM is set the external clock from the SCLK signal is used TCM RCM TX Clock RX Clock SCLK Mode 0 0 Internal Internal Output Synchronous asynchronous 0 1 Internal External Input Asynchronous only 1 0 External Internal Input Asynchronous only 1 1 External External Input Synchronous asynchronous SCP Clock Prescaler Selects a divide by 1 SCP is cleared or divide by 8 SCP is set prescaler for the clock divider The output of the prescaler is further divided by 2 to form the SCI clock COD
142. 2 Asynchronous Mode Asynchronous data uses a data format with embedded word sync which allows an unsynchronized data clock to be synchronized with the word if the clock rate and number of bits per word is known Thus the clock can be generated by the receiver rather than requiring a separate clock signal The transmitter and receiver both use an internal clock that is 16 times the data rate to allow the SCI to synchronize the data The data format requires that each data byte have an additional start bit and stop bit Also two of the word formats have a parity bit The Multidrop mode used when SCIs are on a common bus has an additional data type bit The SCI can operate in full duplex or half duplex modes since the transmitter and receiver are independent 8 1 3 Multidrop Mode Multidrop is a special case of asynchronous data transfer The key difference is that a protocol allows networking transmitters and receivers on a single data transmission line Inter processor messages in a multidrop network typically begin with a destination address All receivers check for an address match at the start of each message Receivers with no address match can ignore the remainder of the message and use a wakeup mode to enable the receiver at the start of the next message Receivers with an address match can receive the 8 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA IO Signals message and optionally transmit an acknowledgment to the sender The particular message
143. 3 4 Pr t m Bo tstrap ROM eegerieeeeteeereeeneeeeeeneee eegene 3 3 3 2 KENE ee eiiiai aises aek iiis nsii asiani 3 3 3 2 1 euer 3 3 3 2 2 Memory Switch Modes X Data Memory AANEREN 3 3 3 2 3 Internal I O Space X Data Alger 3 4 33 Y Dat Memory EE 3 4 Seoul Infernal Y Data Mit y cssices ccs ccaectstdectacastecwteciac beeaesilecuasidegtee s Uvstecigieentalevenieberesndldedeeaaeete 3 4 3 3 2 Memory Switch Modes Y Data Memory cccssccescsceceesseevsereroiecd pose tendeccvsbecaarsevaeneeccederessneceus 3 4 3 3 3 External I O Space Y Data Memory 2 siiecities c2etsciaducsesteceacelederdeetaucesidcidecedabsdbsceleiausdensaserece 3 5 3 4 Dynamic Memory Configuration Switching seesseeeseseeseesrseresresserssrrerstesterreesersesrresresee 3 5 3 5 Sixteen Bit Compatibility Mode Configuration eesesesseeeseseeseesessreeresressesrresressrseresresseseees 3 6 3 6 Internal Memory Configuration Summary ic ccteceecccsscecccesscezcccsaden sess sesteavndesedesteeesevedensuersads 3 6 3 7 Klee EE 3 7 Chapter 4 Core Configuration 4 1 H Modes ee Ee 4 2 AD Bootstrap PU A cca tetera dts eee Ee eEg 4 5 4 3 Central Processor Unit CPU Registers va ccasssvocicsatssesnassovesissbtineanieandaven sstasasvsnndmesasntesusviastabniesss 4 6 ASA Status Register E 4 6 4 3 2 Operating Mode Register OMR sesseseessesessrresessessersesressttstrsrsstestsrrestesstserestesseseresreesetee 4 12 4 4 Configuring Interrupts eseseseseeeeseeesseesseeseesssetss
144. 32 is programmed to interface a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Bus Request signal HTA Output Host Transfer Acknowledge When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Data Bus Enable output Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected 2 12 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 Table 2 10 Host Interface Continued Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description HSERR HIRQ Output open drain Output open drain Tri stated Host System Error When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host System Error signal Host Interrupt Request When HI82 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Interrupt Request output Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected HSTOP HWR HRW Input Output Input Tri stated Host Stop When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Stop signal Host Write Host Read Write When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Write Host Read Write S
145. 4 6 Timer Compare Register TCPR essesseesessesersrreresressersresrerstestrseresreststrssressessrestesseseresres 9 34 94 7 Timer Count Register TOR E 9 34 Chapter A Bootstrap Program Chapter B Programming Reference PE Internal V O Mem ry luesen B 3 PR I terr pt Sources and EE eet B 9 B3 Programming Sheets ssrin aaa a a e Ee EEA eer B 13 Index x DSP56303 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Figures 1 1 2 1 Sep 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 SCH 3 8 4 1 4 2 4 4 4 3 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 1 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 Ree Block Dyer an sca saa ease eet le Seed Re ese eae Sendak dak edie 1 11 Signals Identified by Functional Group ccceesccecsseeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeenaeeeeaeees 2 2 Host Interface Port B Detail Signal Duaeram ee eeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeneeeneeees 2 3 Default Settings AA A erica cntaeepectaaaa ae ree eaeseuiecsms sinew 3 7 16 Bit Space With Default RAM 0 D 1 cssssssassnssgutnvcessnsedynadsarusewsvncessunneavensengeeves 3 8 Switched Program RAM 0 1 0 ssssstessseansnseseanseasaveacdaabeandosacdeacsesebeaseniavenudaaeeresees 3 9 16 Bit Space With Switched Program RAM 0 1 1 ecceeeeeeesseeeesteceesteeeeneeeeees 3 10 Instruction Cache Enabled 1 00 3 11 16 Bit Space With Instruction Cache Enabled 1 OI 3 12 Switched Program RAM and Instruction Cache Enabled 1 1 0 0 ee 3 13 16 Bit Space Switched Program RAM Instruction
146. 56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module Programming Model Table 9 4 Inverter INV Bit Operation Continued TIO Programmed as Input TIO Programmed as Output Mode INV 0 INV 1 INV 0 INV 1 4 Width of the high input Width of the low input pulse is measured pulse is measured 5 Period is measured between Period is measured the rising edges of the input between the falling edges signal of the input signal _ 6 Event is captured on the Event is captured on the rising edge of the signal falling edge of the signal from the TIO signal from the TIO signal _ _ 7 Pulse generated by Pulse generated by the D ES the timer has timer has negative positive polarity polarity 9 Pulse generated by Pulse generated by the SCH c the timer has timer has negative positive polarity polarity 10 Pulse generated by Pulse generated by the BE the timer has timer has negative positive polarity polarity 9 4 5 Timer Load Register TLR The TLR is a 24 bit write only register In all modes the counter is preloaded with the TLR value after the TCSR TE bit is set and a first event occurs In timer modes if the TCSR TRM bit is set the counter is reloaded each time after it reaches the value contained by the timer compare register and the new event occurs In measurement modes if TCSR TRM and TCSR TE are set the counter is reloaded with the value in the TLR on eac
147. 6 65 Received Target Abort RTA 6 65 Signaled System Error SSE 6 65 Signalled Target Abort STA 6 65 System Error Enable SERE 6 66 Wait Cycle Control WCC 6 66 STOP reset 6 12 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CSID 6 71 system errors 6 4 target disconnect C retry event 6 13 terminate and reset 6 13 Universal Bus mode 6 15 Universal Bus Mode Address Space 6 47 Universal Bus modes 6 44 6 63 vectored DSP56300 core interrupts 6 4 Host Interface Status Register HSTR 6 56 Host Flags 5 3 HF 5 3 6 57 Host Interrupt A HINT 6 57 Host Receive Data Request HRRQ 6 58 Host Request HREQ 6 57 Host Transmit Data Request HTRQ 6 58 Transmitter Ready TRDY 6 58 Host Interrupt A HINT bit 6 25 6 57 Host Interrupt Request Drive Control HIRD bit 6 24 Host Interrupt Request Handshake Mode HIRH bit 6 24 Host Master Receive Data Register HRXM 6 7 6 61 Host Non Maskable Interrupt HNMI bit 6 60 Host Read Write Polarity HRWP bit 6 25 Host Receive Data Request HRRQ bit 6 58 Host Receive Data Transfer Format HRF 1 0 bits 6 50 Host Request 6 57 Host Request HREQ bit 6 57 Host Reset Polarity HRSP bit 6 24 Host Semaphores HS 2 0 bits 6 49 Host Slave Receive Data Register HRXS 6 61 6 62 Host Transfer Acknowledge Polarity HTAP bit 6 25 Host Transmit Data Register HTXR 6 62 Host Transmit Data Request HTRQ bit 6 58 Host Transmit Data Transfer Format HTF 1 0 bits 6 51 HPERR pin 6 66 HRS
148. 64 prescaler is connected in series with the refresh clock divider If BPR is cleared the prescaler is bypassed The refresh request rate in clock cycles is the value written to BRF 7 0 bits 1 multiplied by 64 if BRP is set or by one if BRP is cleared When programming the periodic refresh rate you must consider the RAS time out period Hardware support for the RAS time out restriction does not exist Note Refresh requests are not accumulated and therefore in a fast refresh request rate not all the refresh requests are served for example the combination BRF 7 0 00 and BRP 0 generates a refresh request every clock cycle but a refresh access takes at least five clock cycles 22 15 BRF 7 0 Bus Refresh Rate Controls the refresh request rate The BRF 7 O bits specify a divide rate of 1 256 BRF 7 0 00 FF A refresh request is generated each time the refresh counter reaches zero if the refresh counter is enabled BRE 1 14 BSTR Bus Software Triggered Reset Generates a software triggered refresh request When BSTR is set a refresh request is generated and a refresh access is executed to all DRAM banks the exact timing of the refresh access depends on the pending external accesses and the status of the BME bit After the refresh access CAS before RAS is executed the DRAM controller hardware clears the BSTR bit The refresh cycle length depends on the BRW 1 0 bits a refresh access is as lo
149. 9 32 Timer Compare Register TCPR 9 4 9 34 Timer Control TC bits 9 31 Timer Control Status Register TCSR 9 3 9 28 bit definitions 9 28 Data Input DI 9 29 Data Output DO 9 29 Direction DIR 9 30 Inverter INV 9 30 9 32 Prescaler Clock Enable PCE 9 29 programming sheet B 38 Timer Compare Flag TCF 9 29 Timer Compare Interrupt Enable TCIE 9 32 Timer Control TC 9 31 Timer Enable TE 9 32 Timer Overflow Flag TOF 9 29 Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable TOIE 9 32 Timer Reload Mode TRM 9 30 Timer Count Register TCR 9 34 Timer Enable TE bit 9 32 Timer Interrupt Enable TMIE bit 8 13 Timer Interrupt Priority Level TOL bits 4 16 Timer Interrupt Rate STIR bit 8 12 Timer Load Registers TLR 9 4 9 33 programming sheet B 39 Timer module 1 13 architecture 9 1 timer block diagram 9 2 Timer Overflow Flag TOF bit 9 29 Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable TOIE bit 9 32 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR 9 28 bit definitions 9 28 Prescaler Counter Value PC 9 28 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR 9 4 9 27 bit definitions 9 27 Prescaler Preload Value PL 9 27 Prescaler Source PS 9 27 programming sheet B 37 Timer Reload Mode TRM bit 9 30 Timers 2 2 Transaction Abort Interrupt Enable TAIE bit 6 29 Transaction Termination Interrupt Enable TTIE bit 6 29 Transfer Acknowledge TA 2 7 AA MOTOROLA Transfer Complete Interrupt Enable TCIE bit 6 29 Transmit 0 Enable TEO bit 7 20 Transmit 1 Enable TE1
150. A FF93 FFFF93 SCI Status Register SSR MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 7 Internal UO Memory Map Table B 2 Internal UO Memory Map X Data Memory Continued Peripheral 16 Bit Address 24 Bit Address Register Name FF92 FFFF92 Reserved FF91 FFFF91 Reserved FF90 FFFF90 Reserved Triple Timer FF8F FFFF8F Timer 0 Control Status Register TCSRO FF8E FFFF8E Timer 0 Load Register TLRO FF8D FFFF8D Timer 0 Compare Register TCPRO FF8C FFFF8C Timer 0 Count Register TCRO FF8B FFFF8B Timer 1 Control Status Register TCSR1 FF8A FFFF8A Timer 1 Load Register TLR1 FF89 FFFF89 Timer 1 Compare Register TCPR1 FF88 FFFF88 Timer 1 Count Register TCR1 FF87 FFFF87 Timer 2 Control Status Register TCSR2 FF86 FFFF86 Timer 2 Load Register TLR2 FF85 FFFF85 Timer 2 Compare Register TCPR2 FF84 FFFF84 Timer 2 Count Register TCR2 FF83 FFFF83 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR FF82 FFFF82 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR FF81 FFFF81 Reserved FF80 FFFF80 Reserved B 8 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Interrupt Sources and Priorities B 2 Interrupt Sources and Priorities Table B 3 Interrupt Sources Interrupt plenty laval Interrupt Source Starting Address Range VB
151. A 00 3 Hardware RESET VBA 02 3 Stack error VBA 04 3 Illegal instruction VBA 06 3 Debug request interrupt VBA 08 3 Trap VBA 0A 3 Nonmaskable interrupt NMI VBA 0C 3 Reserved VBA 0E 3 Reserved VBA 10 0 2 IRQA VBA 12 0 2 IRQB VBA 14 0 2 IRQC VBA 16 0 2 IRQD VBA 18 0 2 DMA channel 0 VBA 1A 0 2 DMA channel 1 VBA 1C 0 2 DMA channel 2 VBA 1E 0 2 DMA channel 3 VBA 20 0 2 DMA channel 4 VBA 22 0 2 DMA channel 5 VBA 24 0 2 TIMER 0 compare VBA 26 0 2 TIMER 0 overflow VBA 28 0 2 TIMER 1 compare VBA 2A 0 2 TIMER 1 overflow VBA 2C 0 2 TIMER 2 compare VBA 2E 0 2 TIMER 2 overflow VBA 30 0 2 ESSIO receive data VBA 32 0 2 ESSIO receive data with exception status VBA 34 0 2 ESSIO receive last slot VBA 36 0 2 ESSIO transmit data VBA 38 0 2 ESSIO transmit data with exception status VBA 3A 0 2 ESSIO transmit last slot VBA 3C 0 2 Reserved AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 9 Interrupt Sources and Priorities Table B 3 Interrupt Sources Continued interrupt SE Interrupt Source Starting Address Range VBA 3E 0 2 Reserved VBA 40 0 2 ESSI1 receive data VBA 42 0 2 ESSI1 receive data with exception status VBA 44 0 2 ESSI1 receive last slot VBA 46 0 2 ESSI1 transmit data VBA 48 0 2 ESSI1 transmit data with exception status VBA 4A 0 2 ESSI1 transmit last slot VBA 4
152. A 1C 0 2 DMA channel 2 VBA 1E 0 2 DMA channel 3 VBA 20 0 2 DMA channel 4 VBA 22 0 2 DMA channel 5 VBA 24 0 2 TIMER 0 compare VBA 26 0 2 TIMER 0 overflow VBA 28 0 2 TIMER 1 compare VBA 2A 0 2 TIMER 1 overflow VBA 2C 0 2 TIMER 2 compare VBA 2E 0 2 TIMER 2 overflow VBA 30 0 2 ESSIO receive data VBA 32 0 2 ESSIO receive data with exception status VBA 34 0 2 ESSIO receive last slot VBA 36 0 2 ESSIO transmit data VBA 38 0 2 ESSIO transmit data with exception status VBA 3A 0 2 ESSIO transmit last slot VBA 3C 0 2 Reserved VBA 3E 0 2 Reserved VBA 40 0 2 ESSI1 receive data VBA 42 0 2 ESSI1 receive data with exception status VBA 44 0 2 ESSI1 receive last slot VBA 46 0 2 ESSI1 transmit data VBA 48 0 2 ESSI1 transmit data with exception status VBA 4A 0 2 ESSI1 transmit last slot VBA 4C 0 2 Reserved VBA 4E 0 2 Reserved VBA 50 0 2 SCI receive data 4 18 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Configuring Interrupts Table 4 6 Interrupt Sources Continued interr pt iyat Interrupt Source Starting Address Range VBA 52 0 2 SCI receive data with exception status VBA 54 0 2 SCI transmit data VBA 56 0 2 SCI idle line VBA 58 0 2 SCI timer VBA 5A 0 2 Reserved VBA 5C 0 2 Reserved VBA 5E 0 2 Reserved VBA 60 0 2 Host receive data full VBA 62 0 2 Host transmit data empty VBA 64 0 2 Host command default VBA 66 0 2 Reserved VBA FE 0 2 Reserved
153. A do 6 _LOOP6 DH jclr 2 X M_SSR movep X M_SRXL A2 A jclr 1 X M_SSR movep A2 X M_STXL asr 8 a a _LOOP6 move al r0 move al r1 A do at __LOOP7 A do 3 _LOOP8 jclr 2 X M_SSR movep X M_SRXL A2 jclr 1 X M_SSR movep a2 X M_STXL asr 8 a a _LOOP8 movem al p r0 nop _LOOP7 bra lt FINISH Configure SCI Control Reg Configure SCI Clock Control Reg Configure SCLK TXD and RXD get 3 bytes for number of program words and 3 bytes for the starting address Wait for RDRF to go high Put 8 bits in A2 Wait for TDRE to go high cho the received byt starting address for load save starting address Receive program words Wait for RDRF to go high Put 8 bits in A2 Wait for TDRE to go high cho the received byt Store 24 bit result in P mem movem cannot be at LA Boot from SCI done DH This is the routine that loads from external EPROM MD MC MB MA x001 EPROMLD move BOOT r2 f movep AARV X M_AAR1 H r2 address of external EPROM aarl configured for SRAM types of access DSP56301 User s Manual do 6 _LOOP9 vead number of words and starting address movem p r2 a2 Get the 8 LSB from ext P mem asr 8 a a Shift 8 bit data into Al _ LOOPY move al r0 starting address for load move al rl save it in rl a0 holds the number of words do a0 _LOOP10 read program words do 3 _LOOP
154. A MOTOROLA Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers 4 6 3 Address Attribute Registers AAR 0 3 The Address Attribute Registers AAR 0 3 are read write registers that control the activity of the AAO RASO AA3 RAS3 pins The associated AAn RASn pin is asserted if the address defined by the BAC bits in the associated AAR matches the exact number of external address bits defined by the BNC bits and the external address space X data Y data or program is enabled by the AAR Figure 4 8 shows an AAR register Table 4 11 lists the bit definitions Note The DSP56301 does not support address multiplexing 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 Address to Compare 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BNC3 BNC2 ENCT BNO BPAC EEEEJBVEN BXEN BPEN BAAP BAT BATO External Access Type AA pin polarity Program space Enable X data space Enable Y data space Enable Reserved Packing Enable Number of Address bit to compare C Reserved Bit Write to zero for future compatibility Figure 4 8 Address Attribute Registers AAR 0 3 X FFFFF9 FFFFF6 Table 4 11 Address Attribute Registers AAR O 3 Bit Definitions Bit Reset nA Number Pit Name value Description 23 12 BAC 11 0 0 Bus Address to Compare Read write control bits that define the upper 12 bits of the 24 bit address with which to compare the external address to determine whether to assert the correspondi
155. AE ESE OKEERE Aiia 7 28 KIA E WU 7 29 7 5 5 ESSI Receive Data Register E 7 30 3 6 ESSI Transmit Shift Regi tr neris eiai E E A 7 30 7 5 7 ESSI Transmit Data Registers UX 2 0 dasicatenurscasotssrossdvsrnnesesawedatonvenderavasvenndovsuvatenwontacensbs 7 33 72 8 ESSI Time Slot Register TSR siisssceissiichcecasntsedaasaneadaasesdadsudecdceaasecbadasadgeaesaonesedemsapeacestenoncvs 7 33 7 5 9 Transmit Slot Mask Registers TSMA TSM 7 33 7 5 10 Receive Slot Mask Registers RSMA RSMbB A 7 35 7 6 GPIO Signals and Registers sasoira E E E AEE 7 36 7 6 1 Port Control Registers PCRC and PC RD iacnscoscstaazesacvsnseanouadecesvaneose deassaesunraneeveqeneeceanenes 7 36 7 6 2 Port Direction Registers PRRC and DPRRI A 7 37 7 6 3 Por Data Registers PDRC and PDR D isasscssasccassasconsszersesnnsancenvssssanedsagncnsssentouansenteneseslsunies 7 38 Chapter 8 Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 1 Operating INNES geegent 8 1 Gell SyMChronOus TEE 8 2 51 2 Asynehron s Eegen segudanesteedtinentas 8 2 S L3 Multidrop Mode ssccscatcscieticencueted aaccciuteniue sia Satie dedastesccnssutoead em uacees eedbededaieesdeceauoneed EE 8 2 8 1 3 1 Transmitting Data and Address Characters iss cecccceceeestvedecxetedaacessscdecserscesesdvececestiaceseusts 8 3 5 13 22 Ee Ne EE 8 3 1 3 3 lemer arrestee ees 8 3 8 1 34 Addr ss IMO SW AOU EE 8 3 Ct TA EE 8 3 8 2 R ceive Data RADY E 8 4 8 2 2 Transmit Data TXD J ar ss ets aaanaccenteiaacemas RE A
156. BMA on page 6 70 and the HA 2 0 value is 7 In 24 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HTF 0 the host processor views the HTXR as a 24 bit write only register HD 23 0 pins are written to all three bytes of the HTXR in a write access In a 16 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HTF 0 the host processor views the HTXR as a 16 bit write only register In a write access the HD 15 0 pins are written to the two most significant bytes or least significant bytes of the HTXR as defined by the HCTR HTF In a Universal Bus mode write to the HTXR the HI32 inserts wait states if the HTXR is full HTRQ 0 Wait states are inserted until the data is transferred from the HTXR to the DSP side AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 63 Host Side Programming Model 6 8 7 Device ID Vendor ID Configuration Register CDID CVID 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 DID15 DID14 DID13 DID12 DID11 DID10 DID9 DID8 DID7 DID6 DIDS DID4 DID3 DID2 DID1 DIDO 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 VID15 VID14 VID13j VID12 VID11 VID10 VID9 VID8 VID7 VID6 VIDS VID4 VID3 VID2 VID1 VIDO Figure 6 16 Device Vendor ID Configuration Register CDID CVID A PCI standard 32 bit read only register mapped into the PCI configuration space in PCI mode or in mode 0 DCTR HM 1 or 0 CDID CVID is accessed if a configur
157. C 1 or 2 The three least significant PCI data bytes from Cont Cont the HAD 23 0 pins are transferred to the DRXR to be read by the DSP56300 core DPMC FC 3 The three most significant PCI data bytes from the HAD 31 8 pins are transferred to the DRXR to be read by the DSP56300 core 21 16 BL 5 0 0 PCI Data Burst Length Control the PCI data burst length The value of the BL 5 0 bits is the desired number of accesses in the burst minus one In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 when the DSP56300 core writes to the DPAR the master access counter is initialized with the value of BL 5 0 The burst length can be programmed from 1 BL 00 to 64 BL 3F accesses If the master access counter is enabled MACE 1 in the DPCR and the HI32 is the active PCI master the value of the counter decrements after each data cycle in which data is transferred that is a data phase until the counter value reaches 00 Then the HI32 PCI master executes one more data phases and terminates the transaction A transaction can be terminated before the counter reaches 00 for example via a target initiated transaction termination the bus grant is taken or the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to MTT The value of the counter at the end of a transaction is indicated by the RDC 5 0 bits in the DSP PCI Status Register DPSR 15 0 AR 31 16 0 DSP PCI Transaction Address High The two most significant bytes of the 32 bit PCI
158. C 0 2 Reserved VBA 4E 0 2 Reserved VBA 50 0 2 SCI receive data VBA 52 0 2 SCI receive data with exception status VBA 54 0 2 SCI transmit data VBA 56 0 2 SCI idle line VBA 58 0 2 SCI timer VBA 5A 0 2 Not assigned VBA 5C 0 2 Not assigned VBA 5E 0 2 Not assigned VBA 60 0 2 Host PCI transaction termination VBA 62 0 2 Host PCI transaction abort VBA 64 0 2 Host PCI parity error VBA 66 0 2 Host PCI transfer complete VBA 68 0 2 Host PCI master receive request VBA 6A 0 2 Host slave receive request VBA 6C 0 2 Host PCI master transmit request VBA 6E 0 2 Host slave transmit request VBA 70 0 2 Host PCI master address request VBA 72 0 2 3 Host command Host NMI default VBA 74 0 2 Not assigned VBA FE 0 2 Not assigned DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Interrupt Sources and Priorities Table B 4 Interrupt Source Priorities Within an IPL Priority Interrupt Source Level 3 nonmaskable Highest Hardware RESET Stack error Illegal instruction Debug request interrupt Trap Nonmaskable interrupt Lowest Nonmaskable Host Command Interrupt Levels 0 1 2 maskable Highest IRQA external interrupt IRQB external interrupt IRQC external interrupt IRQD external interrupt DMA channel 0 interrupt DMA channel 1 interrupt DMA channel 2 interrupt DMA channel 3 interrupt DMA channel 4 interrupt DMA channel
159. CCMR BR The detected parity error bit DPE in the CSTR is set APER is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to it In personal software reset APER does not reflect new address parity errors MARQ PCI Master Address Request Indicates that the HI32 is not the initiator of a PCI transaction and that the DPAR can be written with the address of the next transaction When the PCI bus master enable bit BM is set in the CCMR and the HI82 is first programmed to the PCI mode DCTR HM 1 or completes a PCI transaction as a master MARQ is set If DPCR MAIE is set a master address interrupt request is generated MARQ is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes the DPAR or the PCI bus master enable bit BM is cleared in the CCMR Hardware software personal hardware and personal software resets clear MARQ 6 40 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 15 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 3 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 2 MRRQ 0 PCI Master Receive Data Request Indicates that the DSP receive data FIFO DRXR contains data read from the host bus by the HI32 master When the HI32 as master reads data from the host bus to the host to DSP FIFO HTXR DRXR MRRQ is set MRR Q is cleared if the DRXR is emptied by DSP56300 core reads or the
160. CI serial clock It supports industry standard asynchronous bit rates and protocols as well as high speed synchronous data transmission SCI asynchronous protocols include a multidrop mode for master slave operation with wake up on idle line and wake up on address bit capability This mode allows the DSP56301 to share a single serial line efficiently with other peripherals The SCI consists of separate transmit and receive sections that can operate asynchronously with respect to each other A programmable baud rate generator supplies the transmit and receive clocks An enable vector and an interrupt vector are included so that the baud rate generator can function as a general purpose timer when the SCI is not using it or when the interrupt timing is the same as that used by the SCI 8 1 Operating Modes The operating modes for the DSP56301 SCI are as follows m 8 bit synchronous shift register mode m 10 bit asynchronous 1 start 8 data 1 stop m 11 bit asynchronous 1 start 8 data 1 even parity 1 stop m 11 bit asynchronous 1 start 8 data 1 odd parity 1 stop 11 bit multidrop asynchronous 1 start 8 data 1 data type 1 stop This mode is used for master slave operation with wake up on idle line and wakeup on address bit capability It allows the DSP56301 to share a single serial line efficiently with other peripherals These modes are selected by the SCR WD 2 0 bits Synchronous data mode is essentially a high speed shift
161. Cl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Data Bus Direction output PB21 Input or Port B 21 When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the Output DCTR this signal is individually programmed as an input or output through the HI32 DIRH HDEVSEL Input Tri stated Host Device Select When the HI32 is programmed to interface Output with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Device Select signal HSAK Output Host Select Acknowledge When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Select Acknowledge output PB22 Input or Port B 22 When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the Output DCTR this signal is individually programmed as an input or output through the HI32 DIRH AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections Host Interface HI32 Table 2 10 Host Interface Continued State During Signal Name Type Reset Signal Description HLOCK Input Tri stated Host Lock When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI Output bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Lock signal HBS Input Host Bus Strobe When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCI bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Bus Strobe Schmitt trigger input PB23 Input or Port B 23 When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the Output DCTR this signal is individually programmed as an
162. D 31 0 pins as left aligned and zero filled in the least significant byte E f HCTR HRF 3 The data written to the DTXS is transferred to the three least significant HRXS bytes and output to the HAD 31 0 pins as right aligned and sign extended in the most significant byte Universal Bus mode DSP to host data transfer formats DCTR HM 2 or 3 E f HCTR HRF 0 The data written to the DTXS is transferred to the HRXS and output to the HI32 data pins HD 23 0 E f HCTR HRF 1 or 2 The two least significant bytes of the data written to the DTXS is transferred to the HRXS and output to HI32 data pins HD 15 0 E f HCTR HRF 3 The two most significant bytes of the data written to the DTXS is transferred to the HRXS and output to HI32 data pins HD 15 0 To assure proper operation HRF 1 0 can be changed only if the DSP to host slave data path is empty In addition switching between 32 bit data modes and non 32 bit data modes can occur only in the personal software reset state DCTR HM 0 and DSR HACT 0 10 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 6 50 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model Table 6 22 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit i Reset SR Number BitName vaiue Mode Description 9 8 HTF 1 0 0 UBM Host Transmit Data Transfer Format PCI Define data transfer formats for host
163. D 31 8 Note LSB least significant byte MSB most significant byte 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 a E AR31 AR30 AR29 AR28 AR27 AR26 AR25 AR24 AR23 AR22 AR21 AR20 AR19 AR18 AR17 AR16 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC Address X FFFFC7 Read Write Reset 000000 Note All bits work only in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 You can write to the DPMC only if MARG is set or the system is in Self Configuration mode Figure B 12 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC B 24 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 4 of 10 Host Processor HI32 PCI Byte Enables Bits 23 20 BEID Ol enable byte lanes 3 0 respectively PCI Bus Command Bits 19 16 Defines PCI bus commands as follows C 3 0 Command Type 0000 Illegal 0001 Illegal 0010 1 O Read 0011 VO Write 0100 Illegal 0101 Illegal 0110 Memory Read 0111 Memory Write 1000 Illegal 1001 Illegal 1010 Configuration Read DSP PCI Transaction Address Low The two least significant bytes of the 32 bit 1100 Memory Read Multiple PCI transaction address In addition the 1101 Illegal lowest two bits have the following meaning 1110 Memory Read Line 1011 Configuration Write AR 1 0 Burst Order 1111 Memory Write and Invalidate 00 Linear incrementing PCI Cach
164. DB MDDB DRXR HTXR HDTFC PCI bus DPMC Register DSP to PCI Host PCI Host to DSP FC1 FCO Data Transfer Format Data Transfer Format 1 1 The three least significant HRXM bytes are output The three most significant PCI data bytes are left aligned and zero filled written to the HTXR GDB MDDB _ I GDB MDDB HI32 DTXM DRXR HRXM HTXR HDTFC HDTFC PCI bus PCI bus Table 6 4 Transmit Data Transfer Format HCTR Host to DSP Data Transfer Format HTF1 HTFO PCI mode Universal Bus mode 0 0 All 32 PCI data bits are written to the HTXR as two All HD 23 0 data are written to the HTXR zero extended 16 bit words GDB MDDB GDB MDDB HI32 DRXR DRXR HTXR HTXR HDTFC HDTFC rT I I PCl bus Host bus 0 1 The three least significant PCI data bytes are written HD 15 0 are written to the HTXR right aligned and zero extended GDB MDDB DRXR HTXR HDTFG Host bus AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 9 Data Transfer Paths Table 6 4 Transmit Data Transfer Format Continued HCTR Host to DSP Data Transfer Format HTF1 HTFO PCI mode Universal Bus mode 1 O The three least significant PCI data bytes are written HD 15 0 are written to the HTXR right aligned to the HTXR and sign extended GDB MDDB GDB MDDB HI382 DRXR DRXR HTXR HTXR HDTFC HDTFC x I I TI PClbus Host bus 1 1 The three most
165. DMA triggers are serviced provide for the preceding DMA trigger to be serviced before the DMA channel receives the next trigger 9 4 Triple Timer Module Programming Model The timer programmer s model in Figure 9 20 shows the structure of the timer registers 9 4 1 Prescaler Counter The prescaler counter is a 21 bit counter that decrements on the rising edge of the prescaler input clock The counter is enabled when at least one of the three timers is enabled that is one or more of the timer enable bits are set and is using the prescaler output as its source that is one or more of the PCE bits are set AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 25 Triple Timer Module Programming Model 23 22 21 20 19 18 Tefo 13 12 11 10 9 8 Po Jo or ES 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 rea realtor reo CoA 14 15 po Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR TPLR FFFF83 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR TPLR FFFF82 Timer Control Status Register TCSR TCSRO FFFF8F TCSR1 FFFF8B TCSR2 FFFF87 Timer Load Register TLR TLRO FFFF8E TLR1 FFFF8A TLR2 FFFF86 Timer Compare Register TCPR TCPRO FFFF8D TCPR1 FFFF89 TCPR2 FFFF85 Timer Count Register TCR TCRO FFFF8C TCR1 FFFF88 TCR2 FFFF84 Reserved bit Read as 0 Write with 0 for future compatibility Figure 9 20 Timer Module Programmer s Model 9 26 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module Programming Model
166. DSP56301 Reference HADO HA3 PBO HPO HAD1 HA4 PB1 HP1 HAD2 HA5 PB2 HP2 HAD3 HA6 PB3 HP3 HAD4 HA7 PB4 HP4 HAD5 HA8 PB5 HP5 HAD6 HAQ PB6 HP6 HAD7 HA10 PB7 HP7 HAD8 HDO PB8 HP8 HAD9 HD1 PB9 HP9 HAD10 HD2 PB10 HP10 HAD11 HD3 PB11 HP11 HAD12 HD4 PB12 HP12 HAD13 HD5 PB13 HP13 HAD14 HD6 PB14 HP14 HAD15 HD7 PB15 HP15 HCO0 HBEO HAO PB16 HP16 HC1 HBE1 HA1 PB17 HP17 HC2 HBE2 HA2 PB18 HP18 HC3 HBE3 Tie to pull up or Voc PB19 HP19 Host Interface HTRDY HDBEN PB20 HP20 HI32 HIRDY HDBDR PB21 HP21 Port B Signals HDEVSEL HSAK PB22 HP22 HLOCK HBS PB23 HP23 HPAR HDAK Internal disconnect HP24 HPERR HDRQ Internal disconnect HP25 HGNT HAEN Internal disconnect HP26 HREQ HTA Internal disconnect HP27 HSERR HIRQ Internal disconnect HP28 HSTOP HWR HRW Internal disconnect HP29 HIDSEL HRD HDS Internal disconnect HP30 HFRAME Tie to pull up or Vcc HP31 HCLK Tie to pull up or Vec HP32 HAD16 HD8 Internal disconnect HP33 HAD17 HD9 Internal disconnect HP34 HAD18 HD10 Internal disconnect HP35 HAD19 HD11 Internal disconnect HP36 HAD20 HD12 Internal disconnect HP37 HAD21 HD13 Internal disconnect HP38 HAD22 HD14 Internal disconnect HP39 HAD23 HD15 Internal disconnect HP40 HAD24 HD16 Internal disconnect HP41 HAD25 HD17 Internal disconnect HP42 HAD26 HD18 Internal disconnect HP43 HAD27 HD19 Internal disconnect HP44 HAD28 HD20 Internal disconnect HP45 HAD29 HD21 Internal disconnect HP46 HAD30 HD22 Internal disconnect HP47 HAD31 HD23 Internal disconnect HP48 HRST HRST
167. DSP56301 User s Manual 24 Bit Digital Signal Processor DSP56301UM AD Revision 3 March 2001 Digital DNA AA MOTOROLA irom Motorola OnCE DigitalDNA and the DigitalDNA logo are trademarks of Motorola Inc Motorola reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein Motorola makes no warranty representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose nor does Motorola assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit and specifically disclaims any and all liability including without limitation consequential or incidental damages Typical parameters which may be provided in Motorola data sheets and or specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual performance may vary over time All operating parameters including Typicals must be validated for each customer application by customer s technical experts Motorola does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others Motorola products are not designed intended or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body or other applications intended to support life or for any other application in which the failure of the Motorola product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur Should Buyer purchase or use Motorola products for any such unintended or unauthorized applica
168. Data A D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 Type Bit Mode 4 11 bit Asynchronous 1 Start 8 Data 1 Even Parity 1 Stop WDS2 WDS1 WDSO lt TX Paa Stop SSFTD 0 i D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 Type i Bit ie a D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 Se lt TX SSFTD 0 Data Type 1 Address Byte 0 Data Byte Note 1 Modes 1 3 and 7 are reserved 2 DO LSB D7 MSB 3 Data is transmitted and received LSB first if SSFTD 0 or MSB first if SSFTD 1 Figure 8 2 SCI Data Word Formats SSFTD 0 2 AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 11 SCI Programming Model 8 6 1 SCI Control Register SCR The SCR is a read write register that controls the serial interface operation Seventeen of its 24 bits are defined 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 REIE 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 SCKP STIR TMIE TIE RIE ILIE TE RE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WOMS RWU WAKE SBK SSFTD WDS2 WDS1 WDSO Reserved bit read as 0 write to 0 for future compatibility Figure 8 3 SCI Control Register SCR Table 8 2 SCI Control Register SCR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 17 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 16 REIE 0 Receive with Exception Interrupt Enable Enables disables the SCI receive data with exception interrupt If REIE is cleared the receive data with exception interrupt is disabled If both REIE and RDRF are set and PE FE and OR are not all
169. Description Host bootstrap 8 bit wide UB mode in double strobe pin configuration The hardware reset vector is located at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through HI32 in UB slave double strobe HWR HRD configuration The DSP56301 is written with 24 bit wide words broken into 8 bit wide host bus transfers You can use this mode for booting from various microprocessors or microcontrollers for example booting a slave DSP56301 from port A of a master DSP563xx Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least three times the data transfer rate Host bootstrap 8 bit wide UB mode in single strobe pin configuration The hardware reset vector is at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through HI32 in UB slave single strobe HRW HDS configuration The DSP56301 is written with 24 bit wide words using 8 bit wide host bus transfers You can use this mode for booting from various microprocessors or microcontrollers Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least three times the data transfer rate Expanded mode Bypasses the bootstrap ROM The DSP56301 begins fetching instructions starting at 008000 Memory accesses are performed using SRAM memory access type with 31 wait states and no address attributes selected default Bootstrap from byte wide memory Loads a program memory segment from consecutive byte wide P memory locations starting at P D00000 bits 7 0 The memory is selected by the Add
170. E 8 12 Receiver Enable RE 8 14 Receiver Wakeup Enable RWU 8 15 SCI Clock Polarity SCKP 8 12 SCI Receive Interrupt Enable RIE 8 13 SCI Shift Direction SSFTD 8 15 SCI Transmit Interrupt Enable TIE 8 13 Send Break SBK 8 15 Timer Interrupt Enable TMIE 8 13 Timer Interrupt Rate STIR 8 12 Transmitter Enable TE 8 14 Wakeup Mode Select WAKE 8 15 Wired OR Mode Select WOMS 8 14 Index 12 DSP56301 User s Manual Word Select WDS 8 16 SCI Interrupt Priority Level SCL bits 4 16 SCI Receive Data Register SRX 8 9 8 22 SCI Receive Interrupt Enable RIE bit 8 13 SCI Serial Clock signal SCLK 8 4 SCI Shift Direction SSFTD 8 15 SCI Status Register SSR 8 9 8 17 bit definitions 8 17 Framing Error Flag FE 8 17 Idle Line Flag DLE 8 18 Overrun Error Flag OR 8 18 Parity Error PE 8 17 Receive Data Register Full RDRF 8 18 Received Bit 8 R8 8 17 Transmit Data Register Empty TDRE 8 18 Transmitter Empty TRNE 8 18 SCI Transmit Data Address Register STXA 8 9 SCI Transmit Data Register STX or STXA 8 22 SCI Transmit Data Register STX 8 9 8 23 SCI Transmit Interrupt Enable TIE bit 8 13 SCLK 8 2 8 6 SCS byte 4 12 Select SCK SSC1 bit 7 15 Self Configuration mode 6 12 6 44 6 72 Send Break SBK bit 8 15 Serial Clock SCK 7 3 Serial Clock SCLK SCI 8 2 Serial Communications Interface SCI 1 5 1 6 1 13 2 2 8 1 Address Mode Wakeup 8 3 Asynchronous mode 8 2 bootstrap loading 8 8 crystal
171. E3 DMA Source Address Register DSR3 FFE2 FFFFE2 DMA Destination Address Register DDR3 FFE1 FFFFE1 DMA Counter DCO3 FFEO FFFFEO DMA Control Register DCR3 DMA4 FFDF FFFFDF DMA Source Address Register DSR4 FFDE FFFFDE DMA Destination Address Register DDR4 FFDD FFFFDD DMA Counter DCO4 FFDC FFFFDC DMA Control Register DCR4 DMA5 FFDB FFFFDB DMA Source Address Register DSR5 FFDA FFFFDA DMA Destination Address Register DDR5 FFD9 FFFFD9 DMA Counter DCO5 FFD8 FFFFD8 DMA Control Register DCR5 FFD7 FFFFD7 Reserved FFD6 FFFFD6 Reserved FFD5 FFFFD5 Reserved FFD4 FFFFD4 Reserved FFD3 FFFFD3 Reserved FFD2 FFFFD2 Reserved FFD1 FFFFD1 Reserved FFDO FFFFDO Reserved PORT B FFCF FFFFCF Host Port GPIO Data Register DATH FFCE FFFFCE Host Port GPIO Direction Register DIRH B 4 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Internal UO Memory Map Table B 2 Internal UO Memory Map X Data Memory Continued Peripheral 16 Bit Address 24 Bit Address Register Name HI32 FFCD FFFFCD DSP Slave Transmit Data FIFO DTXS FFCC FFFFCC DSP Master Transmit DATA FIFO DTXM FFCB FFFFCB DSP Receive Data FIFO DRXR FFCA FFFFCA DSP PCI Status Register DPSR FFCQ9 FFFFC9 DSP Status Register DSR FFC8 FFFFC8 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR FFC7 FFFFC7 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC FFC6 FFFFC6 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR FFC6
172. EO can be left enabled Note Transmitter 0 is the only transmitter that can operate in Asynchronous mode SYN 0 The setting of the TEO bit does not affect the generation of frame sync or output flags 7 20 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model Table 7 4 ESSI Control Register B CRB Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 15 TE1 0 Transmit 1 Enable Enables the transfer of data from TX1 to Transmit Shift Register 1 TE1 is functional only when the ESSI is in Synchronous mode and is ignored when the ESSI is in Asynchronous mode When TE1 is set and a frame sync is detected transmitter 1 is enabled for that frame When TE is cleared transmitter 1 is disabled after completing transmission of data currently in the ESSI transmit shift register Any data present in TX1 is not transmitted If TE1 is cleared data can be written to TX1 the TDE bit is cleared but data is not transferred to transmit shift register 1 If the TE1 bit is kept cleared until the start of the next frame it causes the SCO signal to act as serial I O flag from the start of the frame in both Normal and Network mode The transmit enable sequence in On Demand mode can be the same as in Normal mode or the TE1 bit can be left enabled Note The setting of the TE1 bit does not affect the generation of frame sync or output flags 14 TE2 Transmit 2 Enable Enables t
173. FC Host bus AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 Reset States 6 4 Reset States Table 6 6 describes the various HI32 reset states Table 6 6 HI32 Reset Initiated by the Host Type Entered when Description Hardware HS The DSP56300 core These resets force the HI32 DSP side state machines control Reset RESET pinis asserted registers and status registers to their initial states These resets also SoftWare The RESET instruction activate the Personal Software PS reset Reset is executed Personal PS The DSP56300 core The HI32 terminates the current PCI transaction if it is an active PCI Software writes zeros to the HI32 agent clears the HACT bit in the DSP Status Register DSR and Reset mode bits HM 2 0 in enters the personal software PS reset state All data paths are the DSP control register cleared In the personal software reset state the HI32 is a PCI agent O or the HS reset has and responds to all memory and configuration space transactions S executed with a retry event If connected to other buses for example ISA bus DSP56300 core based DSP Port A bus and so on all outputs are 5 high impedance F STOP mode ST The STOP instruction This reset forces all host port pins to the disconnected state all 5 executes outputs are high impedance all inputs are electrically disconnected ZS The host port pins are affected immediately OH z Note This mod
174. FF Internal Reserved FFOOCO Bootstrap ROM FF0000 External 000400 Internal Program RAM 000000 1K Memory Maps X Data FFFFFF Internal I O FFFF80 128 words External FFF000 Internal FF0000 Reserved External 000C00 Internal X Data RAM 3k 000000 Y Data FFFFFF External I O 128 words FFFF80 External FFF000 Internal Reserved FF0000 External 000C00 Internal Y Data RAM 3k 000000 NOTE External program memory begins immediately after the internal program memory The internal memory modules that are mapped to the addresses 000400 000800 are used as Instruction Cache space when the Instruction Cache is enabled and these addresses become part of the external P memory space Bit Settings Memory Configuration Addressable CE MS sc Program RAM X Data RAM Y Data RAM Cache Memory Size 1 1 0 1K 3K 3K 1K 16M 000 3FF 000 BFF 000 BFF not addressable Note 1 Address range is for 3 K bootstrap space Figure 3 7 Switched Program RAM and Instruction Cache Enabled 1 1 0 AA MOTOROLA Memory Configuration 3 13 Memory Maps Program X Data Y Data FFFF FFFF Internal UO FFFF External I O 128 words FFR0 __ 128 words FF80 External External External 0C00 0C00 Internal X Data Internal Y Data 0400 RAM 3k RAM 3k Internal P RAM 1K
175. Feature Core Side Interface Host Side Interface Mapping 11 internal I O space locations PCI mode Memory space 16 K Dword 32 bit wide locations composed of BR Three 32 bit read write registers control status and host command BR 16377 32 bit read write locations corresponding to one 32 bit input data FIFO and one 32 bit output data FIFO BR Four 32 bit reserved locations read only BR Configuration space Sixty four 32 bit locations 57 of which are reserved Universal Bus mode BR Three 24 bit read write registers control status and host command BR One 24 bit read write register for input and output data FIFO four of which are reserved BR Eight locations up to 24 bits wide four are reserved Word Size 24 bits 8 16 24 or 32 bits PCI Mode Data Format Conversion Output data alignment of 16 bit words to 16 bit double words Dwords Output data alignment of 24 bit words to 32 bit Dwords E Left aligned and zero filled E Right aligned and zero extended E Right aligned and sign extended Input data alignment of 32 bit Dwords to 24 bit words three MSBs three LSBs True 32 bit input and output data transfers 32 bit PCI bus data to two DSP56300 core 16 bit words and vice versa Universal Bus Mode Data Format Conversion Output data alignment of 24 bit words to 16 bit words two MSBs two LSBs Input data alignment of 16 bit words to 24 bit words E left aligned an
176. Fully pipelined 24 x 24 bit parallel multiplier accumulator Bit field unit comprising a 56 bit parallel barrel shifter fast shift and normalization bit stream generation and parsing Conditional ALU instructions Software controllable 24 bit or 16 bit arithmetic support Four 24 bit input general purpose registers X1 X0 Y1 and YO Six data ALU registers A2 Al AO B2 B1 and BO that are concatenated into two general purpose 56 bit accumulators A and B accumulator shifters Two data bus shifter limiter circuits DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DSP56300 Core Functional Blocks 1 4 1 1 Data ALU Registers The data ALU registers are read or written over the X data bus and the Y data bus as 16 or 24 bit operands The source operands for the data ALU can be 24 48 or 56 bits in 24 bit mode or 16 32 or 40 bits in 16 bit mode They always originate from data ALU registers The results of all data ALU operations are stored in an accumulator Data ALU operations are performed in two clock cycles in a pipeline so that a new instruction can be initiated in every clock cycle yielding an effective execution rate of one instruction per clock cycle 1 4 1 2 Multiplier Accumulator MAC The MAC unit comprises the main arithmetic processing unit of the DSP56300 core and performs all of the calculations on data operands For arithmetic instructions the unit accepts as many as three input operands and outputs one 56 bit result of the foll
177. GPIO configuration 5 1 Peripheral Initialization Steps Each peripheral has its own initialization process However all four peripherals share some common steps which follow 1 Determine the Register values to be programmed Find the peripheral register descriptions in the manual Choose the appropriate modes to configure for a given application Determine the bit settings for programming those modes 2 Make sure the peripheral is in individual reset state or disabled Peripheral control registers should not be modified while the peripheral is active 3 Configure the registers by writing the predetermined values to them Write the register values determined in step into the appropriate register locations 4 Enable the peripheral Once the peripheral is enabled it operates according the programmed modes determined in step 1 For detailed initialization procedures unique to each peripheral consult the initialization section within each peripheral s chapter AA MOTOROLA Programming the Peripherals 5 1 Mapping the Control Registers 5 2 Mapping the Control Registers The I O peripherals are controlled through registers mapped to the top 128 words of X data memory FFFF80 FFFFFF Referred to as the internal I O space the control registers are accessed by move MOVE MOVEP instructions and bit oriented instructions BCHG BCLR BSET BTST BRCLR BRSET BSCLR BSSET JCLR JSET JSCLR AND
178. H finish bootstrap DH DH DH This routine loads from the Host Interface in ISA UNIVERSAL mode MD MC MA x101 Host ISA 16 bit wide dual strobe Universal Bus mode e g to support ISA slave glue less connection Using self configuration mode the base address in CBMA is written with S2f which corresponds to an ISA HTXR address of 2fe Serial Port 2 Modem Status read only register ISAHOSTLD move 5a b b1l 5a0000 movep b1 X M_DCTR Configure HI32 as Self Config movep 00002f X M_DPMC write to DPMC rep 4 movep X0 X M_DPAR write to DPAR CSTR CCMR CCCR CRID CAT CBMA completing 32 bit write A 8 DSP56301 User s Manual AA MOTOROLA Switch to ISA mode movep X0 X M_DCTR Software personal reset move 010020 y1 width 16 offset 32 also used as replacment to needed NOP after sw reset movep 3a0000 X M_DCTR HM 3 UB HIRD 1 HIRQ_ pin drive high enabled HIRH 0 HIRQ_ pin handshake disabled HRSP 1 HRST pin active low HDRP 0 HDRO pin active high HTAP 0 HTA pin active high HDSM 0 Data strob pin mode enabled read the magic sequence 32 consecutive words with value 37 _LBLC do 32 _LOOP3 H jclr 2 X M_DSR Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready movep X M_DRXR Al Store 24 bit data into Al and 00ffff A Mask upper byte cmp 37 A Compare the 24 bit dat to 000037 beq lt _LBLD If dat 37 th
179. HP35 HP36 HP37 HP38 HP39 HP40 HP41 HP42 HP43 HP44 HP45 HP46 HP47 HP48 HP49 HP50 PVCL General Purpose Input Output GPIO 5 4 2 Port C Signals and Registers Each of the six Port C signals not used as an ESSIO signal can be configured as a GPIO signal Three registers control the GPIO functionality of Port C Port C control register PCRC Port C direction register PRRC and Port C data register PDRC Chapter 7 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI discusses these registers DSP56301 Port C GPIO SCO 0 2 PC 0 2 Enhanced Synchronous SCKO PC3 Serial Interface Port 0 ESSIO SRDA PC4 STDO PC5 Figure 5 3 Port C Signals 5 4 3 Port D Signals and Registers Each of the six Port D signals not used as an ESSI1 signal can be configured as a GPIO signal Three registers control the GPIO functionality of Port D Port D control register PCRD Port D direction register PRRD and Port D data register PDRD Chapter 7 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI discusses these registers DSP56301 Port D GPIO dck SC1 0 2 PD 0 2 Enhanced Synchronous lt SCK1 PD3 Serial Interface Port 1 ESSH SRD1 PD4 ST1D1 PD5 Figure 5 4 Port D Signals 5 4 4 Port E Signals and Registers Each of the three Port E signals not used as an SCI signal can be configured as a GPIO signal Three registers control the GPIO functionality of Port E Port E control register PCRE Port E direction register P
180. I the GPIO signals are PE 2 0 The corresponding data bits are PDRE 2 0 Reserved Read as zero Write with zero for future compatibility Figure 8 10 Port Data Registers PDRE X FFFF9D AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 25 GPIO Signals and Registers 8 26 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Chapter 9 Triple Timer Module The timers in the DSP56301 internal triple timer module act as timed pulse generators or as pulse width modulators Each timer has a single signal that can function as a GPIO signal or as a timer signal Each timer can also function as an event counter to capture an event or to measure the width or period of a signal 9 1 Overview The timer module contains a common 21 bit prescaler and three independent and identical general purpose 24 bit timer event counters each with its own register set Each timer has the following capabilities Uses internal or external clocking Interrupts the DSP56301 after a specified number of events clocks or signals an external device after counting internal events m Triggers DMA transfers after a specified number of events clocks occurs Connects to the external world through one bidirectional signal designated TIO 0 2 for timers 0 2 When TIO is configured as an input the timer functions as an external event counter or measures external pulse width signal period When TIO is configured as an output the timer functions as a time
181. I function is selected this signal is drain the Interrupt A open drain output Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected PVCL Input Input PCI Voltage Clamp When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected and the PCI bus uses a 3 V signal environment connect this pin to Vcc 3 3 V to enable the high voltage clamping required by the PCI specifications In all other cases including a 5 V PCI signal environment leave the input unconnected Table 2 11 Summary of HI32 Signals and Modes Signal e Name PCI Mode Enhanced Universal Bus Mode Universal Bus Mode GPIO Mode HPO HADO HA3 HIOO HP1 HAD1 HA4 HIO1 HP2 HAD2 HA5 HIO2 HP3 HAD3 HA6 HIO3 HP4 HAD4 HA7 HIO4 HP5 HAD5 HA8 HIO5 HP6 HAD6 HA9 HIO6 HP7 HAD7 HA10 HIO7 2 14 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 Table 2 11 Summary of HI32 Signals and Modes Continued ie PCI Mode Enhanced Universal Bus Mode Universal Bus Mode GPIO Mode HP8 HAD8 HDO HIO8 HP9 HAD9 HD1 HIO9 HP10 HAD10 HD2 HIO10 HP11 HAD11 HD3 HIO11 HP12 HAD12 HD4 HIO12 HP13 HAD13 HD5 HIO13 HP14 HAD14 HD6 HIO14 HP15 HAD15 HD7 HIO15 HP16 HC0 HBEO HAO HIO16 HP17 HC1 HBE1 HA1 HIO17 HP18 HC2 HBE2 HA2 HIO18 HP19 HC3 HBE3 Unused must be pulled up or down HIO19 HP20 HTRD
182. I to read a message before the first character arrives 8 1 3 4 Address Mode Wakeup The purpose and basic operational procedure for Address Mode Wakeup is the same as for Idle Line Wakeup The difference is that Address Mode Wakeup re enables the SCI when the ninth bit in a character is set to one if cleared this bit marks a character as data if set an address As a result an idle line is not needed which eliminates the dead time between messages 8 2 I O Signals Each of the three SCI signals RXD TXD and SCLK can be configured as either a GPIO signal or as a specific SCI signal Each signal is independent of the others For example if only the TXD signal is needed the RXD and SCLK signals can be programmed for GPIO AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 3 IO Signals However at least one of the three signals must be selected as an SCI signal to release the SCI from reset To enable SCI interrupts program the SCI control registers before any of the SCI signals are programmed as SCI functions In this case only one transmit interrupt can be generated because the Transmit Data Register is empty The timer and timer interrupt operate regardless of how the SCI pins are configured either as SCI or GPIO 8 2 1 Receive Data RXD This input signal receives byte oriented serial data and transfers the data to the SCI receive shift register Asynchronous input data is sampled on the positive edge of the receive clock
183. I32 AD 31 0 HAD 31 0 C3 BE3 C0 BEO HC3 HBE3 HC0 HBEO PAR HPAR FRAME HFRAME IRDY HIRDY TRDY HTRDY DEVSEL HDEVSEL STOP HSTOP PERR HPERR SERR HSERR REQ HREQ GNT HGNT IDSEL HIDSEL RST HRST CLK HCLK LOCK HLOCK INTA HINTA Figure 6 2 Connection to a PCI Bus AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 19 Host Port Pins Host master ISA AEN SBHE SA 0 SA 9 4 SA 3 1 D 15 0 CHRDY IOWC IORC 1016 IRQ DRQ DAK RESDRV FINN V kh V A Open Collector Note DSP56301 slave HI32 HAEN HA10 HA9 HA 8 3 HA 2 0 HDBEN HDBDR HD 15 0 HTA HWR HRD HSAK HIRQ HDRQ HDAK HRST HBS HP31 HP32 HP19 HD 23 16 The HI32 can be externally buffered to drive the current required by the ISA EISA standard HI32 inputs should be externally buffered if the other ISA EISA agents are not 3 Volt friendly as defined in the PCI specifications Figure 6 3 Connection to 16 Bit ISA EISA Data Bus 6 20 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DSP56301 master Port A master AAO A 10 0 Host Port Pins DSP56301 slave HI32 slave HAEN HA 0 0 HD 23 0 HTA HWR HRD HIRQ HBS HDAK HP31 HP32 HP19 Note If the HI32 DSP and the host DSP use the same EXTAL clock the HI32 can operate synchronously at its maximum throughput of three clock cycles word For example for a MHz clock CLKOUT
184. IE 1 8 12 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI Programming Model Table 8 2 SCI Control Register SCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit r Reset o Number Pit Name Value Description 13 TMIE 0 Timer Interrupt Enable Enables disables the SCI timer interrupt If TMIE is set timer interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller at the rate set by the SCI clock register The timer interrupt is automatically cleared by the timer interrupt acknowledge from the interrupt controller This feature allows DSP programmers to use the SCI baud rate generator as a simple periodic interrupt generator if the SCI is not in use if external clocks are used for the SCI or if periodic interrupts are needed at the SCI baud rate The SCI internal clock is divided by 16 to match the 1 x SCI baud rate for timer interrupt generation This timer does not require that any SCI signals be configured for SCI use to operate Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears TMIE 12 TIE 0 SCI Transmit Interrupt Enable Enables disables the SCI transmit data interrupt If TIE is cleared transmit data interrupts are disabled and the transmit data register empty TDRE bit in the SCI status register must be polled to determine whether the transmit data register is empty If both TIE and TDRE are set the SCI requests an SCI transmit data interrupt from the interrupt controller Either a hardware RESET signal o
185. ISA slave glueless interface in UB mode Loads the program memory from the Host Interface programmed to operate in the Universal Bus mode supporting ISA slave glueless connection Using Self Configuration mode the base address in the CBMA is initially written with 2F corresponding to an ISA HTXR address of 2FE Serial Port 2 Modem Status read only register The HI32 bootstrap code expects to read 32 consecutive times the magic number 0037 Subsequently the bootstrap code expects to read a 16 bit word that is the designated ISA Port Address this address is written into the CBMA The HOST Processor must poll for the Host Interface to be reconfigured This must be done by reading the HSTR and verifying that the value 0013 is read Then the host processor starts writing data to the Host Interface The HI32 bootstrap code expects to read a 24 bit word first that specifies the number of program words followed by a 24 bit word specifying the address from which to start loading the program words followed by a 24 bit word for each program word to be loaded The program words are stored in contiguous PRAM memory beginning at the specified starting address After reading the program words program execution starts from the address where loading started Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least three times the data transfer rate AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 3 Operating Modes Table 4 2 Operating Mode Definitions Continued Mode
186. Modes Normal Network and On Demand 7 4 8 Byte Format LSB MSB for the Transmitter Some devices such as CODECs require a MSB first data format Other devices such as those that use the AES EBU digital audio format require the LSB first To be compatible with all formats the shift registers in the ESSI are bidirectional You select either MSB or LSB by programming CRB SHFD If CRB SHFD is cleared data is shifted into the receive shift register MSB first and shifted out of the transmit shift register MSB first If CRB SHED is set data is shifted into the receive shift register LSB first and shifted out of the transmit shift register LSB first 7 4 9 Flags Two ESSI signals SC 1 0 are available for use as serial I O flags Their operation is controlled by the SYN SCD 1 0 SSC1 and TE 2 1 bits in the CRB CRA The control bits OF 1 0 and status bits IF 1 O are double buffered to and from SC 1 0 Double buffering the flags keeps the flags in sync with TX and RX The SC 1 0 flags are available in Synchronous mode only Each flag can be separately programmed The SCO flag is enabled when transmitter 1 is disabled TE1 0 The flag s direction is selected by the SCDO bit When SCD0 is set SCO is configured as output When SCDO0 is cleared SCO is configured as input Similarly the SC1 flag is enabled when transmitter 2 is disabled TE2 0 and the SC1 signal is not configured as the transmitter 0 drive enabl
187. OLA Overview 1 1 Manual Conventions Chapter 6 Host Interface HI32 HI32 features signals architecture programming model reset interrupts external host programming model initialization and a quick reference to the HI32 programming model Chapter 7 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI Enhancements data and control signals programming model operating modes initialization exceptions and GPIO Chapter 8 Serial Communication Interface SCI Signals programming model operating modes reset initialization and GPIO Chapter 9 Triple Timer Module Architecture programming model and operating modes of three identical timer devices available for use as internals or event counters Appendix A Bootstrap Program Bootstrap code for the DSP56301 Appendix B Programming Reference Peripheral addresses interrupt addresses and interrupt priorities for the DSP56301 programming sheets list the contents of the major DSP56301 registers for programmer s reference 1 2 Manual Conventions This manual uses the following conventions Bits within registers are always listed from most significant bit MSB to least significant bit LSB Bits within a register are indicated AA n m n gt m when more than one bit is involved in a description For purposes of description the bits are presented as if they are contiguous within a register However this is not always the case Refer to the programming model diagrams or to
188. OLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 5 SCI Initialization Table 8 1 SCI Registers After Reset Continued Reset Type Register Bit Mnemonic Bit Number HW Reset SW Reset IR Reset ST Reset SSR R8 7 0 0 0 0 FE 6 0 0 0 0 PE 5 0 0 0 0 OR 4 0 0 0 0 IDLE 3 0 0 0 0 RDRF 2 0 0 0 0 TDRE 1 1 1 1 1 TRNE 0 1 1 1 1 TCM 15 0 0 RCM 14 0 0 SCCR SCP 13 0 0 COD 12 0 0 CD 1 1 0 11 0 0 0 SRX SRX 23 0 23 16 15 8 7 0 STX STX 23 0 23 0 SRSH SRS 8 0 8 0 STSH STS 8 0 8 0 SRSH SCI receive shift register STSH SCI transmit shift register HW Hardware reset is caused by asserting the external RESET signal SW Software reset is caused by executing the RESET instruction IR Individual reset is caused by clearing PCRE bits 0 2 configured for GPIO ST Stop reset is caused by executing the STOP instruction 1 The bit is set during this reset 0 The bit is cleared during this reset The bit is not changed during this reset 8 4 SCI Initialization The SCI is initialized as follows 1 Ensure that the SCI is in its individual reset state PCRE 0 Use a hardware RESET signal or software RESET instruction 2 Program the SCI control registers 3 Configure at least one SCI signal as an SCI signal If interrupts are to be used the signals must be selected and global interr
189. Occurs when the receive interrupt is enabled the receive data register is full and no receive error conditions exist A read of RX clears the pending interrupt This error free interrupt can use a fast interrupt service routine for minimum overhead AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 7 Operation Note Note ESSI receive last slot interrupt Occurs when the ESSI is in Network mode and the last slot of the frame has ended This interrupt is generated regardless of the receive mask register setting The receive last slot interrupt can signal that the receive mask slot register can be reset the DMA channels can be reconfigured and data memory pointers can be reassigned Using the receive last slot interrupt guarantees that the previous frame is serviced with the previous setting and the new frame is serviced with the new setting without synchronization problems The maximum time it takes to service a receive last slot interrupt should not exceed N 1 ESSI bits service time where N is the number of bits the ESSI can transmit per time slot ESSI transmit data with exception status Occurs when the transmit exception interrupt is enabled at least one transmit data register of the enabled transmitters is empty and a transmitter underrun error has occurred This exception sets the SSISR TUE bit The TUE bit is cleared when you first read the SSISR and then write to all the transmit data registers of the enabled
190. PCI Target Abort TAB 6 40 PCI Target Disconnect TDIS bit 6 40 PCI Target Retry TRTY bit 6 39 PCI Time Out Termination TO bit 6 39 A MOTOROLA PCI only registers DSP PCI Address Register DPAR 6 33 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC 6 30 DSP PCI Port Control Register DPCR 6 26 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR 6 38 Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI 1 5 configuration registers 6 44 illegal events 6 46 PCI Specification Revision 2 0 6 1 Peripheral I O Expansion Bus 1 10 peripheral programming 5 1 personal software reset state 6 12 HI32 6 12 Phase Lock Loop PLL 2 5 signals 2 1 2 5 Phase Lock Loop PLL Initial PINIT state 2 5 PINIT 4 21 PLL 1 9 PLL Capacitor PCAP 2 5 PLL Control PCTL register 4 21 Clock Output Disable COD 4 21 Crystal Range XTLR 4 21 Division Factor DF 4 21 PLL Enable PEN 4 21 PLL Multiplication Factor MF 4 21 PLL Stop State PSTP 4 21 Predivider Factor PD 4 21 programming sheet B 17 XTAL Disable XTLD 4 21 PLL Enable PEN bit 4 21 PLL Stop State PSTP bit 4 21 polling 5 2 Port A 2 6 4 22 Port B 5 5 GPIO 2 3 5 5 programming sheet B 40 Port C 2 2 2 23 5 6 control registers 7 36 Port C Control Register PCRC 7 36 programming sheet B 41 Port C Data Register PDRC 7 38 programming sheet B 41 Port C Direction Register PRRC 7 37 programming sheet B 41 Port D 2 2 2 25 5 6 control registers 7 36 Port D Control Register PCRD 7 36 program
191. PDRC i pr PDRD i bit is reflected as a value on the output signal line Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears all PDRC and PDRD bits 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PDRx5 PDRx4 PDRx3 PDRx2 PDRx1 PDRx0 Note For bits 5 0 the value represents the level that is written to or read from the associated signal line if it is enabled as a GPIO signal by the respective port control register PCRC or PCRD bits For ESSIO the GPIO signals are PC 5 0 For ESSI1 the GPIO signals are PD 5 0 The corresponding data bits for Port C GPIOs are PDRC 5 0 The corresponding data bits for Port D GPIOs are PDRD 5 0 Reserved Read as zero Write with zero for future compatibility Figure 7 20 Port Data Registers PDRC X FFFFBD PDRD X FFFFAD 7 38 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Chapter 8 Serial Communication Interface SCI The DSP56301 Serial Communication Interface SCI provides a full duplex port for serial communication with other DSPs microprocessors or peripherals such as modems The SCI interfaces without additional logic to peripherals that use TTL level signals With a small amount of additional logic the SCI can connect to peripheral interfaces that have non TTL level signals such as RS 232 RS 422 and so on This interface uses three dedicated signals transmit data receive data and S
192. PRRE i is cleared the GPIO port signal i is configured as input A hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears all PRRE bits 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PRRE2 PRRE1 PRREO Note For bits 2 0 a 0 configures PEn as a GPI and a 1 configures PEn as a GPO For the SCI the GPIO signals are PE 2 0 The corresponding direction bits for Port E GPIOs are PRRE 2 0 Reserved Read as zero Write with zero for future compatibility Figure 8 9 Port E Direction Register PRRE X FFFF9E 8 7 3 Port E Data Register PDRE Bits 2 0 of the read write 24 bit PDRE writes data to or reads data from the associated SCI signal lines when configured as GPIO signals If a port signal PE i is configured as an input GPI the corresponding PDRE i bit reflects the value present on the input signal line If a port signal PE i is configured as an output GPO a value written to the corresponding PDRE i bit is reflected as a value on the output signal line Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears all PDR bits 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PDRE2 PDRE1 PDREO Note For bits 2 0 the value represents the level that is written to or read from the associated signal line if enabled as a GPIO signal by the PCRE bits For SC
193. QU M_SCCR EQU M_SCR EQU and the SCI frequency DO00000 D00409 2 SFFFF 93 SFFFF95 SFFFF 98 SFFFF 9B SFFFF9C AAR1 selects the EPROM as C is programmed to 1 400 of the chip D t mapped as P from D00000 to SDFFFFF active low Address Attribute Pin Polarity SCT 7 SCT 7 SCL z SCL SCL Status Register Transmit Data Register low Receive Data Register low Clock Control Register Control Register A 6 DSP56301 User s Manual M_SCTE EQU 9 M_TDRE EQU 1 M_RDRF EQU 2 PCRE EQU SFFFF9F DCTR EQU SFFFFC5 DPMC EQU SFFFFC7 DPAR EQU SFFFFC8 DSR EQU SFFFFC9 DRXR EQU SFFFFCB AAR1 EQU SFFFFF8 I PDRC EQU SFFFFBD I PRRC EQU SFFFFBE SCKO EQU 3 ORG PL Sf 0000 PL Sf 0000 START clr a 0a X0 move 3e x1 movec omr al and Sf a move al n0 move TABLE r0 TABLE Table is here becaus jmp r0 n0 one bra lt EPROMLD two bra lt SCILD three bra lt BURN four bra lt SEREPROM five bra lt ISAHOSTLD six bra lt UB2HOSTLD seven bra lt UB1HOSTLD eight nop nine bra lt EPROMLD ten bra lt SCILD eleven bra lt UB3HOSTLD twelve bra lt PCIHOSTLD thirteen bra lt ISAHOSTLD fourteen bra lt UB2HOSTLD fifteen D D D D D D D D D D D D D SCI Transmitter Enable r Transmit Data Register Empty Receive Data Register Full Port E DSP CON I MA
194. R Counter TCR N NA lt lt M M 1 TCPR M TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 TOF Overflow Interrupt if TOIE 1 float TIO pin INV 0 float high TIO pin INV 1 TIO can connect to the RESET pin internal hardware preserves the TIO value and direction for an additional 2 5 clocks to ensure a reset of valid length Figure 9 19 Watchdog Toggle Mode low 9 24 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module Programming Model 9 3 4 3 Reserved Modes Modes 8 11 12 13 14 and 15 are reserved 9 3 5 Special Cases The following special cases apply during wait and stop state Timer behavior during wait Timer clocks are active during the execution of the WAIT instruction and timer activity is undisturbed If a timer interrupt is generated the DSP56301 leaves the wait state and services the interrupt Timer behavior during stop During execution of the STOP instruction the timer clocks are disabled timer activity stops and the TIO signals are disconnected Any external changes that happen to the TIO signals are ignored when the DSP56301 is in stop state To ensure correct operation disable the timers before the DSP56301 is placed in stop state 9 3 6 DMA Trigger Each timer can also trigger DMA transfers if a DMA channel is programmed to be triggered by a timer event The timer issues a DMA trigger on every event in all modes of operation To ensure that all
195. R HM 0 When DCTR HM2 0 is written with a value of 0 and the HI32 is in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 the HI32 is an active PCI master The HI32 generates a master initiated termination If it is a selected target in a memory space transaction the HI32 generates a target disconnect C retry event thus completing the PCI transaction When the PCI idle state is subsequently detected the HI32 clears DSR HACT and enters the personal software reset state In personal software reset state all data paths are cleared and the HI32 responds to all memory and configuration space transactions with a retry event If the HI32 is not in an active target in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 memory space transaction the HI32 immediately clears DSR HACT in the DSR and enters the personal software PS reset state Clearing the DCTR HM bits does not affect configuration space transactions In the personal software reset the HI32 consumes very little current This is a low power state For even greater power savings the HI32 can be programmed to the GPIO mode 6 5 2 PCI Mode DCTR HM 1 The HI32 supports Glueless connection to the standard PCI bus m Operation as an initiator master or target slave m 24 to 32 bit 32 to 24 bit data formatting and true 32 bit Dword data transfers Memory space and configuration transactions as a target Memory space I O space and configuration transactions as an initiator Note For proper operation CLKOUT s
196. RQA pin 00001 External IRQB pin 00010 External IRQC pin 00011 External IRQD pin 00100 Transfer done from channel 0 00101 Transfer done from channel 1 00110 Transfer done from channel 2 00111 Transfer done from channel 3 01000 Transfer done from channel 4 01001 Transfer done from channel 5 01010 ESSIO receive data RDFO 1 01011 ESSIO transmit data TDEO 1 01100 ESSI1 receive data RDF1 1 01101 ESSI1 transmit data TDE1 1 01110 SCI receive data RDRF 1 01111 SCI transmit data TDRE 1 10000 TimerO TCFO 1 10001 Timer1 TCF1 1 10010 Timer2 TCF2 1 10011 Host receive data full HRDF 1 10100 Host transmit data empty HTDE 1 10101 11111 Reserved Peripheral requests 18 21 DRS 4 0 111xx can serve as fast request sources Unlike a regular peripheral request in which the peripheral can not generate a second request until the first one is served a fast peripheral has a full duplex handshake to the DMA enabling a maximum throughput of a trigger every two clock cycles This mode is functional only in the Word Transfer mode that is DTM 001 or 101 In the Fast Request mode the DMA sets an enable line to the peripheral If required the peripheral can send the DMA a one cycle triggering pulse This pulse resets the enable line If the DMA decides by the priority algorithm that this trigger will be served in the next cycle the enable line is set again even before the corresponding regi
197. RRE and Port E data register PDRE Chapter 8 Serial Communication Interface SCI discusses these registers DSP56301 Port E GPIO RXD PEO Serial TXD PE Communications Interface SCI Port SCLK PE2 Figure 5 5 Port E Signals 5 6 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA General Purpose Input Output GPIO 5 4 5 Triple Timer Signals and Registers Each of the three triple timer interface signals TIOO TIO2 not used as a timer signal can be configured as a GPIO signal Each signal is controlled by the appropriate timer control status register TCSR 0 2 Chapter 9 Triple Timer Module discusses these registers DSP56301 Timer GPIO TIOO TIOO a TO TIO1 TIO2 TIO2 Figure 5 6 Triple Timer Signals Y MOTOROLA Programming the Peripherals 5 7 General Purpose Input Output GPIO 5 8 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Chapter 6 Host Interface HI32 The Host Interface HI32 is a fast parallel host port up to 32 bits wide that can directly connect to the host bus The HI32 supports a variety of standard buses and provides glueless connection with a number of industry standard microcomputers microprocessors DSPs and DMA controllers The DSP56300 core controls host port pin functionality and polarity The host bus can operate asynchronously to the DSP clock so the HI32 registers are divided into two banks the host side bank which is accessible to the external host and the DSP side bank which is accessible to the DSP56300
198. RRQ host interrupt requests are disabled The host interrupt request HIRQ pin is asserted if HRRQ is set HDRQ is deasserted If DMAE is set RREQ enables the host DMA request HDRQ pin when the host receive data request HRRQ status bit in the HSTR is set If RREQ is cleared HRRQ host DMA requests are disabled If RREQ is set the host DMA request HDRQ pin is asserted if HRRQ is set HIRQ is deasserted high impedance if HIRD 0 in the DCTR Note In a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 when both the TREQ and RREQ control bits in the HCTR are cleared host interrupt request strobe acknowledge hardware handshake using the HIRQ Data Strobe HTA pins is disabled The host can poll the HTRQ and HSTR HRRQ status bits or use the host data strobe acknowledge hardware handshake using the Data Strobe HTA pins DMAE TREQ RREQ HIRQ Pin HDR Q pin 0 0 0 deasserted HRRQ high impedance HTRQ polling 0 1 0 HTRQ Host Interrupt high impedance Request Enabled 0 1 1 HRRQ HTRQ Interrupt high impedance Requests Enabled 1 0 D deasserted high impedance 1 0 1 deasserted HRRQ DMA Request Enabled 1 1 0 deasserted HTRQ DMA Request Enabled 1 1 1 deasserted HRRQ HTRQ Host DMA Requests Enabled MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 55 Host Side Programming Model Table 6 22 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit l Reset
199. SL1 RX Word CRB FSR Clock CRA DC4 0 Internal Rx Frame Sync 0 31 Receive Control Logic CRB SCD1 Sync TX 2 Flagi or drive enb Async RX F S SYN 1 These signals are identical in sync mode TX Flagi Out or drive en Flagi In TX 2 Flagi Out or drive enb SSISR IF1 Syne Mode RB TE2 CRB OF1 CRA SSC1 CRB FSL 1 0 CRB FSR y Sync Mode TX Word CRB SCD2 Clock CRA DC4 0 Internal TX Frame Sync 1 to 32 Transmit Control Logic Sync TX RX F S Async TX F S Frame Sync Figure 7 4 ESSI Frame Sync Generator Functional Block Diagram MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 17 ESSI Programming Model 7 5 2 ESSI Control Register B CRB CRB is one of two read write control registers that direct the operation of the ESSI see Figure 7 5 The CRB bit definitions are presented in Table 7 4 CRB controls the ESSI multifunction signals SC 2 0 which can be used as clock inputs or outputs frame synchronization signals transmit data signals or serial I O flag signals 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 REIE TEIE RLIE TLIE RIE TIE RE TEO TE1 TE2 MOD SYN 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CKP FSP FSR FSL1 FSLO SHFD SCKD SCD2 SCD1 SCDO OF 1 OFO ESSIO X FFFFB6 ESSI1 X FFFFA6 Figure 7 5 ESSI Control Register B CRB The CRB contains the serial output flag cont
200. SP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 11 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 22 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 21 IAE 0 Insert Address Enable In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 inserts the PCI transaction address at the head of the incoming data stream in accordance with the value of the host data transfer format HTF bits in the HCTR When IAE is set the HI32 writes the PCI transaction address to the HTXR before the data written by the host if the HI32 is accessed in a write transaction In 32 bit mode the two least significant bytes of the PCI transaction address are written to the two least significant bytes of the HTXR Then the two most significant bytes of the PCI transaction address are inserted as OOHHHH 00LLLL where HHHH HAD 31 16 and LLLL HAD 15 0 If HCTR HTF 0 only the two least significant bytes of the PCI transaction address are written to the two least significant bytes of the HTXR the address is inserted as 00LLLL where LLLL HAD 15 0 The incoming data is written to the HTXR after the address IAE is ignored when the HI32 is not in the PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The value of IAE can change only when DSR HACT 0 or HDTC 1 When the HI32 is in PCI mode the Insert Address Enable control bit IAE 1 can be set only when the Receive Buffer Lock Enable co
201. SSIs in the DSP56301 ESSIO and ESSI1 For simplicity a single generic ESSI is described here The ESSI block diagram is shown in Figure 7 1 This interface is synchronous because all serial transfers are synchronized to one clock SRD STD sco TX2 SHIFT SC1 Interrupts Clock Frame Sync Generators and Control Logic Figure 7 1 ESSI Block Diagram SC2 SCK MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 1 ESSI Enhancements Note This synchronous interface should not be confused with the asynchronous channels mode of the ESSI in which separate clocks are used for the receiver and transmitter In that mode the ESSI is still a synchronous device because all transfers are synchronized to these clocks Pin notations for the generic ESSI refer to the analogous pin of ESSIO PCx and ESSI1 PDx Additional synchronization signals delineate the word frames The Normal mode of operation transfers data at a periodic rate one word per period The Network mode is similar in that it is also for periodic transfers however it supports up to 32 words time slots per period The Network mode can be used to build time division multiplexed TDM networks In contrast the On Demand mode is for nonperiodic transfers of data This mode which offers a subset of the Motorola Serial Peripheral Interface SPI protocol can transfer data serially at high speed when the data become available Since each ESSI unit can be configured
202. ST DSP PC DSP PC Control register ROL REGISTER DCTR R CONTROL REGISTER DPMC e I ADDRESS REGISTER DPAR DSP STA US REGISTER DSR DSP RE C EIVE DATA FIFO DRXR Address Attribute Register 1 Port C GPIO Data Register Port C Direction Register SCKO is bit 3 as GPIO bootstrap code starts at ff0000 clear a and load X0 with constant 0a0000 X1 3E0000 prepare for UB mode host programming UB HIRQ_ pin drive high enabled HM 3 HIRD 1 HIRH 1 HRSP 1 HTAP 0 HDSM 0 HIRQ_ pin handshake enabled HRST pin active low HTA pin active high Double strobe pin mode enabled modd is not don t care Reserv MD MC MD MC Reserv MD MC ed MB it should actuallly start from 1 currently aliased to b1001 A 0001 load from eprom MA 0010 load from SCI used for burn in MA 0011 burn MA 0100 Serial EPROM currently aliased to b1101 MA 0101 16 bit UB ISA mode MA 0110 UB double strobe currently aliased to b1111 A 0111 UB single strobe xternal boot MA 1001 load from eprom MA 1010 load from SCI MA 1011 301 to 301 boot MA 1100 PCI 32 bit MA 1101 16 bit UB ISA mode MA 1110 UB double strobe AA MOTOROLA DSP56301 User s Manual A 7 DH bra lt
203. Space Bits 1 0 10100 Host Transmit Data Empty DSS 1 0 DMA Source Memory 10101 11111 Reserved 00 X Memory Space 01 Y Memory Space 10 P Memory Space 11 Reserved 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 SEN DAMS DMA Onan Registers ES DOE et X FFFFD8 X FFFFDC X FFFFEO Reset 000000 X FFFFE4 X FFFFE8 X FFFFEC Read Write Figure B 9 DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 21 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 1 of 10 Host Processor HI32 HI32 Mode Bits 22 20 Control HI32 operating modes as follows 000 Terminate and Reset 001 PCI 010 Universal Bus Enhanced Universal Bus GPIO Self Configuration Reserved Reserved Host Interrupt Request Drive Control Bit 19 0 HIRQ pin is an open drain output 1 HIRQ pin is always driven Host Interrupt Request Handshake Mode Bit 18 0 HIRQ is asserted for specified number of core clock cycles which is set in the CLAT LT 1 HIRQ is deasserted when interrupt request source is cleared Host Reset Polarity Bit 17 0 HRST pin is active high and the HI32 is reset if the HRST pin is high 1 HRST pin is active low and the HI32 is reset if the HRST pin is low Host DMA Request Polarity Bit 16 0 HDRQ pin is active high 1 HDRQ pin is
204. T HRST pin 6 12 HSERR Force SERF bit 6 28 HSERR pin 6 66 A MOTOROLA T O space X data memory 3 4 Y data memory 3 5 Idle Line Flag IDLE bit 8 18 Idle Line Interrupt Enable ILIE bit 8 13 Idle Line Wakeup mode 8 3 illegal PCI events 6 46 initialization system 5 1 initializing the timer 9 3 input data alignment 6 3 Insert Address Enable IAE bit 6 27 instruction cache 1 5 3 2 location 3 6 instruction cache controller 1 4 internal buses 1 10 internal memory configuration summary 3 6 internal program memory 3 1 3 2 interrupt 1 8 configuring 4 15 source priorities 4 19 sources 4 16 4 17 table 4 15 table memory map 4 17 trigger mode 4 17 vector 4 17 interrupt and mode control 2 1 2 9 interrupt control 2 9 Interrupt Line IL 7 0 bits 6 73 Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration Register CILP Interrupt Line IL 7 0 6 73 Interrupt Pin IP 7 0 6 73 MAX_LAT ML 7 0 6 73 MIN_GNT MG 7 0 6 73 Interrupt Mask I bits 4 10 Interrupt Pin IP 7 0 bits 6 73 Interrupt Priority Register Core IPRC 4 16 IRQD IRQA Priority and Mode IDL IAL 4 16 programming sheet B 15 Interrupt Priority Register Peripherals IPRP 4 16 ESSIO Interrupt Priority Level SOL 4 16 ESSI1 Interrupt Priority Level S1L 4 16 HI32 Interrupt Priority Level HPL 4 16 programming sheet B 16 SCI Interrupt Priority Level SCL 4 16 Timer Interrupt Priority Level TOL 4 16 Interrupt Request A IRQA 2 9 Interrupt Request B IRQB 2 9
205. TACK function that can extend an external bus cycle indefinitely Any number of wait states 1 2 infinity may be added to the wait states inserted by the bus control register BCR by keeping TA deasserted In typical operation TA is deasserted at the start of a bus cycle is asserted to enable completion of the bus cycle and is deasserted before the next bus cycle The current bus cycle completes one clock period after TA is asserted synchronous to CLKOUT The number of wait states is determined by the TA input or by the BCR whichever is longer The BCR can be used to set the minimum number of wait states in external bus cycles To use the TA functionality the BCR must be programmed to at least one wait state A zero wait state access cannot be extended by TA deassertion otherwise improper operation may result TA can operate synchronously or asynchronously depending on the setting of the OMR TAS bit TA functionality must not be used while DRAM accesses are performed otherwise improper operation may result Note For operations that do not use the TA bus control function pull this pin low Output Output deasserted Bus Request Asserted when the DSP requests bus mastership and deasserted when the DSP no longer needs the bus BR is asserted or deasserted independently of whether the DSP56301 is a bus master or a bus slave Bus parking allows BR to be deasserted even though the DSP56301 is the bus maste
206. TOROLA Host Interface HI32 Table 2 12 Host Port Pins HI32 Continued Signal Universal Bus Mode Name ES Enhanced Universal Bus Mode GPIO HP 18 16 HC3 HBE3 HC0 HBEO HA 2 0 HIO 18 16 Bus Command Byte Enable Host Address Bus GPIO Tri state bidirectional bus Input pin During the address phase of a Selects HI32 register to access HA 10 3 transaction HC3 HBE3 HC0 HBEO select the HI32 and HA 2 0 select the define the bus command During the particular register of the HI32 to be accessed Hm are used as byte enables The byte Reserved ER HC3 HBE3 enables determine which byte lanes Must be forced or pulled to Vcc or GND GPIO carry meaningful data HP20 HTRDY HDBEN Host Target Ready Host Data Bus Enable HIO20 Sustained tri state bidirectional pin 2 Output pin GPIO Indicates the target agent s ability to Asserted during HI32 accesses complete the current data phase of When asserted the external optional data the transaction HTRDY is used in transceiver outputs are enabled When conjunction with HIRDY When a data deasserted the external transceiver outputs phase is completed on any clock both are high impedance HIRDY and HTRDY are sampled asserted HTRDY is asserted if E during a data read valid data is present on HAD31 HADO HRRQ 1 in the HSTR BR during a data write it indicates the HI32 is ready to accept data HTRQ 1 in the HSTR BR during a v
207. TOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 23 Operating Modes 9 3 4 2 Watchdog Toggle Mode 10 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 1 0 1 0 10 Toggle Watchdog Output Internal In Mode 10 the timer toggles an external signal after a preset period The TIO signal is set to the value of the INV bit When the counter equals the value in the TCPR TCSR TCF is set and a compare interrupt is generated if the TCSR TCIE bit is also set If the TCSR TRM bit is set the counter loads with the TLR value on the next timer clock and the count resumes Therefore TRM 1 is not useful for watchdog functions If the TCSR TRM bit is cleared the counter continues to increment on each subsequent timer clock When a counter overflow occurs the polarity of the TIO output signal is inverted The counter is reloaded whenever the TLR is written with a new value while the TCSR TE bit is set This process repeats until the timer is disabled In Mode 10 internal logic preserves the TIO value and direction for an additional 2 5 internal clock cycles after the hardware RESET signal is asserted This convention ensures that a valid reset signal is generated when the TIO signal resets the DSP56301 Mode 10 internal clock TRM 0 first event TRM 1 is not useful for watchdog function N write preload M write compare TE Clock CLK 2 or prescale CLK TL
208. TR 1 TREQ Transmit Request 0 HTRQ interrupt disabled 0 Enable 1 HTRQ interrupt enabled e RREQ_ Receive Request 0 HRRQ interrupt disabled 0 Enable 1 HRRQ interrupt enabled 5 3 HF 2 0 Host Flags 0 DMAE DMA Enable 0 HI32 does not support DMA 0 6 ISA EISA 1 transfers HI32 supports ISA DMA type transfers SFT Slave Fetch Type 0 Pre fetch 0 7 1 Fetch HTF 1 0 Host Transmit Data PCI UBM 0 Transfer Format 00 32 bit mode 24 bit mode 9 8 01 3 LSBs 2 Right zero ext 10 3 LSBs 2 Right sign ext 11 3 MSbs 2 Left zero filled HRF 1 0 Host Receive Data PCI UBM 0 Transfer Format 00 32 bit mode 24 bit mode 10 44 01 3 Right zero ext 2 LSBs 10 3 Right sign ext 2 LSBs 11 3 Left zero filled 2 middle bytes 16 14 HS 2 0 Host Semaphores 0 2 TWSD Target Wait State 0 HI82 target inserts up to 8 0 19 Disable wait states 1 HI32 target does not insert wait states HSTR TRDY Transmitter Ready 1 transmit FIF O 6 deep is 1 1 0 empty 0 transmit FIFO is not empty HTRQ Host Transmit Data 1 host transmit FIFO is not full 1 1 Request D bost transmit FIFO is full HRRQ Host Receive Data 0 host receive FIFO is empty 0 0 2 Request 1 host receive FIFO is not empty 5 3 HF 5 3 Host Flags 0 S 6 HINT Host Interrupt A 0 HINTA pin is high impedance 0 1 HINTA pin is driven low HREQ Hoer Request 0 HIRQ pin is deasserted 0 7 1 HIRQ pin is asserted if enabled 6 78 DSP56301
209. TXA In Asynchronous mode when data is to be transmitted STXL STXM and STXH are used When STXL is written the low byte on the data bus is transferred to the STX When STXM is written the middle byte is transferred to the STX When STXH is written the high byte is transferred to the STX This structure makes it easy for the programmer to unpack the bytes in a 24 bit word for transmission TDXA should be written in 11 bit asynchronous multidrop mode when the data is an address and the programmer wants to set the ninth bit the address bit When STXA is written the data from the low byte on the data bus is stored in it The address data bit is cleared in 11 bit asynchronous multidrop mode when any of STXL STXM or STXH is written When either STX STXL STXM or STXH or STXA is written TDRE is cleared The transfer from either STX or STXA to the transmit shift register occurs automatically but not immediately after the last bit from the previous word is shifted out that is the transmit shift register is empty Like the receiver the transmitter is double buffered However a delay of two to four serial clock cycles occurs between when the data is transferred from either STX or STXA to the transmit shift register and when the first bit appears on the TXD signal A serial clock cycle is the time required to transmit one data bit The transmit shift register is not directly addressable and there is no dedicated flag for this register Becaus
210. UB PCI UB PCI UB PCI UB PCI UB PCI UB PCI Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility UB Universal Bus mode PCI PCI mode Figure 6 5 DSP Control Register DCTR Table 6 10 DSP Control Register DCTR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name eset Mode Description Value 23 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 22 20 HM 2 0 0 All HI32 Mode modes Control the operation modes and pin functionality of the HI32 Values are as follows 000 Terminate and Reset 001 PCl 010 Universal Bus 011 Enhanced Universal Bus 100 GPIO 101 Self Configuration 110 Reserved 111 Reserved AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 23 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 10 DSP Control Register DCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name eee Mode Description Value 19 HIRD 0 UB Host Interrupt Request Drive Conirol Controls the output drive of the HIRQ pin when the HI32 is in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 When HIRD is cleared the HIRQ pin is an open drain output that is driven low when asserted released high impedance when deasserted When HIRD is set the HIRQ pin is always driven The value of HIRD can be changed only when DSR HACT 0 HIRD is ignored when the HI32 is not ina Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 Note The HDSM HRWP HTAP HDRP HRSP HIRH and HIRD bits affect the host port pins directly To as
211. UB1HOSTLD MD MC MB MA 1111 UB single strobe This is the routine that loads from the Host Interface in UB UNIVERSAL mode with single strob pin configuration RD WR DS MC MA x111 Host UB UB1HOSTLD DH DH DH Daer 13 x1 HDSM 1 Double strob pin mode disabled This is the routine that loads from the Host Interface in UB UNIVERSAL mode with double strobe pin configuration RD WR MD MC MB MA x110 Host UB UB2HOSTLD movep x1 X M_DCTR Configure HI32 in UB mode Single or Double strobe do 6 _LOOPO read of words and start address jclr 2 X M_DSR Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready movep X M_DRXR a2 S asr 8 a a Shift 8 bit data into Al _ LOOPO move al r0 starting address for load move al rl save it in rl DH a0 holds the number of words Download P memory through UB do a0 _LOOP1 Load instruction words do 3 _LOOP2 for each byte _LBLA jset 2 X M_DSR _LBLB Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready jclr 3 X M_DSR _LBLA If HFO 1 stop loading new data enddo Must terminate the do loop bra lt TERMINATE Terminate loop enddo and finish _LBLB movep X M_DRXR a2 Store 16 bit data in accumulator asr 8 a a Shift 8 bit data into Al _LOOP2 and go get another 24 bit word movem al p r0 Store 24 bit data in P mem nop movem cannot be at LA _LOOP1 and go get another 24 bit word bra lt FINIS
212. UE in the ESSI status register are set When TEIE is cleared this interrupt is disabled The use of the transmit interrupt is documented in Section 7 3 3 Exceptions on page 7 7 A read of the status register followed by a write to all the data registers of the enabled transmitters clears both TUE and the pending interrupt 21 RLIE 0 Receive Last Slot Interrupt Enable Enables disables an interrupt after the last slot of a frame ends when the ESSI is in Network mode When RLIE is set the DSP is interrupted after the last slot in a frame ends regardless of the receive mask register setting When RLIE is cleared the receive last slot interrupt is disabled The use of the receive last slot interrupt is documented in Section 7 3 3 Exceptions on page 7 7 RLIE is disabled when the ESSI is in On Demand mode DC 0 20 TLIE 0 Transmit Last Slot Interrupt Enable Enables disables an interrupt at the beginning of the last slot of a frame when the ESSI is in Network mode When TLIE is set the DSP is interrupted at the start of the last slot in a frame regardless of the transmit mask register setting When TLIE is cleared the transmit last slot interrupt is disabled The transmit last slot interrupt is documented in Section 7 3 3 Exceptions on page 7 7 TLIE is disabled when the ESSI is in On Demand mode DC 0 19 RIE 0 Receive Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP receive data interrupt the interrupt is generated when both t
213. User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 Programming Model Quick Reference HI32 Registers Quick Reference Bit Reset Type Reg Comments Num Mnemonic Name Val Function HS PH PS HCVR HC Host Command 0 jno host command pending cleared when 0 0 1 host command pending the HC interrupt request is serviced 74 HV 6 0 Host Command Vector default vector default vector HNMI Host Non Maskable 0 ja maskable interrupt request 0 15 Interrupt Request 1 ja non maskable interrupt request HRXM 31 0 Host Master Receive empty Data FIFO HRXS 31 0 Host Slave Receive empty Data FIFO HTXR 31 0 Host Transmit Data empty FIFO CVID 15 0 VID 15 0 Vendor ID hardwired 1057 CDID 1057 DID 15 0 Device ID hardwired 1801 31 16 1801 CCMR MSE Memory Space Enable 0 memory space response 0 CSTR i 1 disabled memory space response enabled 2 BM Bus Master Enable 0 HI32 PCI bus master disabled 0 1 HI32 PCI bus master enabled PERR Parity Error Response 0 HI32 does not drive HPERR 0 6 1 HI32 drives HPERR if a parity error is detected 7 WCC Wait Cycle Control 0 HI32 never executes address hardwired 0 stepping 8 SERE System Error Enable 0 HI32 does not drive HSERR 0 1 HI32 can drive HSERR FBBC Fast Back to Back 1 HI32 supports fast hardwired 1 23 Capable back to back transactions as
214. W 2 0 111 7 wait states Bus Area 3 Wait State Control Defines the number of wait states one through seven inserted in each external SRAM access to Area 3 DRAM accesses are not affected by these bits Area 3 is the area defined by AARS Note Do not program the value of these bits as zero since SRAM memory access requires at least one wait state When four through seven wait states are selected one additional wait state is inserted at the end of the access This trailing wait state increases the data hold time and the memory release time and does not increase the memory access time 12 10 BA2W 2 0 111 7 wait states Bus Area 2 Wait State Control Defines the number of wait states one through seven inserted into each external SRAM access to Area 2 DRAM accesses are not affected by these bits Area 2 is the area defined by AAR2 Note Do not program the value of these bits as zero since SRAM memory access requires at least one wait state When four through seven wait states are selected one additional wait state is inserted at the end of the access This trailing wait state increases the data hold time and the memory release time and does not increase the memory access time BA1W 4 0 11111 31 wait states Bus Area 1 Wait State Control Defines the number of wait states one through 31 inserted into each external SRAM access to Area 1 DRAM accesses are not affected by these bits Area
215. W 40 BAD Bus Control Register BCR X FFFFFB Read Write Reset 1FFFFF Figure B 6 Bus Control Register BCR DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 2 of 3 Bus Interface Unit NOTE All DCR bits are read write control bits Refresh Prescaler Bit 23 Bus Software Triggered P lerb d Refresh Bit 14 O lesealcr by Passe 0 Refresh complete reset 1 Divide by 64 prescaler used 1 Software triggered refresh request Bus Row Out of Page Wait States Bits 3 2 Refresh Request Rate Bits 22 15 Bus Refresh 00 4 wait states These read write control bits define Gelee pit 13 01 8 wait states the refresh request rate The bits a0 10 11 wait states specify a divide from 1 256 1 Enable 11 15 wait states BRF 7 0 00 FF A refresh request is generated every time Bus Mastership the refresh counter reaches zero Enable Bit 12 Bus In Page if the refresh counter is enabled 0 Disable Wait States Bits 1 0 i e BREN 1 1 Enable 00 1 wait state 01 2 wait states GE 10 3 wait states 0 Disable 11 4 wait states 1 Enable Bus DRAM Page Size Bits 9 8 00 9 bit column width 512 01 10 bit column width 1 K 10 11 bit column width 2 K 11 12 bit column width 4 K Mp Pat Oem 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 T DRAM Control Register DCR X FFFFFA Read Write Reset 000000 Res
216. Y HDBEN HIO20 HP21 HIRDY HDBDR HIO21 HP22 HDEVSEL HSAK HIO22 HP23 HLOCK HBS Schmitt trigger buffer on input pull up HIO23 if not used HP24 HPAR HDAK Schmitt trigger buffer on input pull disconnected up if not used HP25 HPERR HDRQ disconnected HP26 HGNT HAEN disconnected HP27 HREQ HTA disconnected HP28 HSERR HIRQ disconnected HP29 HSTOP HWR HRW Schmitt trigger buffer on input disconnected HP30 HIDSEL HRD HDS Schmitt trigger buffer on input disconnected HP31 HFRAME Unused must be pulled up disconnected HP32 HCLK Unused must be pulled up HP33 HAD16 pull up or down if not used HD8 disconnected HP34 HAD17 pull up or down if not used HD9 disconnected HP35 HAD18 pull up or down if not used HD10 disconnected HP36 HAD19 pull up or down if not used HD11 disconnected HP37 HAD20 pull up or down if not used HD12 disconnected HP38 HAD21 pull up or down if not used HD13 disconnected HP39 HAD22 pull up or down if not used HD14 disconnected MOTOROLA Signals Connections Host Interface HI32 Table 2 11 Summary of HI32 Signals and Modes Continued ho PCI Mode Enhanced Universal Bus Mode Universal Bus Mode GPIO Mode HP40 HAD23 pull up or down if not used HD15 disconnected HP41 HAD24 pull up or down if not used HD16 disconnected HP42 HAD25 pull up or down if not used HD17 disconnected HP43 HAD26 pull up or
217. a 16 bit bus for example ISA bus HP 48 41 must be forced or pulled up to Vcc or pulled down to GND Note Motorola recommends that you pull these unused data lines down Pulling the lines up sets the corresponding bits when the external host writes to the HCTR AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 21 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 0 Table 2 12 Host Port Pins HI32 Continued Signal Name Universal Bus Mode PCI Enhanced Universal Bus Mode GPIO HP49 HRST HRST Hardware Reset Hardware Reset Input pin Schmitt trigger input pin Forces the HI32 PCI sequencer to the Forces the HI82 to its initial state All pins are initial state All pins are forced to the forced to the disconnected state The polarity disconnected state of the HRST pin is controlled by HRSP bit in HRST is asynchronous to HCLK the DCTR HP50 HINTA Host Interrupt A Active low open drain output pin Used by the HI32 to request service from the host processor HINTA can connect to an interrupt request pin of a host processor a control input of external circuitry or be used as a general purpose open drain output HINTA is asserted by the HI32 when the DSP56300 core sets DCTR HINT HINTA is released high impedance when the DSP56300 core clears DCTR HINT HINTA is asynchronous to HCLK Notes 1 This list does not include Vcg and Ground supply pins The GPIO pin is
218. a target DPR Data Parity Reported DU Jno parity error detected cleared by 0 24 1 HI32 master parity error writing 1 detected or HPERR asserted 26 25 DST 1 0 DEVSEL Timing 01 medium DEVSEL timing hardwired 01 STA Signaled Target Abort 0 HI32 has not generated a cleared by 0 27 1 target abort event writing 1 HI32 target generated a target abort event RTA Received Target Abort 0 HI32 has not received a cleared by 0 28 1 target abort event writing 1 HI32 master received a target abort event MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 79 HI32 Programming Model Quick Reference HI32 Registers Quick Reference Bit Reset Type Reg Comments Num Mnemonic Name Val Function HS PH PS CCMR RMA Received Master Abort 0 HI32 has not received a cleared by 0 CSTR 29 master abort event writing 1 cont 1 HI32 master terminates a transaction with master abort 30 SSE Signaled System Error O HI32 not asserted HSERR jcleared by lt 0 1 HI32 asserted HSERR writing 1 31 DPE Detected Parity Error 0 Jno parity error detected cleared by 0 1 parity error detected writing 1 CRID 7 0 RID 7 0 Revision ID See Table6 26 CCCR Pl 7 0 PCI Device Program d s e 15 8 Interface 23 16 SC 7 0 PCI Device Sub Class S gt 31 24 BC 7 0 PC Device Base S z S Class CLAT 15 8 LT 7 0 Latency Timer
219. able the transmitters and receiver by clearing the TE 2 0 and RE bits Set the interrupt enable bits for the operating mode chosen 3 Enable the ESSI by setting the PCR bits to activate the input output signals to be used 4 Write initial data to the transmitters that are in use during operation This step is needed even if DMA services the transmitters 5 Enable the transmitters and receiver to be used Now the ESSI can be serviced by polling interrupts or DMA Once the ESSI is enabled Step 3 operation starts as follows 1 For internally generated clock and frame sync these signals start activity immediately after the ESSI is enabled 2 The ESSI receives data after a frame sync signal either internally or externally gener ated only when the receive enable RE bit is set 3 Data is transmitted after a frame sync signal either internally or externally generated only when the transmitter enable TE 2 0 bit is set 7 3 3 Exceptions The ESSI can generate six different exceptions They are discussed in the following paragraphs ordered from the highest to the lowest exception priority ESSI receive data with exception status Occurs when the receive exception interrupt is enabled the receive data register is full and a receiver overrun error has occurred This exception sets the ROE bit The ROE bit is cleared when you first read the SSISR and then read the Receive Data Register RX m ESSI receive data
220. able the timer Clearing TCSR TE disables the timer m The value to which the timer is to count is loaded into the TCPR This is true for all modes except the measurement modes modes 4 through 6 m The counter is loaded with the TLR value on the first clock m Ifthe counter overflows TCSR TOF is set and if TCSR TOIE is set an overflow interrupt is generated You can read the counter contents at any time from the Timer Count Register TCR 9 3 1 1 Timer GPIO Mode 0 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 0 0 0 0 0 GPIO Timer GPIO Internal In Mode 0 the timer generates an internal interrupt when a counter value is reached if the timer compare interrupt is enabled see Figure 9 3 and Figure 9 4 When the counter equals the TCPR value TCSR TCF is set and a compare interrupt is generated if the TCSR TCIE bit is set If the TCSR TRM bit is set the counter is reloaded with the TLR value at the next timer clock and the count is resumed If TCSR TRM is cleared the counter continues to increment on each timer clock signal This process repeats until the timer is disabled 9 6 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes Mode 0 internal clock no timer output TRM 1 N write preload first event last event M write compare TE Clock CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR Counter TCR TCPR TCF Compare Interrupt if
221. actor that is applied to the PLL input frequency The MF bits are cleared during DSP56301 hardware reset and thus correspond to an MF of one AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 21 Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers 4 6 Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers The three Bus Interface Unit BIU registers configure the external memory expansion port Port A They include the following Bus Control Register BCR DRAM Control Register DCR m Address Attribute Registers AAR 3 0 To use Port A correctly configure these registers as part of the bootstrap process The following subsections describe these registers 4 6 1 Bus Control Register The Bus Control Register BCR depicted in Figure 4 6 is a read write register that controls the external bus activity and Bus Interface Unit BIU operation All BCR bits except bit 21 BBS are read write bits The BCR bits are defined in Table 4 9 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 BRH BLH BBS BDFW4 BDFW3 BDFW2 BDFW1 BDFWO BA3W2 BA3W1 BA3WO BA2W2 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BA2W1 BA2W0 BA1W4 BA1W3 BA1W2 BA1W1 DAT WO BAOW4 BAOWS3 BAOW2 BAOW1 BAOWO Figure 4 6 Bus Control Register BCR Table 4 9 Bus Control Register BCR Bit Definitions Bil Bit Name Reset Value Description Number 23 BRH 0 Bus Request Hold Asserts the BR signal even if no external access i
222. adeusnsentunspaveanedadenetensooauvitensuaedereenies 9 23 Watchdog Toggle Mode EE EE 9 24 Timer Module Programmer s Model A sdegehgetetarengereiei et tage besuergte 9 26 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR viscces cecccssccseasecscetesscanaasdacranensaacslevecains 9 27 Timer Prescaler Count RegisterCh PCR EE 9 28 Timer Control Status Register CUCSR cisciss sas gecscncnstesetasdeeeccceavarceus eedeancesevagnesnens 9 28 Status Register SR wetted ne aie a aa ea eee B 13 Operating Mode Resister OMR cing eel peated nd og eles ees B 14 Interrupt Priority Register Core HERR Age B 15 Interrupt Priority Register Peripherals IPRP A B 16 Phase Locked Loop Control Register PCTL 0 0 eee ceecessecseeceseeeeeeeeaeeenaeenaes B 17 Bus Control Register BCEE ee de Se B 18 DRAM Control Register OCR EEN B 19 Address Attribute Registers A ART OI B 20 DSP56301 User s Manual xiii B 9 B 10 B 11 B 12 B 13 B 14 B 15 B 16 B 17 B 18 B 19 B 20 B 21 B 22 B 23 B 24 B 25 B 26 B 27 B 28 B 29 B 30 B 31 xiv DMA Control Registers 5 0 OODCRIN Ol ec eeeeeeeecceceseceeeteeeceneeeenneeeeseeeenaeeees B 21 DSP Control R sister DOCTR Jaris EE B 22 DSP PCI Control Resister DPCR E B 23 DSP PCI Master Control Register ODPMC B 24 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR esesssesssssssssessssssrssesssrssrsseessissesseessesseesresses B 25 His Control R gister Leg NEE B 26 Host Command Vector Register OHCNR B 27 Status Command C
223. al X I O memory space are listed in Section B 1 in Appendix B 3 3 Y Data Memory Space The Y data memory space consists of the following Internal Y data memory 2 K by default up to 3 K External I O space upper 128 locations Optional off chip memory expansion up to 64 K in 16 bit mode or 16 M in 24 bit mode Refer to the DSP56300 Family Manual especially Chapter 9 External Memory Interface Port A for details on using the external memory interface to access external Y data memory Note The Y memory space at FFOOOO FFEFFF is reserved and should not be accessed 3 3 1 Internal Y Data Memory The default on chip Y data RAM is a 24 bit wide internal static memory occupying the lowest 2 K 000 7FF of Y memory space The on chip Y data RAM is organized into 8 banks with 256 locations each Available Y data memory space is increased by 1 K through reallocation of program memory using the memory switch mode described in the next section 3 3 2 Memory Switch Modes Y Data Memory Memory switch mode reallocates of portions of program RAM to X and Y data memory Bit 7 in the OMR is the MS bit that controls this function as follows When the MS bit is cleared the Y data memory consists of the default 2 K x 24 bit memory space described in the previous section In this default mode the lowest external Y data memory location is 800 When the MS bit is set a portion of the higher locations of the internal program me
224. alid B6 movep x M_SRXL a2 read ONE byte valid B6 8 PACK IT asr 8 a a pack it _rd_bytes 10 WRITE TO DESTINATION move al p r0 Store 24 bit result in P mem nop pipeline delay nop pipeline delay _rd_n_ws 13 DEASSERT CHIP SELECT pelr M_BAAP x M_AAR1 change AA1 polarity in order to set it high bra lt FINISH Boot from EPROM done Ai moronoLa DSP56301 User s Manual A 15 DSP56301 User s Manual Chapter B Programming Reference This reference for programmers includes a table showing the addresses of all DSP memory mapped peripherals an exception priority table and programming sheets for the major programmable DSP registers The programming sheets are grouped in the following order central processor Phase Lock Loop PLL Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI Serial Communication Interface SCI Timer and GPIO Each sheet provides room to write in the value of each bit and the hexadecimal value for each register You can photocopy these sheets and reuse them for each application development project For details on the instruction set of the DSP56300 family of DSPs see the DSP56300 Family Manual There is a programmer s reference for each of the peripherals in the respective peripheral chapters Table B 2 Internal I O Memory Map X Data Memory on page B 3 lists the memory addresses of all on chip peripherals Table BA Interrupt Sources on page B 9 lists the interr
225. alized or a JSR is performed including long interrupts The SR consists of the following three special purpose 8 bit control registers m Extended Mode Register EMR SR 23 16 and Mode Register MR SR 15 8 These special purpose registers define the current system state of the processor The bits in both registers are affected by hardware reset exception processing ENDDO end current DO loop instructions RTI return from interrupt instructions and TRAP instructions In addition the EMR bits are affected by instructions that specify SR as their destination for example DO FOREVER instructions BRKcc instructions and MOVEC During hardware reset all EMR bits are cleared The MR register bits are affected by DO instructions and instructions that directly reference the MR for example ANDI ORI or instructions such as MOVEC that specify SR as the destination During processor reset the interrupt mask bits are set and all other bits are cleared 4 6 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit CPU Registers Condition Code Register CCR SR 7 0 Defines the results of previous arithmetic computations The CCR bits are affected by Data Arithmetic Logic Unit Data ALU operations parallel move operations instructions that directly reference the CCR for example ORI and ANDI and instructions that specify SR as a destination for example MOVEC Parallel move operations affect only the S and L bits o
226. als are programmed as GPIO PC2 PC1 and PCO all are cleared the SCI becomes active only when at least one of the SCI I O signals is not programmed as GPIO Individual reset During program execution the PC2 PC1 and PCO bits can all be cleared that is individually reset causing the SCI to stop serial activity and enter the Reset state All SCI status bits are set to their reset state However the contents of the SCR remain unaffected so the DSP program can reset the SCI separately from the other internal peripherals During individual reset internal DMA accesses to the data registers of the SCI are not valid and the data is unknown Stop processing state reset that is the STOP instruction Executing the STOP instruction halts operation of the SCI until the DSP is restarted causing the SCI Status Register SSR to be reset No other SCI registers are affected by the STOP instruction Table 8 1 illustrates how each type of reset affects each register in the SCI Table 8 1 SCI Registers After Reset Reset Type Register Bit Mnemonic Bit Number HW Reset SW Reset IR Reset ST Reset REIE 16 0 0 SCKP 15 0 0 STIR 14 0 0 TMIE 13 0 0 TIE 12 0 0 RIE 11 0 0 ILIE 10 0 0 SCR TE 9 0 0 RE 8 0 0 WOMS 7 0 0 RWU 6 0 0 WAKE 5 0 0 SBK 4 0 0 SSFTD 3 0 0 WDS 2 0 2 0 0 0 MOTOR
227. alue on the first timer clock received following the next valid transition on the TIO input signal and the count resumes If TCSR TRM is cleared the counter continues to increment on each timer clock This process repeats until the timer is disabled 9 14 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes Mode 4 internal clock TRM 1 first event N write preload 4 M write compare TE Clock CLK 2 or prescale CLK j TLR A A Counter SAN 1 Ka M Next 0 to 1 edge on TIO loads counter and process repeats TCR RW width being measured TIO pin Interrupt Service TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 ae d SH periods NOTE If INV 1 a 1 to 0 edge on TIO loads the counter and a 0 to 1 edge on TIO stops the counter and loads TCR with the count Figure 9 11 Pulse Width Measurement Mode TRM 1 Mode 4 internal clock TRM 1 first event N write preload ii M write compare Clock ILL CLK 2 or prescale CLK l TLR K Zen ee A de Ne Ca Counter X 0 Es N a N 1 3 M a Next 0 to 1 edge on TIO starts TCR counter from current BW count and process width being measured repeats Overflow TIO pin A S may occur TOF 1 Interrupt Service TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 d WE reads TCR for accumulated width NOTE If INV 1 a 1 to 0 edge on TIO loads th
228. and HC is set the host command interrupt is processed in accordance with the priority programmed in the IPRPand can be disabled by clearing DCTR HCIE The personal hardware reset clears HNMI 14 8 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 7 1 HV 6 0 Programmable UBM Hoer Command Vector PCI Select the host command interrupt address When the DSP56300 core interrupt control logic recognizes the host command interrupt the starting address of the executed interrupt is 2 X HV 6 0 The host processor can select any of the 128 possible interrupt routine starting addresses in the DSP by writing the interrupt routine starting address divided by two into HV This means that the host processor can force any of the existing interrupt routines SSI Timer IRQA IRQB and so on and can use any of the reserved or otherwise unused starting addresses if they have been pre programmed in the DSP The host processor can force non maskable interrupts of the DSP56300 core by setting the host non maskable interrupt HNMI bit in the HCVR When the HI32 command interrupt logic recognizes that HNMI is set the host command interrupt is processed with the highest priority regardless of the current HI32 interrupt priority as written in the DSP56300 Peripheral Priority Register IPRP CAUTION HV 6 0 should not be used with a value of zero the reset location because this location is normally programmed with a JMP instruction Doing so
229. and instruction set details DSP56301 Technical Data DSP56301 D teferred to as the data sheet provides electrical specifications timing pinout and packaging descriptions of the DSP56301 You can obtain these documents as well as Motorola s DSP development tools through a local Motorola Semiconductor Sales Office or authorized distributor To receive the latest information on this DSP access the Motorola DSP home page at the address given on the back cover of this document 1 1 Manual Organization This manual contains the following chapters and appendices Chapter 1 Overview Features list and block diagram related documentation organization of this manual and the notational conventions used m Chapter 2 Signals Connections DSP56301 signals and their functional groupings Chapter 3 Memory Maps DSP56301 memory spaces RAM configuration memory configuration bit settings memory sizes and memory locations Chapter 4 Core Configuration Registers for configuring the DSP56300 core when programming the DSP56301 in particular the interrupt vector locations and the operation of the interrupt priority registers operating modes and how they affect the processor s program and data memories Chapter 5 Programming the Peripherals Guidelines on initializing the DSP56301 peripherals including mapping control registers specifying a method of transferring data and configuring for General Purpose Input Output GPIO AA MOTOR
230. annel of equal priority DMA transfers in the continuous mode of operation can be interrupted if a DMA channel of higher priority is enabled after the continuous mode transfer starts If the priority of the DMA transfer in continuous mode that is DCON 1 is higher than the core priority CDP 01 or CDP 00 and DPR gt CP and if the DMA requires an external access the DMA gets the external bus and the core is not able to use the external bus in the next cycle after the DMA access even if the DMA does not need the bus in this cycle However if a refresh cycle from the DRAM controller is requested the refresh cycle interrupts the DMA transfer When DCON is cleared the priority algorithm operates as for the DPR bits 4 32 DSP56301 User s Manual AA MOTOROLA DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 Table 4 12 DMA Control Register DCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Reset ZE Number Bit Name Value Description 15 11 DRS 4 0 0 DMA Request Source Encodes the source of DMA requests that trigger the DMA transfers The DMA request sources may be external devices requesting service through the IRQA IRQB IRQC and IRQD pins triggering by transfers done from a DMA channel or transfers from the internal peripherals All the request sources behave as edge triggered synchronous inputs DRS 4 0 Requesting Device 00000 External I
231. ansfer The transfer is enabled by DE and initiated by every DMA request When the counter decrements to zero it is reloaded with its original value The DE bit is not automatically cleared so the DMA channel waits for a new request Note The DMA End of Block Transfer Interrupt cannot be used in this mode 110 111 Reserved Note When DTM 2 0 001 or 101 some peripherals can generate a second DMA request while the DMA controller is still processing the first request see the description of the DRS bits 4 30 DSP56301 User s Manual AA MOTOROLA DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 Table 4 12 DMA Control Register DCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Reset Number Bit Name Value Description 18 17 DPR 1 0 0 DMA Channel Priority Define the DMA channel priority relative to the other DMA channels and to the core priority if an external bus access is required For pending DMA transfers the DMA controller compares channel priority levels to determine which channel can activate the next word transfer This decision is required because all channels use common resources such as the DMA address generation logic buses and so forth DPR 1 0 Channel Priority 00 Priority level O lowest 01 Priority level 1 10 Priority level 2 11 Priority level 3 highest E If all or some channels have the same priority then channels are activated in a round robin fashion that is chann
232. ansmitter Note If transmitter interrupt enable is set an interrupt is issued and the interrupt handler should write data into the transmitter The DMA channel services the SCI transmit request if it is programmed to service the SCI transmitter 5 Enable transmitters TE 1 and receiver RE 1 according to use Operation starts as follows For an internally generated clock the SCLK signal starts operation immediately after the SCI is enabled Step 3 above for Asynchronous modes In Synchronous mode the SCLK signal is active only while transmitting that is a gated clock m Data is received only when the receiver is enabled RE 1 and after the occurrence of the SCI receive sequence on the RXD signal as defined by the operating mode that is idle line sequence Data is transmitted only after the transmitter is enabled TE 1 and after the initialization sequence has been transmitted depending on the operating mode 8 4 1 Preamble Break and Data Transmission Priority Two or three transmission commands can be set simultaneously A preamble TE is set m A break SBK is set or is cleared m An indication that there is data for transmission TDRE is cleared AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 7 Exceptions After the current character transmission if two or more of these commands are set the transmitter executes them in the following order preamble break data 8 4 2 Bootstrap Loadin
233. art loading the program words and then 24 bit word for each program word to be loaded The program words will be stored in contiguous PRAM memory locations beginning at the specified starting address After the program words are read program execution starts from the same address where loading started The Host Interface bootstrap load program can be stopped by setting the Host Flag 0 HFO in the HCTR register This will start execution of the loaded program from the specified starting address Note This ISA connection implies 16 bit data width access only and that the number of transferred 16 bit wide words must be even The 24 bit words must be packed into 16 bit ISA words and then sent by the HOST Processor in the following sequence MO LO Ll HO Hl Ml The boot program will convert every three 16 bit wide host words to two 24 bit wide 56301 opcodes in the following format i HO MO LO i Hl Ml Ll The Host Processor must program the Host Interface to operate in the zero fill mode HTF1 HTFO 01 in HCTR Sugested 56301 to ISA connection DSP56301 User s Manual E HA 10 lt SBHE_ selects HI32 base address 10011111 H HA 9 lt SA 0 selects HI32 base address 10011111 7 HA 8 3 lt SA 9 4 selects HI32 base address 10011111 HA 2 0 lt SA 3 1 selects HTXR registers HD 15 0 SD 15 0 Data bus
234. assaennexivaceatssdacevasedetess 6 30 DSP56301 User s Manual xi 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 8 1 8 2 8 3 xii DSP PCI Address Register COPAR oscc2ssccsaasesussacesavedeasesccsanendescdedesaseaa sah edantaenns 6 33 DSP Stat s RESister DSR resete eetset tagged e o e E S 6 35 DSP PCI Status Register PSR EN 6 38 DSP Host Port Direction Register OODIRH cc eecceeeseceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseteeeeeteeeees 6 43 DSP Host Port GPIO Data Register DATH cssceecesseccesseeconteeenseecestees 6 43 Host Interface Control Register HCTR A 6 48 Host Interface Status Register HSTR casas dgeacasdicatadiagsdnacvaaqaasaadoceasannataibeseenns 6 56 Host Command Vector Register HCVR ssesssessssssesseessesssersserrsseeessresseesseessee 6 59 Device Vendor ID Configuration Register CDID CVID An 6 64 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR A 6 64 Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register CCCRICHRID eee eres 6 67 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS 6 68 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CRMA 6 70 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CSID 6 71 Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration Register CILP s es 6 73 ESSI Block Di ger aay aac S95 c Saaess 3 aera Gate donates dea Ga
235. at control bits 6 3 1 Host to DSP Data Path In PCI mode data transfers in which the HI32 is the master DCTR HM 1 with DPMC FC 0 the host to DSP data path is a 24 bit wide FIFO that is six words deep The host data is written into the host side of the FIFO HTXR as 24 bit words and the DSP56300 core reads 24 bit words from the DSP side DRXR In PCI mode data transfers in which the HI32 is the master DCTR HM 1 with DPMC FC 0 and In PCI mode data transfers in which the HI32 is the target DCTR HM 1 with HTF 0 the host to DSP data path operates 32 bit wide FIFO that is three words deep The host data is written into the HTXR as 32 bit words and the DSP56300 core reads 24 bit words from the DRXR Each word read by the DSP56300 core contains 16 bits of data right aligned and zero extended The first word read by the DSP56300 core contains the two least significant bytes of the 32 bit word read into the HTXR The second word contains the two most significant bytes of the 32 bit word read into the HTXR As the active target in a memory space write transaction the HTXR is accessed if the PCI address is between HI32_base_address 01C and HI32_base_address FFFC that is the host process or views HTXR as a 16377 Dword write only memory As the active master all data read from the target is written to the HTXR 6 6 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Data Transfer Paths In PCI mode data transfers in which the HI32 i
236. ating Modes 9 3 2 3 Measurement Capture Mode 6 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 0 1 1 0 6 Capture Measurement Input Internal In Mode 6 the timer counts the number of clocks that elapse between when the timer starts and when an external signal is received At the first appropriate transition of the external clock detected on the TIO signal TCSR TCF is set and if the TCSR TCIE bit is set a compare interrupt is generated The counter halts The contents of the counter are loaded into the TCR The value of the TCR represents the delay between the setting of the TCSR TE bit and the detection of the first clock edge signal on the TIO signal The value of the INV bit determines whether a high to low 1 to 0 or low to high 0 to 1 transition of the external clock signals the end of the timing period If the INV bit is set a high to low transition signals the end of the timing period If INV is cleared a low to high transition signals the end of the timing period Mode 6 internal clock TRM 1 N write preload i event M write compare TE geg E CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR AN l Counter stops Counter 0 E N NA M N counting overflow may occur before capture TOF 1 TCR M TIO pin delay being measured Interrupt Service reads TCR delay M N cl
237. ation read command is in progress and the PCI address is 00 The DID 15 O bits identify the DSP The VID 15 0 bits identify the manufacturer of the DSP The contents of CDID CVID are hardwired and are unaffected by any type of reset The host processor can access CDID CVID only when the HI32 is in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 Table 6 25 Device ID Vendor ID Configuration Register CDID CVID Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 31 16 DID 15 0 Hardwired Device ID 1801 DSP56301 15 0 VIV 15 0 Hardwired Vendor ID 1057 6 8 8 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 DPE SSE RMA RTA STA DST1 DSTO DPR FBBC 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Not implemented read as zero should be Reserved read as zero and should be written written as zero as zero Figure 6 17 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR A PCI standard 32 bit read write register mapped into the PCI configuration space in PCI mode or in mode 0 DCTR HM 1 or 0 CSTR CCMR is accessed if a configuration 6 64 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model read write command is in progress and the PCI address is 04 In Self Configuration mode DCTR DCTR HM 5 the DSP56300 core can indirectly access the CCMR see Section 6 5 5
238. candenvodnenavsedaceyesevedederxe 6 59 6 8 4 Host Master Receive Data Register AR XM esesssrsessssersrrsrisrresersresreestesersrreseessreeeesresee 6 61 6 8 5 Host Slave Receive Data Register HRXS oisc cccsssescccsssescecsastssenssnesccetannacecsaanseacssansecesoanese 6 61 6 8 6 Host Transmit Data Register HTXR esssesssssessssssssseessressessseesserssstessressessernsserssseesseest 6 62 6 8 6 1 PCL Mode DCTRI HM 1 E 6 63 6 8 6 2 Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or n 6 63 6 8 7 Device ID Vendor ID Configuration Register CDIDACNID ieee eeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeenees 6 64 6 8 8 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR cc eeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeees 6 64 6 8 9 Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register CCCRICRID A 6 67 6 8 10 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHIC ATC 6 68 6 8 11 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA cece ceeeeeseeesteeeteeeeees 6 70 6 8 12 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CID 6 71 6 8 13 Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration ReostertCH Di 6 73 6 9 HI32 Programming Model Quick Reterence eee eesceeeeseesseecsaeceeeseeeesaeecnaeesneeeseeenaees 6 74 Chapter Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 1 ESSI Enhancements seserian renane i aE A A a Ca aE EA a aaa 7 2 7 2 ESS Data and Control Geteste so a aoia e a aN Eaa a 7 3 7 2 1 Serial Transmit Data Signal CD A EE 7 3 7 2 2 Serial Receive Data Sig
239. causes an improper short interrupt The personal hardware reset sets HV to the default host command vector which is programmable 6 60 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model Table 6 24 Host Command Vector Register HCVR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Bit Name Reset Value Mode Description Number 0 HC 0 UBM Host Command PCI Used by the host processor to handshake the execution of host command interrupt requests Normally the host processor sets HC to request a host command interrupt from the DSP56300 core When the DSP56300 core acknowledges the host command interrupt request HI32 hardware clears the HC bit The host processor can read the state of HC to determine when the host command request is serviced The host processor cannot clear HC Setting HC causes host command pending HCP to be set in the DSR The host can write HC and HV in the same write cycle if desired If HC is set E Inthe PCI mode The HI32 is a target in a write data phase to the HCVR It deasserts HTRDY and inserts up to eight PCI wait cycles until HC is cleared E n a Universal Bus mode In a write transaction to the HCVR the HI32 slave deasserts HTA until HC is cleared 6 8 4 Host Master Receive Data Register HRXM The HRXM is the output stage of the master DSP to host data path FIFO for DSP to host data transfers Neither the DSP56300 core nor the host can access t
240. ce Unit BIU Address Attribute Registers AAR 4 22 Bus Control Register BCR 4 22 DRAM Control Register DCR 4 22 Bus Lock BL 2 8 Bus Mastership Enable BME bit 4 25 Bus Number of Address Bits to Compare BNC bits 4 27 Bus Packing Enable BPAC bit 4 28 Bus Page Logic Enable BPLE bit 4 26 Bus Program Memory Enable BPEN bit 4 28 Bus Refresh Enable BREN bit 4 25 Bus Refresh Prescaler BRP bit 4 25 Bus Refresh Rate BRF bit 4 25 Bus Release Timing BRT bit 4 14 Bus Request BR 2 7 Bus Request Hold BRH bit 4 22 Index 1 Bus Row Out of Page Wait States BRW bit 4 26 Bus Software Triggered Reset BSTR bit 4 25 Bus Strobe BS 2 7 Bus X Data Memory Enable BXEN bit 4 28 Bus Y Data Memory Enable BYEN bit 4 28 C Cache Burst Mode Enable BE bit 4 14 Cache Enable CE bit 3 7 4 7 4 8 Cache Line Size CLS 7 0 bits 6 69 Cache Line Size Configuraiton Register CCLS 6 34 Carry C bit 4 11 Central Processing Unit CPU 1 1 Chip Operating Mode MD MA bits 4 15 Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register CCCR CRID 6 67 PCI Device Base Class BC 7 0 6 67 PCI Device Program Interface P 17 10 6 67 PCI Device Sub Class SC 7 0 6 67 Revision ID RID 7 0 6 67 Clear Transmitter CLRT bit 6 29 clock 2 1 2 5 signals 2 5 Clock Divider CD bits 8 20 clock generator 7 11 7 17 Clock Generator CLKGEN 1 9 Clock Out Divider COD 8 19 Clock Output CLKOUT 2 5 Clock Output Disable COD bit 4 21 C
241. ce is to write data to one or more transmit data registers or the Time Slot Register TSR before you set the TE bit The normal transmit disable sequence is to set the Transmit Data Empty TDE bit and then to clear the TE Transmit Interrupt Enable TIE and Transmit Exception Interrupt 7 18 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model Enable TEIE bits In Network mode if you clear the appropriate TE bit and set it again then you disable the corresponding transmitter 0 1 or 2 after transmission of the current data word The transmitter remains disabled until the beginning of the next frame During that time period the corresponding SC or STD in the case of TXO signal remains in a high impedance state The CRB bits are cleared by either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction Table 7 4 ESSI Control Register B CRB Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 REIE 0 Receive Exception Interrupt Enable When the REIE bit is set the DSP is interrupted when both RDF and ROE in the ESSI status register are set When REIE is cleared this interrupt is disabled The receive interrupt is documented in Section 7 3 3 Exceptions on page 7 7 A read of the status register followed by a read of the receive data register clears both ROE and the pending interrupt 22 TEIE 0 Transmit Exception Interrupt Enable When the TEIE bit is set the DSP is interrupted when both TDE and T
242. cessor Unit CPU Registers Table 4 3 Status Register Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 11 10 S 1 0 0 Scaling Mode Specify the scaling to be performed in the Data ALU shifter limiter and the rounding position in the Data ALU MAC unit The Shifter limiter Scaling mode affects data read from the A or B accumulator registers out to the X data bus XDB and Y data bus YDB Different scaling modes can be used with the same program code to allow dynamic scaling One application of dynamic scaling is to facilitate block floating point arithmetic The scaling mode also affects the MAC rounding position to maintain proper rounding when different portions of the accumulator registers are read out to the XDB and YDB Scaling mode bits are cleared at the start of a long Interrupt Service Routine and during a hardware reset Scaling S1 SO Mode Rounding Bit SEquation 0 0 No scaling 23 S A46 XOR A45 OR B46 XOR B45 OR S previous Scale down 24 S A47 XOR A46 OR B47 XOR B46 OR S previous Scale up 22 S A45 XOR A44 OR B45 XOR B44 OR S previous 1 1 Reserved S undefined I 1 0 11 Interrupt Mask Reflect the current Interrupt Priority Level IPL of the processor and indicate the IPL needed for an interrupt source to interrupt the processor The current IPL of the processor can be changed under software contr
243. chmitt trigger input Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected HIDSEL HRD HDS Input Input Input Host Initialization Device Select When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Initialization Device Select signal Host Read Host Data Strobe When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Data Read Host Data Strobe Schmitt trigger input Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected HFRAME Input Output Tri stated Host Frame When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host cycle Frame signal Non PCI bus When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal must be connected to a pull up resistor or directly to Vgc Port B When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR this signal is internally disconnected HCLK Input Input Host Clock When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Bus Clock input Non PCI bus When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected this signal must be connected to a
244. controlled by the corresponding bits in the GPIO data DATH and GPIO direction DIRH registers Open drain output pin is driven when asserted by the HI382 When deasserted the pin is released high impedance This enables using a multi slave configuration An external pull up must connect externally for proper operation Sustained Tri State is an active low tri state signal owned and driven by one and only one agent at a time The agent that drives this pin low must drive it high for at least one clock before letting it float A new agent cannot start driving a sustained tri state signal any sooner that one clock after the previous owner tri states it A pull up resistor is required to sustain the inactive state until another agent drives it All pins except PCVL are 5 V tolerant 2 8 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 0 Two synchronous serial interfaces ESSIO and ESSI1 provide a full duplex serial port for serial communication with a variety of serial devices including one or more industry standard CODECs other DSPs microprocessors and peripherals that implement the Motorola serial peripheral interface SPI All ESSI pins are 5V tolerant 2 22 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 0 Table 2 13 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 0 Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description SC00 PCO Input or Output Input Serial Control O For asynchron
245. core Figure 6 1 on page 6 5 is a block diagram showing the HI32 registers The HI32 supports three classes of interfaces Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI bus PCI Specification Revision 2 1 In PCI mode the HI32 is a dedicated bidirectional initiator target master slave parallel port with a 32 bit wide data path up to eight words deep The HI32 can directly connect to the PCI bus Universal bus interface In Universal Bus UB modes the HI32 is a dedicated bidirectional slave only parallel port with a six word deep data path up to 24 bits wide In this mode the HI32 can directly connect to 8 bit data buses 16 bit data buses for example ISA EISA Micro Channel and 24 bit data buses for example DSP56300 core based DSP Port A bus General purpose I O GPIO port The DSP56300 core can program unused host port pins as GPIO pins The HI32 provides up to 24 GPIO pins 6 1 Features This section discusses the DSP56301 host interface features as they apply to the DSP56300 core interface the host interface PCI mode and Universal Bus mode 1 Two Motorola application notes cover HI32 operation in PCI mode AN1780 D DSP563xx HI32 As A PCI Agent and AN1788 D DSP563xx HI32 PCI Functions These application notes and accompanying code files are available at http www mot com SPS DSP Documentation appnotes html MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 1 Features Table 6 1 HI32 Features Core Side and Host Side
246. ction the STOP instruction or by clearing the TCSR TE bit to disable the timer NOTE The TOF and TCF bits are cleared by a 1 written to the specific bit To ensure that only the target bit is cleared do not use the BSET command The proper way to clear these bits is to write 1 using a MOVEP instruction to the flag to be cleared and 0 to the other flag 20 TOF Timer Overflow Flag Indicates that a counter overflow has occurred This bit is cleared by writing a one to the TOF bit Writing a zero to TOF has no effect The bit is also cleared when the timer overflow interrupt is serviced The TOF bit is cleared by a hardware RESET signal a software RESET instruction the STOP instruction or by clearing the TCSR TE bit to disable the timer 19 16 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 15 PCE Prescaler Clock Enable Selects the prescaler clock as the timer source clock When PCE is cleared the timer uses either an internal CLK 2 signal or an external TIO signal as its source clock When PCE is set the prescaler output is the timer source clock for the counter regardless of the timer operating mode To ensure proper operation the PCE bit is changed only when the timer is disabled The PS 1 0 bits of the TPLR determine which source clock is used for the prescaler A timer can be clocked by a prescaler clock that is derived from the TIO of another timer 14 Reserved Write to zero fo
247. d Bit Word Shift Direction 0 MSB First 1 LSB First Clock Source Direction 0 External Clock 1 Internal Clock Serial Control Direction Bits see Table 7 2 Pin SCDx 0 Input SCDx 1 Output SCH Rx Clk Flag 0 SCH Rx Frame Sync Flag 1 SCH Tx Frame Sync Tx Rx Frame Sync Output Flag x If SYN 1 and SCD1 1 OFx gt SCx Pin fa 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16415 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 0 REIE TEIE RUIE TLIE FSL1 FSLO SHFD SCKD ScD2 Scp1 IT OFO ESSI Control Register B CRBx Reset 000000 ESSIO X FFFFB6 Read Write ESSI1 X FFFFA6 Read Write Figure B 21 ESSI Control Register B CRB AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 33 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 3 of 3 23 SSI Transmit Slot Mas 0 0 IgnoreTime Slot 1 Active Time Slot E ESSI Transmit Slot Mask A TSMA 0 1 ESSI0 X FFFFB4 Read Write Reset FFFF ESSI1 X FFFFA4 Read Write SSI Transmit Slot Mask 0 IgnoreTime Slot 1 ActiveTime Slot ESSI Transmit Slot Mask B TSMB 0 1 ESSIO X FFFFB3 Read Write Reset FFFF ESSI1 X FFFFA3 Read Write SSI Receive Slot Mask 0 IgnoreTime Slot 1 ActiveTime Slot ESSI Receive Slot Mask A RSMA 0 1 ESSIO X FFFFB2 Read Write Reset FFFF ESSI1 X FFFFA2 Read Write SSI Receive Slot Mask 0 Ignore Time Slot 0 1 Active Time Slot E 8 ESSI Receive Slot Mask B RSMB 0 1
248. d the MSB is bit 23 and the least significant byte is unused When the ALC bit is set the MSB is bit 15 and the most significant byte is unused Unused bits are read as 0 If the associated interrupt is enabled the DSP is interrupted whenever the RX register becomes full 7 5 6 ESSI Transmit Shift Registers The three 24 bit transmit shift registers contain the data being transmitted as in Figure 7 12 and Figure 7 13 Data is shifted out to the serial transmit data signals by the selected whether internal or external bit clock when the associated frame sync I O is asserted The word length control bits in CRA determine the number of bits that must be shifted out before the shift registers are considered empty and can be written again Depending on the setting of the CRA the number of bits to be shifted out can be 8 12 16 24 or 32 Transmitted data is aligned according to the value of the ALC bit When ALC is cleared the MSB is Bit 23 and the least significant byte is unused When ALC is set the MSB is Bit 15 and the most significant byte is unused Unused bits are read as 0 Data shifts out of these registers MSB first if the SHFD bit is cleared and LSB first if SHFD is set 7 30 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model 23 16 15 87 0 ESSI Receive Data Register Serial 23 16 15 87 0 Receive Receive High Byte Receive Middle Byte Receive Low Byte Shift lt _ _ E Regist
249. d PCI target DCTR HM 1 in a read data phase from the HRXS inserts PCI wait states if the HRXS is empty HRRQ 0 Wait states are inserted until the data is transferred from the DSP side to the HRXS Up to eight wait states can be inserted before a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C Retry is generated In a Universal Bus mode read from the HRXS the HI32 inserts wait states if the HRXS is empty HRRQ 0 Wait states are inserted until the data transfers from the DSP side to the HRXS Hardware software and personal software resets empty the HRXS HSTR HRRQ is cleared 6 8 6 Host Transmit Data Register HTXR The HTXR is the input stage of the host to DSP data path FIFO for host to DSP data transfers The DSP56300 core cannot access HTXR The host processor can write to the HTXR if the HSTR HTRQ bit is set Data should not be written to the HTXR until HSTR HTRQ is set to prevent previous data from being overwritten Filling the HTXR by host processor writes clears HSTR HTRQ 6 62 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model The HTXR receives data from the HI32 data pins via the data transfer format converter HDTFC The value of the HCTR FC bits or the HCTR HTF bits define which bytes of the PCI bus are written to the HTXR and their alignment See Table 6 3 HI32 PCI Master Data Transfer Formats on page 6 8 Section 6 3 1 Host to DSP Data Path on page 6 6 and Table 6 4 Transmit Data
250. d length frame sync is generated or expected with the first bit of the data word m When CRB FSR is set the word length frame sync is generated or expected with the last bit of the previous word CRB FSR is ignored when a bit length frame sync is selected 7 4 7 Frame Sync Polarity The CRB FSP bit controls the polarity of the frame sync m When CRB FSP is cleared the polarity of the frame sync is positive that is the frame sync signal is asserted high The ESSI synchronizes on the leading edge of the frame sync signal m When CRB FSP is set the polarity of the frame sync is negative that is the frame sync is asserted low The ESSI synchronizes on the trailing edge of the frame sync signal The ESSI receiver looks for a receive frame sync edge leading edge if CRB FSP is cleared trailing edge if FSP is set only when the previous frame is completed If the frame sync is asserted before the frame is completed or before the last bit of the frame is received in the case of a bit frame sync or a word length frame sync with CRB FSR set the current frame sync is not recognized and the receiver is internally disabled until the next frame sync Frames do not have to be adjacent that is a new frame sync does not have to follow the previous frame immediately Gaps of arbitrary periods can occur between frames All the enabled transmitters are tri stated during these gaps 7 12 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating
251. d or pulled up to Vcc or pulled down to GND AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 15 DSP Side Operating Modes In addition for Universal Bus mode pins HP 22 20 are GPI O For Enhanced Universal Bus mode two control signals data direction and data output enable are output to an optional external data buffer Also there is host select acknowledge output 6 5 4 GPIO Mode DCTR HM 4 General purpose I O GPIO port pins HP 23 0 m Pins HP 48 33 HP 30 24 are disconnected HP31 and HP32 are unused and must be forced or pulled up to Vcc Minimum current consumption 6 5 5 Self Configuration Mode DCTR HM 5 Indirect write only DSP56300 core access to to all registers in the PCI configuration space except CDID CVID All host port pins are in the disconnected state In Self Configuration mode the HI32 base address and HIRQ pulse width are programmed for operation in the Universal Bus mode and the configuration registers are prorammed for operation in a PCI environment without an external system configurator In Self Configuration mode DCTR HM 5 the DSP56300 core can indirectly write to all the writeable HI32 configuration registers The DSP56300 core writes the 32 bit data to the AR bits of the DPMC and DPAR registers the remaining bits in these registers are ignored The two most significant bytes of the 32 bits are written to the DPMC the two least significant to the DPAR Therefore the 16 mos
252. d peripheral configurations In particular the DSP56301 includes Motorola s JTAG port and OnCE module Core features are fully described in the DSP56300 Family Manual This manual in contrast documents pinout memory and peripheral features Core features are as follows 1 4 80 100 Million Instructions per Second MIPS using an internal 80 100 MHz clock at 3 0 3 6 V depending on the revision of the DSP56301 Object code compatible with the DSP56000 core Highly parallel instruction set Data Arithmetic Logic Unit Data ALU Fully pipelined 24 x 24 bit parallel multiplier accumulator MAC 56 bit parallel barrel shifter fast shift and normalization bit stream generation and parsing Conditional ALU instructions 24 bit or 16 bit arithmetic support under software control Program Control Unit PCU Position Independent Code PIC support Addressing modes optimized for DSP applications including immediate offsets On chip instruction cache controller On chip memory expandable hardware stack Nested hardware DO loops Fast auto return interrupts Direct Memory Access DMA Controller Six DMA channels supporting internal and external accesses One two and three dimensional transfers including circular buffering End of block transfer interrupts Triggering from interrupt lines and all peripherals DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DSP56300 Core Features m P
253. d the high impedance an external pull up access as long as HTA is deasserted The should be connected if it is connected polarity of the HTA pin is controlled by HTAP to the PCI bus arbiter in the DCTR The HTA pin is asserted if E during a data read valid data is present on HD23 HDO HRRQ 1 in the HSTR E during a data write it indicates the HI32 is ready to accept data HTRQ 1 in the HSTR BR during a vector write it indicates the HI32 is ready to accept a new host command HC 0 in the HCVR HP28 HSERR HIRQ disconnected Host System Error Host Interrupt Request Open drain output pin Output pin Reports address parity errors and other errors where the result will be catastrophic Asserted for a single PCI clock by the HI32 Used by the HI32 to request service from the host processor HIRQ may be connected to an interrupt request pin of a host processor a transfer request of a DMA controller or a control input of external circuitry HIRQ is initially asserted by the HI32 when an interrupt request is enabled TREQ 1 or RREQ 1 and the corresponding data path is ready for a data transfer If the HIRH bit in the DCTR is cleared HIRQ assertion is a pulse with a width controlled by the CLAT register If HIRH is set HIRQ is deasserted at the beginning of a corresponding host data access read or write or masked by TREQ 0 or RREQ 0 or disabled DMAE 1 HIRQ is asserted again after the host access regardless
254. d zero filled E right aligned and zero extended E right aligned and sign extended Data Buffers FIFOs up to eight words deep on both transmit and receive data paths FIFOs six or eight words deep on transmit and receive data paths five deep in Universal Bus mode 6 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Features Table 6 1 HI32 Features Core Side and Host Side Continued Feature Core Side Interface Host Side Interface Handshaking E Software polled Universal Bus mode Protocols Interrupt driven fast or long E Software Polled E Direct Memory Access up to six BR Interrupt Driven Data Request HIRQ DSP56300 core DMA channels pin and Interrupt A HINTA pin E Data Acknowledge HTA pin E Direct Memory Access External DMA HDRQ and HDAK pins PCI mode BR Software polled PCI Interrupt HINTA pin E Data Acknowledge HTRDY and HIRDY pins E Bus Arbitration HREQ and HGNT GPIO 24 I O pins data and pin direction are programmable Self Indirect write only access of DSP56300 core to Configuration the HI32 configuration registers Instructions Memory mapped registers allow standard MOVE instruction for data transfers between the DSP56301 and external hosts special MOVEP instruction provides I O service capability using fast interrupts and faster execution with fewer instruction words Address BR PCI Mode
255. ddress to HTXR Ignored when HI32 is not in PCI mode Can be set only when DPCR RBLE 1 Receive Buffer Lock Enable Bit 20 0 HDTC bit not set PCI write access to HTXR can occur 1 HDTC bit is set PCI write access to HTXR cannot occur Master Wait State Disable Bit 19 0 Enables insertion of PCI wait states 1 Disables insertion of PCI wait states Master Access Counter Enable Bit 18 0 Disables master access counter 1 Enables master access counter System Error Force Bit 16 0 HI32 hardware controls the HSERR pin 1 Pulse HSERR pin one PCI clock cycle Master Transfer Terminate Bit 15 0 PCI bus is in idle state 1 Generates master initiated transaction termination 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 Clear Transmitter Bit 14 0 No data transaction pending 1 Clears HI32 master to host bus data path Transfer Complete Interrupt Enable Bit 12 0 Disables transfer complete interrupt requests 1 Enables transfer complete interrupt requests Transaction Termination Interrupt Enable Bit 9 0 Disables transaction interrupt requests 1 Enables transaction interrupt requests Transaction Abort Interrupt Enable Bit 7 0 Disables transaction abort interrupts 1 Enables transaction abort interrupts Parity Error Interrupt Enable Bit 5 0 Disables parity error interrupts 1 Enables parity error interrupts Master Address Interrupt Enable Bit 4 0 Disables master ad
256. ddresses 00C00 001000 are used as l Cache space when the I Cache is enabled and these addresses become part of the external P memory space Bit Settings Memory Configuration Addressable CE MS sc Program RAM X Data RAM Y Data RAM Cache Memory Size 1 0 0 3K 2K 2K 1K 16M 000 BFF 000 7FF 000 7FF not addressable Note 1 Address range is for 3 K bootstrap space Figure 3 5 Instruction Cache Enabled 1 0 0 AA MOTOROLA Memory Configuration 3 11 Memory Maps Program X Data Y Data FFFF FFFF Internal I O FFFF External I O 128 words gFFgo _ 128 words FF80 External External External 0C00 0800 0800 Internal Internal X Data Internal Y Data Pro ap ne RAM 2K RAM 2K 0000 0000 0000 NOTE External program memory begins immediately after the internal program memory The internal memory modules that are mapped to the addresses 0C00 1000 are used as Instruction Cache space when the Instruction Cache is enabled and these addresses become part of the external P memory space Bit Settings Memory Configuration Addressable CE MS SC Program RAM X Data RAM Y Data RAM Cache Memory Size 1 0 1 3K 2K 2K 1K 64K 000 BFF 000 7FF 000 7FF not addressable Figure 3 6 16 Bit Space With Instruction Cache Enabled 1 0 1 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Program SFFFF
257. de MD MC MB MA x100 Host PCI PCIHOSTLD Daer 20 X M_DCTR UB3_CONT _LBLK _LBLL _LOOP5 jclr 2 X M_DSR movep X M_DRXR a0 jclr 2 X M_DSR movep X M_DRXR r0 move r0 r1 do a0 _LOOP5 jset 2 X M_DSR _LBLL jclr 3 X M_DSR _LBLK bra lt TERMINATE movep X M_DRXR P RO nop Wait for SRRQ to go high DSP56301 User s Manual Configure HI32 as PCI Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready Store number of words Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready Store starting address save r0 Load instruction words i e data ready stop loading data Else check SRRQ enddo and finish If HFO 1 Terminate loop Store 24 bit data in P mem movem cannot be at LA and go get another 24 bit word finish bootstrap bra lt FINISH A DH This is the routine for 56301 to 56301 boot MD MC MB MA x011 HI32 in UB mode double strobe HTA pin active low UB3HOSTLD movep 5268000 x M_DCIR bra lt UB3_CONT HM 2 UB HIRD 0 HIRQ_ pin drive high disabled open drain HIRH 1 HIRQ_ pin handshake enabled HRSP 1 HRST pin active low HDRP 0 HDRQ pin active high HTAP 1 HTA pin active low HDSM 0 Double strobe pin mode enabled continue DH This is the routine that loads from the SCI MD MC MB MA x010 external SCI clock SCILD movep 0302 X M_SCR 7 movep C000 X M_SCCR S movep 7 X M_PCRE
258. de called On Demand mode Set the CRB MOD for Network mode and set the frame rate divider to 0 DC 00000 to select On Demand mode This submode does not generate a periodic frame sync A frame sync pulse is generated only when data is available to transmit The frame sync signal indicates the first time slot in the frame On Demand mode requires that the transmit frame sync be internal output and the receive frame sync be external input For simplex operation Synchronous mode could be used however for full duplex operation Asynchronous mode must be used You can enable data transmission that is data driven by writing data into each TX Although the ESSI is double buffered only one word can be written to each TX even if the transmit shift register is empty The receive and transmit interrupts function normally using TDE and RDF however transmit underruns are impossible for On Demand transmission and are disabled This mode is useful for interfacing with codecs requiring a continuous clock Note When the ESSI transmits data in On Demand mode that is MOD 1 in the CRB and DC 4 0 00000 in the CRA with WL 2 0 100 the transmission does not work properly To ensure correct operation do not use On Demand mode with the WL 2 0 100 32 bit word length mode 7 10 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes Normal Network and On Demand 7 4 2 Synchronous Asynchronous Operating Modes The transmit and receive sectio
259. definitely In Asynchronous mode the TDRE flag is not set immediately after a word is transferred from the STX or STXA to the transmit shift register nor when the word first begins to be shifted out TDRE is set 2 cycles of the 16 x clock after the start bit that is 2 16 x clock cycles into the transmission time of the first data bit TRNE Transmitter Empty This flag bit is set when both the transmit shift register and transmit data register STX are empty indicating that there is no data in the transmitter When TRNE is set data written to one of the three STX locations or to the transmit data address register STXA is transferred to the transmit shift register and is the first data transmitted TRNE is cleared when a write into STX or STXA clears TDRE or when an idle preamble or break is transmitted When set TRNE indicates that the transmitter is empty therefore the data written to STX or STXA is transmitted next That is there is no word in the transmit shift register being transmitted This procedure is useful when initiating the transfer of a message that is a string of characters 8 18 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI Programming Model 8 6 3 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR The SCCR is a read write register that controls the selection of clock modes and baud rates for the transmit and receive sections of the SCI interface The SCCR is cleared by a hardware RESET signal 23 2
260. device selection 7 4 A MOTOROLA network enhancements 7 2 Network mode 7 2 7 8 7 10 7 21 Normal mode 7 2 7 10 7 20 7 21 On Demand mode 7 10 7 15 7 20 7 21 operating mode 7 6 7 10 7 21 polling 7 7 Port Control Register PCR 7 6 7 36 Port Control Register C PCRC 7 36 Port Control Register D PCRD 7 36 Port Data Register PDR 7 38 Port Data Register C PDRC 7 38 Port Data Register D PDRD 7 38 Port Direction Register PRR 7 37 Port Direction Register C PRRC 7 37 Port Direction Register D PRRD 7 37 prescale divider 7 16 programming model 7 14 receive data interrupt request 7 28 Receive Data Register RX 7 14 7 30 Receive Shift Register 7 29 receive shift register clock output 7 4 Receive Slot Mask Register RSM programming sheet B 34 Receive Slot Mask Registers RSMA and RSMB 7 14 7 35 reset 7 6 RX clock 7 11 RX frame sync 7 11 RX frame sync pulses active 7 11 select source of clock signal 7 22 Serial Clock SCK ESSI 7 3 Serial Control 0 SC00 and SC10 7 4 Serial Control 1 SC01 and SC11 7 4 Serial Control 2 SC02 and SC12 7 6 Serial Input Flag IFO 7 4 Serial Output Flag 0 OPO bit 7 4 Serial Output Flags OFO OF1 7 18 Serial Receive Data SRD 7 3 Serial Transmit Data STD 7 3 signals 2 1 SPI protocol 7 2 Synchronous mode 7 4 7 11 7 13 Synchronous Serial Interface Status Register SSISR 7 14 7 28 bit definitions 7 28 Receive Data Register Full RDF
261. dicated signals or some combination of both This section tells how signals are used as GPIO Chapter 2 Signals Connections details the special uses of the 42 bidirectional pins These signals fall into five groups and are controlled separately or as a group Port B 24 GPIO signals shared with part of the host interface signals Port C 6 GPIO signals shared with the ESSIO signals Port D 6 GPIO signals shared with the ESSI1 signals Port E 3 GPIO signals shared with the SCI signals Timers 3 GPIO signals shared with the triple timer signals 5 4 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA 5 4 1 Port B Signals and Registers As shown in Figure 5 2 you can configure twenty four Port B signals as GPIO signals DSP56301 Host Interface HI32 Port B Signals Note HPxx is a reference only and is not a signal name GPIO references formerly designated as HIOxx have been renamed PBxx for consistency with other Motorola DSPs Figure 5 2 Host Interface Port B Detail Signal Diagram The DSP GPIO Data Register DATH registers controls the GPIO functionality of Port B Chapter 6 Host Interface HI32 discusses this register AA MOTOROLA PCI Bus Universal Bus HADO HA3 HAD1 HA4 HAD2 HA5 HAD3 HA6 HAD4 HA7 HAD5 HA8 HAD6 HA9 HAD7 HA10 HAD8 HDO HAD9 HD1 HAD10 HD2 HAD11 HD3 HAD12 HD4 HAD13 HD5 HAD14 HD6 HAD15 HD7 HC0 HBEO HAO HC1 HBE1 HA1 HC2 HBE2 HA2 HC3 HBE3 Tie to pull up or Voc
262. dress Request MARQ 6 40 PCI Master Receive Data Request MRRQ 6 41 PCI Master Transmit Data Request MTRQ 6 41 PCI Master Wait States MWS 6 41 PCI Target Abort TAB 6 40 PCI Target Disconnect TDIS 6 40 PCI Target Retry TRTY 6 39 PCI Time Out Termination TO 6 39 Remaining Data Count RDC 5 0 6 38 Remaining Data Count Qualifier RDCQ 6 38 DSP Receive Data FIFO DRXR 6 41 DSP Slave Transmit Data Register DTXS 6 7 6 42 DSP Status Register DSR 6 35 HI32 Active HACT 6 35 Host Command Pending HCP 6 37 Host Flags 2 0 HF 2 0 6 36 Slave Receive Data Request SRRQ 6 36 Slave Transmit Data Request STRQ 6 37 DSP56300 core access 6 22 DSP side operating modes 6 12 programming model 6 22 DSP to host data path 6 7 general purpose flags 6 26 enable disable master access counter 6 28 Enhanced Universal Bus mode 6 15 examples of host to HI32 connections 6 18 AA MOTOROLA exception handlers 6 6 external data buffer 6 4 GPIO 5 5 6 16 GPIO mode 6 13 6 16 HAD 31 0 pins 6 33 handshake flags 6 44 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS 6 68 Cache Line Size CLS 7 0 6 69 Header Type HT 7 0 6 68 Header Type HT 7 0 6 68 Latency Timer High LT 7 0 6 69 HI32 Control Register HCTR 6 48 DMA Enable DMAE 6 54 Host Flags 2 0 HF 2 0 6 54 Host Receive Data Transfer Format HRF 1 0 6 50 Host Semaphores HS 2 0 6 49 Host Transmit Data Transfer Format HTF 1 0 6 51 Rece
263. dress interrupts 1 Enables master address interrupts Master Receive Interrupt Enable Bit 2 0 Disables master receive interrupts 1 Enables master receive interrupts Master Transmit Interrupt Enable Bit 1 0 Disables master transmit interrupts 1 Enables master transmit interrupts 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 47 83 ARG ia eed x wr ox Te E TAT a peeta Fe DSP PCI Control Register DPCR Address X FFFFC6 Read Write Reset 000000 Note All bits work only in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 11 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 23 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 3 of 10 Host Processor HI32 Data Transfer Format Control Bits 23 22 HI32 PCl data transfer formats as follows PCI DSP to Host data in DTXM 00 32 bit data mode 01 Data to HAD 31 0 right aligned and zero extended in MSB Seen e 8 PCI Data Burst Length Bits 21 16 10 Data to HAD 31 0 right aligned and sign extended in MSB e k N E S The value is the desired number of burst accesses 1 11 Data to HAD 31 0 left aligned and zero filled in LSB PCI Host to DSP 00 32 bit data mode DSP PCI Transaction Address High Bits 15 0 01 3 LSB PCI data to DRXR from HAD 23 0 The two most significant bytes of the 32 bit 10 3 LSB PCI data to DRXR from HAD 23 0 PCI transaction address 11 3 MSB PCI data to DRXR from HA
264. e Reset Value Description 6 RWU 0 Receiver Wakeup Enable When RWU is set and the SCI is in Asynchronous mode the wakeup function is enabled i e the SCI is asleep and can be awakened by the event defined by the WAKE bit In Sleep state all interrupts and all receive flags except IDLE are disabled When the receiver wakes up RWU is cleared by the wakeup hardware You can also clear the RWU bit to wake up the receiver You can use RWU to ignore messages that are for other devices on a multidrop serial network Wakeup on idle line i e WAKE is cleared or wakeup on address bit i e WAKE is set must be chosen When WAKE is cleared and RWU is set the receiver does not respond to data on the data line until an idle line is detected When WAKE is set and RWU is set the receiver does not respond to data on the data line until a data frame with Bit 9 set is detected When the receiver wakes up the RWU bit is cleared and the first frame of data is received If interrupts are enabled the CPU is interrupted and the interrupt routine reads the message header to determine whether the message is intended for this DSP If the message is for this DSP the message is received and RWU is set to wait for the next message If the message is not for this DSP the DSP immediately sets RWU Setting RWU causes the DSP to ignore the remainder of the message and wait for the next message Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET
265. e register pointer to SIDR DVID SIDR value to 2345 SVID value to 89ab and write SIDR SVID personal software reset set PCI mode Also see Example 6 3 on page 6 17 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model 6 8 13 Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration Register CILP 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 ML7 ML6 ML5 ML4 ML3 ML2 ML1 MLO MG7 MG6 MG5 MG4 MG3 MG2 MG1 MGO 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IP7 IP6 IP5 IP4 IP3 IP2 IP1 IPO IL7 IL6 ILS IL4 IL3 IL2 IL1 ILO Hardwired to zero D Hardwired to one Figure 6 22 Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration Register CILP CILP is PCI standard read only register mapped into the PCI configuration space in PCI mode or in mode 0 HM 1 or 0 CILP is accessed when a configuration read command is in progress and the PCI address is FC The DSP56300 core cannot access CILP The host can access CILP only in PCI mode HM 1 The 24 most significant bits of the CILP register are hardwired and are unaffected by any type of reset Table 6 30 Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration Register CILP Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 31 24 ML 7 0 0 Hardwired MAX_LAT Specifies h
266. e B 2 Internal UO Memory Map X Data Memory Continued Peripheral 16 Bit Address 24 Bit Address Register Name ESSI 1 FFAC FFFFAC ESSI 1 Transmit Data Register 0 TX10 FFAB FFFFAB ESSI 1 Transmit Data Register 1 TX11 FFAA FFFFAA ESSI 1 Transmit Data Register 2 TX12 FFAQ FFFFAQ ESSI 1 Time Slot Register TSR1 FFA8 FFFFA8 ESSI 1 Receive Data Register RX1 FFA7 FFFFA7 ESSI 1 Status Register SSISR1 FFA6 FFFFA6 ESSI 1 Control Register B CRB1 FFA5 FFFFA5 ESSI 1 Control Register A CRA1 FFA4 FFFFA4 ESSI 1 Transmit Slot Mask Register A TSMA1 FFA3 FFFFA3 ESSI 1 Transmit Slot Mask Register B TSMB1 FFA2 FFFFA2 ESSI 1 Receive Slot Mask Register A RSMA1 FFA1 FFFFA1 ESSI 1 Receive Slot Mask Register B RSMB1 FFAO FFFFAO Reserved PORT E FFOF FFFF9OF Port E Control Register PCRE FF9E FFFF9E Port E Direction Register PRRE FF9D FFFF9D Port E GPIO Data Register PDRE SCI FF9C FFFF9C SCI Control Register SCR FF9B FFFF9B SCI Clock Control Register SCCR FF9A FFFF9A SCI Receive Data Register High SRXH FF99 FFFF99 SCI Receive Data Register Middle SRXM FF98 FFFF98 SCI Recieve Data Register Low SRXL FF97 FFFF97 SCI Transmit Data Register High STXH FF96 FFFF96 SCI Transmit Data Register Middle STXM FF95 FFFF95 SCI Transmit Data Register Low STXL FF94 FFFF94 SCI Transmit Address Register STX
267. e B 29 Port C Registers PCRC PRRC PDRC AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 41 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 3 of 4 GPIO Port D ESSI1 PCn 1 Port Pin configured as ESSI PCn 0 Port Pin configured as GPIO 237 776 5 43 2 1 0 k x Peps sonal sonal scpel Pcpi Song H Port D Conirol Register PCRD X FFFFAF Read Write Reset 000000 PDCn 1 gt Port Pin is Output PDCn 0 gt Port Pin is Input 2376 5 413 2 1 0 k PRD5 PRD4 PRD3 PRD2 PRD PRDO E ET Port D Direction Register PRRD X FFFFAE Read Write Reset 000000 if port pin n is GPIO input then PDn reflects the value on port pin n if port pin n is GPIO output then value written to PDn is reflected on port pin n 2376 5 413 2 1 0 X Pops Popa Pops eopel PpDi PDDo HM Port D GPIO Data Register PDRD X FFFFAD Read Write Reset 000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 30 Port D Registers PCRD PRRD PDRD B 42 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 4 of 4 GPIO Port E SCI PCn 1 Port Pin configured as ESSI PCn 0 gt Port Pin configured as GPIO 23 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 kl X X Tak PcE2 pce pc HIT Port E Control Register PCRE X FFFF9F Read Write Reset 000000 PDCn 1 gt Port Pin is Output PDCn 0 gt Port Pin is Input CN 5 4 3 2 1 0 ak II TATA Tak PRE2
268. e Revision ID Configuration Register CCCR CRID Bit Definitions Register Bit Number Bit Name Description CCCR 31 24 BC 7 0 PCI Device Base Class 04 Multimedia device 23 16 SC 7 0 PCI Device Sub Class 80 Other multimedia device 15 8 P 17 10 PCI Device Program Interface 00 Default program interface CRID 7 0 RID 7 0 Revision ID Specify the DSP specific identifier as an extension of Device ID A 01 B 02 C 03 D 04 AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 67 Host Side Programming Model 6 8 10 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 LT7 LT6 LT5 LT4 LT3 LT2 LT1 LTO CLS7 CLS6 CLS5 CLS4 CLS3 CLS2 CLS2 CLSO Not implemented Read and write as zero for future compatibility Figure 6 19 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHT Y CLAT CCLS A PCI standard read write register mapped into the PCI configuration space in PCI mode or in mode 0 DCTR HM 1 or 0 The CHTY CLAT CCLS is accessed when a configuration read write command is in progress and the PCI address is 0C In Self Configuration mode DCTR HM 5 the DSP56300 core can indirectly access the CLAT see Section 6 5 5 Self Configuration Mode DCTR HM 5 on page 6 16 The CHTY CLAT CCLS is written in
269. e are determined by the MS and CE bits and their addresses are given in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 DSP56301 RAM Address Ranges by Configuration MS CE Program RAM Location Cache Location 0 0 000 FFF N A 0 1 000 BFF CO0 FFF 1 0 000 7FF N A 1 1 000 3FF 400 7FF Note 1 When enabled the internal memory location is not accessible and the address range is assigned to external program memory 3 6 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA 3 7 Memory Maps Memory Maps The figures in this section show the memory space and RAM configurations defined by the settings of the SR CE SR SC and OMR MS bits The figures show the configuration and the accompanying tables describe the bit settings memory sizes and memory locations Note that when the Sixteen Bit Compatibility mode bit SR SC is set the DSP56301 memory map is changed to enable 16 bit wide address access to the memory mapped X I O Default Program X Data Y Data FFFFFF FFFFFF Internal O FFFFFF External O erate FFFF80 _ 128 words gr EECH Reserved External External FFF000 FFF000 FF00C0 Internal Internal Bootstrap ROM Reserved FFO000 FFoo00 _ Reserved FF0000 External 001000 External External Internal 000800 000800 me Internal X Data Internal Y Data RAM 2k RAM 2k 000000 000000 000000 Bit Se
270. e can execute only when the HACT bit in the DSP Status Register DSR is zero Personal PH The HI32 HRST HRST This reset forces the HI32 host side state machines control Hardware pin is asserted registers and configuration registers to their initial states All host Reset port pins except HRST HRST are forced to the disconnected state all outputs are high impedance all inputs are electrically disconnected The DSP side state machines are not affected The HRST HRST pin is ignored in Self Configuration mode 6 5 DSP Side Operating Modes The HI32 Mode DCTR HM bits in the DSP Control Register DCTR control the HI32 operating modes see Table 6 10 DSP Control Register DCTR Bit Definitions on page 6 23 The DSP56300 core can change the value of the DCTR HM bits only when the HI32 is in the personal software reset state DCTR HM 0 DSR HACT 0 These bits must not be changed together that is in the same core write with any of the following bits HDSM HRWP HTAP HDRP HRSP HIRH or HIRD The combinations DCTR HM 6 DCTR HM 7 are reserved for future expansion and should not be used DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DSP Side Operating Modes Table 6 7 HI32 Modes HM 2 0 HI32 Mode 000 Terminate and Reset 001 PCI 010 Universal Bus 011 Enhanced Universal Bus 100 GPIO 101 Self Configuration 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 6 5 1 Terminate and Reset DCT
271. e counter and a 0 to 1 edge on TIO ON MN COCK perigas stops the counter and loads TCR with the count Figure 9 12 Pulse Width Measurement Mode TRM 0 MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 15 Operating Modes 9 3 2 2 Measurement Input Period Mode 5 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 0 1 0 1 5 Input period Measurement Input Internal In Mode 5 the timer counts the period between the reception of signal edges of the same polarity across the TIO signal The value of the INV bit determines whether the period is measured between consecutive low to high 0 to 1 transitions of TIO or between consecutive high to low 1 to 0 transitions of TIO If INV is set high to low signal transitions are selected If INV is cleared low to high signal transitions are selected After the first appropriate transition occurs on the TIO input signal the counter is loaded with the TLR value On the next signal transition of the same polarity that occurs on TIO TCSR TCF is set and a compare interrupt is generated if the TCSR TCIE bit is set The contents of the counter load into the TCR The TCR then contains the value of the time that elapsed between the two signal transitions on the TIO signal After the second signal transition if the TCSR TRM bit is set the TCSR TE bit is set to clear the counter and enable the timer The counter is repeatedly loaded and incremented
272. e line toggle mode DSP software arranges data Reserved era 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Pet eee eh el Weal io a call DSP PCI Address Register DPAR Address X FFFFC7 Read Write Reset 000000 Note All bits work only in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 You can write to the DPAR only if MARQ is set Figure B 13 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 25 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 5 of 10 Host Processor HI32 Host Transmit Data Transfer Format Bits 9 8 HI32 bus data transfer formats as follows PCI Host to DSP DCTR HNM 1 00 32 bit data mode 01 3 LSBs from HAD 23 0 to HTXR DRXR LSBs Target Wait State Disable Bit 19 10 3 LSBs from HAD 23 0 to HTXR DRXR LSBs 0 PCI wait states enabled 11 3 MSBs from HAD 31 8 to HTXR DRXR LSBs 1 PCI wait states disabled Note Address insertion is affected the same way as the data in PCI mode Modes PCI only UB Host to DSP DCTR HM 2 or 3 00 24 bit data mode HD 23 0 to 3 LSBs HTXR DRXR HD 15 0 to 3 LSBs HRXS right aligned zero extended to DRXR HD 15 0 to 3 LSBs HRXS right aligned sign extended to DRXR 11 HD 15 0 to 3 LSBs HRXS left aligned zero filled to DRXR Host Semaphores Bits 16 14 Serve only as read write repository for semaphores Note LSB least significant byte MSB most significant byte when mu
273. e of this fact and the two to four cycle delay two bytes cannot be written consecutively to STX or STXA without polling because the second byte might overwrite the first byte Thus you should always poll the TDRE flag prior to writing STX or STXA to MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 23 GPIO Signals and Registers prevent overruns unless transmit interrupts are enabled Either STX or STXA is usually written as part of the interrupt service routine An interrupt is generated only if TDRE is set The transmit shift register is indirectly visible via the SSR TRNE bit In Synchronous mode data is synchronized with the transmit clock That clock can have either an internal or external source as defined by the TCM bit in the SCCR The length and format of the serial word is defined by the WDSO WDS1 and WDS2 control bits in the SCR In Asynchronous mode the start bit the eight data bits with the LSB first if SSFTD 0 and the MSB first if SSFTD 1 the address data indicator bit or parity bit and the stop bit are transmitted in that order The data to be transmitted can be written to any one of the three STX addresses If SCKP is set and SSHTD is set SCI Synchronous mode is equivalent to the SSI operation in 8 bit data on demand mode Note When data is written to a peripheral device there is a two cycle pipeline delay until any status bits affected by this operation are updated If you read any of those status bits within
274. e results are as follows E The IDLE bit shows the real status of the receive line at all times E An idle interrupt is generated once for each idle state no matter how long the idle state lasts MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 13 SCI Programming Model Table 8 2 SCI Control Register SCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 9 TE 0 Transmitter Enable When TE is set the transmitter is enabled When TE is cleared the transmitter completes transmission of data in the SCI transmit data shift register and then the serial output is forced high that is idle Data present in the SCI transmit data register STX is not transmitted STX can be written and TDRE cleared but the data is not transferred into the shift register TE does not inhibit TDRE or transmit interrupts Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears TE Setting TE causes the transmitter to send a preamble of 10 or 11 consecutive ones depending on WDS giving you a convenient way to ensure that the line goes idle before a new message starts To force this separation of messages by the minimum idle line time we recommend the following sequence 1 Write the last byte of the first message to STX 2 Wait for TDRE to go high indicating the last byte has been transferred to the transmit shift register 3 Clear TE and set TE to queue an idle
275. e value of HRSP can change only when DSR HACT 0 HRSP is ignored in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 16 HDRP 0 UB Host DMA Request Polarity Controls the polarity of HDRQ pin when the HI32 is in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 If HDRP is cleared the HDRQ pin is active high and the HI32 requests DMA service by driving the HDRQ pin high that is asserted If HDRP is set the HDRQ pin is active low and the HI32 requests DMA service by driving the HDRQ pin low that is asserted The value of HDRP can change only when DSR HACT 0 HDRP is ignored when the HI32 is not in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 6 24 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 10 DSP Control Register DCTR Bit Definitions Continued z Reset inti Bit Number Bit Name Value Mode Description 15 HTAP 0 UB Host Transfer Acknowledge Polarity Controls the polarity of the HTA pin when the HI32 is in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 If HTAP is cleared the HTA pin is active high and the HI32 requests to extend the access by driving the HTA pin low that is deasserted If HTAP is set the HTA pin is active low and the HI32 requests to extend the access by driving the HTA pin high that is deasserted Note HTA is driven in the Universal Bus modes DCTR HM 2 or 3 while an external host is accessing the HI32 If the HI32 is not accessed the HTA pin is high im
276. eceived Master Abort Bit 29 0 No master abort received 1 Master abort bus state Modes PCI only Received Target Abort Bit 28 Write Cycle Control Bit 7 0 No target abort received Always 0 hardwired 1 Target abort received Modes PCI only Modes PCI only Signalled Target Abort Bit 27 Panty Error Response Bit 6 0 No target abort issued HI32 as target 0 Hise does not drive HP ERR 1 HI32 issued target abort to terminate transaction EE SC tor driving Si detecton Modes PCI only y DEVSEL Timing Bits 26 25 Bus Master Enable Bit 2 Always 1 hardwired 0 HI32 bus mastership disabled HI32 is medium DEVSEL timing class 1 HI32 bus mastership enabled Modes PCI only Modes PCI only Memory Space Enable Bit 1 0 Memory space response disabled 1 Memory space response enabled Modes PCI only 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 1716 15 14 131 SSE RMA RTA STA DST1 DSTO FBBC Kl KI K SER WCC MSE a PET Rool oola lol lololol To HI32 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR Read Write Reset 02400000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 16 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR B 28 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 8 of 10 Host Processor HI32 Header Type Bits 23 16 Latency Timer High Bits 15 8 Read only hardwired to 00 PCI Specifies the latency timer in PCI bus cycles CCLS Register
277. ect Send Break 1 Multidrop 0 Send break then revert 0 Point to Point 1 Continually send breaks Receiver Enable Wakeup Mode Select 0 Receiver Disabled 0 idle Line Wakeup 1 Receiver Enabled 1 Address Bit Wakeup SAE 1 0 SC SCI Control Register SCR X FFFF9C Read Write Reset 000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 23 SCI Control Register SCR AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 35 B 36 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 2 of 2 TX Clock RX Clock SCLK Pin Internal Internal Internal External External Internal External External Mode Synchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous only Asynchronous only Synchronous Asynchronous Output Input Input Input Clock Divider Bits CD11 CD0 CD11 CDO 000 001 002 Le Rate Kli leycl2 Lac Transmitter Clock Mode Source Internal clock for Transmitter Receiver Clock Mode Source 1 External clock from SCLK Internal clock for Receiver 1 External clock from SCLK IEN loyo 4096 Clock Out Divider 0 Divide clock by 16 before feed to SCLK 1 Feed clock to directly to SCLK SCI Clock Prescaler 0 1 1 8 15 14 13 12 t iaaa aaia iiaii idii SCI Clock Control Register SCCR Address X FFFF9B Read Write Reset 000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 24 SCI Clock Control Registers SCCR DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA
278. ector write it indicates the HI32 is ready to accept a new host command HC 0 in the HCVR Wait cycles are inserted until HIRDY and HTRDY are asserted together HP21 HIRDY HDBDR Host Initiator Ready Host Data Bus Direction HIO21 Sustained tri state bidirectional pin Output pin GPIO Indicates the initiating agent s ability to complete the current data phase of the transaction Used with HTRDY When a data phase is completed on any clock both HIRDY and HTRDY are sampled asserted Wait cycles are inserted until both HIRDY and HTRDY are asserted together The HI32 deasserts HIRDY if it cannot complete the next data phase Driven high on write data transfers and driven low on read data transfers This pin is normally high AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 17 Host Interface HI32 Table 2 12 Host Port Pins HI32 Continued Universal Bus Mode Pcl Enhanced Universal Bus Mode GPIO HP22 HDEVSEL HSAK Host Device Select Host Select Acknowledge H1022 Sustained tri state bidirectional pin Active low output pin GPIO When actively driven indicates the Acknowledges to the host processor that the driving device has decoded its HI32 has identified its address as a slave address as a target of the current HSAK is asserted when the HI32 is the access As an input it indicates selected slave otherwise HSAK is released whether any device on the bus
279. ed HBE 3 0 to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected these signals are lines7 0 of the bidirectional multiplexed Address Data bus HA 2 0 Input Host Address 0 2 When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCI bus and the HI function is selected these signals are lines 2 0 of the input Address bus The fourth signal in this set should be connected to a pull up resistor or directly to Voc when a non PCI bus is used PB 19 16 Input or Port B 16 19 When the HI82 is configured as GPIO through the Output DCTR these signals are individually programmed as inputs or outputs through the HI32 DIRH HTRDY Input Tri stated Host Target Ready When the HI32 is programmed to interface Output with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Target Ready signal HDBEN Output Host Data Bus Enable When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCI bus and the HI function is selected this signal is Host Data Bus Enable output PB20 Input or Port B 20 When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the Output DCTR this signal is individually programmed as an input or output through the HI32 DIRH HIRDY Input Tri stated Host Initiator Ready When the HI32 is programmed to interface Output with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected this is the Host Initiator Ready signal HDBDR Output Host Data Bus Direction When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non P
280. ed all the data signals of the enabled receivers are tri stated during time slot number N Data transfers from the receive data register s to the receive shift register s but the RDF and ROE flags are not set Consequently during a disabled slot no receiver full interrupt is generated The DSP is interrupted only for enabled slots When RSn is set the receive sequence proceeds normally Data is received during slot number N and the RDF flag is set When the bits in the RSM are set their setting affects the next frame transmission The frame being transmitted is not affected by the new RSM setting If the RSM is read it shows the current setting When RSMA or RSMB is read by the internal data bus the register contents occupy the two low order bytes of the data bus and the high order byte is filled by 0 After a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction the RSM register is reset to FFFFFFFF enabling all 32 time slots for data transmission AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 35 GPIO Signals and Registers 7 6 GPIO Signals and Registers The functionality of each ESSI port is controlled by three registers port control register PCRC PCRD port direction register PRRC PRRD and port data register PDRC PDRD 7 6 1 Port Control Registers PCRC and PCRD The read write 24 bit PCRs control the functionality of the signal lines for ESSIO and ESSI1 Each of the PCR bits 5 0 control
281. ed the counter continues to increment on each timer clock This process repeats until the timer is disabled Mode 3 internal clock TRM 1 N write preload first event M write compare 4 TE if clock source is from TIO pin Clock N TIO lt CPUCLK 4 TIO pin or prescale CLK K TLR XN Counter TCR xX Hz N X N 1 x M XN TCPR NM x SE e m interrupts ever TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 N M N K periods NOTE If INV 1 counter is clocked on 1 to 0 clock transitions instead of 0 to 1 transitions Figure 9 9 Event Counter Mode TRM 1 9 12 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes pode d intemal clock TRM N if clock source is from TIO pin N write preload first event TIO lt CPUCLK 4 M write compare 4 TE N i Clock N TIO pin or prescale CLK TLR S fa Counter MGR XxX D N Nat MOMI xX D TCPR gt lt M RW J TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 ee p 3 TOF Overflow Interrupt if TCIE 1 A NOTE If INV 1 counter is clocked on 1 to 0 clock transitions instead of 0 to 1 transitions Figure 9 10 Event Counter Mode TRM 0 AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 13 Operating Modes 9 3 2 Signal Measurement Modes The following signal measurement and pulse width modulation modes are provided Measurement input width Mode 4 Measurement input
282. ed as a GPIO signal P0 when the ESSI SCO function is not in use Note The ESSI can operate with more than one active transmitter only in Synchronous mode 7 2 5 Serial Control Signal SC1 ESSI0 SC01 ESSI1 SCI11 To determine the function of SC1 select either Synchronous or Asynchronous mode according to Table 7 2 In Asynchronous mode as for a single codec with asynchronous transmit and receive SC1 is the receiver frame sync I O In Synchronous mode SC1 is the transmitter data out signal of transmit shift register TX2 for the transmitter 0 drive enabled signal or for serial flag I O As serial flag I O SC1 operates like SCO SCO and SClare independent flags but can be used together for multiple serial device selection they can be unencoded to select up to two CODECs or decoded externally to select up to four CODECs If SC1 is configured as a serial flag or receive frame sync signal the Serial Control Direction 1 CRB SCD1 bit determines its direction 7 4 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Data and Control Signals Table 7 2 Mode and Signal Definitions Control Bits ESSI Signals SYN TEO TE1 TE2 RE Sco SCH SCH SCK STD SRD 0 0 X X 0 U U U U U U 0 0 X X 1 RXC FSR U U U RD 0 1 X X 0 U U FST TXC TDO U 0 1 X X 1 RXC FSR FST TXC TDO RD 1 0 0 0 0 U U U U U U 1 0 0 0 1 FO U F1 TOD U FS XC U RD 1 0 0 1 0 FO U TD2 FS XC U U
283. ed signal Bit SSC1 0 The direction of SC1 is determined by the SCD1 bit When SCD1 is set SC1 is an output flag When SCD1 is cleared SC1 is an input flag When programmed as input flags the value of the SC 1 0 bits is latched at the same time as the first bit of the received data word is sampled Once the input is latched the signal on the input flag signal SCO and SC1 can change without affecting the input flag The value of SC 1 0 does not change until the first bit of the next data word is received When the received data word is latched by RX the latched values of SC 1 O are latched by the SSISR IF 1 0 bits respectively and can be read by software When they are programmed as output flags the value of the SC 1 0 bits is taken from the value of the OF 1 0 bits The value of OF 1 O is latched when the contents of TX transfer to the transmit shift register The value on SC 1 O is stable from the time the first bit of the transmit data word transmits until the first bit of the next transmit data word transmits Software can directly set the OF 1 0 values allowing the DSP56301 to control data transmission by indirectly controlling the value of the SC 1 0 flags AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 13 ESSI Programming Model 7 5 ESSI Programming Model The ESSI is composed of the following registers Two control registers CRA CRB page 14 and page 18 One status register SSISR
284. ed transaction the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to the DPCR MTT bit MACE is ignored when the HI32 is not in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The value of MACE can change only if MARQ 1 or DSR HACT 0 17 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 16 SERF 0 HSERR Force Controls the HSERR pin state in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 When the core sets SERF and the H132 is the current PCI bus master or a selected target the HSERR pin is pulsed one PCI clock cycle If the system error enable SERE bit is set in the Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR the signalled system error SSE bit is set in the CSTR CCMR HI32 hardware clears SERF after HSERR is asserted When SERF is cleared HI32 hardware controls the HSERR pin The DSP56300 core cannot write a value of zero to SERF SERF is ignored when the SERE bit is cleared or when the HI32 is not an active PCI agent that is DCTR HM 1 or the HI32 is not the current PCI bus master or a selected target 15 MTT 0 Master Transfer Terminate Generates a transaction termination initiated by the PCI master In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 when the HI32 is the active PCI master and the DSP56300 core sets the MT bit a master initiated transaction termination not master abort is generated HI32 hardware clears MTT when the PCI bus is in the idle state The DSP56300 core cannot write a value of zero to MTT MTT is ignored when the HI32 is not in the PCI mode DCTR HM
285. eir maximum programmed non DMaA instruction rate without testing the handshake flags for each transfer If the full interrupt driven handshake is not needed the high speed data transfer between the host and the HI32 can be supported with only the host data strobe acknowledge handshake mechanism DMA 6 44 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model hardware can be used with the handshake flags to transfer data without host processor intervention When a host bus is less than 24 bits wide the unused data pins must be forced or pulled up or down to Vcc or to GND respectively For example for a 16 bit bus such as an ISA bus HP 48 41 must be forced or pulled up to Vcc or pulled down to GND In PCI mode In memory space read write transactions the HI32 occupies 16384 Dwords The host can access the HTXR FIFO and HRXS FIFO at 16377 Dword locations These FIFOs appear to the external host as 16377 Dwords of read write memory Registers are accessed as 32 bit data words The HAD 1 0 pins should be zero during the address phase of a transaction The HI32 responds with a target disconnect transaction termination with the first data phase if HAD 1 0 0 during the address phase Configuration space accesses In read write transactions the HI32 occupies 64 Dwords The configuration registers are accessed as 32 bit Dwords so the HAD 1 0 pins must be zero during the address phase The HI32 ignores the transac
286. el 0 is activated to transfer one word followed by channel 1 then channel 2 and so on E If channels have different priorities the highest priority channel executes DMA transfers and continues for its pending DMA transfers BR If alower priority channel is executing DMA transfers when a higher priority channel receives a transfer request the lower priority channel finishes the current word transfer and arbitration starts again E f some channels with the same priority are active in a round robin fashion and a new higher priority channel receives a transfer request the higher priority channel is granted transfer access after the current word transfer is complete After the higher priority channel transfers are complete the round robin transfers continue The order of transfers in the round robin mode may change but the algorithm remains the same BR The DPR bits also determine the DMA priority relative to the core priority for external bus access Arbitration uses the current active DMA priority the core priority defined by the SR bits CP 1 0 and the core DMA priority defined by the OMR bits CDP 1 0 Priority of core accesses to external memory is as follows AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 31 DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 Table 4 12 DMA Control Register DCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 18 17 cont DPR 1_0 OMR CDP 1 0 CP 1 0 Core
287. elect WOMS 8 14 Word Select WDS 8 16 SCI Receive Data Register SRX 8 9 8 22 SCI Status Register SSR 8 9 8 17 bit definitions 8 17 Framing Error Flag FE 8 17 Idle Line Flag DLE 8 18 Overrun Error Flag OR 8 18 Parity Error PE 8 17 Receive Data Register Full RDRF 8 18 Received Bit 8 R8 8 17 Transmit Data Register Empty TDRE 8 18 Transmitter Empty TRNE 8 18 SCI Transmit Data Address Register STXA 8 9 SCI Transmit Data Register STX 8 9 select wakeup on idle line mode 8 15 Serial Clock SCLK 8 4 8 21 state after reset 8 5 Synchronous mode 8 2 transmission priority AA MOTOROLA preamble break and data 8 7 transmit and receive shift registers 8 2 Transmit Data TXD 8 4 Transmit Data Register STX or STXA 8 22 Transmit Data Register STX 8 23 Wired OR mode 8 3 Serial Control 0 SC00 and SC10 signals 7 4 Serial Control 1 SC01 and SC11 signals 7 4 Serial Control 2 SC02 and SC12 signals 7 6 Serial Control Direction 0 SCDO bit 7 23 Serial Control Direction 1 SCD1 bit 7 23 Serial Control Direction 2 SCD2 bit 7 23 Serial Input Flag 0 IFO bit 7 4 7 29 Serial Input Flag 1 IF1 bit 7 29 Serial Output Flag OFO OF1 bits 7 18 Serial Output Flag 0 OFO bit 7 4 7 23 Serial Output Flag 1 OF1 bit 7 23 Serial Receive Data SRD signal 7 3 Serial Transmit Data STD signal 7 3 setting timer operating mode 9 4 Shift Direction SHFD bit 7 22 Signaled System Error SSE bit 6 65 Signalled Target Abort
288. eload M write compare TE Clock iG Operating Modes Period FFFFFF TLR 1 Duty cycle SFFFFFF TCPR Ensure that TCPR gt TLR for correct functionalit TRM 0 S y first event LG CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR Counter TCR TCPR gt lt TCF Compare Interrupt TCF Overflow Interrupt TIO pin INV 0 TIO pin INV 1 Pulse width gt L Period NOTE On overflow TCR Figure 9 AA MOTOROLA if TCIE 1 if TDIE 1 is loaded with the value of TLR 17 Pulse Width Modulation Toggle Mode TRM 0 Triple Timer Module 9 21 Operating Modes 9 3 4 Watchdog Modes The following watchdog timer modes are provided m Watchdog Pulse m Watchdog Toggle 9 3 4 1 Watchdog Pulse Mode 9 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 1 0 0 1 9 Pulse Watchdog Output Internal In Mode 9 the timer generates an external signal at a preset rate The signal period is equal to the period of one timer clock After the counter reaches the value in the TCPR if the TCSR TRM bit is set the counter is loaded with the TLR value on the next timer clock and the count resumes Therefore TRM 1 is not useful for watchdog functions If the TCSR TRM bit is cleared the counter continues to increment on each subseque
289. emory space read transaction the HRXS is accessed if the PCI address is between HI32_base_address 01C and HI32_base_address FFFC The host processor views HRXS as a 16377 Dword read only memory In PCI DSP to host data transfers via the HRXS all four byte lanes are driven with data in accordance with HRF 1 0 bits regardless of the value of the byte enable pins HC3 HBE3 HCO HBEO In a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 the HRXS is accessed if the HA 10 3 value matches the HI32 base address CBMA see Section 6 8 11 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA on page 6 70 and the HA 2 0 value is 7 Ina 24 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HCTR HRF 0 the HRXS is viewed by the host processor as a 24 bit read only register HD 23 0 pins are driven with all three bytes of the HRXS in a read access In a 16 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HCTR HRF 0 the HRXS is viewed by the host processor as a 16 bit read only register In a read access the HD 15 0 pins are driven with data from the two most significant bytes or two least significant bytes of the HRXS as defined by the HCTR HRF bits When HSTR HRRQ is set and HCTR RREQ is set m The HREQ status bit is set in the HSTR m The HIRQ pin is asserted if DMAE is cleared in the Universal Bus modes The HDRQ pin is asserted if DMAE is set in the Universal Bus modes If TWSD is cleared the HI32 as the selecte
290. en go back to loop enddo else break the loop and retry bra lt _LBLC _LBLD nop _LOOP3 read new CBMA value ISA base address jclr 2 X M_DSR Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready movep X M_DRXR Al Store 24 bit data into Al Switch to Self Configuration mode movep X0 X M_DCTR Software personal reset movep Al XM DM write to DPMC also used as replacment to needed NOP after sw reset movep b1 X M_DCTR Configure HI32 as Self Config rep 4 movep X0 X M_DPAR write to DPAR CSTR CCMR CCCR CRID CLAT CBMA Switch to ISA mode movep X0 X M_DCTR Software personal reset move 010010 x1 width 16 offset 16 also used as replacment to needed NOP after sw reset movep 3a0010 x M_DCTR HM 3 UB HIRD 1 HIRQ_ pin drive high enabled HIRH 0 HIRQ_ pin handshake disabled HRSP 1 HRST pin active low HDRP 0 HDRO pin active high HTAP 0 HTA pin active high HDSM 0 Double strob pin mode enabled HF4 1 turn on flag 4 for handshake jclr 2 X M_DSR Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready movep X M_DRXR a0 Store number of words jclr 2 X M_DSR Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready movep X M_DRXR x0 Store starting address jclr 2 X M_DSR Wait for SRRQ to go high i e data ready AA MOTOROLA DSP56301 User s Manual A 9 movep X M_DRXR yO insert x1 x0 a insert yl y0 a move al r0 move a0 al Download P memory
291. enabling 9 4 exception 9 4 Compare 9 4 Overflow 9 4 GPIO 5 7 initialization 9 3 operating modes 9 5 Capture mode 6 9 5 9 14 9 18 Event Counter mode 3 9 5 9 12 GPIO mode 0 9 5 9 6 Input Period mode 5 9 5 9 14 9 16 Input Width mode 4 9 5 9 14 overview 9 6 Pulse mode 1 9 5 9 8 Pulse Width Modulation PWM mode 7 9 5 9 14 9 19 reserved 9 25 setting 9 4 signal measurement modes 9 14 Toggle mode 2 9 5 9 10 watchdog modes 9 21 Watchdog Pulse mode 9 9 5 9 22 Watchdog Toggle mode 10 9 5 9 22 prescaler counter 9 25 programming model 9 25 signals 2 1 special cases 9 25 timer compare interrupts 9 32 Timer Compare Register TCPR 9 34 Timer Control Status Register TCSR 9 28 Data Input DI 9 29 Data Output DO 9 29 Direction DIR 9 30 Inverter INV 9 30 9 32 Prescaler Clock Enable PCE 9 29 Timer Compare Flag TCF 9 29 Timer Compare Interrupt Enable TCIE 9 32 Timer Control TC 9 31 Timer Enable TE 9 32 Timer Overflow Flag TOF 9 29 Index 14 DSP56301 User s Manual AA MOTOROLA Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable TOIE 9 32 Timer Reload Mode TRM 9 30 Timer Count Register TCR 9 34 Timer Load Registers TLR 9 33 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR 9 28 Prescaler Counter Value PC 9 28 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR 9 27 bit definitions 9 27 Prescaler Preload Value PL 9 27 Prescaler Source PS 9 27 Timer Compare Flag TCF bit 9 29 Timer Compare Interrupt Enable TCIE bit
292. enerate two different exceptions Timer Overflow highest priority Occurs when the timer counter reaches the overflow value This exception sets the TOF bit TOF is cleared when a value of one is written to it or when the timer overflow exception is serviced Timer Compare lowest priority Occurs when the timer counter reaches the value given in the Timer Compare Register TCPR for all modes except measurement modes In measurement modes 4 6 a compare exception occurs when the appropriate transition occurs on the TIO signal The Compare exception sets the TCF bit TCF is cleared when a value of one is written to it or when the timer compare interrupt is serviced To configure a timer exception perform the following steps The example at the right of each step shows the register settings for configuring a Timer 0 compare interrupt The order of the steps is optional except that the timer should not be enabled step 2e until all other exception configuration is complete 1 9 4 Configure the interrupt service routine ISR a Load vector base address register VBA b23 8 b Define I_VEC to be equal to the VBA value if that is nonzero If it is defined I_VEC must be defined for the assembler before the interrupt equate file is included c Load the exception vector table entry two word fast interrupt or jump branch to subroutine long interrupt p TIMOC DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes 2
293. equest is issued when the ROE bit is set The programmer clears ROE by reading the SSISR with the ROE bit set and then reading the RX 4 TUE 0 Transmitter Underrun Error Flag Set when at least one of the enabled serial transmit shift registers is empty that is there is no new data to be transmitted and a transmit time slot occurs When a transmit underrun error occurs the previous data which is still present in the TX registers not written is retransmitted In Normal mode there is only one transmit time slot per frame In Network mode there can be up to 32 transmit time slots per frame If the TEIE bit is set a DSP transmit underrun error interrupt request is issued when the TUE bit is set The programmer can also clear TUE by first reading the SSISR with the TUE bit set then writing to all the enabled transmit data registers or to the TSR 7 28 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model Table 7 5 ESSI Status Register SSISR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 3 RFS 0 Receive Frame Sync Flag When set the RFS bit indicates that a receive frame sync occurred during the reception of a word in the serial receive data register In other words the data word is from the first time slot in the frame When the RFS bit is cleared and a word is received it indicates only in Network mode that the frame sync did not occur during receptio
294. er 0 0 0 MSB LSB SS 8 bit Data a 0 0 0 Least Significant Zero Fill LSB 12 bit Data LSB 16 bit Data LSB 24 bit Data a Receive Registers Note Data is received MSB first if SHFD 0 g 24 bit fractional format ALC 0 32 bit mode is not shown 23 16 15 87 0 ESSI Transmit Data Transmit High Byte Transmit Middle Byte Transmit Low Byte Register 7 0 7 07 0 23 16 15 07 0 STD Transmit High Byte Transmit Middle Byte E Ee 7 0 7 0 ESSI Transmit Transmit Low Byte Shift Register 7 0 MS LSB B stoves 8 bit Data L 0 0 0 Least Significant Zero Fill MSB LSB s 12 bit Data LSB 16 bit Data LSB 24 bit Data b Transmit Registers Note Data is transmitted MSB first if SHFD 0 4 bit fractional format ALC 0 32 bit mode is not shown Figure 7 12 ESSI Data Path Programming Model SHFD 0 MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 31 ESSI Programming Model ESSI Receive Data Register Read Only SRD Receive High Byte Receive Middle Byte Receive Low Byte ESSI Receive 1 SIN Register H 0 7 07 0 MSB LSB 8 bit Data L 0 o 0 Least Significant Zero Fill LSB 12 bit Data LSB 16 bit Data LSB 24 bit Data a Receive Registers Note Data is received MSB first if SHFD 0 24 bit fractional format ALC 0 32 bit mode is not shown 2 16 15 87 0 3 ESSI Transmit Data Transmit High Byte Transmit Middle Byte Transmit Low Byte Register Write Only ESSI Transmit S
295. erence wesch Overview Signals Connections Memory Configuration Core Configuration Programming the Peripherals Host Interface HI32 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI Serial Communications Interface SCI Triple Timer Module Bootstrap Program Programming Reference Contents Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 M n al VE ea Oca aes Seek Ac cete el aaoi Eee feet feats tests hice ES eE 1 1 1 2 Manual e EEN 1 2 1 3 IERT EE 1 4 1 4 DSP56300 Core Functional Blocks 2 ccassessesesactinsestasisaetnannigstentenet aera enteaetenene aerate 1 6 E SE EE EE 1 6 1 4 1 1 ege ALU BEE eege 1 7 1 4 1 2 Multiplier Accumulator MACH 1 7 1 4 2 Address Generation Writ AG pc csiscs sstucus onsite dna sadiadtananddnte inden teniadssesndeasacntaddslaontenlanuiles 1 7 1 43 Program Control Unit PCO ss sceiussectacsondietaois sceathnscencaupscunsesaaceedensdeniddvadanteea tersacensdeadecdadnnacte 1 8 14A PLLCand Cl ck E E 1 9 1 4 5 JTAG TAP and OnCE Module oeesneneeeneeeneeeeessseesseessersseessseessseessressersserssseressressresseesseeessees 1 9 1 4 6 On Chip Memory asses ceed inneni aaisan Eae eE A ESE aa eda aE aE 1 10 1 5 Dreyen EN 1 10 1 6 LEE 1 11 1 7 Peripherals eege E EA E E E E E 1 12 1 7 1 General Purpose Input Output GPIO signals 00 eee ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesneeesaeeneeseees 1 12 1 7 2 Host Interface Ee 1 12 1 7 3 Enhance Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI seeeesessssseseesessresresressersrerrersersrer
296. erial Communications Interface SCI Triple timer module 1 7 1 General Purpose Input Output GPIO signals The GPIO port consists of as many as 42 programmable signals all of which are also used by the peripherals HI32 ESSI SCI and timer There are no dedicated GPIO signals After a reset the signals are automatically configured as GPIO Three memory mapped registers per peripheral control GPIO functionality Programming techniques for these registers to control GPIO functionality are detailed in Chapter 5 Programming the Peripherals 1 7 2 Host Interface HI32 The Host Interface HI32 is a fast parallel host port up to 32 bits wide that can directly connect to the host bus The HI32 supports a variety of standard buses and provides glueless connection with a number of industry standard microcomputers microprocessors DSPs and DMA controllers In one of its modes of operation PCI mode the HI32 is a dedicated bidirectional target slave initiator master parallel port with a 32 bit wide data path up to eight words deep The HI32 can connect directly to the PCI bus 1 7 3 Enhance Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI The DSP56301 provides two independent and identical ESSIs Each ESSI has a full duplex serial port for communication with a variety of serial devices including one or more industry standard CODECs other DSPs microprocessors and peripherals that implement the Motorola Serial Peripheral Interface SPI The ESSI co
297. ernal memory should reside in the eight Least Significant Bits LSBs of the external data bus and the packing or unpacking for external write accesses occurs in Little Endian order that is the low byte is stored in the lowest of the three memory locations and is transferred first the middle byte is stored transferred next and the high byte is stored transferred last When this bit is cleared the expansion port control logic assumes a 24 bit wide external memory Notes 1 BPAC is used only for DMA accesses and not core accesses 2 To ensure sequential external accesses the DMA address should advance three steps at a time in two dimensional mode with a row length of one and an offset size of three For details refer to Motorola application note APR23 D Using the DSP56300 Direct Memory Access Controller 3 To prevent improper operation DMA address 1 and DMA address 2 should not cross the AAR bank borders 4 Arbitration is not allowed during the packing access that is the three accesses are treated as one access with respect to arbitration and the bus mastership is not released during these accesses Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility BYEN Bus Y Data Memory Enable A read write control bit that enables disables the AA pin and logic during external Y data space accesses When set BYEN enables the comparison of the external address to the BAC bits during external Y data space accesses If BYEN is c
298. erved Program as 0 Figure B 7 DRAM Control Register DCR AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference Programming Sheets Application B 20 Bus Interface Unit Bus Address to Compare Bits 23 12 BAC 11 0 address to compare to the external address in order to decide whether to assert the AA pin Bus Number of Address Bits to Compare Bits 11 8 BNC 3 0 number of bits from BAC bits that are compared to the external address Combinations BNC 3 0 1111 1110 1101 are reserved Date Programmer Sheet 3 of 3 Bus Packing Enable Bit 7 0 Disable internal packing unpacking logic 1 Enable internal packing unpacking logic Bus Y Data Memory Enable Bit 5 0 Disable AA pin and logic during external Y data space accesses 1 Enable AA pin and logic during external Y data space accesses Bus X Data Memory Enable Bit 4 0 Disable AA pin and logic during external X data space accesses 1 Enable AA pin and logic during external X data space accesses Bus Program Memory Enable Bit 3 0 Disable AA pin and logic during external program space accesses 1 Enable AA pin and logic during external program space accesses Bus Address Attribute Polarity Bit 2 0 AA RAS signal is active low 1 AA RAS signal is active high Bus Access Type Bits 1 0 BAT 1 0 Encoding 00 Reserved 01 SRAM access 10 DRAM access 11 Reserved ll 23 22 21 20 19
299. eset Polarity HRSP 6 24 Host Transfer Acknowledge Polarity HTAP 6 25 Slave Receive Interrupt Enable SRIE 6 26 Slave Transmit Interrupt Enable STIE 6 26 DSP Host Port GPIO Data Register DATH 6 43 DSP Master Transmit Data Register DTXM 6 42 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR DSP PCI Transaction Address Low AR 15 0 6 34 PCI Bus Command C 3 0 6 34 PCI Byte Enables BEI Oly 6 33 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC Data Transfer Format Control FC 1 0 6 31 DSP PCI Transaction Address High AR 31 16 6 32 PCI Data Burst Length BL 5 0 6 32 DSP PCI Port Control Register DPCR Clear Transmiter CLRT 6 29 HSERR Force SERF 6 28 Insert Address Enable IAE 6 27 Master Access Counter Enable MACE 6 28 Master Address Interrupt Enable MAIE 6 30 Master Receive Interrupt Enable MRIE 6 30 Master Transfer Terminate MTT 6 28 Master Transmit Interrupt Enable MTIE 6 30 Master Wait State Disable MWSD 6 28 Parity Error Interrupt Enable PEIE 6 29 Receive Buffer Lock Enable RBLE 6 27 Transaction Abort Interrupt Enable TAIE 6 29 Transaction Termination Interrupt Enable TTIE 6 29 Transfer Complete Interrupt Enable TCIE 6 29 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR Master Data Transferred MDT 6 39 PCI Address Parity Error APER 6 40 PCI Data Parity Error DPER 6 40 Index 3 PCI Host Data Transfer Complete HDTC 6 39 PCI Master Abort MAB 6 40 PCI Master Address Request MARQ 6 40 PCI Master Receive Data Req
300. esrrsrresresesreeseeseese 2 1 2 2 Power tee E Gis exc acinus R EEA E E RAE aah 2 4 2 3 Gro d Signals sssini i eE e EEEE ee nE TeSa Eaa E 2 4 2 4 Clock Signals issii naseiro iis a is Ee aada EEEa E ias aaas 2 5 2 5 Phase Lock Loop Signals e nreseicarorr ana AEE EA EN 2 5 2 6 External Address E 2 6 2 7 External Data Bus Signal Sesssrus sotiin nr a A 2 6 2 8 External EE 2 6 2 9 Interrupt and Mode Control seseseeseeeeseseeseesessreeressersresrersttstesressttstesreesteseseresresseeete 2 9 2 10 Host ott 2 10 2 11 Summary of HI32 Signals and Modes eseeeeeseeeseseesseeseesresrrserssressererssressrseresreses 2 14 2 12 Host P rt Eegeregie 2 16 2 13 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface OU 2 23 2 14 Enhanced Serial Synchronous Interface 1 2 25 2 15 Serial Communication HOER gereent 2 27 2 16 dek 2 28 2 17 VT AiG E e 2 29 3 1 DSP56301 RAM Configurations oj cdicesecsenvssiatoatsiaciondnscitueseqetuancshewteuieseqantoceatieeeese 3 6 3 2 DSP56301 RAM Address Ranges by Configuration eee eeeeeeeseeeneeseeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 4 1 DSP56301 Operate Mod s siscssssisisicssrsisisisnsisisis ginei irigis aio siaa 4 2 4 2 Operating Mode Definitions ssseesseseessesetssrserestsstseresresstsstestessessterresseeseserssressest 4 3 4 3 Status Register Bit Definitions eege eneen 4 7 4 4 Operating Mode Register OMR Bit Definitions sssssessssseesesesesssessssseessresseesses 4 12 4 5 Intemupe Priority Level Ree 4 17 4 6 enee e 4 17 4 7 Interrupt
301. external decoupling capacitors Vccc Bus Control Power An isolated power for the bus control I O drivers This input must be tied externally to all other chip power inputs The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors Vocu Host Power An isolated power for the HI32 I O drivers This input must be tied externally to all other chip power inputs The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors Vcecs ESSI SCI and Timer Power An isolated power for the ESSI SCI and timer I O drivers This input must be tied externally to all other chip power inputs The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors 2 2 Ground Table 2 3 Ground Signals Ground wae Name Description GNDp PLL Ground GND dedicated for PLL use The connection should be provided with an extremely low impedance path to ground Vccp should be bypassed to GNDp by a 0 47 uF capacitor located as close as possible to the chip package GNDp PLL Ground 1 GND dedicated for PLL use The connection should be provided with an extremely low impedance path to ground GNDg Quiet Ground An isolated ground for the internal processing logic This connection must be tied externally to all other chip ground connections The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors GND Address Bus Ground An isolated ground for sections of the address bus I O drivers This c
302. f the CCR During processor reset all CCR bits are cleared The definition of the three 8 bit registers within the SR is primarily for the purpose of compatibility with other Motorola DSPs Bit definitions in the following paragraphs identify the bits within the SR and not within the subregister Extended Mode Register EMR l Mode Register MR l Condition Code Register CCR 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CP 1 0 RM SM CE SA FV LF DM SC S 1 0 1 0 l S L E U N Z V Reset TT TL OLoO ofTo TolTofofoy oloj oj ofififoj ofoj ojfoj ojfojo Reserved bit Read as zero write to zero for future compatibility Figure 4 1 Status Register SR Table 4 3 Status Register Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 22 CP 1 0 11 Core Priority Under control of the CDP 1 0 bits in the OMR the CP bits specify the priority of core accesses to external memory These bits are compared against the priority bits of the active DMA channel If the core priority is greater than the DMA priority the DMA waits for a free time slot on the external bus If the core priority is less than the DMA priority the core waits for a free time slot on the external bus If the core priority equals the DMA priority the core and DMA access the externa
303. f the first word written to the DTXM and HHHH are the two least significant bytes of the second word written to the DTXM DPMC FC 1 The data written to the DTXM is output to the HAD 31 0 pins as right aligned and zero extended in the most significant byte IFC 2 The data written to the DTXM is output to the HAD 31 0 pins as right aligned and sign extended in the most significant byte DPMC FC 3 The data written to the DTXM is output to the HAD 31 0 pins as left aligned and zero filled in the least significant byte In a PCI Host to DSP transaction DPMC FC 0 The two least significant bytes PCI data bytes 32 bit data mode from the HAD 15 0 pins are transferred to the two least significant bytes of the DRXR after which the two most significant bytes from the HAD 31 16 pins are transferred to the two least significant bytes of the DRXR Thus when the DSP56300 core reads two words from the DRXR the two least significant bytes of the first word read contain the two least significant bytes of the 32 bit word written to the HTXR the two least significant bytes of the second word read contain the two most significant bytes of the 32 bit word AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 31 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 12 DSP PCI Master Control Register DMPC Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 22 FC 1 0 0 DPMC F
304. ffsets On chip instruction cache controller On chip memory expandable hardware stack Nested hardware DO loops Fast auto return interrupts Hardware system stack The PCU uses the following registers 1 8 Program counter register Status register Loop address register Loop counter register Vector base address register Size register Stack pointer Operating mode register Stack counter register DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DSP56300 Core Functional Blocks 1 4 4 PLL and Clock Oscillator The clock generator in the DSP56300 core comprises two main blocks the PLL which performs clock input division frequency multiplication and skew elimination and the clock generator which performs low power division and clock pulse generation These features allow you to Change the low power divide factor without losing the lock Output a clock with skew elimination The PLL allows the processor to operate at a high internal clock frequency using a low frequency clock input a feature that offers two immediate benefits A lower frequency clock input reduces the overall electromagnetic interference generated by a system m The ability to oscillate at different frequencies reduces costs by eliminating the need to add additional oscillators to a system 1 4 5 JTAG TAP and OnCE Module In the DSP56300 core is a dedicated user accessible TAP that is fully compatible with the IEEE 1149 1 Standard Test Access Port a
305. ficiently and at high speeds Memory mapping allows the DSP56300 core to transfer data with the HI32 registers using standard instructions and addressing modes In addition the MOVEP instruction allows HI32 to memory and memory to HI32 data transfers without the use of an intermediate register The DSP56300 core can access the HI32 using either standard polling interrupt or DMA techniques The general purpose DMA channels in the DSP56300 core can be programmed to transfer data between the HI32 data FIFOs and other DMA accessible resources at maximum throughput without DSP56300 core intervention This section describes the purpose and operation of each bit in the HI32 registers that are visible to the DSP56300 core The HI32 host side programming model is described in Section 6 8 Host Side Programming Model on page 6 44 6 22 DSP56301 User s Manual MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model 6 7 1 DSP Control Register DCTR The DCTR is a 24 bit read write control register by which the core controls the HI32 interrupts flags and host port pin functionality The host processor cannot access the DCTR To access individual DCTR bits use the bit manipulation instructions 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 HM2 HM1 HMO HIRD HIRH HRSP HDRP All modes All modes All modes UB UB UB UB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 HTAP HRWP HDSM UB UB UB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HINT HF5 HF4 HF3 SRIE STIE HCIE UB PCI
306. for this feature is added to the description of these pins Table 2 1 DSP56301 Functional Signal Groupings Functional Group eae Faire Power Vcc 25 Table 2 2 Ground GND 26 Table 2 3 Clock 2 Table 2 4 Phase Lock Loop PLL 3 Table 2 5 Address bus 24 Table 2 6 Data bus Geier 24 Table 2 7 Bus control 15 Table 2 8 Interrupt and mode control 5 Table 2 9 Host Interface HI32 Port B 52 Table 2 11 Table 2 12 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces ESSIO and Ports C and D 12 Table 2 13 and ESSI1 Table 2 14 Serial Communications Interface SCI Port E4 3 Table 2 15 Timers 3 Table 2 16 JTAG OnCE Port 6 Table 2 17 Notes 1 Port A signals define the external memory interface port including the external address bus data bus and on ap control signals The data bus lines have internal keepers Port B signals are the HI32 port signals multiplexed with the GPIO signals Port C and D signals are the two ESSI port signals multiplexed with the GPIO signals All Port C and D signals have keepers Port E signals are the SCI port signals multiplexed with the GPIO signals All Port E signals have keepers All timer signals have keepers AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 1 DSP56301 MODA IRQA Power Inputs Interrupt Ge Mode ODC IRQC VocP PLL H 4 Control MODD IRQD Veca Internal Logic BR V 6 RESET cca 3 Address Bus NMI Vecp gt Data Bus Vece 6 Bus Cont
307. frequency 8 6 data registers 8 22 Data Word Formats 8 10 enable wakeup function 8 15 enable disable SCI receive data with exception interrupt 8 12 exceptions 8 8 Idle Line 8 9 Receive Data 8 8 Receive Data with Exception Status 8 8 Timer 8 9 Transmit Data 8 8 GPIO 5 6 GPIO functionality 8 24 T O signals 8 3 Idle Line Wakeup mode 8 3 individual reset state PCR 0 8 6 initialization 8 6 Inter processor messages 8 2 interrupts 8 6 Multidrop mode 8 2 operating mode 8 1 A MOTOROLA Asynchronous 8 1 Synchronous 8 1 programming model 8 9 data registers 8 22 Receive Data RXD 8 4 recover synchronization 8 2 reset 8 5 RXD TXD SCLK 8 3 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 19 bit definitions 8 19 Clock Divider CD 8 20 Clock Out Divider COD 8 19 Clock Prescaler SCP 8 19 programming sheet B 36 Receive Clock Mode Source RCM 8 19 Transmit Clock Source TCM 8 19 SCI Control Register SCR 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 12 bit defintions 8 12 Idle Line Interrupt Enable ILIE 8 13 programming sheet B 35 Receive with Exception Interrupt Enable REIE 8 12 Receiver Enable RE 8 14 Receiver Wakeup Enable RWU 8 15 SCI Clock Polarity SCKP 8 12 SCI Receive Interrupt Enable RIE 8 13 SCI Shift Direction SSFTD 8 15 SCI Transmit Interrupt Enable TIE 8 13 Send Break SBK 8 15 Timer Interrupt Enable TMIE 8 13 Timer Interrupt Rate STIR 8 12 Transmitter Enable TE 8 14 Wakeup Mode Select WAKE 8 15 Wired OR Mode S
308. frequency must not exceed Pre AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 3 ESSI Data and Control Signals 7 2 4 Serial Control Signal SCO ESSI0 SC00 ESSI1 SC10 To determine the function of the SCO signal select either Synchronous or Asynchronous mode according to Table 7 2 In Asynchronous mode this signal is used for the receive clock I O In Synchronous mode this signal is the transmitter data out signal for transmit shift register TX1 or for serial flag I O A typical application of serial flag I O would be multiple device selection for addressing in codec systems If SCO is configured as a serial flag signal or receive clock signal its direction is determined by the Serial Control Direction 0 SCDO bit in ESSI Control Register B CRB When configured as an output SCO functions as the serial Output Flag 0 OFO or as a receive shift register clock output If SCO is used as the serial Output Flag 0 its value is determined by the value of the serial Output Flag O OPO bit in the CRB If SCO is an input it functions as either serial Input Flag 0 or a receive shift register clock input As serial Input Flag 0 SCO controls the state of the serial Input Flag 0 IFO bit in the ESSI Status Register SSISR When SCO is configured as a transmit data signal it is always an output signal regardless of the SCDO bit value SCO is fully synchronized with the other transmit data signals STD and SC1 SCO can be programm
309. g Through the SCI Boot Mode 2 or A When the DSP comes out of reset it checks the MODD MODC MODB and MODA pins and sets the corresponding mode bits in the Operating Mode Register OMR If the mode bits are write to 0010 or 1010 respectively the DSP loads the program RAM from the SCI Appendix shows the complete bootstrap code This program 1 configures the SCI 2 loads the program size 3 loads the location where the program begins loading in program memory and 4 loads the program First the SCI Control Register is set to 000302 which enables the transmitter and receiver and configures the SCI for 10 bits asynchronous with one start bit 8 data bits one stop bit and no parity Next the SCI Clock Control Register is set to 00C000 which configures the SCI to use external receive and transmit clocks from the SCLK pin input This external clock must be 16 times the desired serial data rate The next step is to receive the program size and then the starting address to load the program These two numbers are three bytes each loaded least significant byte first Each byte is echoed back as it is received After both numbers are loaded the program size is in AO and the starting address is in Al The program is then loaded one byte at a time least significant byte first After the program is loaded the operating mode is set to zero the CCR is cleared and the DSP begins execution with the first instruction loaded 8 5 Exceptions
310. g interrupts requires two steps 1 Setting up the interrupt routine The interrupt handler is located at the interrupt starting address The interrupt routines can be short only two opcodes long or long more than two opcodes and requiring a JSR instruction 2 Enabling the interrupts b Set the corresponding bits in the applicable peripheral control register c Enable peripheral interrupts in the Interrupt Priority Register IPRP d Enable global interrupts in the Mode Register MR portion of the Status Register SR Events that change bits in the peripheral control registers can then trigger the interrupt Depending on the peripheral two to six peripheral interrupt sources are available to the programmer AA MOTOROLA Programming the Peripherals 5 3 General Purpose Input Output GPIO 5 3 3 DMA The Direct Memory Access DMA controller permits data transfers between internal external memory and or internal external I O in any combination without the intervention of the core Dedicated DMA address and data buses and internal memory partitioning ensure achievement of high level isolation so the DMA operation does not interfere with or slow down core operation The DMA moves data to from the peripheral transmit receive registers You can use the DMA control registers to configure sources and destinations of data transfers Depending on the peripheral one to four peripheral request sources are available This is the m
311. gnal 1010 If the INV bit is cleared the TIO signal generates the following signal 0101 The value of the TLR determines the output period SFFFFFF TLR 1 The timer counter increments the initial TLR value and toggles the TIO signal when the counter value exceeds FFFFFF The duty cycle of the TIO signal is determined by the value in the TCPR When the value in the TLR increments to a value equal to the value in the TCPR the TIO signal is toggled The duty cycle is equal to FFFFFF TCPR divided by FFFFFF TLR 1 For a 50 percent duty cycle the value of TCPR is equal to SFFFFFF TLR 1 2 Note The value in TCPR must be greater than the value in TLR AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 19 Operating Modes Period FFFFFF TLR 1 Duty cycle SF FFFFF TCPR Ensure that TCPR gt TLR for correct functionalit Mode 7 internal clock TRM 1 T g N write preload first event M write compare d TE es cock E CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR Ft Counter TCR 0 N TCPR gt lt M if TCIE 1 0 N N 1 TCF Compare Interrupt TCF Overflow Interrupt if TDIE 1 TIO pin INV 0 TIO pin INV 1 Pulse width gt L Period Figure 9 16 Pulse Width Modulation Toggle Mode TRM 1 9 20 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Mode 7 internal clock N write pr
312. gnal Format CRB FSL1 controls the frame sync signal format If CRB FSL1 is cleared the receive frame sync is asserted during the entire data transfer period This frame sync length is compatible with Motorola codecs serial peripherals that conform to the Motorola SPI serial A D and D A converters shift registers and telecommunication pulse code modulation serial I O IfCRB FSL1 is set the receive frame sync pulses active for one bit clock immediately before the data transfer period This frame sync length is compatible with Intel and National Semiconductor Corporation components codecs and telecommunication pulse code modulation serial I O AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 11 Operating Modes Normal Network and On Demand 7 4 5 Frame Sync Length for Multiple Devices The ability to mix frame sync lengths is useful to configure systems in which data is received from one type of device for example codec and transmitted to a different type of device CRB FSLO controls whether RX and TX have the same frame sync length If CRB FSLO is cleared both RX and TX have the same frame sync length If CRB FSLO is set RX and TX have different frame sync lengths CRB FSLO is ignored when CRB SYN is set 7 4 6 Word Length Frame Sync and Data Word Timing The CRB FSR bit controls the relative timing of the word length frame sync relative to the data word timing When CRB FSR is cleared the wor
313. gure 4 4 is dedicated to DSP56301 peripheral interrupt sources 21 20 T T GE Se TE 14 DMAO IPL DMA1 IPL DMA2 IPL DMAS IPL DMA4 IPL DMAS IPL 11 IRQA IPL IRQA mode IDO IPL IRQB mode IRQC IPL IRQC mode IRQD IPL IRQD mode Figure 4 3 Interrupt Priority Register Core IPRC X FFFFFF 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 reserved 11 10 T 8 T T EE eee e eee HIO8 IPL ESSIO IPL ESSI1 IPL SCI IPL TRIPLE TIMER IPL reserved Reserved bit read as zero should be written with zero for future compatibility Figure 4 4 Interrupt Priority Register Peripherals PPRP X FFFFFE 4 16 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Configuring Interrupts The DSP56301 has a four level interrupt priority structure Each interrupt has two interrupt priority level bits IPL 1 0 that determine its interrupt priority level Level 0 is the lowest priority Level 3 is the highest level priority and is non maskable Table 4 5 defines the IPL bits Table 4 5 Interrupt Priority Level Bits L bi gege Interrupts Enabled Interrupts Masked Interrupt Priority Level xxL1 xxL0O 0 0 No 0 0 1 Yes 0 1 1 0 Yes 0 1 2 1 1 Yes 0 1 2 3 The IPRC also selects the trigger mode of the external interrupts IRQA IRQD If the value of the IxL2 bit is 0 the interrupt mode is level triggered If the value is 1 the
314. gure 8 5 shows the block diagram of the internal clock generation circuitry with the formula to compute the bit rate when the internal clock is used F core Prescaler 12 bit Counter Divide by tors Internal Clock Ge SCI Core Logic Uses Divide by 16 for Asynchronous Uses Divide by 2 for STIR Synchronous If Asynchronous Divide by 1 or 16 If Synchronous Divide By 2 Timer Interrupt STMINT Fcore bps 64 x 7 SCP 1 x CD 1 where SCP Oor1 CD 000 to FFF SCKP Op SCKP 1p SCLK Figure 8 5 SCI Baud Rate Generator 8 20 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI Programming Model As noted in Section 8 6 1 the SCI can be configured to operate in a single Synchronous mode or one of five Asynchronous modes Synchronous mode requires that the TX and RX clocks use the same source but that source may be the internal SCI clock if the SCI is configured as a master device or an external clock if the SCI is configured as a slave device Asynchronous modes may use clocks from the same source internal or external or different sources for the TX clock and the RX clock For synchronous operation the SCI uses a clock that is equal to the two times the desired bit rate designated as the 2 x clock for both internal and external clock sources It must use the same source for both the TX and RX clock The internal clock is used if the SCI is the master device and the external clock is used if
315. gured in Synchronous mode the CRB synchronous asynchronous bit SYN is set and transmitter 2 is disabled transmit enable TE2 0 then the SC1 signal acts as the transmitter 0 driver enabled signal while the SC1 signal is configured as output SCD1 1 This configuration enables an external buffer for the transmitter 0 output If SSC1 is cleared the ESSI is configured in Synchronous mode SYN 1 and transmitter 2 is disabled TE2 0 then the SC1 acts as the serial I O flag while the SC1 signal is configured as output SCD1 1 21 19 WL 2 0 0 Word Length Control Select the length of the data words transferred via the ESSI Word lengths of 8 12 16 24 or 32 bits can be selected The ESSI data path programming model in Figure 7 12 and Figure 7 13 shows additional information on how to select different lengths for data words The ESSI data registers are 24 bits long The ESSI transmits 32 bit words in one of two ways BR by duplicating the last bit 8 times when WL 2 0 100 BR by duplicating the first bit 8 times when WL 2 0 101 Note When WL 2 0 100 the ESSI is designed to duplicate the last bit of the 24 bit transmission eight times to fill the 32 bit shifter Instead after the 24 bit word is shifted correctly eight zeros Os are shifted ESSI Word Length Selection WL2 WL1 WLO Number of Bits Word 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 12 0 1 0 16 0 1 1 24 1 0 0 32 valid data in the fir
316. h Master and slave should enable the PLL For the slave multiplication division and predivision fuctors should be one to guarantee syncronization between master and slave For asynchronous connection HBS_ must be tied to Vcc Note2 If HTA to HTA_ connection is not used it is recommended that the HOST Processor s boot program verify that the Host Interface is ready by reading the status register HSTR and confirming that TRDY 1 or HTRO 1 FEEL LEE EEL EE EA PEPE FE EEE EEE CEES OPE EE EES TEE EEE EEE EST OTF ET EES TF If MD MC MB MA x100 then it loads the program RAM from the Host Interface programmed to operate in the PCI target slave mode The HI32 bootstrap code expects first to read a 24 bit word specifying the number of program words then a 24 bit word specifying the address to start loading the program words and then 24 bit word for each program word to be loaded The program words will be stored in contiguous PRAM memory locations starting at the specified starting address After the program words are read program execution starts from the same address where loading started The Host Interface bootstrap load program can be stopped by setting the Host Flag 0 HFO in the HCTR register This starts execution of the loaded program from the specified starting address The HOST Processor must first configure the Host Interface as a PCI slave and then start writing data to t
317. h appropriate edge of the input signal In PWM modes if TCSR TRM is set the counter is reloaded each time after it overflows and the new event occurs In watchdog modes if TCSR TRM is set the counter is reloaded each time after it reaches the value contained by the timer compare register and the new event occurs In this mode the counter is also reloaded whenever the TLR is written with a new value while TCSR TE is set In all modes if TCSR TRM is cleared TRM 0 the counter operates as a free running counter MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 33 Triple Timer Module Programming Model 9 4 6 Timer Compare Register TCPR The TCPR is a 24 bit read write register that contains the value to be compared to the counter value These two values are compared every timer clock after TCSR TE is set When the values match the timer compare flag bit is set and an interrupt is generated if interrupts are enabled that is the timer compare interrupt enable bit in the TCSR is set The TCPR is ignored in measurement modes 9 4 7 Timer Count Register TCR The TCR is a 24 bit read only register In timer and watchdog modes the contents of the counter can be read at any time from the TCR register In measurement modes the TCR is loaded with the current value of the counter on the appropriate edge of the input signal and its value can be read to determine the width period or delay of the leading edge of the input signal When the timer
318. h is a six word deep FIFO buffer three 2 or 3 word deep in the 32 bit data format mode DCTR HM 1 and HCTR HRF 0 STRQ is set if the DTXS is not full STRQ is cleared when the DSP56300 core fills the DTXS STRQ is set BR When STIE is set a slave transmit data interrupt request is generated BR When enabled by a DSP56300 core DMA channel a slave transmit data DMA request is generated 0 HCP 0 UBM _ Host Command Pending PCI Indicates that the host has set the HC bit and that a host command interrupt is pending The HCP bit reflects the status of the HC bit in the HCVR If HCP is set and HCIE is set a host command interrupt request is generated The HI32 interrupt logic hardware clears HC and HCP when the HC interrupt request is serviced The host cannot clear HC AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 37 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model 6 7 6 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RDC5 RDC4 RDC3 RDC2 RDC1 RDCO 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 RDCQ MDT HDTC TO TRTY TDIS TAB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MAB DPER APER MARQ MRRQ MTRQ MWS Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility Figure 6 10 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR A 24 bit read only status register by which the DSP56300 core examines the status and flags of the HI32 in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The host processor cannot access the DPSR Table 6 15 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR Bit Definitions Bit N
319. h other peripherals Separate SCI transmit and receive sections can operate asynchronously with respect to each other A programmable baud rate generator provides the transmit and receive clocks An enable vector and an interrupt vector allow the baud rate generator to function as a general purpose timer when the SCI is not using it or when the interrupt timing is the same as that used by the SCI 1 7 5 Triple Timer Module The triple timer module is composed of a common 21 bit prescaler and three independent and identical general purpose 24 bit timer event counters each with its own memory mapped register set Each timer has the following properties A single signal that can function as a GPIO signal or as a timer signal Uses internal or external clocking and can interrupt the DSP after a specified number of events clocks or signal an external device after counting internal events Connects to the external world through one bidirectional signal When this signal is configured as an input the timer functions as an external event counter or measures the external pulse width signal period When the signal is used as an output the timer functions as either a timer a watchdog or a pulse width modulator AA MOTOROLA Overview 1 13 Related Documents and Web Sites 1 8 Related Documents and Web Sites The documents listed in Table 1 3 are required for a complete description of the DSP56301 and are necessary to design properly with the
320. hase Lock Loop PLL Allows change of low power Divide Factor DF without loss of lock Output clock with skew elimination Hardware debugging support On Chip Emulation OnCE module Joint Action Test Group JTAG Test Access Port TAP port Address Trace mode reflects internal Program RAM accesses at the external port On chip memories Program RAM instruction cache X data RAM and Y data RAM sizes are programmable Program RAM Instruction X Data RAM Y Data RAM Instruction Switch Size Cache Size Size Size Cache Mode 4096 x 24 bit 0 2048 x 24 bit 2048 x 24 bit disabled disabled CE 0 MS 0 3072 x 24 bit 1024 x 24 bit 2048 x 24 bit 2048 x 24 bit enabled disabled CE 1 MS 0 2048 x 24 bit 0 3072 x 24 bit 3072 x 24 bit disabled enabled CE 0 MS 1 1024 x 24 bit 1024 x 24 bit 3072 x 24 bit 3072 x 24 bit enabled enabled CE 1 MS 1 1 Controlled by the Cache Enable CE bit in the Status Register SR 2 Controlled by the Memory Select MS bit in the Operating Mode Register OMR 192 or 3 K x 24 bit bootstrap ROM depending on the DSP56301 revision Off chip memory expansion Data memory expansion to two 16 M x 24 bit word memory spaces in 24 Bit mode or two 64 K x 16 bit memory spaces in Sixteen Bit Compatibility mode Program memory expansion to one 16 M x 24 bit words memory space in 24 Bit mode or 64 K x 16 bit in Sixteen Bit Compatib
321. he HRXM The HRXM transfers the data to the HI32 data pins via the data transfer format converter HDTFC The value of the DPMC FC bits define which bytes of the HRXM are output to the pins and their alignment See Section 6 3 2 DSP To Host Data Path on page 6 7 and Table 6 3 HI32 PCI Master Data Transfer Formats on page 6 8 In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 the DSP56300 core can clear the HI32 master to host bus data path and empty HRXM by setting the DPCR CLRT bit In PCI DSP to host data transfers via the HRXM all four byte lanes are driven with data in accordance with the FC 1 0 bits regardless of the value of the byte enable pins HC3 HBE3 HCO0 HBEO Hardware software and personal software resets empty the HRXM 6 8 5 Host Slave Receive Data Register HRXS The HRXS is the output stage of the slave DSP to host data path FIFO for DSP to host data transfers The DSP56300 core cannot access HRXS The HRXS contains valid data when the HSTR HRRQ bit is set Emptying the HRXS by host processor reads clears HSTR HRRQ The HRXS transfers the data to the HI32 data pins via the data transfer format converter HDTFC The value of the HCTR HRF bits define which bytes of the HRXS are output to AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 61 Host Side Programming Model the pins and their alignment See Section 6 3 2 DSP To Host Data Path on page 6 7 and Section 6 3 1 Host to DSP Data Path on page 6 6 In a PCI mode DCTR HM 1 m
322. he Host Interface The HOST Processor must program the HCTR HTF1 HTIFO bits as 01 10 or 11 and then DSP56301 User s Manual A 3 A 4 correspondingly drive the 24 bit data mapped into the 32 bit PCI bus word Note that for the synchronization purposes the DSP to PCI clock ratio should be more than 5 3 ZEETEEEEEEITTREEEEEEZEESEEEE EE EFFE EEEEEEEEEEZEREEEEEEREEEEZTEEEZEEEEEEEEEEEZEEE E STE MC MB MA x101 then it loads the program RAM from the Host Interface programmed to operate in the Universal Bus mode supporting ISA slave glue less connection Using Self Configuration mode the bas address in the CBMA is initially written with 2f which corresponds to an ISA HTXR address of S2fe Serial Port 2 Modem Status read only register The HI32 bootstrap code expects to read 32 consecutive times the magic number 0037 Subsequently the bootstrap code expects to read a 16 bit word that is the designated ISA Port Address this address is written into the CBMA The HOST Processor must poll for the Host Interface to be reconfigured This must be done by reading the HSTR and verifying that the value 0013 is vead From this moment the HOST Processor can start writing data to the Host Interface The HI32 bootstrap code expects first to read a 24 bit word see Note below specifying the number of program words then a 24 bit word specifying the address to st
323. he Intel 8051 serial interface mode 0 When odd parity is selected the transmitter counts the number of ones in the data word If the total is not an odd number the parity bit is set thus producing an odd number If the receiver counts an even number of ones an error in transmission has occurred When even parity is selected an even number must result from the calculation performed at both ends of the line or an error in transmission has occurred WDS2 wbDs1 WDS0 Mode Word Formats 0 0 0 0 8 Bit Synchronous Data shift register mode 0 0 1 1 Reserved 0 1 0 10 Bit Asynchronous 1 start 8 data 1 stop 2 1 1 1 3 Reserved 4 11 Bit Asynchronous 1 start 8 data 1 even parity 1 stop 1 0 1 5 11 Bit Asynchronous 1 start 8 data 1 odd parity 1 stop 1 1 0 6 11 Bit Multidrop Asynchronous 1 start 8 data 1 data type 1 stop 0 1 1 7 Reserved 8 16 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA 8 6 2 SCI Status Register SSR The SSR is a read only register that indicates the status of the SCI 23 22 21 20 19 18 SCI Programming Model 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 6 5 4 3 R8 FE PE OR IDLE RDRF TDRE TRNE Reserved bit read as 0 write to 0 for future compatibility Table 8 3 SCI Status Register Table 8 4 SCI Status Register SSR Bit Definitions Bi
324. he RIE and receive data register full RDF bit in the SSISR are set When RIE is cleared this interrupt is disabled The receive interrupt is documented in Section 7 3 3 Exceptions on page 7 7 When the receive data register is read it clears RDF and the pending interrupt Receive interrupts with exception have higher priority than normal receive data interrupts If the receiver overrun error ROE bit is set signaling that an exception has occurred and the REIE bit is set the ESSI requests an SSI receive data with exception interrupt from the interrupt controller AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 19 ESSI Programming Model Table 7 4 ESSI Control Register B CRB Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 18 TIE 0 Transmit Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP transmit interrupt the interrupt is generated when both the TIE and the TDE bits in the ESSI status register are set When TIE is cleared the transmit interrupt is disabled The transmit interrupt is documented in Section 7 3 3 When data is written to the data registers of the enabled transmitters or to the TSR it clears TDE and also clears the interrupt Transmit interrupts with exception conditions have higher priority than normal transmit data interrupts If the transmitter underrun error TUE bit is set signaling that an exception has occurred and the TEIE bit is set
325. he TCSR TRM bit This process repeats until the timer is disabled Mode 1 internal clock TRM 1 N write preload first event M write compare TE Clock CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR Counter TCR TCPR TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 TIO pin INV 0 pulse width timer clock TIO pin INV 1 period Figure 9 5 Pulse Mode TRM 1 9 8 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes Mode 1 internal clock TRM 0 N write preload M write compare Clock first event CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR gt lt N S ee EE Counter TCR X 0 X NET C Ma KMET O X N n TCPR K M Es C TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 A TIO pin INV 0 pulse width J timer clock riod TIO pin INV 1 Pee TOF Overflow Interrupt if TCIE 1 Si Ir Figure 9 6 Pulse Mode TRM 0 AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 9 Operating Modes 9 3 1 3 Timer Toggle Mode 2 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 0 0 1 0 2 Toggle Timer Output Internal In Mode 2 the timer periodically toggles the polarity of the TIO signal When the timer is enabled the TIO signal is loaded with the value of the TCSR INV bit When the counter value matches the value in the TCPR the polarity of the TIO output signal is inverted TCSR TCF is set and a compare interr
326. he bit is clear then the stack extension is mapped onto the X memory space If the XYS bit is set the stack extension is mapped to the Y memory space 15 ATE Address Trace Enable When set the Address Trace Enable ATE bit enables Address Trace mode The Address Trace mode is a debugging tool that reflects internal memory accesses at the external bus address 14 APD Address Attribute Priority Disable Disables the priority assigned to the Address Attribute signals AA O 3 When APD 0 default setting the four Address Attribute signals each have a certain priority AA3 has the highest priority AAO has the lowest priority Therefore only one AA signal can be active at one time This allows continuous partitioning of external memory however certain functions such as using the AA signals as additional address lines require the use of additional interface hardware When APD is set the priority mechanism is disabled allowing more than one AA signal to be active simultaneously Therefore the AA signals can be used as additional address lines without the need for additional interface hardware For details on the Address Attribute Registers see Section 4 6 3 Address Attribute Registers AAR 0 3 on page 4 27 13 ABE Asynchronous Bus Arbitration Enable SE SH Eliminates the setup and hold time requirements for BB and BG and substitutes a required non overlap interval between the deassertion of o
327. he transfer of data from TX2 to Transmit Shift Register 2 TE2 is functional only when the ESSI is in Synchronous mode and is ignored when the ESSI is in Asynchronous mode When TE2 is set and a frame sync is detected transmitter 2 is enabled for that frame When TE2 is cleared transmitter 2 is disabled after completing transmission of data currently in the ESSI transmit shift register Any data present in TX2 is not transmitted If TE2 is cleared data can be written to TX2 the TDE bit is cleared but data is not transferred to transmit shift register 2 If the TE2 bit is kept cleared until the start of the next frame it causes the SC1 signal to act as a serial I O flag from the start of the frame in both Normal mode and Network mode The transmit enable sequence in On Demand mode can be the same as in Normal mode or the TE2 bit can be left enabled Note The setting of the TE2 bit does not affect the generation of frame sync or output flags 13 MOD Mode Select Selects the operational mode of the ESSI as in Figure 7 8 on page 7 26 Figure 7 9 on page 7 27 and Figure 7 10 on page 7 27 When MOD is cleared the Normal mode is selected when MOD is set the Network mode is selected In Normal mode the frame rate divider determines the word transfer rate one word is transferred per frame sync during the frame sync time slot In Network mode a word can be transferred every time slot For details see Section 7 3 12 SYN
328. hift Register 7 24 Bit 7 0 16 Bit MSB LSB 8 bit Data 0 0 0 _ WL1 WLO LSB Least Significant 12 bit Data Zero Fill LSB 16 bit Data LSB 24 bit Data b Transmit Registers Note Data is received MSB first if SHFD 0 4 bit fractional format ALC 0 32 bit mode is not shown Figure 7 13 ESSI Data Path Programming Model SHFD 1 7 32 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model 7 5 7 ESSI Transmit Data Registers TX 2 0 ESSI0 TX20 TX10 TX00 ESSI1 TX21 TX11 TX01 TX2 TX1 and TXO are 24 bit write only registers Data written into these registers automatically transfers to the transmit shift registers See Figure 7 12 and Figure 7 13 The data transmitted 8 12 16 or 24 bits is aligned according to the value of the ALC bit When the ALC bit is cleared the MSB is Bit 23 When ALC is set the MSB is Bit 15 If the transmit data register empty interrupt has been enabled the DSP is interrupted whenever a transmit data register becomes empty Note When data is written to a peripheral device there is a two cycle pipeline delay while any status bits affected by this operation are updated If any of those status bits are read during the two cycle delay the status bit may not reflect the current status 7 5 8 ESSI Time Slot Register TSR TSR is effectively a write only null data register that prevents data transmission in the current transmit time slot For
329. host processor can use polling techniques HRRQ functions in accordance with the value of the slave fetch type SFT bit in the HCTR In Fetch mode SFT 1 the HRRQ is always read as zero In Pre Fetch mode SFT 0 the DSP to host data path is FIFO buffered HRRQ reflects the status of the HRXS HRRQ is cleared if the HRXS is empty and is set when data is transferred from the DTXS HTRQ UBM PCI Host Transmit Data Request Indicates that the host transmit data FIFO HTXR is not full and can be written by the host processor HTRQ is set when the HTXR data is transferred to the DRXR HTRQ is cleared when the HTXR is filled by host processor writes In PCI mode as target in a write data phase to the HTXR the HI32 deasserts HTRDY and inserts up to eight PCI wait cycles if HTRQ is cleared In a Universal Bus mode write to the HTXR the HI32 slave deasserts HTA as long as HTRQ is cleared HTRQ can assert the external HIRQ pin if the TREQ bit is set Regardless of whether the HTRQ host interrupt request is enabled HTRQ provides valid status so that the host processor can use polling techniques TRDY UBM PCI Transmitter Ready Indicates that both HTXR and DRXR are empty When TRDY is set to one both HTXR and DRXR are empty TRDY is cleared when the host processor writes to HTXR The data the host processor writes to the HTXR is immediately transferred to the DSP side of the HI32 This has many app
330. hould be 5 3 of the PCI clock Using DMA channels optimizes PCI data throughput as Example 6 1 and Example 6 2 illustrate AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 13 DSP Side Operating Modes Example 6 1 PCI DMA Throughput 32 Bit PCI clock 33 MHz 56301 core clock 66 MHz 33 bit PCI mode 1 wait state SRAM DMA transfers SRAM gt host transmit FIFO master or slave Best throughput rate is 14 14 Mwords sec Here s why 1 HI32 max transfer rate 32 bit pci_cyc pci_w s x multfactor tot_cyc 1 133 x 2 4 67 multfactor 2 because f_cor 66 MHz and f_pci 33 MHz Since 4 2 3 HI32 gt 2 core this dominates so the answer is 66 4 67 14 14 Mwords s 2 DMA transfer internal memory DRXR gt DMA gt internal X 2 1 src 1 dest 0 w s 2 2 4 DMA faster than HI32 gt 66 4 67 14 14 Mwords sec HI32 constrained 3 dma transfer external memory core cycles DMA 1 DMA source access 1 external wait state 1 DMA destination access 3 total DRXR gt DMA gt external X 2 1 src 1 dest 1 w s 2 3 6 DMA slower than HI32 gt 66 6 11 Mwords sec DMA const rained Example 6 2 PCI DMA Throughput 24 Bit PCI clock 33 MHz 56301 core clock 66 MHz 24 bit PCI mode 1 wait state SRAM DMA transfers SRAM gt host transmit FIFO master or slave Best throughput rate is 33 Mwords sec Here s why 1 HI32 max
331. ies to both ESSIO and ESSI1 SCD1 Serial Control Direction 1 In Synchronous mode SYN 1 when transmitter 2 is disabled TE2 0 or in Asynchronous mode SYN 0 SCD1 controls the direction of the SC1 I O signal When SCD1 is set SC1 is an output when SCD1 is cleared SC1 is an input When TE2 is set the value of SCD1 is ignored and the SC1 signal is always an output SCDO Serial Control Direction 0 In Synchronous mode SYN 1 when transmitter 1 is disabled TE1 0 or in Asynchronous mode SYN 0 SCDO controls the direction of the SCO I O signal When SCDO is set SCO is an output when SCDO is cleared SCO is an input When TE1 is set the value of SCDO is ignored and the SCO signal is always an output OF1 Serial Output Flag 1 In Synchronous mode SYN 1 when transmitter 2 is disabled TE2 0 the SC1 signal is configured as ESSI flag 1 When SCD1 is set SC1 is an output Data present in bit OF 1 is written to SC1 at the beginning of the frame in Normal mode or at the beginning of the next time slot in Network mode OFO Serial Output Flag 0 In Synchronous mode SYN 1 when transmitter 1 is disabled TE1 0 the SCO signal is configured as ESSI flag 0 When SCDO is set the SCO signal is an output Data present in Bit OFO is written to SCO at the beginning of the frame in Normal mode or at the beginning of the next time slot in Network mode AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Sy
332. ility mode External memory expansion port Chip Select Logic for glueless interface to SRAMs On chip DRAM Controller for glueless interface to DRAMs On chip peripheral support 32 bit parallel PCI Universal Host Interface HI32 PCI Rev 2 1 compliant with glueless interface to other DSP563xx buses ISA interface requires only 74LS45 style buffer Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces ESSIO and ESSI1 AA MOTOROLA Overview 1 5 DSP56300 Core Functional Blocks Serial Communications Interface SCI with baud rate generator Triple timer module Up to forty two programmable General Purpose Input Output GPIO pins depending on which peripherals are enabled Reduced power dissipation Very low power CMOS design Wait and Stop low power standby modes Fully static logic Optimized power management circuitry instruction dependent peripheral dependent and mode dependent 1 4 DSP56300 Core Functional Blocks The functional blocks of the DSP56300 core are as follows Data arithmetic logic unit ALU Address generation unit Program control unit PLL and clock oscillator JTAG TAP and OnCE module In addition the DSP56301 provides a set of on chip peripherals discussed in Section 1 7 Peripherals on page 1 12 1 4 1 Data ALU The data ALU performs all the arithmetic and logical operations on data operands in the DSP56300 core These are the components of the data ALU 1 6
333. imer and clears the timer counter The counter starts counting according to the mode selected by the timer control TC 3 0 bit values When clear TE bit disables the timer NOTE When all three timers are disabled and the signals are not in GPIO mode all three TIO signals are tri stated To prevent undesired spikes on the TIO signals when you switch from tri state into active state these signals should be tied to the high or low signal state by pull up or pull down resistors Table 9 4 Inverter INV Bit Operation Mode TIO Programmed as Input TIO Programmed as Output INV 0 INV 1 INV 0 INV 1 GPIO signal on the TIO signal read directly GPIO signal on the TIO signal inverted Bit written to GPIO put on TIO signal directly Bit written to GPIO inverted and put on TIO signal Counter is incremented on the rising edge of the signal from the TIO signal Counter is incremented on the falling edge of the signal from the TIO signal Counter is incremented on the rising edge of the signal from the TIO signal Counter is incremented on the falling edge of the signal from the TIO signal Initial output put on TIO signal directly Initial output inverted and put on TIO signal Counter is incremented on the rising edge of the signal from the TIO signal Counter is incremented on the falling edge of the signal from the TIO signal 9 32 DSP
334. instruction clears RWU RWU is ignored in Synchronous mode WAKE Wakeup Mode Select When WAKE is cleared the wakeup on Idle Line mode is selected In the wakeup on idle line mode the SCI receiver is re enabled by an idle string of at least 10 or 11 depending on WDS mode consecutive ones The transmitter s software must provide this idle string between consecutive messages The idle string cannot occur within a valid message because each word frame there contains a start bit that is 0 When WAKE is set the wakeup on address bit mode is selected In the wakeup on address bit mode the SCI receiver is re enabled when the last eighth or ninth data bit received in a character frame is 1 The ninth data bit is the address bit R8 in the 11 bit multidrop mode the eighth data bit is the address bit in the 10 bit asynchronous and 11 bit asynchronous with parity modes Thus the received character is an address that has to be processed by all sleeping processors that is each processor has to compare the received character with its own address and decide whether to receive or ignore all following characters SBK Send Break A break is an all zero word frame a start bit 0 characters of all zeros including any parity and a stop bit 0 that is ten or eleven zeros depending on the mode selected If SBK is set and then cleared the transmitter finishes transmitting the current frame sends 10 or 11 Os and reverts to idle or
335. interrupt mode is negative edge triggered 4 4 2 Interrupt Table Memory Map Each interrupt is allocated two instructions in the interrupt table resulting in 128 table entries for interrupt handling Table 4 6 shows the table entry address for each interrupt source The DSP56301 initialization program loads the table entry for each interrupt serviced with two interrupt servicing instructions In the DSP56301 only some of the 128 vector addresses are used for specific interrupt sources The remaining interrupt vectors are reserved and can be used for host NMI IPL 3 or for host command interrupt IPL 2 Unused interrupt vector locations can be used for program or data storage Table 4 6 Interrupt Sources Interrupt Priority Level Interrupt Source Starting Address Range VBA 00 3 Hardware RESET VBA 02 3 Stack error VBA 04 3 Illegal instruction VBA 06 3 Debug request interrupt VBA 08 3 Trap VBA 0A 3 Nonmaskable interrupt NMI VBA 0C 3 Reserved VBA 0E 3 Reserved AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 17 Configuring Interrupts Table 4 6 Interrupt Sources Continued Interrupt nterrupt Starting Address Priority Level Interrupt Source Range VBA 10 0 2 IRQA VBA 12 0 2 IRQB VBA 14 0 2 IRQC VBA 16 0 2 IRQD VBA 18 0 2 DMA channel 0 VBA 1A 0 2 DMA channel 1 VB
336. interrupt with an RTI instruction the System Stack is pulled and the LF bit value is restored 4 8 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit CPU Registers Table 4 3 Status Register Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 14 DM 0 Double Precision Multiply Mode Enables four multiply MAC operations to implement a double precision algorithm that multiplies two 48 bit operands with a 96 bit result Clearing the DM bit disables the mode Note The Double Precision Multiply mode is supported to maintain object code compatibility with devices in the DSP56000 family For a more efficient way of executing double precision multiply refer to the chapter on the Data Arithmetic Logic Unit in the DSP56300 Family Manual In Double Precision Multiply mode the behavior of the four specific operations listed in the double precision algorithm is modified Therefore do not use these operations with those specific register combinations in Double Precision Multiply mode for any purpose other than the double precision multiply algorithm All other Data ALU operations or the four listed operations but with other register combinations can be used The double precision multiply algorithm uses the YO Register at all stages Therefore do not change YO when running the double precision multiply algorithm If the Data ALU must be used in an interrupt service routine YO
337. iod after the last data bit is transmitted if another data word does not follow immediately If sequential data words are transmitted the STD signal does not assume a high impedance state The STD signal can be programmed as a GPIO signal P5 when the ESSI STD function is not in use 7 2 2 Serial Receive Data Signal SRD SRD receives serial data and transfers the data to the receive shift register SRD can be programmed as a GPIO signal P4 when the SRD function is not in use 7 2 3 Serial Clock SCK SCK is a bidirectional signal providing the serial bit rate clock for the ESSI interface The signal is a clock input or output used by all the enabled transmitters and receivers in Synchronous modes or by all the enabled transmitters in Asynchronous modes See Table 7 1 for details SCK can be programmed as a GPIO signal P3 when not used as the ESSI clock Table 7 1 ESSI Clock Sources SYN SCKD SCDO RX Clock Source GC TX Clock Source TX Clock Out Asynchronous 0 0 0 EXT SCO EXT SCK 0 0 1 INT Sco EXT SCK m 0 1 0 EXT SCO INT SCK 0 1 i INT SCO INT SCK Synchronous 1 0 on EXT SCK EXT SCK 1 1 on INT SCK INT SCK Note Although an external serial clock can be independent of and asynchronous to the DSP system clock the external ESSI clock frequency must not exceed F 3 and each ESSI phase must exceed the minimum of 1 5 CLKOUT cycles The internally sourced ESSI clock
338. ion Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP56300 core interrupt request in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 when the HI32 as a PCI master executes a time out termination TO is set a target initiated disconnect DPSR TDIS is set or a retry termination TRTY is set When TTIE is cleared transaction termination interrupt requests are disabled Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility TAIE Transaction Abort Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP56300 core interrupt request in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 when the HI32 as a PCI master executes a master abort termination DPSR MAB is set or a target initiated target abort termination TAB is set If TAIE is cleared transaction abort interrupt requests are disabled Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility PEIE Parity Error Interrupt Enable Enables disables a DSP56300 core interrupt request when a parity error is detected in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 When PEIE is cleared parity error interrupt requests are disabled When PEIE is set a parity error interrupt request is generated if a parity error address or data is detected and the address parity error APER status bit or the data parity error DPER status bit in the DPSR is set AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 29 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 11 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description
339. ions For example the Master Transfer Terminate MTT bit in the DSP PCI Control Register DPCR generates a transaction termination initiated by the PCI master The DSP56300 core can set MTT when MWS is set to terminate a transaction after the transfer of a specific number of words After MTT is set the HI32 completes the data phase and terminates the transaction Hardware software and personal software resets clear MWS 6 7 7 DSP Receive Data FIFO DRXR The 24 bit wide DSP Receive Data Register DRXR is the output stage of the host to DSP data path FIFO for host to DSP data transfers refer to Section 6 3 Data Transfer Paths on page 6 6 The DRXR contains master data that is data read by the HI32 as PCI master from an external target to be read if DPSR MRRQ is set MRRQ is cleared if the data in the DRXkR is slave data or when the host to DSP data path FIFO is emptied by DSP56300 core reads The DSP56300 core can set the DPCR MRIE bit to cause a host receive data interrupt when MRRQ is set The DRXR contains slave data that is data written to the HI32 from the host bus to be read if DSR SRRQ is set DSR SRRQ is cleared if the data in the DRXR is master data or AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 41 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model when the host to DSP data path FIFO is emptied by DSP56300 core reads The DSP56300 core can set the SRIE bit to cause a host receive data interrupt when SRRQ is set In 32 bit mode
340. ired to zero Figure 6 20 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA A PCI standard read write register mapped into the PCI configuration space in PCI mode or in mode 0 HM 1 or 0 The CBMA is accessed if a configuration read write command is in progress and the PCI address is 10 The CBMA controls the HI32 mapping into the PCI memory space and the Universal Bus mode space In Self Configuration mode DCTR HM 5 the DSP56300 core can indirectly access the CBMA see Section 6 5 5 Self Configuration Mode DCTR HM 5 on page 6 16 The CBMA is written in accordance with the byte enables Byte lanes that are not enabled are not written and the corresponding bits remain unchanged The host can access CBMA only when the HI32 is in PCI mode HM 1 Table 6 29 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 31 16 PM 31 16 0 Memory Base Address High Low Defines the HI32 base address when it is mapped into the PCI memory space PM 15 4 are hardwired to zero and the PCI master can write to PM 31 16 during system configuration The HI32 target occupies 16384 32 bit words of the PCI memory space The HI32 is selected by the 20 most significant PCI address pins HAD 31 12 The twelve least significant address pins HAD 11 0 select the HI32 registers on the host side see Figure 6 2 on page 6 19 The personal hardware
341. is selected HP23 HLOCK HBS HIO23 Host Lock Bus Strobe GPIO Sustained tri state bidirectional pin Schmitt trigger input pin Indicates an atomic operation that Asserted at the start of a bus cycle for half of may require multiple transactions to a clock cycle providing an early bus start complete When HLOCK is asserted signal This enables the HI32 to respond non exclusive transactions to the HTA valid earlier HBS should be forced or HI32 are retried that is this is an pulled up to Vcc if not used for example ISA entire resource lock bus HP24 HPAR HDAK disconnected Host Parity Host DMA Acknowledge Tri state bidirectional pin Schmitt trigger input pin Even parity across HAD 31 0 and Indicates that the external DMA channel is HC3 HBE3 HC0 HBEO The master accessing the HI32 The HI32 is selected as a drives HPAR during address and write DMA device if HDAK and HWR or HRD in the data phases the target drives HPAR double strobe mode or HDAK and HDS in during read data phases the single strobe mode are asserted HDAK should be forced or pulled up to Vcc if not used HP25 HPERR HDRQ disconnected Parity Error DMA Request Sustained tri state bidirectional pin Output Pin Used for reporting of data parity Supports ISA EISA type DMA data transfers errors HPERR must be driven active The HI32 asserts HDRQ when a DMA request by the agent receiving data two receive and or transmit is generated in the clock
342. is bit is hardwired to one 22 10 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility Not implemented Write to zero for future compatibility SERE System Error Enable Enable disables HI32 HSERR pin driving in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 When SERE is cleared the HSERR pin is disabled that is high impedance When SERE is set the force system error bit DPCR SERF is set and the HI32 is an active PCI agent or an address parity error is detected which causes the HI32 to pulse the HSERR pin and set the signalled system error bit CSTR SSE The personal hardware reset clears SERE WCC Wait Cycle Control hardwired to zero PERR Parity Error Response Controls HI32 response to parity errors in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 When PERR is cleared the HI32 does not drive HPERR If PERR is set and a parity error is detected the HI32 pulses the HPERR pin If a parity error or HPERR low is detected the HI32 sets the DPR bit in the CSTR CCMR In both cases the HI32 sets bit 15 DPE in the CSTR CCMR sets DPER in the DPSR and generates a parity error interrupt request if DPCR PEIE is set The personal hardware reset clears PERE Not implemented Write to zero for future compatibility BM Bus Master Enable Controls HI32 ability to act as a master on the PCI bus in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 When BM is cleared the HI32 is disabled from acting as a bus master when BM is set the HI32 can functi
343. is signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated SRDO PC4 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Receive Data Receives serial data and transfers the data to the ESSI receive shift register SRDO is an input when data is being received Port C 4 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PC4 When configured as PC4 signal direction is controlled through PRRO The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SRDO through PCRO This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated STDO PC5 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Transmit Data Transmits data from the serial transmit shift register STDO is an output when data is transmitted Port C 5 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PC5 When configured as PC5 signal direction is controlled through PRRO The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal STDO through PCRO This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated 2 24 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 1 2 9 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 1 Table 2 14 Enhanced Serial Synchronous Interface 1 Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description SC10 PDO Input or Output Input or Output Input Serial Control O For a
344. ister DPCR is set it indicates that the host to DSP data path is empty HDTC is set if SRRQ and MRRQ are cleared that is the host to DSP data path is emptied by DSP56300 core reads under one of the following conditions BR A non exclusive PCI write transaction to the HTXR terminates or completes BR HLOCK is deasserted after the completion of an exclusive write access to the HTXR The HI32 disconnects retry or disconnect C forthcoming write accesses to the HTXR as long as HDTC is set Note The HDTC bit is not set after a read transaction initiated by the HI32 as a PCI master HDTC is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to it The DSP56300 core can write a value of one to HDTC only if this bit is set When HDTC is cleared the HI32 responds to write PCI transactions according to the status of the host to DSP data path Hardware software and personal software resets clear HDTC Each of the bits APER DPER MAB TAB TDIS TRTY TO and HDTC are cleared by writing one to the specific bit To assure that only the desired bit is cleared do not use the BSET command The proper way to clear these bits is to write MOVE P instruction ones to the bits to be cleared and zeros to all the others Note 11 TO PCI Time Out Termination Indicates that an HI32 initiated PCI transaction has terminated due to the deassertion of the bus grant after the latency timer expired When TO is set and DPCR TTIE is set a transac
345. it bootstrap ROM For details on internal memory see Chapter 3 Memory Configuration Program RAM instruction cache X data RAM and Y data RAM size are programmable as Table 1 2 shows Table 1 2 DSP56301 Switch Memory Configuration fines Ce e BE GE ge Instruction Cache Switch Mode 4096 x 24 bit 0 2048 x 24 bit 2048 x 24 bit disabled CE 0 disabled MS 0 3072 x 24 bit 1024 x 24 bit 2048 x 24 bit 2048 x 24 bit enabled CE 1 disabled MS 0 2048 x 24 bit 0 3072 x 24 bit 3072 x 24 bit disabled CE 0 enabled MS 1 1024 x 24 bit 1024 x 24 bit 3072 x 24 bit 3072 x 24 bit enabled CE 1 enabled MS 1 1 Controlled by the Cache Enable CE bit in the Status Register SR 2 Controlled by the Memory Select MS bit in the Operating Mode Register OMR 1 5 Internal Buses All internal buses on the DSP56300 devices are 24 bit buses To provide data exchange between the blocks the DSP56301 implements the following buses Peripheral I O expansion bus to peripherals X memory expansion bus to X memory Y memory expansion bus to Y memory Program data bus for carrying program data throughout the core X memory data bus for carrying X data throughout the core Y memory data bus for carrying Y data throughout the core Program address bus for carrying program memory addresses throughout the core X memory address bus for carrying X memory addresses thr
346. ive Request Enable RREQ 6 55 Slave Fetch Type SFT 6 52 Target Wait State Disable TWSD 6 49 Transmit Request Enable TREQ 6 56 HI32 Mode HM bits 6 12 HI32 to memory data transfers 6 22 HI32 to PCI agent data transfers 6 45 host command 6 6 Host Command Vector Register HCVR 6 59 Host Command HC 6 61 Host Command Vector HV 6 0 6 60 Host Non Maskable Interrupt HNMI 6 60 Host Data Direction Register HDDR programming sheet B 40 Host Data Register HDR programming sheet B 40 Host Interface Control Register HCTR 6 6 Host Interface Status Register HSTR 6 57 Host Flags 5 3 HF 5 3 6 57 Host Interrupt A HINT 6 57 Host Receive Data Request HRRQ 6 58 Host Request HREQ 6 57 Host Transmit Data Request HTRQ 6 58 Transmitter Ready TRDY 6 58 Host Master Receive Data Register HRXM 6 7 6 61 Host Port Pins 2 16 host request 6 57 Host Slave Receive Data Register HRXS 6 61 6 62 Host Transmit Data Register HTXR 6 62 host side programming model 6 44 HTXR DRXR and DTXM HRXM data paths 6 6 incomplete burst 6 38 Index 7 initializing configuration registers 6 4 input and output data transfers 6 4 interrupt 6 22 Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration Register CILP 6 73 Interrupt Line IL 7 0 6 73 Interrupt Pin IP 7 0 6 73 MAX_LAT ML 7 0 6 73 MIN_GNT MG 7 0 6 73 interrupt requests 6 4 low power state 6 13 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA 6 70 Memory Base Addres
347. ived least significant byte first followed by the mid and then by the most significant byte The SCI bootstrap number The program words will be condensed into 24 bit words and stored in contiguous PRAM memory locations starting at the specified starting address After reading the program words program execution starts from the same address where loading started with 8 data bits 1 and the clock it mode is external each byte is received The SCI is programmed to work stop bit and no parity The clock source frequency must be 16x the baud rate After is echoed back through the SCI transmitter in asynchronous CELE ELLA KLEE IL EEE ETE LET EE TELL EE ALE EEE ERE EEA EES EET EEL EEE ETL EE TET LETT If MD MC MB MA x011 then it loads the program RAM from the Host Interface programmed to operate in the Universal Bus mode supporting DSP to DSP glueless connection The HI32 bootstrap code expects first to read a 24 bit word specifying the number of program words then a 24 bit word specifying the address to start loading the program words and then 24 bit word for each program word to be loaded The program words will be stored in contiguous PRAM memory locations starting at the specified starting address After the program words are read program execution starts from the same address where loading started The Host Interface bootstrap load program may be stopped by setting the Host Flag 0 HFO in HCTR
348. l and cleared when the DSP56300 core fills the DTXS HSTR HRRQ is cleared if the HRXS is empty and set if it contains data to be read by an external host If the host is not executing a read transaction from the HRXS the DSP to host data path is forced to the reset state and STRQ and HSTR HRRQ are cleared 6 52 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model Table 6 22 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Reset SS Number BitName vaiue Mode Description 7 Cont SFT Cont 0 UBM Universal Bus mode Fetch SFT 1 PCI DCTR HM 2 or There is no FIFO buffering of the DSP to host 3 data path Writing SFT 1 resets the DSP to host data path and clears the STRQ and the HSTR HRRQ At the beginning of a read data transfer from the HRXS STRQ is set STRQ is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes to the DTXS HSTR HRRQ is cleared if the HRXS is empty and set if it contains data to be read by an external host If the host is not reading from the HRXS the DSP to host data path is forced to the reset and STRQ and HSTR HRRQ are cleared Note Any data remaining in the DSP to host data path is lost when the reset state is entered PCI and Universal Bus modes DCTR HM 1 2 or 3 Pre fetch SFT 0 The DSP to host data path is a six word deep FIFO buffer three words deep in the 32 bit data format mode DCTR HM
349. l bus in a round robin pattern for example P X Y DMA P X Y A Priority Core DMA OMR Mode Priority Priority CDP 1 0 SR CPLI o Dynamic 0 Determined 00 00 Lowest by DCRn 1 DPR 1 0 00 01 2 for active 00 10 3 DMA 00 11 Highest channel Static core lt DMA 01 XX core DMA 10 XX core gt DMA 11 XX 21 RM 0 Rounding Mode Selects the type of rounding performed by the Data ALU during arithmetic operations If RM is cleared convergent rounding is selected If RM is set two s complement rounding is selected AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 7 Central Processor Unit CPU Registers Table 4 3 Status Register Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 20 SM 0 Arithmetic Saturation Mode Selects automatic saturation on 48 bits for the results going to the accumulator This saturation is performed by a special circuit inside the MAC unit The purpose of this bit is to provide an Arithmetic Saturation mode for algorithms that do not recognize or cannot take advantage of the extension accumulator 19 CE Cache Enable Enables disables the instruction cache controller If CE is set the cache is enabled and instructions are cached into and fetched from the internal Program RAM If CE is cleared the cache is disabled and the DSP56300 core fetches instructions from external or internal program memory according to the memory space table of the
350. leared no address comparison is performed BXEN Bus X Data Memory Enable A read write control bit that enables disables the AA pin and logic during external X data space accesses When set BXEN enables the comparison of the external address to the BAC bits during external X data space accesses If BXEN is cleared no address comparison is performed BPEN Bus Program Memory Enable a A read write control bit that enables disables the AA RAS pin and logic during external program space accesses When set BPEN enables the comparison of the external address to the BAC bits during external program space accesses If BPEN is cleared no address comparison is performed BAAP Bus Address Attribute Polarity A read write Bus Address Attribute Polarity BAAP control bit that defines whether the AA RAS signal is active low or active high When BAAP is cleared the AA RAS signal is active low useful for enabling memory modules or for DRAM Row Address Strobe If BAAP is set the appropriate AA RAS signal is active high useful as an additional address bit 4 28 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 Table 4 11 Address Attribute Registers AAR O 3 Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 1 0 BAT 1 0 0 Bus Access Type Read write bits that define the type of external memory DRAM or SRAM to acces
351. lect SCK SSC1 7 15 Word Length Control WL 7 15 Control Register B CRB Clock Polarity CKP 7 22 Clock Source Directions SCKD 7 22 Frame Sync Length FSL 7 22 Frame Sync Polarity FSP 7 22 Frame Sync Relative Timing FSR 7 22 Mode Select MOD 7 21 programming sheet B 33 Receive Enable RE 7 20 Receive Exception Interrupt Enable REIE 7 19 Receive Interrupt Enable RIE 7 19 Receive Last Slot Interrupt Enable 7 19 Serial Control Direction 0 SCDO 7 23 Serial Control Direction 1 SCD1 7 23 Serial Control Direction 2 SCD2 7 23 Serial Output Flag 0 OPO 7 23 Serial Output Flag 1 OF1 7 23 Shift Direction SHFD 7 22 Synchronous Asynchronous SYN 7 21 Transmit 0 Enable TEO 7 20 Transmit 1 Enable TE1 7 21 Transmit 2 Enable TE2 7 21 Transmit Exception Interrupt Enable TEIE 7 19 Transmit Interrupt Enable TIE 7 20 Transmit Last Slot Interrupt Enable TLIE 7 19 control registers 7 14 data and control signals 7 3 DMA 7 7 exception configuration 7 9 exceptions 7 7 receive last slot interrupt 7 8 transmit data 7 8 transmit data with exception status 7 8 transmit last slot interrupt 7 8 flags 7 13 frame rate divider 7 10 frame sync generator 7 17 length 7 12 polarity 7 12 selection 7 11 signal 7 7 7 10 7 18 word length 7 12 initialization 7 6 initialization example 7 7 internally generated clock and frame sync 7 7 interrupt 7 7 Interrupt Service Routine ISR 7 9 interrupt trigger event 7 9 multiple serial
352. lications For example if the host processor issues a host command that causes the DSP56300 core to read the DRXR the host processor can be guaranteed that the data it transferred to the HI32 is what the DSP56300 core is receiving To support high speed data transfers the HI32 host to DSP data path is a six word deep FIFO five words deep in the Universal Bus modes three word deep in 32 bit mode DCTR HM 1 and HCTR HTF 0 In PCI data transfers with DCTR HM 1 and HCTR HTF 0 if TRDY is set the HI32 does not insert wait states into the next six data transfers written by the host to the HTXR In PCI data transfers with DCTR HM 1 and HCTR HTF 0 that is 32 bit mode if TRDY is set the HI32 does not insert wait states in the next three data phases written by the host to the HTXR In Universal bus mode data transfers if TRDY is set the HI32 does not insert wait states into the next five data transfers written by the host to the HTXR 6 58 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model 6 8 3 Host Command Vector Register HCVR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HNMI HV6 HV5 HV4 HV3 HV2 HV1 HVO HC UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI Reserved Read as zero Write to zero for future compatibility UBM Universal Bus mode PCI PCI mode
353. lock Polarity CKP bit 7 22 Clock Prescaler SCP 8 19 Clock Source Direction SCKD bit 7 22 CMOS design 1 6 code compatibility 1 4 codec 7 4 7 10 7 13 Column Address Strobe CAS 2 8 COM byte 4 12 Condition Code Register CCR 4 7 Carry C 4 11 Extension E 4 11 Limit L 4 11 Negative N 4 11 Overflow V 4 11 Scaling S 4 10 Unnormalized U 4 11 Zero Z 4 11 Control Register A CRA Alignment Control ALC 7 16 Frame Rate Divider Control DC 7 16 Prescale Modulus Select PM 7 16 Prescaler Range PSR 7 16 programming sheet B 32 Select SCK SSC1 7 15 Index 2 DSP56301 User s Manual Word Length Control WL 7 15 Control Register B CRB Clock Polarity CKP 7 22 Clock Source Direction SCKD 7 22 Frame Sync Length FSL 7 22 Frame Sync Polarity FSP 7 22 Frame Sync Relative Timing FSR 7 22 Mode Select MOD 7 21 programming sheet B 33 Receive Enable RE 7 20 Receive Exception Interrupt Enable REIE 7 19 Receive Interrupt Enable RIE 7 19 Receive Last Slot Interrupt Enable RLIE 7 19 Serial Control Direction 0 SCDO 7 23 Serial Control Direction 1 SCD1 7 23 Serial Control Direction 2 SCD2 7 23 Serial Output Flag 0 OPO 7 23 Serial Output Flag 1 OF1 7 23 Shift Directions SHFD 7 22 Synchronous Asynchronous SYN 7 21 Transmit 0 Enable TEO 7 20 Transmit 1 Enable TE1 7 21 Transmit 2 Enable TE2 7 21 Transmit Exception Interrupt Enable TEIE 7 19 Transmit Interrupt Enable TIE 7 20 Transmit
354. loopd _loopx _loopy af else endif else endif rep no mac x0 xl a x 1l r0 write x memory clr a start_xram r0 move gt length_xram n0 rep no mac x0 y0 a x1 x r0 7 write y memory clr a start_yram r1 move gt length_yram nl rep nl mac x1 y0 a x0 y r1 7 write p memory clra start_pram r2 move gt length_pram n2 rep n2 move yO p r2 7 Check memory contents EQUALDATA 7 Check dram clra start_dram r0 do n0 _loopd move x r0 al eor xl a add a b move y r0 al eor x0 a add a b 77 check xram elr a start_xram r0 do n0 _loopx move x r0 al eor xl a add a b 7 Check yram clra start_yram rl do nl Loop move y rl al eor x0 a add a b DSP56301 User s Manual Ir Ir Ir Ir Ir Ir Ir Ir exercise mac write x y ram x y ram not symmetrical start of xram length of xram exercise mac write xram start of yram length of yram exercise mac write yram start of pram length of pram write pram x y ram symmetrical mr Ir mr mr Ir Ir Ir mr Ir Ir Ir mr restore pointer clear a a0 a2 0 accumulate error in b a0 a2 0 accumulate error in b x y ram not symmetrical restore pointer clear a a0 a2 0 accumulate error in b restore pointer clear a a0 a2 0 accumulate error in b A 13
355. ltiple master hosts are used Modes UBM and PCI Modes UBM and PCI Slave Fetch Type Bit 7 0 Fetch mode 1 Pre fetch mode Host Receive Data Transfer Format Bits 12 11 a HI32 bus data transfer formats as follows DSP to PCI Host DCTR HM 1 DMA Enable Bnp 0 DMA accesses disabled 00 32 bit data mode 1 DMA accesses enabled 01 3 LSBs in DTXS HRXS right aligned zero extended to HAD 31 0 MSB Modes UBM only 10 3 LSBs in DTXS HRXS left aligned zero filled to HAD 31 0 LSB 11 3 LSBs in DTXS HRXS right aligned sign extended in HAD 31 0 MSB Host Flags Bits 5 3 Used for host to DSP communication DSP to UB Host DCTR HM 2 or 3 Set or cleared by host visible to DSP 00 24 bit data mode DTXS to HRXS and HD 23 0 01 2LSB data in DTXS to HRXS and HD 15 0 Receive Request Enable Bit 2 10 2 LSB data in DTXS to HRXS and HD 15 0 0 Receive requests disabled 1 Receive requests enabled Modes UBM only 11 2 MSB data in DTXS to HRXS and HD 15 0 Note LSB least significant byte MSB most significant byte Modes VBM andiPEI Transmit Request Enable Bit 1 0 Transmit requests disabled 1 Transmit requests enabled Modes UBM only Deg aol ort TI III Ir HI32 Control Register HCTR Read Write Reset 00000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 14 HI32 Control Register HCTR B 26 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheet
356. ming sheet B 42 Port D Data Register PDRD 7 38 programming sheet B 42 Port D Direction Register PRRD 7 37 programming sheet B 42 Port E 2 27 5 6 Port E Control Register PCRE 8 24 AA MOTOROLA programming sheet B 43 Port E Data Register PDRE 8 25 programming sheet B 43 Port E Direction Register PRRE 8 25 programming sheet B 43 Position Independent Code PIC support 1 4 power 2 1 2 4 Predivider Factor PD bits 4 21 Pre Fetch PF bit 6 71 prescale divider for ESSI 7 16 Prescale Modulus Select PM bits 7 16 Prescaler Clock Enable PCE bit 9 29 prescaler counter 9 25 Prescaler Counter Value PC bits 9 28 Prescaler Preload Value PL bits 9 27 Prescaler Range PSR bit 7 16 Prescaler Source PS bits 9 27 Program Address Bus PAB 1 10 Program Address Generator PAG 1 8 Program Control Unit PCU 1 4 1 8 Program Counter PC register 1 8 Program Data Bus PDB 1 10 Program Decode Controller PDC 1 8 Program Interrupt Controller PIC 1 8 program memory 1 5 3 2 internal 3 1 program memory expansion 1 5 Program ROM bootstrap 3 1 programming model ESSI 7 14 HI32 DSP side 6 22 host side 6 44 SCI 8 9 timer 9 25 programming peripherals 5 1 R Read RD 2 7 Read Address Strobe 0 3 RAS 0 3 2 6 Receive Buffer Lock Enable RBLE bit 6 27 Receive Clock Mode Source RCM 8 19 Receive Data RXD signal 8 4 Receive Data Register RX 7 30 Receive Data Register Full RDF bit 7 28 Receive Data Regi
357. mory The internal memory in this address range switches to cache only mode and is not available via direct addressing when cache is enabled In systems using Instruction Cache always enable the cache CE 1 before loading code into internal program memory this prevents the condition in which code loaded into program memory before cache is enabled disappears after cache is enabled Off chip memory expansion optional as much as 64 K in 16 bit mode or 16 M in 24 bit mode Refer to the DSP56300 Family Manual especially Chapter 9 External Memory Interface Port A for details on using the external memory interface to access external program memory Bootstrap program ROM 3 K x 24 bit Note Early versions of the DSP56301 used a 192 x 24 bit bootstrap ROM space Note Program memory space at locations FFOOCO FFFFFF is reserved and should not be accessed AA MOTOROLA Memory Configuration 3 1 Program Memory Space 3 1 1 Internal Program Memory The default on chip program memory consists of a 24 bit wide high speed SRAM occupying the lowest 4 K default 3 K 2 K or 1 K locations in program memory space depending on the settings of the OMR MS and SR CE bits Section 4 3 2 Operating Mode Register OMR on page 4 12 provides details on the MS bit Section 4 3 1 Status Register SR on page 4 6 provides details on the CE bit The default on chip program RAM is organized in 16 banks with 256 locations each 4 K Setti
358. mory is switched to X and Y data memory The Y data memory in this mode consists of a 3 K x 24 bit memory space In this mode the lowest external Y data memory location is C00 3 4 DSP56301 User s Manual AA MOTOROLA Dynamic Memory Configuration Switching 3 3 3 External UO Space Y Data Memory The off chip peripheral registers should be mapped into the top 128 locations of Y data memory SFFFF80 FFFFFF in the 24 bit Address mode or FF80 FFFF in the 16 bit Address mode to take advantage of the Move Peripheral Data MOVEP instruction and the bit oriented instructions BCHG BCLR BSET BTST BRCLR BRSET BSCLR BSSET JCLR JSET JSCLR and JSSET 3 4 Dynamic Memory Configuration Switching Do not change the OMR MS bit when the SR CE bit is set The Instruction Cache occupies the top 1 K of what is otherwise Program RAM and to switch memory into or out of Program RAM when the cache is enabled can cause conflicts To change the MS bit when CE is set 1 Clear CE 2 Change MS 3 Set CE CAUTION To ensure that dynamic switching is trouble free do not allow any accesses including instruction fetches to or from the affected address ranges in program and data memories during the switch cycle Because an interrupt could cause the DSP to fetch instructions out of sequence and might violate the switch condition special care should be taken in relation to the interrupt vector routines CAUTION Pay special a
359. n Register CSTR CCMR page B 28 Figure B 17 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS page B 29 Figure B 18 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA page B 30 Figure B 19 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CSID page B 31 ESSI Figure B 20 ESS Control Register A CRA page B 32 Figure B 21 ESS Control Register B CRB page B 33 Figure B 22 ESS Transmit and Receive Slot Mask Registers TSM RSM page B 34 SCI Figure B 23 SCI Control Register SCR page B 35 Figure B 24 SCI Clock Control Registers SCCR page B 36 Timers Figure B 25 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR page B 37 Figure B 26 Timer Control Status Register TCSR page B 38 Figure B 27 Timer Load Registers TLR page B 39 GPIO Figure B 28 Host Data Direction and Host Data Registers HDDR HDR page B 40 Figure B 29 Port C Registers PCRC PRRC PDRC page B 41 Figure B 30 Port D Registers PCRD PRRD PDRD page B 42 Figure B 31 Port E Registers PCRE PRRE PDRE page B 43 B 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA B 1 Internal UO Memory Map Internal UO Memory Map Table B 2 Internal I O Memory Map X Data Memory Peripheral 16 Bit Address 24 Bit Address Register Name IPR FFFF FFFFFF Interrupt Priority Register Core IPR C FFFE FFFFFE Interrupt Priority Register Peripheral IPR P PLL FFFD FFFFFD PLL Control Regi
360. n Space DDS 4 34 MA Interrupt Enable DIE 4 30 MA Request Source DRS 4 33 MA Source Space DSS 4 34 MA Three Dimensional Mode D3D 4 33 MA Transfer Mode DTM 4 30 programming sheet B 21 MA Destination Space DDS bit 4 34 MA Enable DMAE bit 6 54 MA Enable ISA EISA bit 6 54 MA Interrupt Enable DIE bit 4 30 MA Request Source DRS bit 4 33 MA see Direct Memory Access MA Source Space DSS bit 4 34 MA Three Dimensional Mode D3D bit 4 33 MA Transfer Mode DTM bit 4 30 DO FOREVER FY Flag bit 4 8 DO loop 1 4 1 8 Do Loop Flag LF bit 4 8 document conventions 1 2 Double Precision Multiply Mode DM bit 4 9 DRAM controller 1 5 DRAM Control Register DCR 4 22 4 24 Bit Definitions 4 25 Bus Column In Page Wait State BCW 4 26 Bus DRAM Page Size BPS 4 26 VOUVTUUUUY Glscss Mere es Meel MOTOROLA Bus Mastership Enable BME 4 25 Bus Page Logic Enable BPLE 4 26 Bus Refresh Enable BREN 4 25 Bus Refresh Prescaler BRP 4 25 Bus Refresh Rate BRF 4 25 Bus Row Out of Page Wait States BRW 4 26 Bus Software Triggered Reset BSTR 4 25 programming sheet B 19 DSP Control Register DCTR 6 12 Host Command Interrupt Enable HCIE 6 26 Host Data Strobe Mode HDSM 6 25 Host DMA Request Polarity HDRP 6 24 Host Flags 5 3 HF 5 3 6 26 Host Interrupt A HINT 6 25 Host Interrupt Request Drive Control HIRD 6 24 Host Interrupt Request Handshake Mode HIRH 6 24 Host Read Write Polarity HRWP 6 25 Host R
361. n of that word RFS is valid only if the receiver is enabled that is if the RE bit is set Note In Normal mode RFS is always read as 1 when data is read because there is only one time slot per frame the frame sync time slot TFS Transmit Frame Sync Flag When set TFS indicates that a transmit frame sync occurred in the current time slot TFS is set at the start of the first time slot in the frame and cleared during all other time slots If the transmitter is enabled data written to a transmit data register during the time slot when TFS is set is transmitted in Network mode during the second time slot in the frame TFS is useful in Network mode to identify the start of a frame TFS is valid only if at least one transmitter is enabled that is when TEO TE1 or TE2 is set Note In Normal mode TFS is always read as 1 when data is being transmitted because there is only one time slot per frame the frame sync time slot IF1 Serial Input Flag 1 The ESSI latches any data on the SC1 signal during reception of the first received bit after the frame sync is detected IF1 is updated with this data when the data in the receive shift register transfers into the receive data register IF1 is enabled only when SC1 is an input flag and Synchronous mode is selected that is when SC1 is programmed as ESSI in the port control register PCR the SYN bit is set and the TE2 and SCD1 bits are cleared If it is not enabled IF1 is cleared
362. n the HI32 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected these signals are lines 0 7 of the bidirectional multiplexed Address Data bus Host Address 3 10 When HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected these signals are lines 3 10 of the input Address bus Port B 0 7 When the HI82 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR these signals are individually programmed as inputs or outputs through the HI32 Data Direction Register DIRH HAD 15 8 HD 7 0 PB 15 8 Input Output Input Output Input or Output Tri stated Host Address Data 8 15 When the HI82 is programmed to interface with a PCI bus and the HI function is selected these signals are lines15 8 of the bidirectional multiplexed Address Data bus Host Data 0 7 When the HI32 is programmed to interface with a universal non PCl bus and the HI function is selected these signals are lines 7 0 of the bidirectional Data bus Port B 8 15 When the HI32 is configured as GPIO through the DCTR these signals are individually programmed as inputs or outputs through the HI32 DIRH 2 10 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 Table 2 10 Host Interface Continued State During Signal Name Type Reset Signal Description HCO HC3 Input Output Tri stated Command 0 3 Byte Enable 0 3 When the HI32 is programm
363. nal SRD ss sisscssicsssccesasieceassssencesantecensasheveseisubenetaasavenvastesaadsabecevasnepes 7 3 T23 S rnal Clock SCK NG 7 3 7 2 4 Serial Control LE Reesen eegene EE 7 4 T23 Serial Comma signal GE 7 4 V2 Serial Control Signal 2 satis eaceia ce moscetabscnieneegaresatesa en a a a Eei EEEE ia 7 6 7 3 CPSC AION ME EE EE E E 7 6 T3 ESSTATtet oc ene ea ee Poy Sen ete Me ONES CONE RE Yer een te en Cen ae e em 7 6 DoS E KEE TE 7 6 Dect MANOS NIG E 7 7 74 Operating Modes Normal Network and On Demand AAA 7 10 7 4 1 Normal Network On Demand Mode Selection 0 cee eee eesecesecseeeeeeeceseceseeeseeesaeessaeenseesees 7 10 7 4 2 Synchronous Asynchronous Operating Modes AAA 7 11 74 3 Frame EE 7 11 LAA Pirate Syne Signal EE 7 11 7 4 5 Frame Sync Length for Multiple Devices cee ceececessceceseeeceeeeeceeneeceeeeeceeeeeseeeessteeeesaes 7 12 7 4 6 Word Length Frame Sync and Data Word Tmng ceeceeeececeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeesteeeenaeers 7 12 TAT Frame Syne Pol acy ee ecpatererccn rae oe ane eee ean Era EET E 7 12 74 8 Byte Format LSB MSB for the Transmitter 22 c cccccecsecececeessecenetasseceseeeecestatececensstdenteas 7 13 DA E 7 13 7 5 ESSI Programming E 7 14 viii DSP56303 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA 7 5 1 ESSI Control Register A CRA sesg eeggaetetoe eege SCENE edee 7 14 Tae ESSI Control Register 1 CRE EE 7 18 1 5 3 ESSI Status Register SSISR siccsascacecssssseseasassevecsasdedensaas span sassavas E GERE RE
364. nal static memory in the lowest 2 K locations 000 7FF in X memory space The on chip X data RAM is organized into 8 banks with 256 locations each Available X data memory space is increased by 1 K through reallocation of program memory using the memory switch mode described in the next section 3 2 2 Memory Switch Modes X Data Memory Memory switch mode reallocates portions of program RAM to X and Y data memory Bit 7 in the OMR is the MS bit that controls this function as follows When the MS bit is cleared the X data memory consists of the default 2 K x 24 bit memory space described in the previous section In this default mode the lowest external X data memory location is 800 When the MS bit is set a portion of the higher locations of the internal program memory is switched to X and Y data memory The X data memory in this mode consists of a 3 K x 24 bit memory space In this mode the lowest external X data memory location is CO0 AA MOTOROLA Memory Configuration 3 3 Y Data Memory Space 3 2 3 Internal UO Space X Data Memory One part of the on chip peripheral registers and some of the DSP56301 core registers occupy the top 128 locations of the X data memory FFFF80 FFFFFF This area is referred to as the internal X I O space and it can be accessed by MOVE MOVEP instructions and by bit oriented instructions BCHG BCLR BSET BTST BRCLR BRSET BSCLR BSSET JCLR JSET JSCLR and JSSET The contents of the intern
365. nal or software RESET instruction the TSM register is reset to FFFFFFFF enabling all 32 slots for data transmission 7 34 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model 7 5 10 Receive Slot Mask Registers RSMA RSMB Both receive slot mask registers are read write registers In Network mode the receiver s use these registers to determine which action to take in the current time slot Depending on the setting of the bits the receiver s either tri state the receiver s data signal s or receive a data word and generate a receiver full condition 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 RS15 RS14 RS13 RS12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RS11 RS10 RS9 RS8 RS7 RS6 RS5 RS4 RS3 RS2 RS1 RSO Reserved bit read as 0 write to 0 0 for future compatibility ESSIO X FFFFB2 ESSI1 X FFFFA2 Figure 7 16 ESSI Receive Slot Mask Register A RSMA 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 RS31 RS30 RS29 RS28 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RS27 RS26 RS25 RS24 RS23 RS22 RS21 RS20 RS19 RS18 RS17 RS16 Reserved Read as zero Write with zero for future compatibility ESSIO X FFFFB1 ESSH X FFFFA1 Figure 7 17 ESSI Receive Slot Mask Register B RSMB RSMA and RSMB as in Figure 7 12 and Figure 7 13 can be seen as one 32 bit register RSM Bit n in RSM RSn is an enable disable control bit for time slot number N When RSn is clear
366. nchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 23 ESSI Programming Model Word Length FSL1 0 FSLO 0 Serial Clock RX TX Frame em TT TI RX TX Serial Data daa Note Frame sync occurs while data is valid One Bit Length FSL1 1 FSLO 0 Serial Clock RX TX Frame SYNC Note Frame sync occurs for one bit time preceding the data Mixed Frame Length FSL1 0 FSLO 1 Serial Clock RX Frame Sync RXSerial Data daa TX Frame SYNC TX Serial Data m y Mixed Frame Length FSL1 1 FSLO 1 Serial Clock RX Frame SYNC RX Serial Data a y TX Frame SYNC ooo Le Figure 7 6 CRB FSLO and FSL1 Bit Operation FSR 0 7 24 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model Asynchronous SYN 0 Transmitter External Transmit Clock External Transmit Frame SYNC SCK ESSI Bit Internal Clock Internal Frame SYNC Clock d External Receive Clock External Receive Frame SYNC sco Receiver Note Transmitter and receiver may have different clocks and frame syncs SYNCHRONOUS SYN 1 Transmitter External Frame SYNC Internal Frame SYNC External Clock ESSI Bit Internal Clock Clock Receiver Note Transmitter and receiver may have the same clock frame syncs Figure 7 7 CRB SYN Bit Operation AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 25 9e L enuen S43SN LOE9SdSd VIOUOLOW W uone1ado gq GOW GO 8 2 eunbi4
367. nchronous data transfer 8 2 Asynchronous mode 7 10 8 2 8 15 8 17 8 18 Asynchronous Multidrop mode 8 17 B barrel shifter 1 4 1 6 baud rate generator 1 6 bit oriented instructions 5 2 bootstrap 3 1 3 3 code 8 8 program 4 5 program options invoking 4 6 ROM 1 5 Boundary Scan Register BSR 4 35 Burst Mode Enable BE bit 4 14 bursts 6 4 bus AA MOTOROLA DSP56301 User s Manual address signals 2 1 data signals 2 1 2 6 external address 2 6 external data 2 6 internal 1 10 Bus Access Type BAT bits 4 29 Bus Address Attribute Polarity BAAP bit 4 28 Bus Address to Compare BAC bits 4 27 Bus Area 0 Wait State Control BAOW bits 4 24 Bus Area 1 Wait State Control BA1W bits 4 23 Bus Area 2 Wait State Control BA2W bits 4 23 Bus Area 3 Wait State Control BA3W bits 4 23 Bus Busy BB 2 8 Bus Clock BCLK 2 8 Bus Clock Not BCLK 2 8 Bus Column In Page Wait State BCW bit 4 26 Bus Control Register BCR 4 22 Bit Definitions 4 22 Bus Area 0 Wait State Control BAOW 4 24 Bus Area 1 Wait State Control BA1W 4 23 Bus Area 2 Wait State Control BA2W 4 23 Bus Area 3 Wait State Control BA3W 4 23 Bus Default Area Wait State Control BDFW 4 23 Bus Lock Hold BLH bit 4 22 Bus Request Hold BRH 4 22 Bus Request Hold BRH bit 4 22 Bus State BBS bit 4 22 programming sheet B 18 bus control signals 2 1 Bus Default Area Wait State Control BDFW bits 4 23 Bus DRAM Page Size BPS bit 4 26 Bus Grant BG 2 8 Bus Interfa
368. nd Boundary Scan Architecture Problems with testing high density circuit boards led to the development of this standard under the sponsorship of the Test Technology Committee of IEEE and the JTAG The DSP56300 core implementation supports circuit board test strategies based on this standard The test logic includes a TAP with four dedicated signals a 16 state controller and three test data registers A boundary scan register links all device signals into a single shift register The test logic implemented utilizing static logic design is independent of the device system logic For details on the JTAG port consult the DSP56300 Family Manual The OnCE module interacts with the DSP56300 core and its peripherals nonintrusively so that you can examine registers memory or on chip peripherals This facilitates hardware and software development on the DSP56300 core processor OnCE module functions are provided through the JTAG TAP signals For details on the OnCE module consult the DSP56300 Family Manual AA MOTOROLA Overview 1 9 Internal Buses 1 4 6 On Chip Memory The memory space of the DSP56300 core is partitioned into program X data and Y data memory space The data memory space is divided into X and Y data memory in order to work with the two address ALUs and to feed two operands simultaneously to the data ALU Memory space includes internal RAM and ROM and can be expanded off chip under software control There is an on chip 192 3K x 24 b
369. nd HAEN are set HTA is released high impedance because DMA devices cannot extend DMA cycles ISA EISA The personal hardware reset clears DMAE DMAE HAEN ISA EISA Access Type HIRQ and HDRQ bit pin Functionality 0 D The HI32 responds when it HIRQ is active identifies its address HDRQ is deasserted that is ISA EISA I O type access 0 1 The HI32 does not respond to HIRQ is active any access HDRQ is deasserted 1 D The HI32 responds when it HDRQ is active identifies its address HIRQ is deasserted that is ISA EISA I O type access 1 1 The HI32 responds when HDRQ is active HDAK is asserted HIRQ is deasserted that is ISA EISA DMA type access 5 3 HF 2 0 0 UBM Host Flags PCI General purpose flags for host to DSP communication The host processor sets and clears HF 2 0 The personal hardware reset clears HF 2 0 6 54 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model Table 6 22 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Reset E Number Bit Name vaiue Mode Description 2 RREQ 0 UBM Receive Request Enable Controls the HIRQ and HDRQ pins for DSP to host data transfers in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 When DMAE is cleared RREQ enables the host interrupt request HIRQ pin if the host receive data request HRRQ status bit in the HSTR is set If RREQ is cleared H
370. ne BG input to a DSP56300 family device and the assertion of a second BG input to a second DSP56300 family device on the same bus When the ABE bit is set the BG and BB inputs are synchronized This synchronization causes a delay between a change in BG or BB until this change is actually accepted by the receiving device AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 13 Central Processor Unit CPU Registers Table 4 4 Operating Mode Register OMR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 12 BRT 0 Bus Release Timing Selects between fast or slow bus release If BRT is cleared a Fast Bus Release mode is selected that is no additional cycles are added to the access and BB is not guaranteed to be the last Port A pin that is tri stated at the end of the access If BRT is set a Slow Bus Release mode is selected that is an additional cycle is added to the access and BB is the last Port A pin that is tri stated at the end of the access 11 TAS TA Synchronize Select Selects the synchronization method for the input Port A pin TA Transfer Acknowledge If TAS is cleared you are responsible for asserting the TA pin in synchrony with the chip clock as described in the technical data sheet If TAS is set the TA input pin is synchronized inside the chip thus eliminating the need for an off chip synchronizer Note The TAS bit has no effect when the TA pin is deasserted yo
371. ng AA RAS signal This is also true of 16 bit compatibility mode The BNC 3 0 bits define the number of address bits to compare 11 8 BNC 3 0 0 Bus Number of Address Bits to Compare Specify the number of bits from the BAC bits that are compared to the external address The BAC bits are always compared with the Most Significant Portion of the external address for example if BNC 3 0 0011 then the BAC 1 1 9 bits are compared to the 3 MSBs of the external address If no bits are specified that is BNC 3 0 0000 the AA signal is activated for the entire 16 M word space identified by the space enable bits BPEN BXEN BYEN but only when the address is external to the internal memory map The combinations BNC 3 0 1111 1110 1101 are reserved AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 27 Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers Table 4 11 Address Attribute Registers AAR O 3 Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 7 BPAC 0 Bus Packing Enable Enables disables the internal packing unpacking logic When BPAC is set packing is enabled In this mode each DMA external access initiates three external accesses to an 8 bit wide external memory the addresses for these accesses are DAB then DAB 1 and then DAB 2 Packing to a 24 bit word or unpacking from a 24 bit word to three 8 bit words is done automatically by the expansion port control hardware The ext
372. ng EE uereg eege 9 5 931 Triple Timer Eegeregie 9 6 9 3 1 1 Timer GPIO Mod EE 9 6 9 3 1 2 Timer P ls Mod T E 9 8 9 3 1 3 Timer Toggle Mode 2 tadeegeeeeeegte Eege iai ia a EEn 9 10 9 3 1 4 Timer Event Counter Mode 21 9 12 9 3 2 Signal Measurement Node sgtieg eietete kreeg kteeegE eege 9 14 9 3 2 1 Measurement Input Width Mode 4 ssssoesssssssssessesesesssesessseesseessessessseeesseeesseesseesseessene 9 14 9 3 2 2 Measurement Input Period Mode 3 s sscccincesseiasteareaespanseaeterseaetnineaeteareeiaenecenies 9 16 9 3 2 3 Measurement Capture Mode EEN 9 18 9 3 3 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Mode 71 9 19 DIA Watchdog Modes saidccc ct tioscciscciecentidedacentaces titdaaicicicblacsibtedsGplaassenieantes a EE E ats EK iii 9 22 9 3 4 1 Watchdog P ls Mod 9 EE 9 22 e Watchdog Toggle Mode LR 9 24 9 3 4 3 Reserved e 9 25 935 Special E 9 25 9 3 6 REN KEE 9 25 9 4 Triple Timer Module Programming Model i 1sintocspsczcecesrctanemadaddeeutcashs veeaens cecadaremadaddusnnvas 9 25 94 1 Prescaler TEE 9 25 9 4 2 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR s seesesesesssesessseessressesssersseeesseeessresserssereseeessseessrese 9 27 9 4 3 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR scscissisdessassesecvadsecasdacseeedenssesesvasesaedesasecesseseeseeeaaseiont 9 28 9 4 4 Timer Control Status Register TCSR seseseeeeesssesssresseresersserssresssressresseesseeesseeesseesseesse 9 28 945 Tim t Load Re mister TLR EE 9 33 9
373. ng as the out of page access 13 BREN Bus Refresh Enable Enables disables the internal refresh counter When BREN is set the refresh counter is enabled and a refresh request CAS before RAS is generated each time the refresh counter reaches zero A refresh cycle occurs for all DRAM banks together that is all pins that are defined as RAS are asserted together When this bit is cleared the refresh counter is disabled and a refresh request may be software triggered by using the BSTR bit In a system in which DSPs share the same DRAM the DRAM controller of more than one DSP may be active but it is recommended that only one DSP have its BREN bit set and that bus mastership is requested for a refresh access If BREN is set and a WAIT instruction is executed periodic refresh is still generated each time the refresh counter reaches zero If BREN is set and a STOP instruction is executed periodic refresh is not generated and the refresh counter is disabled The contents of the DRAM are lost 12 BME Bus Mastership Enable Enables disables interface to a local DRAM for the DSP When BME is cleared the RAS and CAS pins are tri stated when mastership is lost Therefore you must connect an external pull up resistor to these pins In this case BME 0 the DSP DRAM controller assumes a page fault each time the mastership is lost A DRAM refresh requires a bus mastership If the BME bit is set the RAS and CAS pins are alwa
374. ng the MS bit switches four banks of program memory to the X data memory and an additional four banks of program memory to the Y data memory Setting the CE bit switches four banks of internal program memory to the Instruction Cache and reassigns its address to external program memory The internal memory addresses for the Instruction Cache vary depending on the setting of the MS and CE bits Refer to the memory maps in Section 3 7 for detailed information about the program memory configurations 3 1 2 Memory Switch Modes Program Memory Memory switch mode allows reallocation of portions of program RAM to X and Y data RAM OMR 7 is the memory switch MS bit that controls this function as follows When the MS bit is cleared program memory consists of the default 4 K x 24 bit memory space described in the previous section In this default mode the lowest external program memory location is 1000 If the CE bit is set the program memory consists of the lowest 3 K x 24 bits of memory space and the lowest external program memory location is 0CO00 When the MS bit is set the highest 2 K x 24 bit portion of the internal program memory is switched to internal X and Y data memory In this mode the lowest external program memory location is 800 If the CE bit is set and the MS bit is set the program memory consists of the lowest 1 K x 24 bits of memory space and the lowest external program memory location is 400 3 1 3 Instruction Cache
375. ns instead of 000 To avoid this problem the DSP56300 core must read these bits twice and check for consensus 2 SRRQ 0 UBM Slave Receive Data Request PCI Indicates that the receive data FIFO DRXR contains data written by the host processor to the HI32 slave When an external host writes data to the host to DSP FIFO HTXR DRXR SRRQ is set SRRQ is cleared when the DRXR is emptied by DSP56300 core reads or the data to be read from the DRXR is master data When SRRQ is set E f SRIE is set a slave receive data interrupt request is generated E f enabled by an DSP56300 core DMA channel a slave receive data DMA request is generated Note Side effects of reading the empty DRXR If the DSP56300 core reads the DRXR when the FIFO is empty the SRRQ bit is set SRRQ can also be set when the OncE interface reads it or when debugging tools are used When the DRXR is read while empty either a reset or approximately 12 more reads of DRXR are required to clear SRRQ 6 36 DSP56301 User s Manual MOTOROLA HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 14 DSP Status Register DSR Bit Definitions Continued Daa i Bit Name Aere Mode Description 1 STRQ 1 UBM Slave Transmit Data Request PCI Indicates that the slave transmit data FIFO DTXS is not full and the DSP56300 core can write to it STRQ functions in accordance with the value of the slave fetch type SFT bit in the Host Control Register
376. ns of the ESSI interface are synchronous or asynchronous The transmitter and receiver use common clock and synchronization signals in Synchronous mode they use separate clock and sync signals in Asynchronous mode The CRB S YN bit selects synchronous or asynchronous operation When the SYN bit is cleared the ESSI TX and RX clocks and frame sync sources are independent If the SYN bit is set the ESSI TX and RX clocks and frame sync are driven by the same source either external or internal Since the ESSI operates either synchronously or asynchronously separate receive and transmit interrupts are provided Transmitter 1 and transmitter 2 operate only in Synchronous mode Data clock and frame sync signals are generated internally by the DSP or obtained from external sources If clocks are internally generated the ESSI clock generator derives bit clock and frame sync signals from the DSP internal system clock The ESSI clock generator consists of a selectable fixed prescaler with a programmable prescaler for bit rate clock generation and a programmable frame rate divider with a word length divider for frame rate sync signal generation 7 4 3 Frame Sync Selection The transmitter and receiver can operate independently The transmitter can have either a bit long or word long frame sync signal format and the receiver can have the same or another format The selection is made by programming the CRB FSL 1 0 FSR and FSP bits 7 4 4 Frame Sync Si
377. nsists of independent transmitter and receiver sections and a common ESSI clock generator ESSI capabilities include Independent asynchronous or shared synchronous transmit and receive sections with separate or shared internal external clocks and frame syncs Normal mode operation using frame sync Network mode operation with as many as 32 time slots Programmable word length 8 12 16 24 or 32 bits Program options for frame synchronization and clock generation One receiver and three transmitters per ESSI 1 12 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Peripherals 1 7 4 Serial Communications Interface SCI The SCI provides a full duplex port for serial communications with other DSPs microprocessors or peripherals such as modems The SCI interfaces without additional logic to peripherals that use TTL level signals With a small amount of additional logic the SCI can connect to peripheral interfaces that have non TTL level signals such as the RS 232C RS 422 and so forth This interface uses three dedicated signals transmit data receive data and SCI serial clock It supports industry standard asynchronous bit rates and protocols as well as high speed synchronous data transmission up to 12 5 Mbps for a 100 MHz clock SCI asynchronous protocols include a multidrop mode for master slave operation with wakeup on idle line and wakeup on address bit capability This mode allows the DSP56301 to share a single serial line efficiently wit
378. nt timer clock This process repeats until the timer is disabled that is TCSR TE is cleared If the counter overflows a pulse is output on the TIO signal with a pulse width equal to the timer clock period If the INV bit is set the pulse polarity is high logical 1 If INV is cleared the pulse polarity is low logical 0 The counter reloads when the TLR is written with a new value while the TCSR TE bit is set In Mode 9 internal logic preserves the TIO value and direction for an additional 2 5 internal clock cycles after the hardware RESET signal is asserted This convention ensures that a valid RESET signal is generated when the TIO signal resets the DSP56301 9 22 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes Mode 9 internal clock TRM 0 Software does not reset watchdog timer watchdog times out N write preload first event TRM 1 is not useful for watchdog function M write compare TE ee LE EE CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR N Counter TCR H N NA xX M M 1 9 1 TCPR M TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 TOF Overflow Interrupt if TOIE 1 float i pulse width TIO pin INV 0 ow timer clock period 4 S float high TIO pin INV 1 TIO can connect to the RESET pin internal hardware preserves the TIO value and direction for an additional 2 5 clocks to ensure a reset of valid length Figure 9 18 Watchdog Pulse Mode AA MO
379. nterrupt serviced 1 Counter wraparound has occurred Date Programmer Sheet 2 of 3 Timer Control Bits 4 7 TC 3 0 TIO Clock Mode GPIO Output Output Input Input Input Input Output Output Output nternal nternal nternal External nternal nternal nternal nternal nternal nternal Timer Timer Pulse Timer Toggle Event Counter Input Width Input Period Capture Pulse Width Modulation Reserved Watchdog Pulse Watchdog Toggle Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Timer Enable Bit 0 0 Timer Disabled 1 Timer Enabled Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit 1 0 Overflow Interrupts Disabled 1 Overflow Interrupts Enabled Timer Compare Interrupt Enable Bit 2 0 Compare Interrupts Disabled 1 Compare Interrupts Enabled ee 18 Z 181S 1413 1211 12 3 8 Reset 000000 Timer Control Status Register TCSRO FFFF8F Read Write TCSR1 FFFF8B Read Write TCSR2 FFFF87 Read Write Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 26 Timer Control Status Register TCSR DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Programming Sheets Application Date 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Timer Reload Value Programmer Sheet 3 of 3 1 0 TLRO X FFFF8E Write Only TLR1 X FFFF8A Write Only Timer Load Register TLR 0 2 Reset 000000 TLR2 X FFFF86 Write Only Figure B 27 Timer Load Registers TLR AA MOTOROLA
380. ntrol bit is set RBLE 1 in the DPCR Note 20 RBLE Receive Buffer Lock Enable In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 assures that the host to DSP data path contains data from only one external master RBLE inhibits the HI32 from responding to new PCI write transactions to the HTXR until the DSP56300 core reads all the data written to the HTXR When RBLE is set and one of the following conditions occurs BR a non exclusive write transaction to the HTXR E an HLOCK deassertion completes after an exclusive write access to the HTXR E aread transaction initiated by the HI32 completes then the following situations occur BR Forthcoming PCI write accesses to the HTXR are disconnected retry or disconnect C until the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to the host data transfer complete HDTC bit in the DPSR BR Ifthe host to DSP data path is empty SRRQ 0 and MRRQ 0 because of DSP56300 core reads from the DRXR the HDTC bit is set The HI32 disconnects retry or disconnect C all PCI write accesses to the HTXR until the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to the HDTC bit to clear it When RBLE is cleared the HI32 does not set the HDTC bit If the HDTC bit is cleared the HI32 responds to write PCI transactions according to the status of the host to DSP data path RBLE is ignored when the HI32 is not in the PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The value of RBLE may be changed only when DSR HACT 0 or HDTC 1 AA MOTOROLA Hos
381. o Terminate and Reset DCTR HM 0 BR While the HI32 is an active PCI bus master or selected target ina memory space transaction a master initiated termination or target disconnect respectively is generated When the PCI idle state is detected HACT is cleared BR While the HI32 is in a Universal Bus or Self Configuration mode DCTR HM 2 3 or 5 the HACT status bit in the DSR is cleared immediately When HACT is set the HI32 is active and the DCTR mode and polarity bits must not be changed 22 6 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 35 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 14 DSP Status Register DSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit ei Reset E Number Pt Name Value Mode Description 5 3 HF 2 0 0 UBM Host Flags PCI Indicate the state of host flags HF 2 0 respectively in the Host Control Register HCTR on the host side Only the host processor can change HF 2 0 In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 the HF 2 0 bits are updated at the end of a transaction Personal hardware reset clears HF 2 0 Note A potential problem exists when the status bits HF 2 0 are read as an encoded triad During personal hardware reset these bits are cleared asynchronously For example If HF 2 0 change from 111 to 000 there is a small probability the DSP56300 core could read the bits during transition and receive 001 or 110 or other combinatio
382. ock TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 periode NOTE If INV 1 a 1 to 0 edge on TIO loads TCR with count and stops the counter Figure 9 15 Capture Measurement Mode TRM 0 9 18 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes 9 3 3 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Mode 7 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 0 1 1 1 7 Pulse width modulation PWM Output Internal In Mode 7 the timer generates periodic pulses of a preset width When the counter equals the value in the TCPR the TIO output signal is toggled and TCSR TCF is set The contents of the counter are placed into the TCR If the TCSR TCIE bit is set a compare interrupt is generated The counter continues to increment on each timer clock If counter overflow occurs the TIO output signal is toggled TCSR TOF is set and an overflow interrupt is generated if the TCSR TOIE bit is set If the TCSR TRM bit is set the counter is loaded with the TLR value on the next timer clock and the count resumes If the TCSR TRM bit is cleared the counter continues to increment on each timer clock This process repeats until the timer is disabled When the TCSR TE bit is set and the counter starts the TIO signal assumes the value of INV On each subsequent toggle of the TIO signal the polarity of the TIO signal is reversed For example if the INV bit is set the TIO signal generates the following si
383. ode Controls the counter preload operation In timer 0 3 and watchdog 9 10 modes the counter is preloaded with the TLR value after the TCSR TE bit is set and the first internal or external clock signal is received If the TRM bit is set the counter is reloaded each time after it reaches the value contained by the TCR In PWM mode 7 the counter is reloaded each time counter overflow occurs In measurement 4 5 modes if the TRM and the TCSR TE bits are set the counter is preloaded with the TLR value on each appropriate edge of the input signal If the TRM bit is cleared the counter operates as a free running counter and is incremented on each incoming event INV Inverter Affects the polarity definition of the incoming signal on the TIO signal when TIO is programmed as input It also affects the polarity of the output pulse generated on the TIO signal when TIO is programmed as output See Table 9 4 Inverter INV Bit Operation on page 32 The INV bit does not affect the polarity of the prescaler source when the TIO is input to the prescaler NOTE The INV bit affects both the timer and GPIO modes of operation To ensure correct operation change this bit only when one or both of the following conditions is true the timer is disabled the TCSR TE bit is cleared The timer is in GPIO mode 9 30 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module Programming Model Table 9 3 Timer Contr
384. ode examples they have a tilde in front of their names In Example 1 1 line 3 refers to the SSO signal shown as SS0 Sets of signals are indicated by the first and last signals in the set for instance HA O 2 Input Output indicates a bidirectional signal Input or Output indicates a signal that is exclusively one or the other Code examples are displayed in a monospaced font as shown in Example 1 1 Example 1 1 Sample Code Listing BFSET 50007 X PCC Configure line 1 MISOO MOSIO SCKO for SPI master line 2 SSO as PC3 for GPIO line 3 m Hexadecimal values are indicated with a dollar sign preceding the value For example FFFFFF is the X memory address for the core interrupt priority register The word reset appears in four different contexts in this manual the reset signal written as RESET the reset instruction written as RESET the reset operating state written as Reset the reset function written as reset AA MOTOROLA Overview 1 3 DSP56300 Core Features 1 3 DSP56300 Core Features All DSP56300 core family members contain the DSP56300 core and additional modules The modules are chosen from a library of standard predesigned elements such as memories and peripherals New modules can be added to the library to meet customer specifications A standard interface between the DSP56300 core and the on chip memory and peripherals supports a wide variety of memory an
385. ogic TDI Input Input Test Data Input A test data serial input signal for test instructions and data TDI is sampled on the rising edge of TCK and has an internal pull up resistor TDO Output Tri stated Test Data Output A test data serial output signal for test instructions and data TDO is tri statable and is actively driven in the shift IR and shift DR controller states TDO changes on the falling edge of TCK TMS Input Input Test Mode Select An input signal to sequence the test controller s state machine TMS is sampled on the rising edge of TCK and has an internal pull up resistor TRST Input Input Test Reset A Schmitt trigger input signal to asynchronously initialize the test controller TRST has an internal pull up resistor TRST must be asserted after power up DE Input Output Input Debug Event An open drain signal As an input enters the Debug mode of operation from an external command controller As an output acknowledges that the chip has entered Debug mode When asserted as an input DE causes the DSP56300 core to finish the executing instruction save the instruction pipeline information enter the Debug mode and wait for commands to be entered from the debug serial input line This signal is asserted as an output for three clock cycles when the chip enters Debug mode as a result of a debug request or as a result of meeting a breakpoint condition The DE has an internal pull up resistor Thi
386. ol The interrupt mask bits are set during hardware reset but not during software reset Exceptions Priority l1 10 Permitted Exceptions Masked Lowest 0 0 IPL0 1 2 3 None 1 IPL 1 2 3 IPLO IPL 2 3 IPL 0 1 Highest 1 1 IPL 3 IPL 0 1 2 Scaling Set when a result moves from accumulator A or B to the XDB or YDB buses during an accumulator to memory or accumulator to register move and remains set until explicitly cleared that is the S bit is a sticky bit The logical equations of this bit are dependent on the Scaling mode The scaling bit is set if the absolute value in the accumulator before scaling is gt 0 25 or lt 0 75 4 10 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit CPU Registers Table 4 3 Status Register Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 6 L 0 Limit Set if the overflow bit is set or if the data shifter limiter circuits perform a limiting operation In Arithmetic Saturation mode the L bit is also set when an arithmetic saturation occurs in the Data ALU result otherwise it is not affected The L bit is cleared only by a processor reset or by an instruction that specifically clears it that is a sticky bit this allows the L bit to be used as a latching overflow bit The L bit is affected by data movement operations that read the A or B accumulator registers Exten
387. ol Status Register TCSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 7 4 TC 3 0 0 Timer Control Control the source of the timer clock the behavior of the TIO signal and the Timer mode of operation Section 9 3 Operating Modes on page 9 5 describes the timer operating modes in detail NOTE To ensure proper operation the TC 3 0 bits should be changed only when the timer is disabled that is when the TCSR TE bit is cleared NOTE If the clock is external the counter is incremented by the transitions on the TIO signal The external clock is internally synchronized to the internal clock and its frequency should be lower than the internal operating frequency divided by 4 that is CLK 4 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics Mode Mode TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO N mber F ctlon TIO Clock Timer and 1 0 0 0 0 0 GPIO GPIO Internal 0 0 0 1 1 Timer pulse Output Internal 0 0 1 0 2 Timer toggle Output Internal 0 0 1 1 3 Event counter Input External 0 1 0 0 4 put Wath Input Internal measurement 0 1 0 1 5 Input period Input Internal measurement 0 1 1 0 6 Capture event Input Internal Pulse width 0 1 1 1 7 Ee Gre Output Internal 1 0 0 0 8 Reserved 1 0 0 1 9 Watchdog Output Internal pulse 1 0 1 0 10 Watchdog Output Internal Toggle 1 0 1 1 11 Reserved 1 1 0 0 12 Reserved 1 1 0 1
388. on as a bus master This bit affects the MARQ bit in the DSP side Status Register DPSR When BM is cleared MARQ is also cleared The personal hardware reset clears BM MSE Memory Space Enable Controls the HI32 response to the PCI memory space accesses in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The HI32 memory space response is disabled if MSE is cleared and enabled if MSE is set The personal hardware reset clears MSE Not implemented Write to zero for future compatibility 6 66 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model 6 8 9 Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register CCCR CRID 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 BC7 BC6 BC5 BC4 BC3 BC2 BC1 BCO SC7 SC6 SC5 SC4 SC3 SC2 SC1 SCO 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIZ Pl PIS Pl4 PIS Pl2 Pi PIO RID7 RID6 RIDS RID4 RID3 RID2 RID1 RIDO Figure 6 18 Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register CCCR CRID A PCI standard 32 bit read only register mapped into the PCI configuration space in PCI mode or in mode 0 DCTR HM 1 or 0 CCCR CRID is accessed when a configuration read command is in progress and the PCI address is 08 The host can access CCCR CRID only when the HI32 is in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The contents of CCCR CRID are hardwired and are unaffected by any type of reset Table 6 27 Class Cod
389. onality in the different HI32 operating modes Examples of host to HI32 connections are given in Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 and Figure 6 4 Table 6 8 Host Port Pin Functionality Universal Bus Mode HI32 PCI Bus GPIO Mode Enhanced Universal Mode Port Universal Bus Mode Pin Bus Mode DCTR HN 1 DCTR HN 3 DCTR HN 2 DCTR HN 4 HP 7 0 HAD 15 0 HA 1 0 3 HIO 7 0 HP 15 8 HD 7 0 HIO 15 8 HP 19 16 HC 3 0 HBE 3 0 HA 2 0 HIO 18 16 UNUSED HIO19 HP20 HTRDY HDBEN HIO20 HP21 HIRDY HDBDR HIO21 HP22 HDEVSEL HSAK HIO22 HP23 HLOCK HBS HIO23 HP24 HPAR HDAK 2 disconnected HP25 HPERR HDRQ HP26 HGNT HAEN HP27 HREQ HTA HP28 HSERR HIRQ HP29 HSTOP HWR HRW HP30 HIDSEL HRD HDS HP31 HFRAME UNUSED2 HP32 HCLK UNUSED HP 40 33 HAD 23 16 HD 15 8 disconnected HP 48 41 HAD 31 24 HD 23 16 Output is high impedance if HCTR HRF 0 Input is disconnected if HCTR HTF 0 HP49 HRST HRST HP50 HINTA NOTES 1 When the host bus is less than 24 bits wide the data pins that are not used for transferring data must be forced or pulled to Vcc or to GND 2 Must be forced or pulled to Vcc or GND 3 HBS HDAK should be forced or pulled up to Vcc if not used 4 Must be forced or pulled up to Vcc 6 18 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Port Pins PCI Bus DSP56301 initiator target target initiator H
390. onfiguration Register CSTR CCMR ees ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees B 28 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHTY CLAT CCLS B 29 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CRMA B 30 Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID Configuration Register CSID B 31 ESS Control Register A CRA eet B 32 ESSI Control Register B EE B 33 ESSI Transmit and Receive Slot Mask Registers TSM KSM B 34 SCI Control Register SCR E B 35 SCI Clock Control Registers SCCR ccjscaesssseiea shes geascnensteet odawedccsausesbus neve sncenevass B 36 Timer Prescaler Load Register ClPIER si cssccssesvessseosacedeqnos tases acasavsstees oescctteccnsen B 37 Timer Control Status Register CIS B 38 Timer Load Registers TER cinse neones ete ea ek etna ee aca B 39 Host Data Direction and Host Data Registers HDDR HDR eee B 40 Port C Registers PCRC PRRC PDRO ssssssessssssesssssessseessressersseresseesssresssesse B 41 Port D Registers PCRD PRRD KREE B 42 Port E Registers PCRE PRRE PDRB 912 455 sveassesades ches ieasducnstenyhen senetectetassoes tain B 43 DSP56301 User s Manual AL MOTOROLA Tables 1 1 High True Low True Signal Conventions 000 0 ces ceeceesseeescecseeceseeeseeeeaeecsaeenseenseees 1 2 1 2 DSP56301 Switch Memory Configuration eee eeeeesecseeseneecsaeceeesseeeeseeesaeenes 1 10 1 3 DSP56301 Documentation E 1 14 2 1 DSP56301 Functional Signal Groupings eesesseseeereeseesessersresresst
391. onnection must be tied externally to all other chip ground connections The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors GNDp Data Bus Ground An isolated ground for sections of the data bus I O drivers This connection must be tied externally to all other chip ground connections The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors GNDjy _ Bus Control Ground An isolated ground for the bus control I O drivers This connection must be tied externally to all other chip ground connections The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors GND Host Ground An isolated ground for the HI32 I O drivers This connection must be tied externally to all other chip ground connections The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors GNDg_ ESSI SCI and Timer Ground An isolated ground for the ESSI SCI and timer I O drivers This connection must be tied externally to all other chip ground connections The user must provide adequate external decoupling capacitors 2 4 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA 2 3 Clock Clock Table 2 4 Clock Signals Signal State During Ai Name Type Reset Signal Description EXTAL Input Input External Clock Crystal Input lnterfaces the internal crystal oscillator input to an external crystal or an external clock XTAL Output Chip driven Crystal Output Connects the internal crystal oscillator output to an external c
392. ontrol Control the divide ratio for the programmable frame rate dividers that generate the frame clocks In Network mode this ratio is the number of words per frame minus one In Normal mode this ratio determines the word transfer rate The divide ratio ranges from 1 to 32 DC 00000 to 11111 for Normal mode and 2 to 32 DC 00001 to 11111 for Network mode A divide ratio of one DC 00000 in Network mode is a special case known as On Demand mode In Normal mode a divide ratio of one DC 00000 provides continuous periodic data word transfers A bit length frame sync must be used in this case you select it by setting the FSL 1 0 bits in the CRA to 01 Figure 7 4 shows the ESSI frame sync generator functional block diagram 11 PSR Prescaler Range Controls a fixed divide by eight prescaler in series with the variable prescaler This bit extends the range of the prescaler when a slower bit clock is needed When PSR is set the fixed prescaler is bypassed When PSR is cleared the fixed divide by eight prescaler is operational as in Figure 7 3 This definition is reversed from that of the SSI in other DSP56000 family members The maximum allowed internally generated bit clock frequency is the internal DSP56301 clock frequency divided by 4 the minimum possible internally generated bit clock frequency is the DSP56301 internal clock frequency divided by 4096 Note The combination PSR 1 and PM 7 0 00 dividing Feore by 2
393. op standby state and IRQA is asserted the processor exits the stop state MODB Input Input Mode Select B Internally synchronized to CLKOUT MODA MODB MODC and Schmitt MODD select one of 16 initial chip operating modes latched into the OMR when the trigger RESET signal is deasserted IRQB Input External Interrupt Request B After reset this input becomes a level sensitive or negative edge triggered maskable interrupt request input during normal instruction processing If IRQB is asserted synchronous to CLKOUT multiple processors can be resynchronized using the WAIT instruction and asserting IRQB to exit the wait state MODC Input Input Mode Select C Internally synchronized to CLKOUT MODA MODB MODC and Schmitt MODD select one of 16 initial chip operating modes latched into the OMR when the trigger RESET signal is deasserted IRQC Input External Interrupt Request C After reset this input becomes a level sensitive or negative edge triggered maskable interrupt request input during normal instruction processing If IRQC is asserted synchronous to CLKOUT multiple processors can be resynchronized using the WAIT instruction and asserting IRQC to exit the wait state MODD Input Input Mode Select D Internally synchronized to CLKOUT MODA MODB MODC and Schmitt MODD select one of 16 initial chip operating modes latched into the OMR when the trigger RESET signal is deasserted IRQD Input External Interrupt Request D After reset
394. ost efficient method of data transfer available Core intervention is not required after the DMA channel is initialized DMA requires more initialization code and consideration of DMA modes However it is the most efficient use of core resources Once these registers are programmed you must enable the DMA by triggering a DMA request off one of the peripheral control flags or enabling it in normal program flow or an interrupt service routine 5 3 4 Advantages and Disadvantages Polling is the easiest method to implement but it requires a large amount of DSP56300 core processing power The core cannot be involved in other processing activities while it is polling receive and transmit ready bits Interrupts require more code but the core can process other routines while waiting for data I O An interrupt is generated when data is ready to be transferred to or from the peripheral device DMA requires even less core intervention and the setup code is minimal but the DMA channels must be available 5 4 General Purpose Input Output GPIO The DSP56301 provides 42 bidirectional pins that can be configured as GPIO signals or as peripheral dedicated signals or some combination of both depending on the peripheral No dedicated GPIO pins are provided All peripheral pins except those of the HI32 are GPIO inputs by default after reset The control register settings of the DSP56301 peripherals determine whether these pins function as GPIO or as peripheral de
395. oughout the core Y memory address bus for carrying Y memory addresses throughout the core DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DMA The block diagram in Figure 1 1 illustrates these buses among other components y Memory Expansion Area X Data Host Program RAM RAM Y Data Interface 4096 X 24 2048 X 24 RAM Default Default 2048 X 24 Default Triple Peripheral Expansion Area External ia Address ka Bus Switch ADDRESS External Bus Interface strap an ROM l Cache CONTROL Control Internal External Data Data Bus Bus Switch j Switch DATA ES Si eer er pe fella DN E SS Sa a Program i Program Program i Interrupt ke Decode Address Controller Controller Generator d L d L l L 56 bit Barrel Shifte MODD IRQA MODC IRQB T MODB IRQC RESE PINIT NMI MODA IRQD Figure 1 1 DSP56301 Block Diagram 1 6 DMA The DMA block has the following features m Six DMA channels supporting internal and external accesses One two and three dimensional transfers including circular buffering End of block transfer interrupts Triggering from interrupt lines and all peripherals AA MOTOROLA Overview 1 11 Peripherals 1 7 Peripherals In addition to the core features the DSP56301 provides the following peripherals As many as 42 user configurable General Purpose Input Output GPIO signals Host Interface HI32 Dual Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces ESSIO and ESSI1 S
396. our combinations of BPS 1 0 enable the use of many DRAM sizes 1 M bit 4 M bit 16 M bit and 64 M bit The encoding of BPS 1 0 is BR 00 9 bit column width 512 words BR 01 10 bit column width 1 K words E 10 11 bit column width 2 K words E 11 12 bit column width 4 K words When the row address is driven all 24 bits of the external address bus are driven for example if BPS 1 0 01 when driving the row address the 14 MSBs of the internal address XAB YAB PAB or DAB are driven on address lines A O 13 and the address lines A 14 23 are driven with the 10 MSBs of the internal address This method enables the use of different DRAMs with the same page size 7 4 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 3 2 BRW 1 0 Bus Row Out of page Wait States Defines the number of wait states that should be inserted into each DRAM out of page access The encoding of BRW 1 0 is BR 00 4 wait states for each out of page access BR 01 8 wait states for each out of page access BR 10 11 wait states for each out of page access BR 11 15 wait states for each out of page access 1 0 BCW 1 0 0 Bus Column In Page Wait State Defines the number of wait states to insert for each DRAM in page access The encoding of BCW 1 0 is BR 00 1 wait state for each in page access BR 01 2 wait states for each in page access BR 10 3 wait states for each in page access BR 11 4 wait states for each in page access 4 26 DSP56301 User s Manual
397. ous mode this signal is used for the receive clock I O Schmitt trigger input For synchronous mode this signal is used either for transmitter 1 output or for serial I O flag 0 Port C 0 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PCO When configured as PCO signal direction is controlled through the port directions register PRRO The signal can be configured as ESSI signal SC00 through the port control register PCRO This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated SC01 PC1 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Control 1 For asynchronous mode this signal is the receiver frame sync I O For synchronous mode this signal is used either for transmitter 2 output or for serial I O flag 1 Port C 1 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PC1 When configured as PC1 signal direction is controlled through PRRO The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SC01 through PCRO This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated SC02 PC2 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Control Signal 2 Used for frame sync I O SC02 is the frame sync for both the transmitter and receiver in synchronous mode and for the transmitter only in asynchronous mode When configured as an output this signal is the internally generated frame sync signal When configured as an input
398. ow often the device needs to gain access to the PCI bus Because the HI32 has no major requirements for the settings of Latency Timers these bits are hardwired to zero 23 16 MG 7 0 O Hardwired MIN_GNT Specifies how long a burst the device needs Because the HI32 has no major requirements for the settings of Latency Timers these bits are hardwired to zero 15 8 IP 7 0 1 Hardwired Interrupt Pin Specifies which interrupt the device uses A value of 1 corresponds to PCI INTA 7 0 IL 7 0 0 Interrupt Line Communicates PCI interrupt line routing information POST software writes the routing information into these bits as it initializes and configures the PCI system AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 73 HI32 Programming Model Quick Reference 6 9 HI32 Programming Model Quick Reference HI32 Registers Quick Reference Bit Reset Type Reg Comments Num Mnemonic Name Val Function HS PH PS DSP SIDE DCTR 0 HCIE Host Command 0 HCP interrupt disabled 0 Interrupt Enable 1 HCP interrupt enabled j STIE Slave Transmit 0 STRQ interrupt disabled 0 Interrupt Enable 1 STRQ interrupt enabled a SRIE Slave Receive 0 SRRQ interrupt disabled 0 Interrupt Enable 1 SRRQ interrupt enabled 5 3 HF 5 3 Host Flags general purpose 0 S flags 6 HINT Host Interrupt A 0 HINTA pin is high impedance o 1 HINTA pin is driven lo
399. owing form extension most significant product least significant product EXT MSP LSP The multiplier executes 24 bit x 24 bit parallel fractional multiplies between twos complement signed unsigned or mixed operands The 48 bit product is right justified and added to the 56 bit contents of either the A or B accumulator A 56 bit result can be stored as a 24 bit operand The LSP is either truncated or rounded into the MSP Rounding is performed if specified 1 4 2 Address Generation Unit AGU The AGU performs the effective address calculations using integer arithmetic necessary to address data operands in memory and contains the registers that generate the addresses It implements four types of arithmetic linear modulo multiple wrap around modulo and reverse carry The AGU operates in parallel with other chip resources to minimize address generation overhead The AGU is divided into halves each with its own identical address ALU Each address ALU has four sets of register triplets and each register triplet includes an address register offset register and modifier register Each contains a 24 bit full adder called an offset adder A second full adder called a modulo adder adds the summed result of the first full adder to a modulo value that is stored in its respective modifier register A third full adder called a reverse carry adder is also provided The offset adder and the reverse carry adder work in parallel and share common inp
400. pedance The value of HTAP can change only when DSR HACT 0 HTAP is ignored when the HI32 is not in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 4 2 or 3 14 HRWP 0 UB Host Read Write Polarity Controls the polarity of HWR HRW signal in single strobe Universal Bus modes DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HDSM 1 that is when the HWR HRW signal HP29 functions as the host read write HRW signal When HRWP is cleared the host to DSP data transfer direction corresponds to the low level of the HRW signal and DSP to host data transfer direction corresponds to high level of the HRW signal When HRWP is set the host to DSP data transfer direction corresponds to the high level of the HRW signal and DSP to host data transfer direction corresponds to the low level of the HRW signal The value of HRWP can change only when DSR HACT 0 HRWP is ignored when the HI82 is not in a Universal Bus mode or double strobe host port mode is selected DCTR HM 2 or 3 or HDSM 0 13 HDSM 0 UB Host Data Strobe Mode Controls the data strobe mode of the host port pins in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 When HDSM is cleared the double strobe pin mode is selected the HWR HRW pin HP29 functions as host write strobe HWR and HRD HDS HP30 functions as a host read strobe HRD When HDSM is set the single strobe pin mode is selected the HWR HRW pin functions as host read write HRW and HRD HDS functions as host data strobe HDS The value of HDSM can
401. pper 21 address lines during HDSM 0 this pin functions as the host read configuration read and write strobe HRD The host processor initiates a transactions read access by asserting HRD Data output may be latched with the rising edge of HRD In the single strobe mode of the HI32 HDSM 1 this pin functions as the host data strobe HDS The host processor initiates a read access by asserting HDS with HRW asserted Data output may be latched with the rising edge of HDS The host processor initiates a write access by asserting HDS with HRW deasserted Data input is latched by the HI32 with the rising edge of HDS NOTE Simultaneous assertion of HRD and HWR is illegal HP31 HFRAME Reserved disconnected Host Cycle Frame Must be forced or pulled up to Vcc Sustained tri state bidirectional pin Driven by the current master to indicate the beginning and duration of an access HFRAME is deasserted in the final data phase of the transaction 2 20 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 Table 2 12 Host Port Pins HI32 Continued Universal Bus Mode Signal PCI Name i Enhanced Universal Bus Mode GPIO HP32 HCLK Reserved disconnected Host Bus Clock Must be forced or pulled up to Vcc Input pin Provides timing for all transactions on PCI All other PCI signals are sampled on the HCLK rising edge HP 40 33 HAD 31 16 HD 23 8 disconnected Address Data Multiplexed Bus Data Bus Tri state
402. proper operation change the PS 1 0 bits only when the prescaler counter is disabled Disable the prescaler counter by clearing TCSR TE of each of three timers PS1 PSO Prescaler Clock Source 0 0 Internal CLK 2 0 1 TIOO 1 0 TIO1 1 1 TIO2 20 0 PL 20 0 Prescaler Preload Value Contains the prescaler preload value which is loaded into the prescaler counter when the counter value reaches 0 or the counter switches state from disabled to enabled If PL 20 0 N then the prescaler counts N 1 source clock cycles before generating a prescaler clock pulse Therefore the prescaler divide factor preload value 1 AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 27 Triple Timer Module Programming Model 9 4 3 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR The TPCR is a read only register that reflects the current value in the prescaler counter 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 PC20 PC19 PC18 PC17 PC16 PC15 PC14 PC13 PC12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC11 PC10 PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PCO Reserved bit read as 0 write to 0 for future compatibility Figure 9 22 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR Table 9 2 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bi
403. put this signal receives an external frame sync signal for the transmitter and the receiver in synchronous operation Port D 2 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PD2 When configured as PD2 signal direction is controlled through PRR1 The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SC12 through PCR1 This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 25 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface 1 Table 2 14 Enhanced Serial Synchronous Interface 1 Continued Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description SCK1 PD3 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Clock Provides the serial bit rate clock for the ESSI The SCK1 is a clock input or output used by both the transmitter and receiver in synchronous modes or by the transmitter in asynchronous modes Although an external serial clock can be independent of and asynchronous to the DSP system clock it must exceed the minimum clock cycle time of 6T that is the system clock frequency must be at least three times the external ESSI clock frequency The ESSI needs at least three DSP phases inside each half of the serial clock Port D 3 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PD3 When configured as PD3 signal direction is controlled through PRR1 The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SCK1 through PCR1
404. r CSTR CCMR 6 64 Data Parity Reported DPR 6 65 Detected Parity Error DPE 6 65 DEVSEL Timing DST 1 0 6 65 Fast Back to Back Capable FBBC 6 66 Parity Error Response PERR 6 66 PCI Bus Master Enable BM 6 66 PCI Memory Space Enable MSE 6 66 Received Master Abort RMA 6 65 Received Target Abort RTA 6 65 Signaled System Error SSE 6 65 Signalled Target Abort STA 6 65 System Error Enable SERE 6 66 Wait Cycle Control WCC 6 66 Stop Delay Mode SD bit 4 15 STOP instruction 6 12 8 6 STOP reset 6 12 Switch mode 1 5 switching memory configuration dynamically 3 5 switching memory sizes 3 2 Synchronous mode 7 10 7 11 7 13 8 2 8 18 Synchronous Serial Interface Status Register SSISR 7 14 7 28 Receive Data Register Full RDF 7 28 Receiver Frame Sync Flag RFS 7 29 Receiver Overrun Error Flag ROE 7 28 Serial Input Flag 0 IFO 7 29 Serial Input Flag 1 IF1 7 29 Transmit Data Register Empty TDE 7 28 Transmit Frame Sync Flag TFS 7 29 Transmitter Underrun Error Flag TUE 7 28 Synchronous Asynchronous SYN bit 7 21 System Error Enable SERE bit 6 66 system initialization 5 1 SZ register 1 8 T TA Synchronize Select TAS bit 4 14 Target Wait State Disable TWSD bit 6 49 Test Access Port TAP 1 5 1 9 signals 2 29 Test Clock TCK 2 29 Test Data Input TDI 2 29 Test Data Output TDO 2 29 Test Mode Select TMS 2 29 Test Reset TRST 2 29 Time Slot Register TSR 7 33 timer 2 2 2 27 after Reset 9 3
405. r See the description of bus parking in the BB signal description The bus request hold BRH bit in the BCR allows BR to be asserted under software control even though the DSP does not need the bus BR is typically sent to an external bus arbitrator that controls the priority parking and tenure of each master on the same external bus BR is affected only by DSP requests for the external bus never for the internal bus During hardware reset BR is deasserted and the arbitration is reset to the bus slave state AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 7 External Memory Expansion Port Port A Table 2 8 External Bus Control Signals Continued Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description Input Ignored Input Bus Grant Asserted deasserted synchronous to CLKOUT for proper operation BG is asserted by an external bus arbitration circuit when the DSP56301 becomes the next bus master When BG is asserted the DSP56301 must wait until BB is deasserted before taking bus mastership When BG is deasserted bus mastership is typically given up at the end of the current bus cycle This may occur in the middle of an instruction that requires more than one external bus cycle for execution The default operation of this bit requires a setup and hold time as specified in DSP56301 Technical Data the data sheet An alternate mode can be invoked set the asynchronous bus arbitration enable ABE bit Bit 13 in
406. r s Manual A MOTOROLA Operation The timer mode is controlled by the TC 3 0 bits which are TCSR 7 4 For a listing of the timer modes and descriptions of their operations see Section 9 3 Operating Modes on page 9 5 24 TLR Load Count Compare Register Register Register 24 GDB 24 Control Status Register l Timer Control 7 Logic TIO CLK 2 Prescaler CLK Timer interrupt DMA request Figure 9 2 Timer Module Block Diagram 9 2 Operation This section discusses the following timer basics Reset Initialization Exceptions 9 2 1 Timer After Reset A hardware RESET signal or software RESET instruction clears the Timer Control and Status Register for each timer thus configuring each timer as a GPIO A timer is active only if the timer enable bit 0 TCSR TE in the specific timer TCSR is set AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 3 Operation 9 2 2 Timer Initialization To initialize a timer do the following 1 4 Ensure that the timer is not active either by sending a reset or clearing the TCSR TE bit Configure the control register TCSR to set the timer operating mode Set the interrupt enable bits as needed for the application Configure other registers Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR Timer Load Register TLR and Timer Compare Register TCPR as needed for the application Enable the timer by setting the TCSR TE bit 9 2 3 Timer Exceptions Each timer can g
407. r a watchdog timer or a pulse width modulator When the timer does not use TIO it can be used as a GPIO signal also called TIO 0 2 AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 1 Overview 9 1 1 Triple Timer Module Block Diagram Figure 9 1 shows a block diagram of the triple timer module This module includes a 24 bit Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR a 24 bit Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR and three timers Each timer can use the prescaler clock as its clock source GDB 24 24 4 24 TPCR 24 Timer Prescaler Count Register c Timer Prescaler Load Register a 1 Figure 9 1 Triple Timer Module Block Diagram 24 vunn Counter CLK 2 TIOO TIO1 TIO2 9 1 2 Individual Timer Block Diagram Figure 9 2 shows the structure of an individual timer block The DSP56301 treats each timer as a memory mapped peripheral with four registers occupying four 24 bit words in the X data memory space The three timers are identical in structure and function Either standard polled or interrupt programming techniques can be used to service the timers A single generic timer is discussed in this chapter Each timer includes the following 9 2 24 bit counter 24 bit read write Timer Control and Status Register TCSR 24 bit read only Timer Count Register TCR 24 bit write only Timer Load Register TLR 24 bit read write Timer Compare Register TCPR Logic for clock selection and interrupt DMA trigger generation DSP56301 Use
408. r a software RESET instruction clears TIE 11 RIE 0 SCI Receive Interrupt Enable Enables disables the SCI receive data interrupt If RIE is cleared the receive data interrupt is disabled and the RDRF bit in the SCI status register must be polled to determine whether the receive data register is full If both RIE and RDRF are set the SCI requests an SCI receive data interrupt from the interrupt controller Receive interrupts with exception have higher priority than normal receive data interrupts Therefore if an exception occurs that is if PE FE or OR are set and REIE is set the SCI requests an SCI receive data with exception interrupt from the interrupt controller Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears RIE 10 ILIE 0 Idle Line Interrupt Enable When ILIE is set the SCI interrupt occurs when IDLE SCI status register bit 3 is set When ILIE is cleared the IDLE interrupt is disabled Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears ILIE An internal flag the shift register idle interrupt SRIINT flag is the interrupt request to the interrupt controller SRIINT is not directly accessible to the user When a valid start bit is received an idle interrupt is generated if both IDLE and ILIE are set The idle interrupt acknowledge from the interrupt controller clears this interrupt request The idle interrupt is not asserted again until at least one character has been received Th
409. r future compatibility 13 DO Data Output The source of the TIO value when it is a data output signal The TIO signal is a data output when the GPIO mode is enabled and DIR is set A value written to the DO bit is written to the TIO signal If the INV bit is set the value of the DO bit is inverted when written to the TIO signal When the INV bit is cleared the value of the DO bit is written directly to the TIO signal When GPIO mode is disabled writing to the DO bit has no effect 12 DI Data Input Reflects the value of the TIO signal If the INV bit is set the value of the TIO signal is inverted before it is written to the DI bit If the INV bit is cleared the value of the TIO signal is written directly to the DI bit AA MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 29 Triple Timer Module Programming Model Table 9 3 Timer Control Status Register TCSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 11 DIR 0 Direction Determines the behavior of the TIO signal when it functions as a GPIO signal When DIR is set the TIO signal is an output when DIR is cleared the TIO signal is an input The TIO signal functions as a GPIO signal only when the TC 3 0 bits are cleared If any of the TC 3 0 bits are set then the GPIO function is disabled and the DIR bit has no effect 10 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility TRM Timer Reload M
410. r to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated TIO2 Input or Output Input Timer 2 Schmitt Trigger Input Output When timer 2 functions as an external event counter or in measurement mode TIO2 is used as input When timer 2 functions in watchdog timer or pulse modulation mode TIO2 is used as output The default mode after reset is GPIO input This can be changed to output or configured as a timer I O through the timer 2 control status register TCSR2 This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated 2 28 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA JTAG and OnCE Interface 2 12 JTAG and OnCE Interface The DSP56300 family and in particular the DSP56301 support circuit board test strategies based on the JEEE 1149 1 Standard Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture the industry standard developed under the sponsorship of the Test Technology Committee of IEEE and the JTAG The OnCE module interfaces nonintrusively with the DSP56300 core and its peripherals so that you can examine registers memory or on chip peripherals Functions of the OnCE module are provided through the JTAG Test Access Port TAP signals All JTAG and OncE pins are 5 V tolerant Table 2 17 JTAG OnCE Interface State During Signal Name Type Reset Signal Description TCK Input Input Test Clock A test clock input signal to synchronize the JTAG test l
411. ransfer _ reserved DAM 5 3 Addressing Mode Offset Selection ese 000 DORO reserved 007 DORT 010 DOR2 een S 017 DOP DMA Channel Priority Bits 18 17 100 No update None DPR 1 0 Channel Priority 1 S EE GE 00 Priority level 0 lowest T11 3D DOR 2 3 01 Priority level 1 10 Priority level 2 DAM2 Addressing Mode Offset Selection SC Source 3D Source DOR 0 1 1 Priority level 3 highest Destination Defined by DAM 5 3 Source Defined by DAM 5 3 DMA Continuous Mode Enable Bit 16 Destination 3D Destination DOR 2 3 0 Disables continuous mode Counter DCO Layout 1 Enables continuous mode Mode C DCOH 23 12 DCOM 11 6 DCOL 5 0 Mode D DCOH 23 18 DCOM 17 6 DCOL 5 0 DMA Request Source Bits 15 11 Mode E DCOH 23 18 DCOM 1 7 12 DCOL 1 1 0 Reserved DRS 4 0 Requesting Device 00000 00011 External IRQA IRQB IRQC IRQD DMA Destination Space Bits 3 2 00100 01001 Transfer done from channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 DSS 1 0 DMA Destination Memory 01010 01011 ESSIO Receive Transmit Data 00 X Memory Space 01100 01101 ESSI1 Receive Transmit Data 01 Y Memory Space 01110 01111 SCI Receive Transmit Data 10 P Memory Space 10000 10010 TimerO Timert Timer2 1 Reserved 10011 Host Receive Data Full DMA Source
412. ration The hardware reset vector is located at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through HI32 in UB slave single strobe HRW HDS configuration The DSP56301 is written with 24 bit wide words broken into 8 bit wide host bus transfers You can use this mode for booting from various microprocessors or microcontrollers Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least three times the data transfer rate 4 2 Bootstrap Program In recent revisions of the DSP56301 the bootstrap program is factory programmed in an internal 3 K x 24 bit bootstrap ROM located in program memory space at locations FF0000 FFOBFE The bootstrap program can load any program RAM segment from an external byte wide EPROM the SCI Serial EEPROM other DSP56301 or the host port The bootstrap program code for a recent revision of the DSP56301 is listed in Appendix A Bootstrap Program Upon exiting the reset state the DSP56301 samples the MODA MODD signal lines and loads their values into OMR MA MD The mode input signals MODA MODD and the resulting MA MD bits determine which bootstrap mode the DSP56301 enters see Table 4 1 1 In early revisions of the DSP56301 the size of the bootstrap program is 192 bytes x 24 bits AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 5 Central Processor Unit CPU Registers You can invoke the bootstrap program options except modes 0 and 8 at any time by setting the MA MB MC and MD bits in the OMR and j
413. reeseesresrreses 1 12 1 7 4 Serial Communications Interface SCD seisscssccsaseascetaasawsmavdeesssatacendacrdeartatdeouaeliocedsaccceeanasen 1 13 1 7 3 Wp Timer Mod le sies ceanna e aaea o e EEEa aao ARA TeaTS E ESAR 1 13 1 8 Related Documents and Web SMS occ sascasnsdnascersnaseneseesdnarivasscae de gESeehAGEECden deenen 1 14 Chapter 2 Signals Connections 2 1 PO WEE ei siciceissinsaeei Deeg eise chewestas SESCH Ae vaeshaeacestastabasvieeinestete 2 4 22 Eaa BEE 2 4 2 3 Eege 2 5 2A EE EE 2 5 2 5 External Memory Expansion Port Port A sscsiccssescceiessendedossencesdgateucessceeieseageosednetoucenevseead 2 6 2 9 Ext rnal Address DS cpscedsscicsaudacicdansactensadsveesdeataseneadsadeacceiadeasadsnacetuetasluaad eege 2 6 2 3 2 TM EUR Data CN 2 6 2 9 9 External Bis Contr l siisstessccaincsinteseasteitanss teie E EEEE RRE EE EREE 2 6 2 6 eu ee e Mode e E 2 9 2 7 H st Int rfac H32 siirre rresiaren E aE E ETEA EEN iaia 2 10 Y MOTOROLA Contents V 2 8 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface U N 2 22 29 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface TL esetngedeteegeeek Echter degeiEde 2 25 2 10 Serial Communications Interface GC 2 27 PN E 2 27 2 12 JEAG and O CE E 2 29 Chapter 3 Memory Configuration 3 1 Program Memory S PACS eebe Eege iseis accehdecaleteetiautedaneasadend ities 3 1 Soll Intemal Program Memory uskgeedeen beet 3 2 3 1 2 Memory Switch Modes Program Memory ANEN 3 2 31 3 Instruction Cacheiras oara a E A E EA N 3 2
414. register This will start execution of the loaded program from the specified starting address During the access the HAEN and HA 10 3 pins must be driven low pins HA 2 0 select the HI32 registers Before booting through the Host Interface it is recommended that the DSP56301 User s Manual Host boot program verify that the HI32 is operational by reading the status register HSTR and confirming that its value is 3 Suggested DSP to DSP connection slave master 56301 HI32 563xx PortA P HA 10 3 lt A 10 3 selects HI32 base address 00000000 gt HA 2 0 lt A 2 0 selects HTXR registers 7 HD 24 0 lt gt D 24 0 Data bus R HBS_ lt BS_ Bus Strobe optional see Notel HAEN lt AAx DMA cycle disable AAx is active low d HTA TA Transfer Acknowledge optional see Note2 HIRQ_ gt IROQx_ Interrupt Request active low open drain S HWR_ lt WR_ Write strobe H HDD lt BD Read strobe H HRST lt system reset Reset active low Pins HP31 HP32 and HDAK_ must be tied to Vcc Pins HP 22 20 can be used as GPIO pins Pin HINTA_ can be used as softwar driven interrupt request pin Notel If HBS_ to BS_ connection is used the synchronous connection of the HI32 is used and therefore the 563xx master should access the 56301 slave as SRAM with 2 wait states In addition the CLKOUT of 563xx master should connect to EXTAL of 56301 slave and bot
415. ress Attribute AA1 and is accessed with 31 wait states The EPROM bootstrap code expects first to read 3 bytes specifying the number of program words then 3 bytes specifying the address to start loading the program words and then 3 bytes for each program word to be loaded The number of words the starting address and the program words are read least significant byte first followed by the middle and then the most significant byte The program concatenates consecutive three byte sequences into 24 bit words and stores them in contiguous PRAM memory locations starting at the specified address After the program words are read program execution starts from the same address where loading started Bootstrap through SCl The hardware reset vector is located at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through the SCI The bootstrap program sets the SCI to operate in 10 bit asynchronous mode with 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Data is received in this order start bit 8 data bits LSB first and one stop bit Data is aligned in the SCI receive data register with the LSB of the least significant byte of the received data appearing at Bit 0 The user must provide an external clock source with a frequency at least 16 times the transmission data rate Each byte received by the SCI is echoed back through the SCI transmitter to the external transmitter The boot program concatenates every three bytes read from the SCI into
416. ress Low PM 15 4 6 71 Memory Space MS 1 0 6 71 Memory Space Indicator MSI 6 71 Pre Fetch PF 6 71 Universal Bus Mode Base Address GB 10 3 6 70 Memory Space Indicator MSI 6 71 Memory Switch MS bit 3 7 Memory Switch mode 3 2 X data Memory 3 3 Y data memory 3 4 Memory Switch Mode MS bit 4 14 MIN ONT MG 7 0 bits 6 73 MODA MODD pins 4 2 8 8 mode control 2 9 Mode Register MR 4 7 Do Loop Flag LF 4 8 Double Precision Multiply Mode DM 4 9 Interrupt Mask I 4 10 Scaling S Mode 4 10 Sixteen bit Compatibility SC mode 4 9 Mode Select MOD bit 7 21 Mode Select A MODA 2 9 Mode Select B MODB 2 9 Mode Select C MODC 2 9 Mode Select D MODD 2 9 modulo adder 1 7 MOVE instruction 6 42 MOVEFP instruction 6 22 Multidrop mode 8 2 Multiplication Factor MF bits 4 21 Multiplier Accumulator MAC 1 6 1 7 N Negative N bit 4 11 Network mode 7 8 Non Maskable Interrupt NMI 2 9 O off chip memory 1 5 3 1 offset adder 1 7 on chip DRAM controller 1 5 On Chip Emulation OnCE module 1 5 1 9 interface 2 29 on chip memory 1 5 1 10 On Demand mode 7 10 7 15 operating mode definitions 4 3 Operating Mode Register OMR 1 8 4 6 4 12 6 72 Address Attribute Priority Disable APD 4 13 Address Trace Enable ATE 4 13 Asynchronous Bus Arbitration Enable ABE 4 13 Bus Release Timing BRT 4 14 Cache Burst Mode Enable BE 4 14 Index 10 DSP56301 User s Manual Chip Operating Mode MD MA 4
417. ress is HI32_base_address 018 In a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 the HCVR is accessed if the HA 10 3 value matches the HI32 base address see Section 6 8 11 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA on page 6 70 and the HA 2 0 value is 6 AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 59 Host Side Programming Model If TWSD is cleared the HI32 is the selected PCI target DCTR HM 1 in a write data phase to the HCVR It inserts PCI wait states if a host command is pending HC 1 Wait states are inserted until the pending host command is serviced Up to eight wait states can be inserted before a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C Retry is generated In a Universal Bus mode write to the HCVR the HI32 inserts wait states if a host command is pending HC 1 Wait states are inserted until the pending host command is serviced Table 6 24 Host Command Vector Register HCVR Bit Definitions Bit Bit Name Reset Value Mode Description Number 31 16 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 15 HNMI 0 UBM Host Non Maskable Interrupt PCI Used by the host processor to force the generation of the host command as a non maskable interrupt request If HNMI and HC are set the host command interrupt is processed with the highest priority regardless of the current HI32 interrupt priority as written in the DSP56300 Peripheral Priority Register IPRP If HNMI is cleared
418. rol VecH HI32 z 2 Universal Port B V ccs ESSI SCI Timer PCI Bus Bus GPIO Host 52 SR Grounds Interface See Figure 2 2 for a listing of the Host GNDp PLL HI32 Port Interface Port B Signals GNDip 7 PLL GNDo S Internal Logic GND 5 Address Bus GNDp Data Bus GNDy 5 Bus Control GND 5 HI32 GNDs ESSI SCI Timer 3 Port C GPIO Extended Synchronous SCO 0 2 PC 0 2 EXTAL Clock Serial Interface Port 0 SCKO PC3 XTAL ESSI10 SRDO PC4 STDO PC5 CLKOUT PCAP Port D GPIO PINIT Extended C1 0 2 PD 0 2 Synchronous Serial SCK1 PD3 Port A Interface Port 1 SRD1 PD4 24 External ESSI1 STD1 PD5 A 0 2 0 23 Address Bus D 0 23 24 External Serial Port E GPIO Data Bus Communications RXD PEO AA O 3 4 Interface SCI Port Ge Ge RAS 0 3 External RD Bus WR Control Timer GPIO BS TIOO TIOO TA Timers TIO1 TIO1 BR TIO2 TIO2 BG BB TCK BL TDI CAS JTAG OnCE TDO BCLK Port TMS BCLK Notes 1 The HI32 port supports PCI and non PCl bus configurations Twenty four of these HI32 signals can also be configured alternately as GPIO signals PB 0 23 2 The ESSIO ESSI1 and SCI signals are multiplexed with the Port C GPIO signals PC 0 5 Port D GPIO signals PD 0 5 and Port E GPIO signals PE 0 2 respectively 3 TIO O 2 can be configured as GPIO signals Figure 2 1 Signals Identified by Functional Group 2 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA PCI Bus Universal Bus Port B GPIO Host Port HP
419. rol Resistor DC TR arssinat iessen airaa e a E Aaaa Erea A EE A ETE 6 23 6 72 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR ssessessesseseeseresesreesrtsrrsrerstrssesressresrseresressesseerresseesresres 6 26 6 7 3 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPM c isccsicatasesieasasaedasctisd Savsvlnostacasdednansnudnitensiinans 6 30 6 7 4 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR sessessessessesrresesreesersrisrerstrssesressresrsererressersrerresseesresees 6 33 6 1 3 Egeter 6 35 6 7 6 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR x cccscucasisactracemtntcnsacnieerertnra tani neeanae 6 38 6 7 7 DSP Receive Data ECKE EAR 6 41 6 7 8 DSP Master Transmit Data Register DTXM sississasaricasonssesasosasaassoussessassnsunscevandssavencagnanves 6 42 6 7 9 DSP Slave Transmit Data Register DTXS eesesseerseseeseesrreresreesresrrsrrssrrssrsreeseessreeresresee 6 42 MOTOROLA Contents vii 6 7 10 DSP Host Port GPIO Direction Register ODIRH cece eecceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceneeeeseeeeneeeenaees 6 43 6 7 11 DSP Host Port GPIO Data Register DATH cccesscscssscecssececssecesssecesssceeesseceeseeeenees 6 43 6 8 Host Sid Programming Model vsccsicceccsseicccceiacatecd lt tsccaeed bead cute taacededbcabecdetbecacbetaadandetalrecsabaats 6 44 6 9 1 HI32 Control Register HC UR EE 6 48 6 8 2 Host Interface Status Register CHS UR siisyssccoracesacenasnaesereceansesastaiseaadnaceadvarseeadannetetenaens 6 56 6 8 3 Host Command Vector Register HCVR scesstecsascuseestancsstvadansasnsacesee
420. rol bits and the direction control bits for the serial control signals Also in the CRB are interrupt enable bits for the receiver and the transmitter Bit settings of the CRB determines how many transmitters are enabled 0 1 2 or 3 The CRB settings also determine the ESSI operating mode Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears all the bits in the CRB Table 7 2 Mode and Signal Definitions on page 7 5 summarizes the relationship between the ESSI signals SC 2 0 SCK and the CRB bits The ESSI has two serial output flag bits OF1 and OFO The normal sequence follows for setting output flags when transmitting data by transmitter 0 through the STD signal only 1 Wait for TDE TXO empty to be set 2 Write the flags 3 Write the transmit data to the TX register Bits OFO and OPT are double buffered so that the flag states appear on the signals when the TX data is transferred to the transmit shift register The flag bit values are synchronized with the data transfer The timing of the optional serial output signals SC 2 0 is controlled by the frame timing and is not affected by the settings of TE2 TE1 TEO or the receive enable RE bit of the CRB The ESSI has three transmit enable bits TE 2 0 one for each data transmitter The process of transmitting data from TX1 and TX2 is the same TXO differs from these two bits in that it can also operate in Asynchronous mode The normal transmit enable sequen
421. rough the SCI The bootstrap program sets the SCI to operate in 10 bit asynchronous mode with 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Data is received in this order start bit 8 data bits LSB first and one stop bit Data is aligned in the SCI receive data register with the LSB of the least significant byte of the received data appearing at Bit 0 The user must provide an external clock source with a frequency at least 16 times the transmission data rate Each byte received by the SCI is echoed back through the SCI transmitter to the external transmitter The boot program concatenates every three bytes read from the SCI into a 24 bit wide DSP56301 word Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least 64 times the data transmission rate Host bootstrap in DSP to DSP mode The hardware reset vector is located at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through the HI32 in UB mode double strobe HTA pin active low The DSP56301 is written with 24 bit wide words Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be at least three times the data transfer rate Bootstrap from SPl compatible Serial EEPROM through the SCI The hardware reset vector is at address FF0000 in the bootstrap ROM The program bootstraps through the HI32 in standard PCI slave configuration The DSP56301 is written with 24 bit wide words encapsulated in 32 bit wide PCI transfers Note DSP CLKOUT rate must be 5 3 of the PCI clock Host bootstrap 16 bit wide
422. rystal If an external clock is used leave XTAL unconnected Table 2 5 Phase Lock Loop Signals State During SR Signal Name Type Reset Signal Description PCAP Input Input PLL Capacitor Connects an off chip capacitor to the PLL filter Connect one capacitor terminal to PCAP and the other terminal to Vccp If the PLL is not used PCAP may be tied to Vcc GND or left floating CLKOUT Output Chip driven Clock Output An output clock synchronized to the internal core clock phase Note If the PLL is enabled and both the multiplication and division factors equal one then CLKOUT is also synchronized to EXTAL If the PLL is disabled the CLKOUT frequency is half the frequency of EXTAL PINIT Input Input PLL Initial During assertion of RESET the value of PINIT is written into the PLL enable PEN bit of the PLL control PCTL register determining whether the PLL is enabled or disabled MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 5 External Memory Expansion Port Port A 2 5 External Memory Expansion Port Port A When the DSP56301 enters a low power standby mode stop or wait it releases bus mastership and tri states the relevant Port A signals A 0 23 D O 23 AAO RASO AA3 RAS3 RD WR BB CAS BCLK BCLK 2 5 1 External Address Bus Table 2 6 External Address Bus Signals Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description A 0 23 Output Tri stated Address B
423. s Application Date Programmer Sheet 6 of 10 Host Processor HI32 Host Non Maskable Interrupt Bit 15 Host Command Vector Bits 7 1 Log H Transmit Request Enable Bit 0 0 Host Command Interrupt normal priority Selects host command interrupt address o teg geet disabled EE highest priority Caution Never use the reset location 0 4 _ Transmit requests enabled SE Modes UBM and PCI Modes UBM and PCI 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2120 19 18 1716 1514 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 KK KK KK KL KL KL k KL KL KL KEK k KL k k KR Fe ve me J Hv va ave Hvi Hvo Ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HI32 Command Vector Register HCVR Read Write Reset 00000000 Reserved Program as 0 Figure B 15 Host Command Vector Register HCVR AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 27 Programming Sheets Application Date Programmer Sheet 7 of 10 Host Processor HI32 Detected Parity Error Bit 31 Data Parity Reported Bit 24 0 No parity error detected 0 No parity error reported 1 Parity error detected 1 HI32 as master reported data parity error Modes PCI only Modes PCI only Signaled System Error Bit 30 Fast Back to Back Capable Bit 23 0 No signaled system error detected Always 1 hardwired 1 Signaled system error detected Modes PCI only Modes PCI only System Error Enable Bit 8 0 HSERR pin disabled 1 HSERR pin enabled Modes PCI only R
424. s High Low PM 31 16 6 70 Memory Base Address Low PM 15 4 6 71 Memory Space MS 1 0 6 71 Memory Space Indicator MSI 6 71 Pre Fetch PF 6 71 Universal Bus Mode Base Address GB 10 3 6 70 memory space read write transactions 6 45 Memory Write and Invalidate command 6 34 memory to HI32 data transfers 6 22 modes 6 13 MOVE instruction 6 42 MOVEFP instruction 6 22 NMIs 6 6 operating modes 6 12 6 18 parity 6 4 PCI configuration registers 6 44 PCI DSP to host transaction 6 31 PCI host to DSP data transfers 6 45 PCI host to DSP transaction 6 31 PCI idle state 6 13 PCI master data transfer formats 6 8 PCI master transaction termination 6 28 PCI mode 2 2 6 13 6 45 6 63 PCI target data transfers 6 6 6 7 personal software reset state 6 12 6 13 pin functionality 6 18 pins 6 16 preventing data overwriting 6 42 reset 6 12 reset states 6 12 Self Configuration mode 6 44 6 72 signalling environments 6 4 signals 2 1 2 10 signals and modes 2 14 software mastership arbitration 6 49 software driven PCI Interrupt Requests 6 4 standard polling 6 22 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR 6 64 Index 8 DSP56301 User s Manual Data Parity Reported DPR 6 65 Detected Parity Error DPE 6 65 DEVSEL Timing DST 1 0 6 65 Fast Back to Back Capable FBBC 6 66 Memory Space Enable MSE 6 66 Parity Error Response PERR 6 66 PCI Bus Master Enable BM 6 66 Received Master Abort RMA
425. s are cleared after power up Any reset does not affect the value written to the CSID AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 71 Host Side Programming Model Use the following procedure for writing to the CSID 1 Power up the DSP56301 The default CSID value is 00000000 The HI32 is in the Personal Software Reset state HM 0 and responds to memory and configuration space PCI transactions with a retry event 2 Boot the DSP56301through the EPROM or SCI a The program downloaded to the DSP56301 should do the following Enter the Self Configuration mode HM 5 and write the CSID The HI32 still responds to memory and configuration space PCI transactions with a retry movep rep movep movep movep movep movep Note 6 72 event Optional set the PCTL value This enables the DSP56301 to run from the low frequency internal clock Enter the Personal Software Reset state HM 0 Enter PCI mode HM 1 Now a PCI master can access the DSP56301 PCI configuration space Optional Set the mode bits in the OMR to MC MB MA 100 and jump to the DSP56301 bootstrap ROM start address FF0000 for further program download from the HI32 in the PCI mode Example 6 5 Code for Setting the CSID move 0 x0 gt 500000 x M_DCTR 4 X0 x M_DPAR P gt 012345 x M_DPMC gt S6789ab x M_DPAR x0 x M_DCTR 100000 x M_DCTR set Set set set set constant Self Configuration mod
426. s following the data that is one HI32 HDRQ is deasserted when the DMA clock following the HPAR signal request source is cleared HDAK is asserted when a data parity error is detected masked by RREQ 0 or TREQ 0 or disabled DMAE 0 The polarity of HDRQ pin is controlled by HDRP bit in the DCTR HP26 HGNT HAEN disconnected Bus Grant Host Address Enable Input pin Input pin Indicates to the HI32 that it has Enables ISA EISA DMA I O type accesses mastership of the bus If not used this When high the HI32 responds to DMA cycles pin should be forced or pulled up to only if DMAE 1 in the DCTR if DMAE 0 the Vcc HI32 ignores the access When low the HI32 responds when it identifies its address that is ISA EISA DMA I O type space accesses 2 18 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 Table 2 12 Host Port Pins HI32 Continued Universal Bus Mode ignal Nate pci Enhanced Universal Bus Mode GPIO HP27 HREQ HTA disconnected Bus Request Host Transfer Acknowledge Tri state Output pin Tri state Output pin Indicates to the arbiter that the HI32 For high speed data transfer between the requires use of the bus HI32 and an external host when the host uses HREQ is deasserted in the same PCI anon interrupt driven handshake mechanism clock that the HI32 asserts HFRAME If the HI32 deasserts HTA at the beginning of As during the STOP reset HREQ is the host access the host should exten
427. s for the area defined by the BAC 11 0 BYEN BXEN and BPEN bits The encoding of BAT 1 0 is BR 00 Reserved E 01 SRAM access BR 10 DRAM access BR 11 Reserved When the external access type is defined as a DRAM access BAT 1 0 10 AA RAS acts as a Row Address Strobe RAS signal Otherwise it acts as an Address Attribute signal External accesses to the default area always execute as if BAT 1 0 01 that is SRAM access If Port A is used for external accesses the BAT bits in the AAR3 0 registers must be initialized to the SRAM access type that is BAT 01 or to the DRAM access type that is BAT 10 To ensure proper operation of Port A this initialization must occur even for an AAR register that is not used during any Port A access Note At reset the BAT bits are initialized to 00 4 7 DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 The DMA Control Registers DCR 5 0 are read write registers that control the DMA operation for each of their respective channels All DCR bits are cleared during processor reset 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 DE DIE DTM2 DTM1 DTMO DPR1 DPRO DCON DRS4 DRS3 DRS2 DRS1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DRSO D3D DAM5 DAM4 DAM3 DAM2 DAM1 DAMO DDS1 DDSO DSS1 DSSO Figure 4 9 DMA Control Register DCR Table 4 12 DMA Control Register DCR Bit Definitions Bit Reset er Number Bi
428. s is not a standard part of the JTAG TAP controller The signal connects directly to the OnCE module to initiate Debug mode directly or to provide a direct external indication that the chip has entered the debug mode All other interface with the OnCE module must occur through the JTAG port AA MOTOROLA Signals Connections 2 29 JTAG and OnCE Interface 2 30 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Chapter 3 Memory Configuration Like all members of the DSP56300 core family the DSP56301 addresses three sets of 16 M x 24 bit memory program X data and Y data Each of these memory spaces includes both on chip and external memory accessed through the external memory interface The DSP56301 is extremely flexible because it has several modes to allocate on chip memory between the program memory and the two data memory spaces You can also configure it to operate in a special sixteen bit compatibility mode that allows the chip to use DSP56000 object code without any change this can result in higher performance of existing code for applications that do not require a larger address space This section provides detailed information on each of these memory spaces 3 1 Program Memory Space Program memory space consists of the following Internal program RAM 4 K by default Instruction cache optional 1 K formed from program RAM When enabled the memory addresses used by the internal cache memory are switched to external me
429. s needed When BRH is set the BR signal is always asserted If BRH is cleared the BR is asserted only if an external access is attempted or pending 22 BLH 0 Bus Lock Hold Asserts the BL signal even if no read modify write access is occurring When BLH is set the BL signal is always asserted If BLH is cleared the BL signal is asserted only if a read modify write external access is attempted 21 BBS 0 Bus State This read only bit is set when the DSP is the bus master and is cleared otherwise 4 22 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers Table 4 9 Bus Control Register BCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 20 16 BDFW 4 0 11111 31 wait states Bus Default Area Wait State Control Defines the number of wait states one through 31 inserted into each external access to an area that is not defined by any of the AAR registers The access type for this area is SRAM only These bits should not be programmed as zero since SRAM memory access requires at least one wait state When four through seven wait states are selected one additional wait state is inserted at the end of the access When selecting eight or more wait states two additional wait states are inserted at the end of the access These trailing wait states increase the data hold time and the memory release time and do not increase the memory access time 15 13 BA3
430. s register is read followed by a read of SRX A hardware RESET signal a software RESET instruction an SCI individual reset or a STOP instruction also clears PE In 10 bit Asynchronous mode 11 bit multidrop mode and 8 bit Synchronous mode the PE bit is always cleared since there is no parity bit in these modes If the byte received causes both parity and overrun errors the SCI receiver recognizes only the overrun error AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 17 SCI Programming Model Table 8 4 SCI Status Register SSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 4 OR 0 Overrun Error Flag Set when a byte is ready to be transferred from the receive shift register to the receive data register SRX that is already full RDRF 1 The receive shift register data is not transferred to the SRX The OR flag indicates that character s in the received data stream may have been lost The only valid data is located in the SRX OR is cleared when the SCI status register is read followed by a read of SRX The OR bit clears the FE and PE bits that is overrun error has higher priority than FE or PE A hardware RESET signal a software RESET instruction an SCI individual reset or a STOP instruction clears OR IDLE Idle Line Flag Set when 10 or 11 consecutive ones are received IDLE is cleared by a start bit detection The IDLE status bit represents
431. s set and if DPCR TAIE is set generates a transaction abort interrupt request MAB is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to it If an HI32 initiated PCI transaction terminates with a master abort the received master abort bit RMA in the CSTR is also set DPER PCI Data Parity Error In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 when the HI32 is a PCI master or selected target indicates that a data parity error has been detected by the HI32 hardware or reported by the external host HPERR asserted At the end of a transaction if a data parity error is detected DPER is set and if DPCRIPEIE is set a parity error interrupt request is generated DPER is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to it In personal software reset DPER does not reflect new data parity errors APER PCI Address Parity Error In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 when the HI32 is a PCI target indicates that the HI32 hardware has detected an address parity error At the end of a transaction if an address parity error is detected APER is set and if DPCRIPEIE is set a parity error interrupt request is generated If an address parity error is detected BR The HI82 target claims the cycles and terminates as though the address was correct BR Ifthe system error enable SERE bit in the Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR is set the HSERR pin is pulsed one PCI clock cycle and the signalled system error SSE bit is set in the CSTR
432. s the functionality of the corresponding signal line When a PCR i bit is set the corresponding port signal is configured as an ESSI signal When a PCR i bit is cleared the corresponding port signal is configured as a GPIO signal Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears all PCR bits 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PCx5 PCx4 PCx3 PCx2 PCx1 PCx0 Note For Px 5 0 a 0 selects Pxn as the signal and a 1 selects the specified ESSI signal For ESSIO the GPIO signals are PC 5 0 and the ESSI signals are STDO SRDO SCKO and SCO 2 0 For ESSI1 the GPIO signals are PD 5 0 and the ESSI signals are STD1 SRD1 SCK1 and SC1 2 0 Reserved Read as zero Write with zero for future compatibility Figure 7 18 Port Control Registers PCRC X FFFFBF PCRD X FFFAF 7 36 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA GPIO Signals and Registers 7 6 2 Port Direction Registers PRRC and PRRD The read write PRRC and PRRD control the data direction of the ESSIO and ESSI1 GPIO signals when they are enabled by the associated Port Control Register PCRC or PCRD respectively When PRRC i or PRRD i is set the corresponding signal is an output GPO signal When PRRC i or PRRD i is cleared the corresponding signal is an input GPI signal Either a hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears all PRRC and PRRD bi
433. s the target DCTR HM 1 with HCTR HTF 0 the host to DSP data path is a six word deep 24 bit wide FIFO The host writes 24 bit words to the HTXR and the DSP56300 core reads 24 bit words from the DRXR In Universal Bus mode data transfers the host to DSP data path is a five word deep 24 bit wide FIFO The host writes 24 bit words to the HT XR and the DSP56300 core reads 24 bit words from the DRXR Note To guarantee proper HI32 operation the DMA should service the HI32 under the following restrictions Two DMA channels should not service the DRXR FIFO if master and slave data is mixed there The DMA data transfers should not be concurrent with the DSP56300 core data transfers to from the same HI32 data FIFO 6 3 2 DSP To Host Data Path In PCI mode data transfers in which the HI32 is the master DCTR HM 1 with DPMC FC 0 the master DSP to host data path DTXM HRXM is an eight word deep FIFO The DSP56300 core writes to the DSP side of the FIFO DTXM The data is output to the bus from the host side HRXM In PCI mode data transfers in which the HI32 is the master DCTR HM 1 with DPMC FC 0 the master DSP to host data path is a FIFO four words deep and 32 bits wide The DSP56300 core writes 24 bit words to the DTXM Each word written by the DSP56300 core contains 16 bits of significant data right aligned the most significant byte is not transmitted The first word written by the DSP56300 core contains the t
434. saction is terminated with target abort RTA is cleared when the host processor writes a value of one to it The personal hardware reset clears RTA 27 STA Signalled Target Abort Indicates a target abort PCI bus event In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 STA is set when the HI32 as a target device terminates a transaction with target abort STA is cleared when the host processor writes a value of one to it The personal hardware reset clears STA 26 25 DST 1 0 DEVSEL Timing hardwired to 1 Encode the timing of the HDEVSEL pin in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 DST 1 0 are hardwired to DST 1 indicating that the HI32 belongs to the medium DEVSEL timing class of the PCI devices 24 DPR Data Parity Reported Indicates the detection of a data parity error in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The DPR is set when the HI32 acts as a bus master and detects a data parity error or samples HPERR asserted while CCMR PERR is set DPR is cleared when the host processor writes a value of one to it The personal hardware reset clears DPR AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 65 Host Side Programming Model Table 6 26 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 FBBC 0 Fast Back to Back Capable hardwired to one Indicates that the HI32 supports fast back to back transactions as a target in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 Th
435. sca aea les aeons r aE toons 7 1 ESSI Control Register A CRA E 7 14 ESSI Clock Generator Functional Block Duageram 7 17 ESSI Frame Sync Generator Functional Block Diagram ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 17 ESSI Control Register Bi CK EE 7 18 CRB FSLO and FSL1 Bit Operation FSR 01 7 24 CRB SY NiBit Operation ee Seid ei ae Sees 7 25 CRB MOD Bit Operation Secos pmet lerrian gnc savesgule eet ioio estes 7 26 Normal Mode External Frame Sync 8 Bit 1 Word in brame 7 27 Network Mode External Frame Sync 8 Bit 2 Words in Frame 00 0s0sesssese 7 27 ESSI Status Register SSISR rcce i ee e Eege 7 28 ESSI Data Path Programming Model SHED 0 7 31 ESSI Data Path Programming Model SHED IL 7 32 ESSI Transmit Slot Mask Register A CISMA 7 33 ESSI Transmit Slot Mask Register B OISMB 7 34 ESSI Receive Slot Mask Register A RSMA 0 eeceeeeccecsseceeeteeeeeteeeenteeeenaeeeenes 7 35 ESSI Receive Slot Mask Register B RSMB escccssececeeeceeseeeeesteeeeseeeeees 7 35 Port Control Registers PCRC X FFFFBF PCRD XS SPPPAF 7 36 Port Direction Registers PRRC X FFFFBE PRRD X FFFFAE 7 37 Port Data Registers PDRC X FFFFBD PDRD X SPAD 7 38 SCI Data Word Formats GGSHID zItTl 8 10 SCI Data Word Formats SSFTD 02 8 11 SCI Control Register SCR jc issessssavisascaendenversesesencsaswnezeve shsenateaunvsceensunseanweosanese 8 12 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 1
436. sending data If SBK remains set the transmitter continually sends whole frames of Os 10 or 11 bits with no stop bit At the end of the break code the transmitter sends at least one high set bit before transmitting any data to guarantee recognition of a valid start bit Break can signal an unusual condition message and so on by forcing a frame error the frame error is caused by a missing stop bit SSFTD SCI Shift Direction Determines the order in which the SCI data shift registers shift data in or out MSB first when set LSB first when cleared The parity and data type bits do not change their position in the frame and they remain adjacent to the stop bit AA MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 15 SCI Programming Model Table 8 2 SCI Control Register SCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 2 0 WDS 2 0 0 Word Select Select the format of transmitted and received data Asynchronous modes are compatible with most UART type serial devices and they support standard RS 232 communication links Multidrop Asynchronous mode is compatible with the MC68681 DUART the M68HC11 SCI interface and the Intel 8051 serial interface Synchronous data mode is essentially a high speed shift register for UO expansion and stream mode channel interfaces You can synchronize data by using a gated transmit and receive clock compatible with t
437. serts address in PS reset 0 incoming data AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 75 HI32 Programming Model Quick Reference HI32 Registers Quick Reference Bit Reset Type Reg Comments Num Mnemonic Name Val Function HS PH PS DPMC 15 0 AR 31 16 DSP PCI Transaction written only if go000 Address High MARQ 1 21 16 BL 5 0 IPCI Data Burst Length written only if 0 MARQ 1 FC 1 0 Data Transfer Format Transmit Receive written only if Control 00 132 bit mode 32 bit mode MARQ 1 23 22 01 3 Right zero ext 3LSBs 0 10 3 Right sign ext 3LSBs 11 3 Left zero filled 3MSBs DPAR 15 0 AR 15 0 DSP PCI Transaction written only if 0000 _ Address Low MARQ 1 19 16 C 38 0 PCI Bus Command written only if 0 MARQ 1 23 20 BE 3 0 PCI Byte Enables written only if 0 MARQ 1 DSR HCP Host Command 0 no host command pending cleared when 0 0 Pending 1 host command pending the HC interrupt request is serviced STRQ Slave Transmit Data 1 slave transmit FIFO is not full cleared if the 1 40 1 Request 0 slave transmit FIFO is full DTXS is filled by core writes SRRQ Slave Receive Data 0 slave receive FIFO is empty cleared if the 0 0 Request 1 slave receive FIFO is not DRXR is empty emptied by core 2 reads or the data to be read from the DRXR is master data 5 3 HF 2 0 Host Flags 0 HACT HI32 Active
438. set if HRRQ 1 otherwise cleared 1 0 set if HTRQ 1 otherwise cleared 1 1 set if HTRQ 1 or HRRQ 1 otherwise cleared 6 HINT 0 UBM Host interrupt A PCI Reflects the status of the HINT bit in the DSP Control Register DCTR and the HINTA pin HINT is set if the host interrupt A bit is set in the DCTR and the HINTA pin is driven low HINT is cleared if the host interrupt A is cleared in the DCTR and the HINTA pin is driven low 5 3 HF 5 3 0 UBM Host Flags PCI Indicate the state of host flags HF 5 3 respectively in the DSP Control Register DCTR on the DSP side Only the DSP56300 core can change HF 5 3 AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 57 Host Side Programming Model Table 6 23 Host Interface Status Register HSTR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Mode Description 2 HRRQ 0 UBM PCI Host Receive Data Request Indicates that the host slave receive data FIFO HRXS contains data from the DSP56300 core and can be read by the host processor In PCI mode as a target in a read data phase from the HRXS the HI32 deasserts HTRDY and inserts up to eight PCI wait cycles if HRRQ is cleared In a Universal Bus mode read from the HRXS the HI32 slave deasserts HTA as long as HRRQ is cleared HRRQ can assert the HIRQ pin if the RREQ bit is set Regardless of whether the HRRQ host interrupt request is enabled HRRQ provides valid status so that the
439. should be saved with other Data ALU registers to be used and restored before the interrupt routine terminates 13 SC Sixteen Bit Compatibility Mode Affects addressing functionality enabling full compatibility with object code written for the DSP56000 family When SC is set MOVE operations to from any of the following PCU registers clear the eight MSBs of the destination LA LC SP SSL SSH EP SZ VBA and SC If the source is either the SR or OMR then the eight MSBs of the destination are also cleared If the destination is either the SR or OMR then the eight MSBs of the destination are left unchanged To change the value of one of the eight MSBs of the SR or OMR clear SC SC also affects the contents of the Loop Counter Register If SC is cleared normal operation then a loop count value of zero causes the loop body to be skipped and a loop count value of F FFFFF causes the loop to execute the maximum number of 224 1 times If the SC bit is set a loop count value of zero causes the loop to execute 216 times anda loop count value of F FFFFF causes the loop to execute 218 1 times Note Due to pipelining a change in the SC bit takes effect only after three instruction cycles Insert three NOP instructions after the instruction that changes the value of this bit to ensure proper operation 12 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 9 Central Pro
440. sierrrsrrerrrrresrrseese 7 19 ESSI Status Register SSISR Bit Definitions eeeseseereeseereesrrsreerrrsrrsrrsrrrsressee 7 28 ESSI Port Signal Configurations sesso seesocessesioieccser tere eadecessoeeteioee uae 7 37 SCL Registers Aller GSO E 8 5 SCI Control Register SCR Bit DeTitta sei sgcasccncaccssscadcestentactanss sacaxesevascsevesiceven 8 12 BCT Sais E 8 17 SCI Status Register SSR Bit Definitions 2 00 eee ceeneceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeneeeee 8 17 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR Bit Definitions 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 8 19 Timer Prescaler Load Register TPLR Bit Definitions 0 ee eeeceeeseeeeeteeeeeees 9 27 Timer Prescaler Count Register TPCR Bit Definitions s s s 9 28 Timer Control Status Register TCSR Bit Defmpons eee eeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeteees 9 28 Inverter UNV Bit Operation sterne kee breede 9 32 Crude to Programming SCC CS eeedecieerigeteese gege deeg B 2 Internal I O Memory Map X Data Memor B 3 Irene B 9 Interrupt Source Priorities Within an ID B 11 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Chapter 1 Overview This manual describes the DSP56301 24 bit digital signal processor DSP its memory operating modes and peripheral modules The DSP56301 is an implementation of the DSP56300 core with a unique configuration of on chip memory cache and peripherals Use this manual in conjunction with the DSP56300 Family Manual DSP56300FM AD which describes the CPU core programming models
441. significant PCI data bytes are written HD 15 0 are written to the HTXR left aligned to the HTXR and zero filled GDB MDDB GDB MDDB HI32 DRXR DRXR HTXR HTXR HDTFC HDTFC PCI bus Host bus Table 6 5 Receive Transfer Data Formats HCTR DSP to Host Data Transfer Format one ig PCI mode Universal Bus mode 0 0 The two least significant bytes of two HRXS The three least significant HRXS bytes locations are output are output to HD 23 0 GDB MDDB GDB MDDB HI32 DTXS DTXS HRXS HRXS HDTFC HDTFC PCI bus Host bus 6 10 DSP56301 User s Manual LA MororoLa Table 6 5 Receive Transfer Data Formats Data Transfer Paths right aligned and sign extended GDB MDDB DTXS HRXS HDTFC PCI bus output to HD 15 0 HCTR DSP to Host Data Transfer Format a g PCI mode Universal Bus mode 0 1 The three least significant HRXS bytes are output The two least significant HRXS bytes are right aligned and zero extended output to HD 15 0 GDB MDDB GDB MDDB HI32 DTXS DTXS HRXS HRXS HDTFC HDTFC Tso PClbus _ Hoer bus 1 0 The three least significant HRXS bytes are output The two least significant HRXS bytes are GDB MDDB DTXS HRXS HDTFG Host bus The three least significant HRXS bytes are output left aligned and zero filled GDB MDDB DTXS HRXS HDTFC PCI bus The two middle HRXS bytes are output to HD 15 0 ge GDB MDDB DTXS HRXS HDT
442. sion Cleared if all the bits of the integer portion of the 56 bit result are all ones or all zeros otherwise this bit is set The Scaling mode defines the integer portion If the E bit is cleared then the low order fraction portion contains all the significant bits the high order integer portion is sign extension In this case the accumulator extension register can be ignored If the E bit is set it indicates that the accumulator extension register is in use S1 so Scaling Mode Integer Portion No scaling Bits 55 47 Scale down Bits 55 48 1 Scale up Bits 5 46 1 0 1 0 1 Reserved Undefined Unnormalized Set if the two MSBs of the Most Significant Portion MSP of the result are identical otherwise this bit is cleared The MSP portion of the A or B accumulators is defined by the Scaling mode S1 So Scaling Mode Integer Portion 0 No scaling U Bit 47 XOR Bit 46 Scale down U Bit 48 XOR Bit 47 1 Scale up U Bit 46 XOR Bit 45 0 1 0 1 1 Reserved U undefined Negative Set if the MSB of the result is set otherwise this bit is cleared Zero Set if the result equals zero otherwise this bit is cleared Overflow Set if an arithmetic overflow occurs in the 56 bit result otherwise this bit is cleared V indicates that the result cannot be represented in the accumulator register that is the register overflo
443. sm is disabled and the lines can be used together as four external lines that can be decoded externally into 16 chip select signals Row Address Strobe When defined as RAS these signals can be used as RAS for DRAM interface These signals are tri statable outputs with programmable polarity 2 6 DSP56301 User s Manual AA MOTOROLA External Memory Expansion Port Port A Table 2 8 External Bus Control Signals Continued Type State During Reset Signal Description Output Tri stated Read When the DSP is the bus master RD is an active low output that IS asserted to read external memory on the data bus DO D23 Otherwise RD is tri stated Output Tri stated Write When the DSP is the bus master WR is an active low output that is asserted to write external memory on the data bus DO D23 Otherwise the signals are tri stated BS Output Tri stated Bus Strobe When the DSP is the bus master BS is asserted for half a clock cycle at the start of a bus cycle to provide an early bus start signal for a bus controller If the external bus is not used during an instruction cycle BS remains deasserted until the next external bus cycle Input Ignored Input Transfer Acknowledge lf the DSP56301 is the bus master and there is no external bus activity or the DSP56301 is not the bus master the TA input is ignored The TA input is a data transfer acknowledge D
444. specific DSP56300 core based device Note To ensure proper operation do not clear Cache Enable mode while Burst mode is enabled OMR BE is set 18 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 17 SA Sixteen Bit Arithmetic Mode Affects data width functionality enabling the Sixteen bit Arithmetic mode of operation When SA is set the core uses 16 bit operations instead of 24 bit operations In this mode 16 bit data is right aligned in the 24 bit memory locations registers and 24 bit register portions Shifting limiting rounding arithmetic instructions and moves are performed accordingly For details on Sixteen Bit Arithmetic mode consult the DSP56300 Family Manual 16 FV DO FOREVER Flag Set when a DO FOREVER loop executes The FV flag like the LF flag is restored from the stack when a DO FOREVER loop terminates Stacking and restoring the FV flag when initiating and exiting a DO FOREVER loop respectively allow program loops to be nested When returning from the long interrupt with an RTI instruction the system stack is pulled and the value of the FV bit is restored 15 LF Do Loop Flag When a program loop is in progress enables the detection of the end of the loop The LF is restored from stack when a program loop terminates Stacking and restoring the LF when initiating and exiting a program loop respectively allow program loops to be nested When returning from the long
445. st 24 bits 1 0 1 32 valid data in the last 24 bits 1 1 0 Reserved 1 1 1 Reserved Note When the ESSI transmits data in On Demand mode that is MOD 1 in the CRB and DC 4 0 00000 in the CRA with WL 2 0 100 the transmission does not work properly To ensure correct operation do not use On Demand mode with the WL 2 0 100 32 bit word length mode AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 15 ESSI Programming Model Table 7 3 ESSI Control Register A CRA Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 18 ALC 0 Alignment Control The ESSI handles 24 bit fractional data Shorter data words are left aligned to the MSB bit 23 For applications that use 16 bit fractional data shorter data words are left aligned to bit 15 The ALC bit supports shorter data words If ALC is set received words are left aligned to bit 15 in the receive shift register Transmitted words must be left aligned to bit 15 in the transmit shift register If the ALC bit is cleared received words are left aligned to bit 23 in the receive shift register Transmitted words must be left aligned to bit 23 in the transmit shift register Note Ifthe ALC bit is set only 8 12 or 16 bit words are used The use of 24 or 32 bit words leads to unpredictable results 17 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 16 12 DC 4 0 Frame Rate Divider C
446. st Flag 0 HFO in HCTR register This will start execution of the loaded program from the specified starting address The user must externally decode the port address with active low logic and connect the select line to HAEN all the address lines shall be pulled down except for HA3 HA2 and HA1 that select the HOST Interface registers When booting through the Host Interface it is recommended that the Host boot program verify that the Host Interface is operational by reading the status register HSTR and confirm that TRDY 1 When booting through the Host Interface it is recommended that the HOST Processor s boot program verify that the Host Interface is ready by reading the status register HSTR and confirm that TRDY 1 or HTRO 1 LECLERC LEC EET REPLIES CEERI CST ETL I LEE ETE ETE EET EEE EEE ET EOE RHI aT ET ZE e If D MC MB MA x111 then it loads the program RAM from the Host Interface programmed to operate inthe Universal Bus UB mode in Single strobe pin configuration Other than the single strobe pin configuration this mode is identical to the double strobe pin configuration UB mode MD MC MB MA x110 DSP56301 User s Manual 1 a 0 A EE EIIEE EEE EE E EE E EE E EE E EE E E TE EE E E EE EE EEE EE EET EE ETE EE E E EEE EE ETTE EE E Er If MD MC MB MA 0100 then it loads the program RAM from a SPI compatible Serial below r
447. ster PCTL OnCE FFFC FFFFFC OnCE GDB Register OGDB BIU FFFB FFFFFB Bus Control Register BCR FFFA FFFFFA DRAM Control Register DCR FFF9 FFFFF9 Address Attribute Register 0 AARO FFF8 FFFFF8 Address Attribute Register 1 AAR1 FFF7 FFFFF7 Address Attribute Register 2 AAR2 FFF6 FFFFF6 Address Attribute Register 3 AAR3 FFF5 FFFFF5 ID Register IDR DMA FFF4 FFFFF4 DMA Status Register DSTR FFF3 FFFFF3 DMA Offset Register 0 DORO FFF2 FFFFF2 DMA Offset Register 1 DOR1 FFF1 FFFFF1 DMA Offset Register 2 DOR2 FFFO FFFFFO DMA Offset Register 3 DOR3 DMAO FFEF FFFFEF DMA Source Address Register DSRO FFEE FFFFEE DMA Destination Address Register DDRO FFED FFFFED DMA Counter DCO0 FFEC FFFFEC DMA Control Register DCRO DMA1 FFEB FFFFEB DMA Source Address Register DSR1 FFEA FFFFEA DMA Destination Address Register DDR1 FFE9 FFFFE9 DMA Counter DCO1 FFE8 FFFFE8 DMA Control Register DCR1 AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 3 Internal UO Memory Map Table B 2 Internal UO Memory Map X Data Memory Continued Peripheral 16 Bit Address 24 Bit Address Register Name DMA2 FFE7 FFFFE7 DMA Source Address Register DSR2 FFE6 FFFFE6 DMA Destination Address Register DDR2 FFE5 FFFFE5 DMA Counter DCO2 FFE4 FFFFE4 DMA Control Register DCR2 DMA3 FFE3 FFFF
448. ster Full RDRF bit 8 18 Receive Enable RE bit 7 20 Receive Exception Interrupt Enable REIE bit 7 19 Receive Frame Sync Flag RFS 7 29 Receive Interrupt Enable RIE bit 7 19 Receive Last Slot Interrupt Enable RLIE bit 7 19 Receive Request Enable RREQ bit 6 55 Receive Shift Register 7 29 Index 11 Receive Slot Mask Registers RSMA and RSMB 7 14 7 35 Receive with Exception Interrupt Enable REIE bit 8 12 Received Bit 8 R8 bit 8 17 Received Master Abort RMA bit 6 65 Received Target Abort RTA 6 65 Receiver Enable RE bit 8 14 Receiver Overrun Error Flag ROE 7 28 Receiver Wakeup Enable RWU bit 8 15 Related Documents and Web Sites 1 14 Remaining Data Count RDC 5 0 bits 6 38 Remaining Data Count Qualifier RDCQ bit 6 38 RESET 2 9 reset STOP 6 12 reset state 4 2 4 5 HI32 6 12 reverse carry adder 1 7 Revision ID RID 7 0 bits 6 67 ROM bootstrap 3 1 3 3 Rounding Mode RM bit 4 7 RX clock 7 11 S SC register 1 8 Scaling S bit 4 10 Scaling S Mode bits 4 10 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR 8 9 8 19 bit definitions 8 19 Clock Divider CD 8 20 Clock Out Divider COD 8 19 Clock Prescaler SCP 8 19 programming sheet B 36 Receive Clock Mode Source RCM 8 19 Transmit Clock Source TCM 8 19 SCI Clock Polarity SCKP bit 8 12 SCI Control Register SCR 8 9 8 12 bit definitions 8 12 Idle Line Interrupt Enable ILIE 8 13 programming sheet B 35 Receive with Exception Interrupt Enable REI
449. ster in the peripheral is accessed 10 D3D 0 Three Dimensional Mode Indicates whether a DMA channel is currently using three dimensional D3D 1 or non three dimensional D3D 0 addressing modes The addressing modes are specified by the DAM bits AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 33 Device Identification Register IDR Table 4 12 DMA Control Register DCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Reset Number EI Name Value Description 9 4 DAM 5 0 0 DMA Address Mode Defines the address generation mode for the DMA transfer These bits are encoded in two different ways according to the D3D bit 3 2 DDS 1 0 0 DMA Destination Space Specify the memory space referenced as a destination by the DMA Note In Cache mode a DMA to Program memory space has some limitations as described in Chapter 8 nstruction Cache and Chapter 11 Operating Modes and Memory Spaces in the DSP56300 Family Manual DDS1 DDSO DMA Destination Memory Space 0 0 X Memory Space 0 1 Y Memory Space 1 0 P Memory Space 1 1 Reserved 1 0 DSS 1 0 0 DNA Source Space Specify the memory space referenced as a source by the DMA Note In Cache mode a DMA to Program memory space has some limitations as described in Chapter 8 nstruction Cache and Chapter 11 Operating Modes and Memory Spaces in the DSP56300 Family Manual DSS1 DSSO DMA Source Memory Space 0 0 X
450. struction Cache is enabled SR CE bit is set 4 14 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Configuring Interrupts Table 4 4 Operating Mode Register OMR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 6 SD 0 Stop Delay Mode Determines the length of the delay invoked when the core exits the Stop state The STOP instruction suspends core processing indefinitely until a defined event occurs to restart it If SD is cleared a 128K clock cycle delay is invoked before a STOP instruction cycle continues However if SD is set the delay before the instruction cycle continues is 16 clock cycles The long delay allows a clock stabilization period for the internal clock to begin oscillating and to stabilize When a stable external clock is used the shorter delay allows faster start up of the DSP56300 core 5 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 4 EBD 0 External Bus Disable Disables the external bus controller to reduce power consumption when external memories are not used When EBD is set the external bus controller is disabled and external memory cannot be accessed When EBD is cleared the external bus controller is enabled and external access can be performed Hardware reset clears the EBD bit 3 0 MD MA See Note Chip Operating Mode Indicate the operating mode of the DSP56300 core On hardware reset these bits are loaded from the external mode select pins MODD MODC
451. sure proper operation these pins can be changed only when DSR HACT 0 The HM 2 0 bits must not be changed together with these bits that is in the same core write 18 HIRH 0 UB Host Interrupt Request Handshake Mode Controls the handshake mode of the HIRQ pin when the HI82 is ina Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 The HI32 asserts HIRQ when a host interrupt request receive and or transmit is generated in the HI32 When HIRH is cleared and a host interrupt request is generated HIRQ is asserted for the number of DSP56300 core clock cycles specified CLAT LT 7 0 and then deasserted The duration of the HIRQ pulse is expressed as follows HIRO PULSE WIDTH LT 7 0 _Value 1 DSP56300_Core_clock_cycle If HIRH is set HIRQ is deasserted when the interrupt request source is cleared by the corresponding host data access masked by TREQ 0 or RREQ 0 or disabled by the DMA enable bit HCTR DMAE The value of HIRH can be changed only when DSR HACT 0 HIRH is ignored when the HI32 is not in a Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 17 HRSP 0 UB Host Reset Polarity Controls the polarity of the HRST pin when the HI82 is in a Universal Bus or the GPIO mode DCTR HM 2 3 or 4 If HRSP is cleared the HRST pin is active high and the HI32 is reset if the HRST pin is high that is asserted If HRSP is set the HRST pin is active low and the HI32 is reset if the HRST pin is low that is asserted Th
452. synchronous mode this signal is used for the receive clock I O Schmitt trigger input For synchronous mode this signal is used either for transmitter 1 output or for serial I O flag 0 Port D 0 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PDO When configured as PDO signal direction is controlled through the port directions register PRR1 The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SC10 through the port control register PCR1 This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated SC11 PD1 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Control 1 For asynchronous mode this signal is the receiver frame sync I O For synchronous mode this signal is used either for Transmitter 2 output or for Serial I O Flag 1 Port D 1 The default configuration following reset is GPIO input PD1 When configured as PD1 signal direction is controlled through PRR1 The signal can be configured as an ESSI signal SC11 through PCR1 This signal has a weak keeper to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated SC12 PD2 Input Output Input or Output Input Serial Control Signal 2 For frame sync I O SC12 is the frame sync for both the transmitter and receiver in synchronous mode and for the transmitter only in asynchronous mode When configured as an output this signal is the internally generated frame sync signal When configured as an in
453. t 01 FF0000 Bootstrap from MC68302 host H 1000 008000 Expanded mode memor Tan Mode 100 FF0000 Bootstrap from byte wide memory alsable 1 enable 1010 FF0000 Bootstrap through SCI 10 FF0000 Bootstrap through SCI Core DMA Priority 1100 FF0000 Bootstrap from ISA host CDP 1 0 Core DMA Priority 110 FF0000 Bootstrap from HC11 host 1110 FF0000 Bootstrap from 8051 host 00 Core vs DMA Priority 11 FF0000 Bootstrap from MC68302 host 01 DMA accesses gt Core 10 DMA accesses Core 11 DMA accesses lt Core Burst Mode Enable 0 disable 1 enable MMVUNDSFOBDNOANAWN AO TA Synchronize Select 0 not selected 1 selected Bus Release Timing 0 fast 1 slow Asynchronous Bus Arbitration Enable 0 disable 1 enable Address Attribute Priority Disable 0 enable 1 disable Address Trace Enable 0 disable 1 enable Stack Extension XY Select 0 X memory 1 Y memory Extended Stack Underflow Flag 0 no 1 underflow Extended Stack Overflow Flag 0 no 1 overflow Extended Stack Wrap Flag 0 no wrap 1 wrap sticky bit Stack Extension Enable 0 disable 1 enable 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ees Seege e System Stack Control Extended Chip Operating Chip Operating Mode Status Register SCS Mode Register EOM Register COM Operating Mode Register OMR Read Write Reset 00030X X latched from
454. t Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 8 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 7 R8 0 Received Bit 8 In 11 bit Asynchronous Multidrop mode the R8 bit indicates whether the received byte is an address or data R8 is set for addresses and is cleared for data R8 is not affected by reads of the SRX or SCI status register A hardware RESET signal a software RESET instruction an SCI individual reset or a STOP instruction clears R8 FE Framing Error Flag In Asynchronous mode FE is set when no stop bit is detected in the data string received FE and RDRE are set simultaneously when the received word is transferred to the SRX However the FE flag inhibits further transfer of data into the SRX until it is cleared FE is cleared when the SCI status register is read followed by a read of the SRX A hardware RESET signal a software RESET instruction an SCI individual reset or a STOP instruction clears FE In 8 bit Synchronous mode FE is always cleared If the byte received causes both framing and overrun errors the SCI receiver recognizes only the overrun error PE Parity Error In 11 bit Asynchronous modes PE is set when an incorrect parity bit is detected in the received character PE and RDRF are set simultaneously when the received word is transferred to the SRX If PE is set further data transfer into the SRX is not inhibited PE is cleared when the SCI statu
455. t Interface HI32 6 27 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 11 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 19 MWSD 0 Master Wait State Disable Disables PCI wait states inserted by deasserting HIRDY during a data phase When MWSD is cleared the HI32 as the active PCI master DCTR HM 1 inserts wait states to extend the current data phase if it cannot guarantee the completion of the next data phase The HI32 asserts HIRDY and completes the current data phase when one of the following is true E it can complete the next data phase E it determines to terminate the transaction due to time out or completion If MWSD is set the HI32 as the active PCI master DCTR HM 1 does not insert wait states If it cannot guarantee the completion of the next data phase the HI32 completes the current data phase and terminates the transaction MWSD is ignored when the HI32 is not in the PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The value of MWSD can change only when DSR HACT 0 18 MACE 0 Master Access Counter Enable Enables disables the master access counter When the master access counter is enabled the HI32 as the active PCI master DCTR HM 1 terminates the current PCI transaction when the counter reaches the terminal count When MACE is cleared the counter is disabled and the burst length of HI32 initiated transactions is unlimited To terminate an HI32 initiat
456. t Name Reset Value Description 23 21 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 20 0 PC 20 0 0 Prescaler Counter Value Contain the current value of the prescaler counter 9 4 4 Timer Control Status Register TCSR The TCSR is a read write register controlling the timer and reflecting its status 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 TCF TOF PCE DO DI 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DIR TRM INV TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO TCIE TOIE TE Reserved Read as 0 Write to 0 for future compatibility Figure 9 23 Timer Control Status Register TCSR Table 9 3 Timer Control Status Register TCSR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 22 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 9 28 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module Programming Model Table 9 3 Timer Control Status Register TCSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 21 TCF 0 Timer Compare Flag Indicate that the event count is complete In timer PWM and watchdog modes the TCF bit is set after M N 1 events are counted M is the value in the compare register and N is the TLR value In measurement modes the TCF bit is set when the measurement completes Writing a one to the TCF bit clears it A zero written to the TCF bit has no effect The bit is also cleared when the timer compare interrupt is serviced The TCF bit is cleared by a hardware RESET signal a software RESET instru
457. t Name Value Description 23 DE 0 DMA Channel Enable Enables the channel operation Setting DE either triggers a single block DMA transfer in the DMA transfer mode that uses DE as a trigger or enables a single block single line or single word DMA transfer in the transfer modes that use a requesting device as a trigger DE is cleared by the end of DMA transfer in some of the transfer modes defined by the DTM bits If software explicitly clears DE during a DMA operation the channel operation stops only after the current DMA transfer completes that is the current word is stored into the destination AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 29 DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 Table 4 12 DMA Control Register DCR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Reset g Number Bit Name Value Description 22 DIE 0 DMA Interrupt Enable Generates a DMA interrupt at the end of a DMA block transfer after the counter is loaded with its preloaded value A DMA interrupt is also generated when software explicitly clears DE during a DMA operation Once asserted a DMA interrupt request can be cleared only by the service of a DMA interrupt routine To ensure that a new interrupt request is not generated clear DIE while the DMA interrupt is serviced and before a new DMA request is generated at the end of a DMA block transfer that is at the beginning of the DMA channel interrupt ser
458. t significant bits of the 32 bit PCI data word reside in the DPMC AR bits 16 least significant bits of DPMC The 16 least significant bits of the 32 bit PCI data word reside in the DPAR AR bits 16 least significant bits of DPAR The HI32 hardware transfers the data to the configuration register The registers must be written sequentially beginning with the CSTR CCMR register location 04 After each write to the DPAR a 32 bit data word Dword is transferred to the accessed register and an internal pointer advances to point to the next Dword location in the configuration space Note At least one DSP instruction must appear between writing the Self Configuration mode HM 2 0 5 and the first write to the DPAR if the first write requires one DSP clock cycle for example move immediate and move from external memory require more than one clock cycle If the SIDR SVID register is to be written in Self Configuration mode and the host has already written the CBMA address this address is over written by this prodcedure You must be careful to ensure that this does not happen In the example code that follows the DPMC AR bits are loaded with the Base Address upper 16 bits of the 32 bit PCI word Dword and 6 16 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DSP Side Operating Modes never changed Therefore the upper 16 bits of the base address are written to every register location in this example Example 6 3 Self Configuration Procedure for PCI
459. the address from the DPMC and the DPAR is driven to the HAD 31 0 pins and the bus command is driven to the HC 3 0 HBE 3 0 pins during the PCI address phase The DPAR can be written only if MARQ is set Table 6 13 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 20 BE 3 0 0 PCI Byte Enables Determine which byte lanes carry meaningful data in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 when the HI32 is a PCI master BE3 applies to byte 3 and BEO to byte 0 Byte enables are driven to HC 3 0 HBE 3 0 pins during the PCI data phases As master the HI32 drives all the HRXM data to the HAD 31 0 pins during write transactions and writes the HAD 31 0 pins to the HTXR in accordance with the FC 1 0 bits in read transactions regardless of the BE 3 0 value Note The PCI host must not change the values of the BE 3 0 bits during PCI read transactions from the HI32 as a PCI target 1 DPSR MARQ is the PCI Master Address Request bit in the DSP PCI Status Register This bit indicates that the HI32 is currently not the initiator of a PCI transaction and the DPAR can be written with the address of the next transaction 2 That is in a write transaction the DSP to host data path is not empty in a read transaction the host to DSP data path is not full AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 33 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 13 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR
460. the next two cycles the bit does not reflect its current status For details see the DSP56300 Family Manual 8 7 GPIO Signals and Registers Three registers control the GPIO functionality of the SCI pins Port E control register PCRE Port E direction register PRRE and Port E data register PDRE 8 7 1 Port E Control Register PCRE The read write PCRE controls the functionality of SCI GPIO signals Each of the PCRE 2 0 bits controls the functionality of the corresponding port signal When a PCRE i bit is set the corresponding port signal is configured as an SCI signal When a PC i bit is cleared the corresponding port signal is configured as a GPIO signal A hardware RESET signal or a software RESET instruction clears all PCRE bits 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE2 PE1 PEO SCLK TXD RXD Note For bits 2 0 a 0 selects PEn as the signal and a 1 selects the specified SCI signal Reserved Read as zero Write to zero for future compatibility Figure 8 8 Port E Control Register PCRE X FFFF9F 8 24 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA GPIO Signals and Registers 8 7 2 Port E Direction Register PRRE The read write PRRE controls the direction of SCI GPIO signals When port signal i is configured as GPIO PRRE i controls the port signal direction When PRRE i is set the GPIO port signal i is configured as output When
461. the programming sheets to see the exact location of bits within a register When a bit is described as set its value is 1 When a bit is described as cleared its value is 0 The word assert means that a high true active high signal is pulled high to Vcc or that a low true active low signal is pulled low to ground The word deassert means that a high true signal is pulled low to ground or that a low true signal is pulled high to Vcc See Table 1 1 Table 1 1 High True Low True Signal Conventions Signal Symbol Logic State Signal State Voltage PIN True Asserted Ground PIN False Deasserted 3 Voc 1 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Manual Conventions Table 1 1 High True Low True Signal Conventions Signal Symbol Logic State Signal State Voltage PIN True Asserted Vec PIN False Deasserted Ground 1 PIN is a generic term for any pin on the chip 2 Ground is an acceptable low voltage level See the appropriate data sheet for the range of acceptable low voltage levels typically a TTL logic low 3 Vec is an acceptable high voltage level See the appropriate data sheet for the range of acceptable high voltage levels typically a TTL logic high Pins or signals that are asserted low made active when pulled to ground are indicated like this In text they have an overbar for example RESET is asserted low Inc
462. the status of the receive line The transition of IDLE from 0 to 1 can cause an IDLE interrupt ILIE RDRF Receive Data Register Full Set when a valid character is transferred to the SCI receive data register from the SCI receive shift register regardless of the error bits condition RDRF is cleared when the SCI receive data register is read TDRE Transmit Data Register Empty Set when the SCI transmit data register is empty When TDRE is set new data can be written to one of the SCI transmit data registers STX or the transmit data address register STXA TDRE is cleared when the SCI transmit data register is written Either a hardware RESET signal a software RESET instruction an SCI individual reset or a STOP instruction sets TDRE In Synchronous mode when the internal SCI clock is in use there is a delay of up to 5 5 serial clock cycles between the time that STX is written until TDRE is set indicating the data has been transferred from the STX to the transmit shift register There is a delay of 2 to 4 serial clock cycles between writing STX and loading the transmit shift register in addition TDRE is set in the middle of transmitting the second bit When using an external serial transmit clock if the clock stops the SCI transmitter stops TDRE is not set until the middle of the second bit transmitted after the external clock starts Gating the external clock off after the first bit has been transmitted delays TDRE in
463. thods esinsin a i e a E 5 2 S CH WR Ge EE 5 2 s E ee e EE 5 3 0 WEE E EE 5 4 534 Advantages ald Disa EE 5 4 5 4 General Purpose Input Output GPIO eemesstgeggreegitnegeh deEegeu deed age 5 4 5 4 1 Port B Signals and Registers s 22 ccccccietecceedtitcectieeetdaiaseeelecutadieeeeie ede 5 5 54 2 Port Si nal s and R gisterS esinin ia Si a 5 6 54 3 Port D Signals and Registers geregeeegegegteege geet a aaa eei Ra iE 5 6 SAA Port E Signals and Registers aere is e E A ER aE 5 6 5 4 5 Triple Timer Signals RE 5 7 Chapter 6 Host Interface HI32 6 1 SP ANE acter son cece eee Eege 6 1 6 2 aere ee 6 4 6 3 Data tere eet 6 6 6 3 1 Host to DSP Data Eatb eskseregetz usie ess ts Mees Eed rs aieia E enee 6 6 6 3 2 DSP T o Host D t Etage cczates dasedenseudadesnesdconees betanceeemaatenyeedsanestanees degen 6 7 6 4 LU 6 12 6 5 Boe cae Seg ae a2 IVs 1 ala Ee Eege 6 12 6 5 1 Terminate and Reset DCTR HM 0 ccc cscccccccosscssssssscesssecssssescesesterseecesscesseeasees 6 13 6 5 2 PCI Mode DCTR HM EE 6 13 6 5 3 Universal DCTR HM 2 and Enhanced Universal DCTR HM 3 Bus Modes 6 15 6 5 4 GPIO Mode DCTR HM 4 icsactsvieiastesactiseasersachosncvalnnsectihavsttassasastantanasiountaseanaens 6 16 6 5 5 Self Configuration Mode DCTR HM S i 6 16 GM H st Port PINS eidele 6 18 6 7 HIb2 DSP Side Programming Model os ceisccissccccicescencstesscestinciacdasceeneucidencaes ddeesivecsrendcutrses 6 22 6 7 1 DSP Cont
464. through UB _LBLI _LBLF _LBLG _LBLH _LBLI _LBLJ _LOOP4 DH DH DH lsra S do al _LOOP4 jset 2 X M_DSR _LBLF jclr 3 X M_DSR bra lt TERMINATE movep X M_DRXR a0 jset 2 X M_DSR _LBLH jclr 3 X M_DSR _LBLG bra lt TERMINATE movep X M_DRXR x0 jset 2 X M_DSR _LBLJ jclr 3 X M_DSR _LBLI bra lt TERMINATE movep X M_DRXR y0 insert x1 x0 a insert yl y0 a movem a0 p r0 movem al p r0 nop bra lt FINISH Wait for SRRQ to go high Wait for SRRQ to go high Wait for SRRQ to go high Store starting address concatenate next 16 bit word concatenate next 16 bit word start to p mem number of words to transfer divide loop count by 2 and save r0 Load instruction words i e data ready stop loading new data enddo and finish If HFO 1 Terminate loop Store 16 bit data in accumulator i e data ready stop loading new data enddo and finish If HFO 1 Terminate loop Store 16 bit data in register i e data ready stop loading new data enddo and finish If HFO 1 Terminate loop Store 16 bit data in register concatenate next 16 bit word concatenate next 16 bit word Store 24 bit data in P mem Store 24 bit data in P mem movem cannot be at LA and go get another 24 bit word finish bootstrap This is the routine that loads from the Host Interface in PCI mo
465. tion Buyer shall indemnify and hold Motorola and its officers employees subsidiaries affiliates and distributors harmless against all claims costs damages and expenses and reasonable attorney fees arising out of directly or indirectly any claim of personal injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use even if such claim alleges that Motorola was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part Motorola and are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc Motorola Inc is an Equal Opportunity Affirmative Action Employer SC How to reach us USA EUROPE JAPAN Home Page Motorola Literature Distribution Motorola Japan Ltd http www mot com SPS DSP P O Box 5405 SPS Technical Information Center Denver Colorado 80217 3 20 1 Minami Azabu Minato ku DSP Helpline 1 303 675 2140 Tokyo 106 8573 Japan http www motorola dsp com contact 1 800 441 2447 81 3 3440 3569 email dsphelp dsp sps mot com Technical Information Center ASIA PACIFIC 1 800 521 6274 Motorola Semiconductors H K Ltd Silicon Harbour Centre 2 Dai King Street Tai Po Industrial Estate Tai Po N T Hong Kong 852 26668334 MOTOROLA INC 1996 2001 Overview Signals Connections Memory Configuration Core Configuration Programming the Peripherals Host Interface HI32 Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI Serial Communications Interface SCI Triple Timer Module Bootstrap Program Programming Ref
466. tion if HAD 1 0 0 during the address phase of a configuration transaction In HCTR HSTR HCVR and configuration space register accesses if all four byte lanes are disabled the HI32 completes the data phase without affecting any flags or data PCI host to DSP data transfers In transfers to the HI32 registers HCTR HSTR HCVR and all configuration space registers disabled byte lanes that is the corresponding byte enable line is deasserted are not written and the corresponding bytes do not contain significant data Data is written to the HTXR FIFO in accordance with FC 1 0 or HTF 1 0 bits regardless of the value of the byte enable pins HC3 HBE3 HC0 HBEO In PCI DSP to host data transfers via the HRXS or HRXM all four byte lanes are driven with data in accordance with FC 1 0 or HRF 1 0 bits regardless of the value of the byte enable pins HC3 HBE3 HCO HBEO In HI32 to PCI agent data transfers all four byte lanes are driven with data regardless of the value of the byte enables As a PCI target the HI32 executes the PCI bus command as shown in Table 6 18 AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 45 Host Side Programming Model Table 6 18 PCI Bus Commands HC3 HBE3 HC0 HBEO Executed as Command Type 0000 ignored 0001 ignored 0010 ignored 0011 ignored 0100 ignored 0101 ignored 0110 Memory Read 0111 Memory Write 1000 ignored 100
467. tion termination interrupt request is generated TO is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to it 10 TRTY PCI Target Retry Indicates that an HI32 initiated PCI transaction has terminated with a target initiated retry When TRTY is set and DPCR TTIE is set a transaction termination interrupt request is generated TRTY is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to it AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 39 HI32 DSP Side Programming Model Table 6 15 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 9 TDIS 0 PCI Target Disconnect Indicates that an HI32 initiated PCI transaction has terminated with a target initiated disconnect When TDIS is set and if DPCRI TTIE is set a transaction termination interrupt request is generated TDIS is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to it TAB PCI Target Abort Indicates that an HI32 initiated PCI transaction has terminated with target abort When TAB is set and DPCR TAIE is set a transaction abort interrupt request is generated TAB is cleared when the DSP56300 core writes a value of one to it If an HI32 initiated PCI transaction terminates with target abort the received target abort bit RTA in the CSTR is also set MAB PCI Master Abort Indicates that an HI32 initiated PCI transaction has terminated with master abort MAB i
468. tively Reserved bit Read as zero write to zero for future compatibility Figure 4 2 Operating Mode Register OMR The Enhanced Operating Mode EOM and Chip Operating Mode COM bytes are affected only by processor reset and by instructions directly referencing the OMR that is ANDI ORI and other instructions such as MOVEC that specify OMR as a destination The Stack Control Status SCS byte is referenced implicitly by some instructions such as DO JSR and RTI or directly by the MOVEC instruction During processor reset the chip operating mode bits MD MC MB and MA are loaded from the external mode select pins MODD MODA respectively Table 4 4 defines the DSP56301 OMR bits Table 4 4 Operating Mode Register OMR Bit Definitions Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 21 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 20 SEN 0 Stack Extension Enable Enables disables the stack extension in data memory If the SEN bit is set the extension is enabled Hardware reset clears this bit so the default out of reset is a disabled stack extension 19 WRP 0 Stack Extension Wrap Flag Set when copying from the on chip hardware stack System Stack Register file to the stack extension memory begins You can use this flag during the debugging phase of the software development to evaluate and increase the speed of software implemented algorithms The WRP flag is a sticky bit that is
469. to eight wait states can be inserted before a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C Retry is generated If TWSD is set and the HI32 is in the PCI mode DCTR HM 1 BR as the selected target in a read transaction from the HRXS the HI32 generates a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C if the HRXS is empty HRRQ 0 BR as the selected target in a write transaction to the HTXR the HI32 generates a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C if the HTXR is full HTXR 0 BR as the selected target in a write transaction to the HCVR the HI32 generates a target initiated transaction termination disconnect C if a host command is pending HC 1 TWSD is ignored when the HI32 is not in PCI mode DCTR HM 1 The personal hardware reset clears TWSD 18 17 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 16 14 HS 2 0 UBM PCI Host Semaphores Used by the host processors for software arbitration of mastership over the HI32 These bits do not affect the HI32 operation and serve only as a read write semaphore repository These bits can be used as a mailbox between the external hosts For example the semaphores can assist HI32 bus arbitration among several external hosts All external host processors that compete for mastership over the HI32 should work according to the same software protocol for handling over the HI32 from one host processor to another
470. toggle M N clock periods Second and later toggles 2 27 clock periods TIO pin INV 1 TOF Overflow Interrupt if TCIE 1 KR gt Figure 9 8 Toggle Mode TRM 0 Y MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 11 Operating Modes 9 3 1 4 Timer Event Counter Mode 3 Bit Settings Mode Characteristics TC3 TC2 TC1 TCO Mode Name Function TIO Clock 0 0 1 1 3 Event Counter Timer Input External In Mode 3 the timer counts external events and issues an interrupt if interrupt enable bits are set when the timer counts a preset number of events The timer clock signal can be taken from either the TIO input signal or the prescaler clock output If an external clock is used it must be internally synchronized to the internal clock and its frequency must be less than the DSP56301 internal operating frequency divided by 4 The value of the TCSR INV bit determines whether low to high 0 to 1 transitions or high to low 1 to 0 transitions increment the counter If the INV bit is set high to low transitions increment the counter If the INV bit is cleared low to high transitions increment the counter When the counter matches the value contained in the TCPR TCSR TCF is set and a compare interrupt is generated if the TCSR TCIE bit is set If the TCSR TRM bit is set the counter is loaded with the value of the TLR when the next timer clock is received and the count is resumed If the TCSR TRM bit is clear
471. ts 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PRx5 PRx4 PRx3 PRx2 PRx1 PRx0 Note For bits 5 0 a 0 configures PRxn as a GPI and a 1 configures PRxn as a GPO For ESSIO the GPIO signals are PC 5 0 For ESSI1 the GPIO signals are PD 5 0 The corresponding direction bits for Port C GPIOs are PRC 5 0 The corresponding direction bits for Port D GPIOs are PRD 5 0 Reserved Read as zero Write with zero for future compatibility Figure 7 19 Port Direction Registers PRRC X FFFFBE PRRD X FFFFAE The following table summarizes the ESSI port signal configurations Table 7 6 ESSI Port Signal Configurations PCRC PCRD I PRRC PRRD i Port Signal i Function 1 X ESSIO ESSI1 0 0 Port C Port D GPI 0 1 Port C Port D GPO X The signal setting is irrelevant to the Port Signall i function AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 37 GPIO Signals and Registers 7 6 3 Port Data Registers PDRC and PDRD Bits 5 0 of the read write PDRs write data to or read data from the associated ESSI GPIO signal lines if they are configured as GPIO signals If a port signal PC i or PD i is configured as an input GPI the corresponding PDRC i pr PDRD i bit reflects the value present on the input signal line If a port signal PC i or PD i is configured as an output GPO a value written to the corresponding
472. ttention when executing a memory switch routine using the OnCE port Running the switch routine in trace mode for example can cause the switch to complete after the MS bit changes while the DSP is in Debug mode As a result subsequent instructions may be fetched according to the new memory configuration after the switch and thus may not execute properly AA MOTOROLA Memory Configuration 3 5 Sixteen Bit Compatibility Mode Configuration 3 5 Sixteen Bit Compatibility Mode Configuration The sixteen bit compatibility SC mode allows the DSP56301 to use DSP56000 object code without change The SC bit Bit 13 in the SR is used to switch from the default 24 bit mode to this special 16 bit mode SC is cleared by reset You must set this bit to select the SC mode The address ranges described in the previous sections apply in the SC mode with regard to the reallocation of X and Y data memory to program memory in MS mode but the maximum addressing ranges are limited to FFFF and all data and program code are 16 bits wide 3 6 Internal Memory Configuration Summary The RAM configurations for the DSP56301 are listed in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 DSP56301 RAM Configurations Bit Settings Memory Sizes in K MS CE Program RAM X data RAM Y data RAM Cache 0 0 4 2 2 0 0 1 3 2 2 1 1 0 2 3 3 0 1 1 1 3 3 1 The actual memory locations for Program RAM and the Instruction Cache in the Program memory spac
473. ttings Memory Configuration Program Addressable CE MS SC RAM X Data RAM Y Data RAM Cache Memory Size 0 0 0 4K 2K 2K None 16 M 000 FFF 000 7FF 000 7FF Note 1 Address range is for 3 K bootstrap space MOTOROLA Figure 3 1 Default Settings 0 0 0 Memory Configuration 3 7 Memory Maps Program X Data Y Data FFFF FFFF Internal UO FFFF External I O External External External 1000 0800 0800 Internal Do Internal X Data Internal Y Data RAM 2K RAM 2K 0000 0000 0000 Bit Settings Memory Configuration Program Addressable CE MS SC RAM X Data RAM Y Data RAM Cache Memory Size 0 0 1 4K 2K 2K None 64K 000 FFF 000 7FF 000 7FF 3 8 Figure 3 2 16 Bit Space With Default RAM 0 0 1 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Memory Maps Program X Data Y Data FFFFFF FFFFFF Internal O SFFFFFF External VO nema FFFFa9 __ 28 words gFFFFgo I words Reserved External External FFFOOO FFF000 FFOOCO Internal Internal 1 FF0000 Bootstrap ROM FF0000 Reserved FF0000 Reserved External External External 000C00 000C00 000800 p Een Internal X Data Internal Y Data CH RAM 3K RAM 3K 000000 000000 000000 Bit Settings Memory Configuration Program Addressable CE MS sc RAM X Data RAM
474. ttsseesseessstessseessresseneseressessseesseesseesseeeetts 4 15 44 1 Interrupt Priority Registers IPRC and IPRP ssssseesseeeeeseeessessesesesssersseerssressresseessseesseee 4 16 AA Interrupt Table Memory Ka 2gemgeeetag eege eege egeEee 4 17 4 4 3 Processing Interrupt Source Priorities Within an ID 4 19 4 5 PEE Control Register POM EE 4 21 4 6 Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers jsiissicisssceiasscvctsassseaesasnacansandvoendaceesassannaseavasvavandeasedevosues 4 22 46 1 Bus Control Registers E 4 22 4 6 2 DRAM Control Register DCR 5 cesicvsseosnsesanvsasvaascarsninnie tanieadareeteataetaseneteareranncnaete 4 24 4 6 3 Address Attribute Registers EE 4 27 4 7 DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 acssssiteadsncatuadstsusesesasvcvdancevendssssansissavuyasatedvunaatevanes 4 29 4 8 Device Identification Register IDR eesessseessessresrsesesressrssrssresstsreesresstestestessesseerresseeereeees 4 34 vi DSP56303 DSP56301 User s Manual LA MororoLa 4 9 JTAG Identification ID Register iiciscsccedssassdas sasnanes saavavaatecuadadsanoven duncseadesauavsceannbgedeacapaaies 4 35 4 10 JTAG Boundary Scan Register BSR E 4 35 Chapter 5 Programming the Peripherals 5 1 Peripheral Initialization Steps eeeseeeeeeeesseesesrrsserssesressrsetssrtsstrstesresstestestenstestenreesreseeeresrenee 5 1 5 2 Mapping the Control Registers seeeeeeseseeseeseesresreestrsesressttsteseresttsesriestestsetestenseseessressesst 5 2 5 3 D ta Tfanster Me
475. u are responsible for deasserting the TA pin in synchrony with the chip clock regardless of the value of TAS 10 BE Cache Burst Mode Enable Enables disables Burst mode in the memory expansion port during an instruction cache miss If the bit is cleared Burst mode is disabled and only one program word is fetched from the external memory when an instruction cache miss condition is detected If the bit is set Burst mode is enabled and up to four program words are fetched from the external memory when an instruction cache miss is detected CDP 1 0 11 Core DMA Priority Specify the priority of core and DMA accesses to the external bus E 00 Determined by comparing status register CP 1 0 to the active DMA channel priority E 01 DMA accesses have higher priority than core accesses E 10 DMA accesses have the same priority as the core accesses E 11 DMA accesses have lower priority than the core accesses MS Memory Switch Mode Allows some internal data memory X Y or both to become part of the chip internal Program RAM Notes 1 Program data placed in the Program RAM Instruction Cache area changes its placement after the OMR MS bit is set that is the Instruction Cache always uses the lowest internal Program RAM addresses 2 To ensure proper operation place six NOP instructions after the instruction that changes the MS bit 3 To ensure proper operation do not set the MS bit while the In
476. uency of 66 MHz DSP clock CLKOUT when operating or more synchronously with an DSP56300 E True 32 bit input and output data transfers core based DSP host two wait states per 32 bit PCI bus data to two DSP56300 core access 16 bit words and vice versa BR High speed fast peripheral DSP56300 E Bursts of up to 16384 32 bit words when core DMA transfers two core clock cycles accessed as a memory mapped target per DMA transfer BR Bursts of up to sixty four 32 bit words or unlimited length as master BR High speed fast peripheral DSP56300 core DMA transfers two core clock cycles per DMA transfer Interrupts E Software driven PCI Interrupt Requests E Interrupt requests hardware driven HIRQ Interrupt A and software driven HINTA BR Vectored DSP56300 core interrupts BR Vectored DSP56300 core interrupts separately for receive transmit transaction separately for receive and transmit events termination error events and host and host commands commands Voltage Both 3 3 V and 5 V PCI signalling environments An external data buffer may be needed for drive and voltage level compatibility with the external bus for example the ISA bus requires buffering System BR Memory space and configuration BR Self Configuration mode for initializing the transactions as a target memory space I O space and configuration transactions as an initiator E Exclusive locked accesses E Self Configuration mode for initializing the config
477. uennenresteanetens 6 35 DSP PCI Status Register DPSR Bit Definitions ee eeeceeeescetteeceneeeeeneeees 6 38 DATH and DIRH Functionality E 6 43 HI32 Programming Model Host Side Register 6 44 PCI B s RE 6 46 Host Side Registers PCI Memory Address Space E ten aaa tredeaeeanneets 6 47 Host Side Registers PCI Configuration Address Space EE 6 47 Host Side Registers Universal Bus Mode Address Space ee 6 47 Host Interface Control Register HCTR Bit Definitions 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeteeeeeees 6 49 Host Interface Status Register HSTR Bit Definitions 6 57 Host Command Vector Register HCVR Bit Definitions 0 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeees 6 60 Device ID Vendor ID Configuration Register CDID CVID Bit Definitions 6 64 Status Command Configuration Register CSTR CCMR Bit Definitions 6 65 Class Code Revision ID Configuration Register CCCR CRID Bit Definitions 6 67 Header Type Latency Timer Configuration Register CHT Y CLAT CCLS ua eher 6 68 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA Bit Definitions 6 70 Interrupt Line Interrupt Pin Configuration Register CILP Bit Definitions 6 73 ESSI Clock e 7 3 Mode and Signal Definitions esseeeeeseseeeeesereseeeeeseesrrsrrestrsereresressrseresressessresressesee 7 5 ESSI Control Register A CRA Bit Definitions s sesssssessssessesssesessressserssressses 7 15 ESSI Control Register B CRB Bit Definitions ssseseseseseeeeesrrs
478. uest MRRQ 6 41 PCI Master Transmit Data Request MTRQ 6 41 PCI Master Wait States MWS 6 41 PCI Target Abort TAB 6 40 PCI Target Disconnect TDIS 6 40 PCI Target Retry TRTY 6 39 PCI Time Out Termination TO 6 39 Remaining Data Count RDC 5 0 6 38 Remaining Data Count Qualifier RDCQ 6 38 DSP PCI Transaction Address High AR 31 16 bits 6 32 DSP PCI Transaction Address Low AR 15 0 bits 6 34 DSP Receive Data FIFO DRXR 6 41 DSP Slave Transmit Data Register DTXS 6 7 6 42 DSP Status Register DSR HI32 Active HACT 6 35 Host Command Pending HCP 6 37 Host Flags 2 0 HF 2 0 6 36 Slave Receive Data Request SRRQ 6 36 Slave Transmit Data Request STRQ 6 37 DSP56000 code compatibility 1 4 DSP56300 code compatibility 1 4 core 1 1 Family Manual 1 1 1 4 DSP56301 Technical Data 1 1 DSP56301 Operating Modes 4 2 dynamic memory configuration switching 3 5 E Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 1 5 2 2 2 23 2 25 7 1 24 bit fractional data 7 16 after reset 7 6 Asynchronous mode 7 4 7 11 7 20 audio enhancements 7 2 byte format 7 13 clock generator 7 11 7 17 Clock Sources 7 3 codec 7 13 control and time slot registers 7 6 control direction of SC2 I O signal 7 23 Control Register A CRA Alignment Control ALC 7 16 Frame Rate Divider Control DC 7 16 Prescale Modulus Select PM 7 16 Prescaler Range PSR 7 16 Index 4 DSP56301 User s Manual programming sheet B 32 Se
479. umber Bit Name Reset Value Description 23 22 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 21 16 RDC 5 0 Remaining Data Count Read only bits that indicate the PCI data phases remaining to complete a PCI burst after the HI32 completes a transaction as a PCI master RDC 5 0 are updated each time a transaction terminates and the HI32 is a PCI master MARQ 1 If the transaction terminates normally the value of RDC 5 0 is 00 and TO 0 TRTY 0 TDIS 0 TAB 0 MAB 0 If the master access counter is enabled and the burst does not complete for any reason the value of RDC 5 0 is the remaining number of data phases remaining to complete the burst minus one that is RDC 2 signifies that three more words must be transferred to complete the burst The length of the burst is limited by BL 5 0 in the DPMC If the master counter is disabled DPCR MACE is cleared the RDC 5 0 and RDCQ bits are not valid Note Typical reasons why a burst does not complete are a target initiated transaction termination or a requirement that the HI32 generate a master initiated time out transaction termination 15 RDCQ Remaining Data Count Qualifier Qualifies the value of the DPSR RDC bits If the MDT bit is cleared MARQ 1 at the end of a transaction initiated by the HI32 that is not all the master data transferred the burst length for the next transaction to the same target to complete
480. umping to the bootstrap program entry point FF0000 Software can set the mode selection bits directly in the OMR Bootstrap modes 1 7 and 9 F select different specific bootstrap loading source devices For the bootstrap program to execute correctly in these modes you must use the following data sequence when downloading the user program through an external port 1 Three bytes that specify the number of 24 bit program words to be loaded 2 Three bytes that specify the 24 bit start address where the user program loads in the DSP56301 program memory 3 The user program three bytes for each 24 bit program word Note The three bytes for each data sequence are loaded least significant byte first When the bootstrap program finishes loading the specified number of words it jumps to the specified starting address and executes the loaded program 4 3 Central Processor Unit CPU Registers There are two CPU registers that must be configured to initialize operation The Status Register SR selects various arithmetic processing protocols and contains several status reporting flag bits The Operating Mode Register OMR configures several system operating modes and characteristics 4 3 1 Status Register SR The Status Register SR Figure 4 1 is a 24 bit register that indicates the current system state of the processor and the results of previous arithmetic computations The SR is pushed onto the system stack when program looping is initi
481. until the timer is disabled If the TCSR TRM bit is cleared the counter continues to increment until it overflows Mode 5 internal clock TRM 1 first event N write preload M write compare TE geg CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR Ka N Counter 0 N N 1 M N Counter continues counting does TCR M not stop period being measured TIO pin Interrupt Service reads TCR period M N clock periods TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 NOTE If INV 1 a 1 to 0 edge on TIO loads the counter and a 0 to 1 edge on TIO loads TCR with count and the counter with N Figure 9 13 Period Measurement Mode TRM 1 9 16 DSP56301 User s Manual MOTOROLA Operating Modes Mode 5 internal clock TRM 0 first event N write preload M write compare TE Clock ae CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR y 4 N Counter 0 N N 1 M MA a Counter continues counting does TCR M not stop Overflow may occur TOF 1 period being measured TIO pin Interrupt Service reads TCR period M N clock periods TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 NOTE If INV 1 a 1 to 0 edge on TIO loads the counter and a 0 to 1 edge on TIO loads TCR with count and the counter with N Figure 9 14 Period Measurement Mode TRM 0 Y MOTOROLA Triple Timer Module 9 17 Oper
482. upt disabled 0 Interrupt Enable 1 MTRQ interrupt enabled S MRIE Master Receive 0 MRRQ interrupt disabled 0 Interrupt Enable 1 MRRQ interrupt enabled 4 MAIE Master Address 0 A DPER interrupt disabled 0 Interrupt Enable 1 A DPER interrupt enabled 5 PEIE Parity Error Interrupt 0 MARQ interrupt disabled o i Enable 1 MARQ interrupt enabled 7 TAIE Transaction Abort 0 M TAB interrupt disabled 0 Interrupt Enable 1 M TAB interrupt enabled TTIE Transaction 0 TO DIS RTY interrupt 9 Termination Interrupt disabled 0 Enable 1 TO DIS RTY interrupt enabled 40 TCIE Transfer Complete 0 HDTC interrupt disabled 0 k Interrupt Enable 1 HDTC interrupt enabled CLRT Clear Transmitter 0 jinactive set only if 14 1 empty master transmitter path hardware clears 0 MARQ 1 MTT Master Transfer 0 jinactive set only if 15 Terminate 1 terminate current PCI hardware clears 0 transaction MWS 1 SERF HSERR Force 0 jinactive cleared by 16 0 R 1 generate a PCI system error hardware MACE Master Access 0 unlimited burst length 18 Counter Enable 1 burst length is limited by the 0 BL value MWSD Master Wait State 0 HI32 master inserts wait set only if MARQ 19 Disable states 1 0 1 HI32 master releases bus HL E Receive Buffer Lock 0 HI32 responds to new changed only in 20 Enable accesses PS reset 0 S 1 HI32 retries accesses after write accesses IAE Insert Address Enable 0 HI32 does not insert address changed only in 21 1 HI32 in
483. upt is generated if the TCSR TCIE bit is set If the TCSR TRM bit is set the counter is loaded with the value of the TLR when the next timer clock is received and the count resumes If the TRM bit is cleared the counter continues to increment on each timer clock This process repeats until the timer is cleared disabling the timer The TCPR TLR value sets the delay between starting the timer and toggling the TIO signal To generate output signals with a delay of X clock cycles between toggles set the TLR value to X 2 and set the TCSR TRM bit This process repeats until the timer is disabled that is TCSR TE is cleared Mode 2 internal clock TRM 1 first event N write preload M write compare TE Clock N CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR XN 7 Counter TCR X 0 X N X N 1 X M XN X TCPR OM Z TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 TIO pin INV 0 pulse width M N clock TIO pin INV 1 periods Figure 9 7 Toggle Mode TRM 1 9 10 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operating Modes Mode 2 internal clock TRM 0 gei event N write preload M write compare ZS TE N Clock J CLK 2 or prescale CLK TLR d 3 7 C TCR SN OS NET Mai 0 ounter TCR AN ZS N S M Ee t N gt N 1 TCPR lt M A va TCF Compare Interrupt if TCIE 1 D TIO pin UNV 0 First
484. upt starting addresses and sources Table BA Interrupt Source Priorities Within an IPL on page B 11 lists the priorities of specific interrupts within interrupt priority levels The programming sheets appear in this manual as figures listed in Table B 1 they show the major programmable registers on the DSP56301 AA MOTOROLA Programming Reference B 1 Table B 1 Guide to Programming Sheets Module Programming Sheet Page Central Figure B 1 Status Register SR page B 13 Processor Figure B 2 Operating Mode Register OMR page B 14 IPR Figure B 3 nterrupt Priority Register Core IPRC page B 15 Figure B 4 Interrupt Priority Register Peripherals IPRP page B 16 PLL Figure B 5 Phase Locked Loop Control Register PCTL page B 17 BIU Figure B 6 Bus Control Register BCR page B 18 Figure B 7 DRAM Control Register DCR page B 19 Figure B 8 Address Attribute Registers AAR 3 0 page B 20 DMA Figure B 9 DMA Control Registers 5 0 DCR 5 0 page B 21 HI32 Figure B 10 DSP Control Register DCTR page B 22 Figure B 11 DSP PCI Control Register DPCR page B 23 Figure B 12 DSP PCI Master Control Register DPMC page B 24 Figure B 13 DSP PCI Address Register DPAR page B 25 Figure B 14 H 32 Control Register HCTR page B 26 Figure B 15 Host Command Vector Register HCVR page B 27 Figure B 16 Status Command Configuratio
485. upts must be enabled and unmasked before the SCI can operate The order does not matter any one of these three requirements for interrupts can enable the SCI but the interrupts should be unmasked last that is I 1 O bits in the Status Register SR should be changed last Synchronous applications usually require exact frequencies so the crystal frequency must be chosen carefully An alternative to selecting the system clock to accommodate the SCI requirements is to provide an external clock to the SCI When the SCI is configured in Synchronous mode internal clock and all the SCI pins are simultaneously enabled an extra pulse of one DSP clock length is provided on the SCLK pin 8 6 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI Initialization There are two workarounds for this issue Enable an SCI pin other than SCLK m In the next instruction enable the remaining SCI pins including the SCLK pin Following is an example of one way to initialize the SCI 1 Ensure that the SCI is in its individual reset state PCRE 0 2 Configure the control registers SCR SCCR according to the operating mode but do not enable transmitter TE 0 or receiver RE 0 Note It is now possible to set the interrupts enable bits that are used during the operation No interrupt occurs yet 3 Enable the SCI by setting the PCRE bits according to which signals are used during operation 4 If transmit interrupt is not used write data to the tr
486. uration registers in a system without an external system configurator E Address insertion in the data written to the HI32 BR Parity generation detection and reporting E System error generation and reporting configuration registers in a system without an external system configurator 6 2 Overview Figure 6 1 shows the two banks of registers in the HI32 DSP side and host side The DSP56300 core can access the DSP side registers which are listed in Table 6 9 HI32 Programming Model DSP Side on page 6 22 The host side registers which are accessed by the host bus are listed in Table 6 17 HI32 Programming Model Host Side Registers on page 6 44 6 4 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA DSP Side Registers DCTR DSP Control Register DPCR DSP PCI Control Register DPMC DSP PCI Master Control Register DPAR DSP PCI Address Register DSR DSP Status Register DSP DMA Data Bus P DSP Global Data Bus 24 24 24 24 pesn prer prne ES Configuration spade Cem CCMR CRID CBMA Cep CILP 32 32 432 32 HOST Bus lt Host Side Registers HCTR Host Interface Control Register HSTR Host Interface Status Register HCVR Host Command Vector Register HRXM Host Master Receive Data Register HRXS Host Slave Receive Data Register HTXR Host Transmit Data Register Overview DPSR DSP PCI Status Register DRXR DSP
487. us When the DSP is the bus master A 0O 23 are active high outputs that specify the address for external program and data memory accesses Otherwise the signals are tri stated To minimize power dissipation A 0Q 23 do not change state when external memory spaces are not being accessed 2 5 2 External Data Bus Table 2 7 External Data Bus Signals Signal Name Type State During Reset Signal Description D 0 23 Input Output Tri stated Data Bus When the DSP is the bus master DO D23 are active high bidirectional input outputs that provide the bidirectional data bus for external program and data memory accesses Otherwise D 0 23 are tri stated These lines have weak keepers to maintain the last state even if all drivers are tri stated Notes 1 One pin is reserved for use in the expansion port interface and the peripherals interface Leave this pin unconnected 2 5 3 External Bus Control Table 2 8 External Bus Control Signals Signal Name Type Reset State During Signal Description AA 0 3 RAS 0 3 Output Output Tri stated Tri stated Address Attribute When defined as AA these signals can be used as chip selects or additional address lines The default use defines a priority scheme under which only one AA signal can be asserted at a time Setting the AA priority disable APD bit Bit 14 of the OMR the priority mechani
488. us mode the internal clock is the source of the clock signal used for all the transmit shift registers and the receive shift register If SCKD is set and the ESSI is in Asynchronous mode the internal clock source becomes the bit clock for the transmit shift register and word length divider The internal clock is output on the SCK signal When SCKD is cleared the external clock source is selected The internal clock generator is disconnected from the SCK signal and an external clock source may drive this signal 7 22 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Programming Model Table 7 4 ESSI Control Register B CRB Bit Definitions Continued Bit Number Bit Name Reset Value Description 4 SCD2 0 Serial Control Direction 2 Controls the direction of the SC2 I O signal When SCD2 is set SC2 is an output when SCD2 is cleared SC2 is an input Note Programming the ESSI to use an internal frame sync that is SCD2 1 in CRB causes the SC2 and SC1 signals to be programmed as outputs However if the corresponding multiplexed pins are programmed by the Port Control Register PCR to be GPIOs the GPIO Port Direction Register PRR chooses their direction The ESSI uses an external frame sync if GPIO is selected To assure correct operation either program the GPIO pins as outputs or configure the pins in the PCR as ESSI signals The default selection for these signals after reset is GPIO This note appl
489. utput signal regardless of the SCD1 bit value As an output it is fully synchronized with the other ESSI transmit data signals STD and SCO SC1 can be programmed as a GPIO signal P1 when the ESSI SC1 function is not in use AA MOTOROLA Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface ESSI 7 5 Operation 7 2 6 Serial Control Signal SC2 ESSI0 SC02 ESSI1 SC12 SC2 is a frame sync I O signal for both the transmitter and receiver in Synchronous mode and for the transmitter only in Asynchronous mode The direction of this signal is determined by the SCD2 bit in the CRB When configured as an output this signal outputs the internally generated frame sync signal When configured as an input this signal receives an external frame sync signal for the transmitter in Asynchronous mode and for both the transmitter and receiver when in Synchronous mode SC2 can be programmed as a GPIO signal P2 when the ESSI SC2 function is not in use 7 3 Operation This section discusses ESSI basics reset state initialization and exceptions 7 3 1 ESSI After Reset A hardware RESET signal or software RESET instruction clears the port control register and the port direction control register thus configuring all the ESSI signals as GPIO The ESSI is in the reset state while all ESSI signals are programmed as GPIO it is active only if at least one of the ESSI I O signals is programmed as an ESSI signal 7 3 2 Initialization To initialize the ESSI do the follo
490. uts The only difference between them is that the carry operation propagates in opposite directions Test logic determines which of the three summed results of the full adders is output Each address ALU can update one address register from its own address register file during one instruction cycle The contents of the associated modifier register specify the type of AA MOTOROLA Overview 1 7 DSP56300 Core Functional Blocks arithmetic used in the address register update calculation The modifier value is decoded in the address ALU 1 4 3 Program Control Unit PCU The PCU prefetches and decodes instructions controls hardware DO loops and processes exceptions Its seven stage pipeline controls the different processing states of the DSP56300 core The PCU consists of three hardware blocks m Program decode controller decodes the 24 bit instruction loaded into the instruction latch and generates all signals necessary for pipeline control Program address generator contains all the hardware needed for program address generation system stack and loop control Program interrupt controller arbitrates among all interrupt requests internal interrupts as well as the five external requests IRQA IRQB IRQC IRQD and NMI and generates the appropriate interrupt vector address PCU features include the following Position independent code support Addressing modes optimized for DSP applications including immediate o
491. versal Bus mode PCI PCI mode UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM UBM PCI The HSTR is a 32 bit read only status register by which the host processor examines the status and flags of the HI32 m When the HSTR is read to the PCI bus DCTR HM 1 the HAD 31 0 pins are driven with the HSTR data during a read access Ina 24 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HCTR HRF 0 the HD 23 0 pins are driven with the three least significant HSTR bytes during a read access 6 56 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Host Side Programming Model Ina 16 bit data Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 and HCTR HRF 0 the HD 15 0 pins are driven with the two least significant bytes of the HSTR in a read access In PCI mode DCTR HM 1 memory space transactions the HSTR is accessed if the PCI address is HI32_base_address 014 Ina Universal Bus mode DCTR HM 2 or 3 the HSTR is accessed if the HA 10 3 value matches the HI32 base address see Section 6 8 11 Memory Space Base Address Configuration Register CBMA on page 6 70 and the HA 2 0 value is 5 Table 6 23 Host Interface Status Register HSTR Bit Definitions Bit Reset EE Number Bit Name Value Mode Description 31 8 0 Reserved Write to 0 for future compatibility 7 HREQ 0 UBM Host Request PCI Set and cleared as follows The personal software reset clears HREQ TREQ RREQ HREQ 0 0 cleared 0 1
492. vice routine When DIE is cleared the DMA interrupt is disabled 21 19 DTM 2 0 0 DMA Transfer Mode Specify the operating modes of the DMA channel as follows DE DTM 2 0 Trigger Cleared Transfer Mode After 000 request Yes Block Transfer DE enabled and DMA request initiated The transfer is complete when the counter decrements to zero and the DMA controller reloads the counter with the original value 001 request Yes Word Transfer A word by word block transfer length set by the counter that is DE enabled The transfer is complete when the counter decrements to zero and the DMA controller reloads the counter with the original value 010 request Yes Line Transfer A line by line block transfer length set by the counter that is DE enabled The transfer is complete when the counter decrements to zero and the DMA controller reloads the counter with the original value 011 DE Yes Block Transfer The DE initiated transfer is complete when the counter decrements to zero and the DMA controller reloads the counter with the original value 100 request No Block Transfer The transfer is enabled by DE and initiated by the first DMA request The transfer is completed when the counter decrements to zero and reloads itself with the original value The DE bit is not cleared at the end of the block so the DMA channel waits for a new request Note The DMA End of Block Transfer Interrupt cannot be used in this mode 101 request No Word Tr
493. viewed as three types of registers Control SCI Control Register SCR in Figure 8 3 SCI Clock Control Register SCCR in Figure 8 4 Status SCI Status Register SSR in Figure 8 3 Data transfer SCI Receive Data Registers SRX in Figure 8 7 SCI Transmit Data Registers STX in Figure 8 7 SCI Transmit Data Address Register STXA in Figure 8 7 The SCI includes the GPIO functions described in Section 8 7 GPIO Signals and Registers on page 8 24 The next subsections describe the registers and their bits MOTOROLA Serial Communication Interface SCI 8 9 SCI Programming Model Mode 0 o o o 8 bit Synchronous Data Shift Register Mode WDS2 WDS1 WDSO One Byte From Shift Register Mode 2 fo 1 0 10 bit Asynchronous 1 Start 8 Data 1 Stop WDS2 WDS1 WDSO DO or lt 1X Data Stop SSFTD 1 i Type Bit Mode 4 Stop Bit lt lt TX SSFTD 1 e TX Stop SSFTD 1 Bit Data Type 1 Address Byte i 0 Data Byte Note 1 Modes 1 3 and 7 are reserved 2 DO LSB D7 MSB 3 Data is transmitted and received LSB first if SSFTD 0 or MSB first if SSFTD 1 Figure 8 1 SCI Data Word Formats SSFTD 1 1 8 10 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA SCI Programming Model Mode 0 8 bit Synchronous Data Shift Register Mode WDS2 WDS1 WDSO g TX One Byte From Shift Register fo 1 0 10 bit Asynchronous 1 Start 8 Data 1 Stop D7 or Stop
494. w HDSM Host Data Strobe 0 HWR HRD double data changed only in 13 Mode 1 strobe PS reset 0 S HRW HDS single data ignored when strobe not in UBM HRWP Hoer RD WR Polarity 0 HRW 0 WRITE 1 READ changed only in 1 JHRW 0 READ 1 WRITE PS reset 14 i 0 ignored when not in UBM HTAP Host Transfer 0 HTA changed only in 15 Acknowledge Polarity 1 HTA PS reset ignored 0 when not in UBM HDRP Hoer DMA Request 0 HDRQ changed only in Polarity 1 HDRQ PS reset ignored 16 0 2 when not in UBM HRSP _ Host Reset Polarity 0 HRST changed only in 1 HRST PS reset ignored 17 0 when not in UBM HIRH Host Interrupt Request 0 HIRQ pulsed changed only in Handshake Mode 1 HIRQ full handshake PS reset HIRQ pulse 18 width is defined 0 by CLAT ignored when not in UBM HIRD Host Interrupt Request 0 HIRQ open drain changed only in Drive Control 1 HIRQ driven PS reset 19 0 ignored when not in UBM 6 74 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA HI32 Programming Model Quick Reference HI32 Registers Quick Reference Bit Reset Type Reg Comments Num Mnemonic Name Val Function HS PH PS DCTR HM 2 0 HI32 Mode 000 Terminate and Reset changed to cont 001 IPC non zero value 010 JUBM only in PS reset 22 20 011 Enhanced UBM 0 100 GPIO 101 Self Configuration 11x Reserved DPCR 1 MTIE Master Transmit 0 MTRQ interr
495. wed In Arithmetic Saturation mode an arithmetic overflow occurs if the Data ALU result is not representable in the accumulator without the extension part that is 48 bit accumulator or the 32 bit accumulator in Arithmetic Sixteen bit mode Carry Set if a carry is generated by the MSB resulting from an addition operation This bit is also set if a borrow is generated in a subtraction operation otherwise this bit is cleared The carry or borrow is generated from Bit 55 of the result The C bit is also affected by bit manipulation rotate and shift instructions AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration Central Processor Unit CPU Registers 4 3 2 Operating Mode Register OMR The OMR is a read write register divided into three byte sized units The lowest two bytes EOM and COM control the chip s operating mode The high byte SCS controls and monitors the stack extension The OMR control bits are shown in Figure 4 2 Stack Control Status SCS Extended Operating Mode EOM Chip Operating Mode COM 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SEN WRP EOV EUN lag APD ABE BRT TAS BE CDP 1 0 ms SD EBD MD MC MB MA Reset o o o o o o o o o o o o o o il iflo lo o o After reset these bits reflect the corresponding value of the mode input that is MODD MODC MODB or MODA respec
496. wing 1 Send a reset hardware RESET signal software RESET instruction ESSI individual reset or STOP instruction reset Program the ESSI control and time slot registers Write data to all the enabled transmitters Configure at least one signal as ESSI signal St S e If an external frame sync is used from the moment the ESSI is activated at least five 5 serial clocks are needed before the first external frame sync is supplied Otherwise improper operation may result When the PC 5 0 bits in the GPIO Port Control Register PCR are cleared during program execution the ESSI stops serial activity and enters the individual reset state All status bits of the interface are set to their reset state The contents of CRA and CRB are not affected The ESSI individual reset allows a program to reset each interface separately from the other internal peripherals During ESSI individual reset internal DMA accesses to the data registers of the ESSI are not valid and data read there are undefined To ensure proper operation of the 7 6 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA Operation ESSI use an ESSI individual reset when you change the ESSI control registers except for bits TEIE REIE TLIE RLIE TIE RIE TE2 TE1 TEO and RE Here is an example of how to initialize the ESSI 1 Put the ESSI in its individual reset state by clearing the PCR bits 2 Configure the control registers CRA CRB to set the operating mode Dis
497. with one receiver and three transmitters the two units can be used together for surround sound applications which need two digital input channels and six digital output channels 7 1 ESSI Enhancements The DSP56000 SSI is enhanced in the following ways to make the ESSI m Network enhancements Time slot mask registers receive and transmit End of frame interrupt Drive enable signal used with transmitter 0 Audio enhancements Three transmitters per ESSI for six channel surround sound General enhancements Can trigger DMA interrupts receive or transmit Separate exception enable bits Other changes One divide by 2 step is removed from the internal clock source chain The CRA PSR bit definition is reversed Gated Clock mode is not available 7 2 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA ESSI Data and Control Signals 7 2 ESSI Data and Control Signals Three to six signals are required for ESSI operation depending on the operating mode selected The serial transmit data STD signal and serial control SCO and SC1 signals are fully synchronized to the clock if they are programmed as transmit data signals 7 2 1 Serial Transmit Data Signal STD The STD signal transmits data from the serial transmit shift register STD is an output when data is transmitted from the TXO shift register With an internally generated bit clock the STD signal becomes a high impedance output signal for a full clock per
498. wo least significant bytes of the 32 bit word to be output from the HRXM The second word written by the DSP56300 core contains the two most significant bytes of the 32 bit word output from the HRXM Each time a 32 bit word is output from the HRXM the 32 bits of significant data located in two words written to the DTXM are output In PCI mode data transfers in which the HI32 is the target DCTR HM 1 with HCTR HRF 0 and in Universal Bus mode data transfers the slave DSP to host data path DTXS HRXS is a six word deep FIFO The DSP56300 core writes 24 bit words to the DTXS The data is output a word at a time to the bus from the HRXS In PCI mode data transfers in which the HI32 is the target DCTR HM 1 with HCTR HRF 0 the slave DSP to host data path is a three word deep 32 bit wide FIFO The DSP56300 core writes 24 bit words to the DTXS Each word written by the DSP56300 core contains 16 bits of significant data right aligned the most significant byte is not transmitted The first word written by the DSP56300 core contains the two least significant bytes of the 32 bit word to be output from the HRXS The second word written by the DSP56300 core contains the two most significant bytes of the 32 bit word output from the AA MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 7 Data Transfer Paths HRXS Each time the host reads a 32 bit word from the HRXS the 32 bits of significant data located in two locations of the slave DSP to host data path
499. x GPIO Pin Non GPIO Pin 0 Read only bit The value read is the binary value of Read only bit Does not contain significant data the pin The corresponding pin is configured as an input 1 Read write bit The value written is the value read Read write bit The value written is the value read The corresponding pin is configured as an output and is driven with the data written to DATx Note 1 Defined by the selected mode 6 7 11 DSP Host Port GPIO Data Register DATH 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 DAT23 DAT22 DAT21 DAT20 DAT19 DAT18 DAT17 DAT16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 DAT15 DAT14 DAT13 DAT12 DAT11 DAT10 DAT9 DAT8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DAT7 DAT6 DAT5 DAT4 DAT3 DAT2 DAT1 DATO Figure 6 12 DSP Host Port GPIO Data Register DATH A 24 bit read write data register by which the DSP56300 core reads or writes data to from host port pins configured as GPIO The host processor cannot access DATH DAT 23 0 read or write data from to the corresponding GPIO pin The functionality of the DAT 23 0 bits is defined in Table 6 16 Hardware and software resets clear all DATH bits MOTOROLA Host Interface HI32 6 43 Host Side Programming Model 6 8 Host Side Programming Model The HI32 appears to the host processor as a bank of registers listed in Table 6 17 Table 6 17 HI32 Programming Model Host Side Registers X Memory Register 3 Addes
500. y Expansion Bus 1 10 X data memory 1 5 XTAL Disable XTLD bit 4 21 Y Y data memory 3 4 Y I O space 3 5 Y Memory Address Bus YAB 1 10 Y Memory Data Bus YDB 1 10 Y Memory Expansion Bus 1 10 Y data memory 1 5 Z Zero Z bit 4 11 Index 16 DSP56301 User s Manual A MOTOROLA
501. ys driven from the DSP Therefore DRAM refresh can be performed even if the DSP is not the bus master AA MOTOROLA Core Configuration 4 25 Bus Interface Unit BIU Registers Table 4 10 DRAM Control Register DCR Bit Definitions Continued Des Bit Name Ge Description 11 BPLE 0 Bus Page Logic Enable Enables disables the in page identifying logic When BPLE is set it enables the page logic the page size is defined by BPS 1 O bits Each in page identification causes the DRAM controller to drive only the column address and the associated CAS signal When BPLE is cleared the page logic is disabled and the DRAM controller always accesses the external DRAM in out of page accesses for example row address with RAS assertion and then column address with CAS assertion This mode is useful for low power dissipation Only one in page identifying logic exists Therefore during switches from one DRAM external bank to another DRAM bank the DRAM external banks are defined by the access type bits in the AARs different external banks are accessed through different AA RAS pins a page fault occurs 10 0 Reserved Write to zero for future compatibility 9 8 BPS 1 0 0 Bus DRAM Page Size Defines the size of the external DRAM page and thus the number of the column address bits The internal page mechanism works according to these bits only if the page logic is enabled by the BPLE bit The f

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

2014 self clean owners manual (english) FINAL 121313    CDK-120  Genius 10200  Manual del Usuario para RENDICIONES 2012  Video Transmitter/Receiver Extender Kit with HDMI Selector  User Manual: TT8540PB001MAN Skypatrol Evolution GSM/GPRS  5 EN 1 Guante Alta Conductividad Lifting Facial Alta  LD-Protocol_BeadChip  Nero Express - ftp.nero.com  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file